Pcs Cdma Minicell

8/6/2019 Pcs Cdma Minicell

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pcs-cdma-minicell 1/646

Lucent Technologies — ProprietaryThis document contains proprietary information of

Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or usedexcept in accordance with applicable agreements

Copyright © 1999 Lucent TechnologiesUnpublished and Not for Publication

All Rights Reserved

401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

PCS SystemsCDMA Minicell

Description, Operation, andMaintenance



Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page

This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. Itmay not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external toLucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without theexpress written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the businessmanagement owner of the material.

For permission to reproduce or distribute, please contact:

Product Development Manager1 888 LTINFO6 (domestic)

1 317 322 6848 (international)

NoticeEvery effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the timeof printing. However, information is subject to change.

Mandatory Customer Information

Federal Communication Commission Statement (FCC) Notification and Repair InformationNOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipmentgenerates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment ina residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct theinterference at his/her own expense.

Security StatementIn rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through theuse of remote access features.In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. LucentTechnologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give credit forcharges that result from unauthorized access.

TrademarksAUTOPLEX is a registered trademark of Lucent TechnologiesCadweld is registered trademark of ERICO Products, Inc.Twist-Lock is a registered trademark of Hubbell Inc.

Support Telephone NumberLucent Technologies provides a telephone number for you to report errors or to ask questions about theinformation in this document.

1 888-LTINFO6

Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for technical support from the Customer TechnicalSupport Organization (CTSO).

1-800-225-4672

E-mail addresses have been created that allow CTIP Wireless customers to send in comments aboutWireless customer documents and training courses. The e-mail address for comments on customerdocuments is:[email protected]

Developed by the Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support and Information Organization.



How Are We Doing?

Title:

Identification No.: Issue No.: Date:

Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Yourcomments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.

1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:

2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.

r Improve the overview/introduction r Make it more concise/briefr Improve the table of contents r Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorialsr Improve the organization r Add more troubleshooting informationr Include more figures r Make it less technicalr Add more examples r Add more/better quick reference aidsr Add more detail r Improve the index

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.

3. What did you like most about this CIP?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:

Name: Telephone Number:

Company/Organization: Date:

Address:

When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on backor Fax to: 910 727-3043.

Excellent Good Fair PoorNot

Applicable

Ease of Use ////////////////// Clarity ////////////////// Completeness ////////////////// Accuracy ////////////////// Organization ////////////////// Appearance ////////////////// Examples

Illustrations

Overall Satisfaction //////////////////

PCS CDMA Description, Operation and Maintenance

401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999



BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

NO POSTAGENECESSARY

IF MAILEDIN THE

UNITED STATES

--------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------

DOCUMENTATION SERVICES2400 Reynolda RoadWinston-Salem, NC 27199-2029



How Are We Doing?

Title:

Identification No.: Issue No.: Date:

Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Yourcomments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.

1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:

2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.

r Improve the overview/introduction r Make it more concise/briefr Improve the table of contents r Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorialsr Improve the organization r Add more troubleshooting informationr Include more figures r Make it less technicalr Add more examples r Add more/better quick reference aidsr Add more detail r Improve the index

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.

3. What did you like most about this CIP?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:

Name: Telephone Number:

Company/Organization: Date:

Address:

When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on backor Fax to: 910 727-3043.

Excellent Good Fair PoorNot

Applicable

Ease of Use ////////////////// Clarity ////////////////// Completeness ////////////////// Accuracy ////////////////// Organization ////////////////// Appearance ////////////////// Examples

Illustrations

Overall Satisifaction //////////////////

PCS CDMA Description, Operation and Maintenance

401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999



BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

NO POSTAGENECESSARY

IF MAILEDIN THE

UNITED STATES

--------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------

DOCUMENTATION SERVICES2400 Reynolda RoadWinston-Salem, NC 27199-2029



Contents - 3Lucent Technologies - ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preface 0-1

1. Introduction to PCS CDMA 1-1

2. PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description 2-1

3. Cabling, Connections, and Software 3-1

4. Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell 4-1

5. PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance 5-1

6. Diagnostics 6-1

7. Troubleshooting 7-1

8. Repairs 8-1

9. Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell 9-1

10. Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting Techniques 10-1

Glossary GL-1



Contents - 4 Lucent Technologies—ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



- 1Lucent Technologies - ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preface

Contents

Contents Preface-1

Manual Coverage and Revisions Preface-2

Sources of Information Preface-3

Electromagnetic Interference Preface-4

Service Available Preface-5

Introduction Preface-6



- 2 Lucent Technologies—ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

Preface Manual Coverage and Revisions

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Manual Coverage and Revisions

Overview Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this

manual reflects hardware configuration at the time of shipment. LucentTechnologies continually strives to improve the quality and reliabilityof all its products, and in some instances, product changes may occur

just prior to shipment. Therefore, because of printing and distributionrequirements, some information in this manual may not reflecthardware configuration as delivered. However, in all cases, whenrequired, updated information will be issued to you as rapidly aspossible.

Reason for Reissue Whenever this manual is reissued, the reason for reissue will be givenin this paragraph.

Issue 8 corrects errors from Issue 7.

Manual Organization For ease of access, the information contained in this manual is dividedand organized under major headings and subheadings as listed in thetable of contents.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PrefaceSources of Information

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Sources of Information

Documentation

Sources

The documentation useful in maintaining the Minicell comes from two

primary sources: Lucent Technologies manuals and records maintainedon the cell maintenance.

Document Comments E-mail addresses have been created that allow CTIP Wirelesscustomers to send in comments about Wireless customer documentsand training courses.

Obtaining RelatedDocumentation

The AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000Customer Documentation Catalog (401-610-000 ) is a guide to allAUTOPLEX System 1000 customer documents and includes documentdescriptions and ordering information.

To order AUTOPLEX System 1000 documents, including documentson CD-ROM, and all other Lucent Technologies productdocumentation by phone, please use the following numbers:

Within the United States:Voice: 1-888-LUCENT8 or 1-888-582-3688, prompt 1FAX: 1-800-566-9568

Locations outside of the United States:

To order documentation by mail, please use the following address: Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center Attention: Order Entry Section2855 N. Franklin Road P.O. Box 19901

e-mail address for comments on is

customer documents [email protected]

training courses and student guides [email protected].

Australia and all European countries (317) 322-6416

Asia Pacific and China (317) 322-6411

North America (excluding U.S.) and allother countries

(317) 322-6646

FAX for all international customers (317) 322-6699




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

PrefaceSources of Information

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indianapolis, IN 46219U.S.A.

To order documentation electronically, visit the Lucent TechnologiesCustomer Information Center web site at:

http://www.cic.lucent.com

Related Documentation For related documentation, refer to the table below:

Hardware/SoftwareOptions Information

To determine which hardware/software options are currently available,please contact your Account Executive.

Document ReferenceCell Site Antenna Equipment Installation Planning Guide 401-200-300Cell Site Diagnostic Description 401-660-101Cell Site I/O Manual 401-610-107PCS CDMA Minicell Installation 401-703-300Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment 401-610-120System Description and Planning Guide 401-610-006System Routine and Corrective Maintenance (Series II) 401-610-175




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preface Electromagnetic Interference

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Electromagnetic Interference

Electromagnetic

Interference

Lucent Technologies runs extensive tests on all its products to ensure

that they do not cause interference to radio communications by theradiation of radio frequency energy. Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules require that you be notified of the following:

RF InterferenceThis equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequencyenergy.

If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications.

It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area islikely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his ownexpense, will be required to take whatever measures may be

required to correct the interference.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

PrefaceService Available

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Service Available

Engineering Services The PCS CDMA Minicells are designed to provide self-contained

systems requiring no equipment engineering. However, site engineeringand custom configuration services are available to meet your specialrequirements. Lucent Technologies has a wide range of services to helpyou in selecting the right configuration for your needs, installing andmaintaining your system, and planning for future growth.

Warranty and RepairServices

The Minicell is warranted upon shipment for 24 months. If installed byLucent Technologies, the product is warranted upon the acceptancedate or thirty (30) days from the installation completion date, whicheveris sooner. For repaired product or product provided as a replacement,the warranty period is the greater of 6 months or the unexpired term of the new product warranty. A complete and detailed description of thewarranty and repair policy is available from your Account Executive.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preface Introduction

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Introduction

General Preventive maintenance is defined as those activities performed at

regular intervals and designed to identify, as soon as possible, potentialfailure conditions and/or equipment failures. The goal of preventivemaintenance is to maintain normal system operations and to preventloss of service by the use of software and manual routines. Theseroutines consist of software-controlled diagnostic tests and a number of manual tests as defined by the Equipment Test List (ETL).

Product Warranty Lucent Technologies warrants that all PCS System equipment that itsells and installs is free from defects in materials and workmanship asspecified in the sales agreement. Lucent Technologies, at its ownoption, will either repair or replace defective units without charge forparts or labor during the warranty period. Unless otherwise negotiated,or the system is altered due to customer actions, the warranty periodbegins at the time of turnover, or as specified in the sales agreement.

Customer Options As a customer option, it may be to your advantage to become involvedwith the operation and maintenance activities prior to normal turnover.By doing so, you will have access to your system earlier than normal,and your maintenance personnel will become familiar with theequipment sooner.

The opportunity for your involvement is in no way intended to replacethe formal training offered by Lucent Technologies. Nor is involvementintended for maintenance personnel who are inexperienced inmaintaining switching and radio systems. The mutual benefits of yourinvolvement opportunities must be negotiated prior to turnover. Theoptions which may be negotiated are summarized as follows:

Full or partial operation of the system from the MSC

• Full or partial system maintenance

• Cutover prior to the completion of system testing by LucentTechnologies

• Customer additions to and/or involvement in system-level tests.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

Preface Introduction

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



1 - 1Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Introduction to PCS CDMA

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose PCS stands for Personal Communication Services, and designates aportion of the radio frequency spectrum in the 1.8-to 2.0-GHz range.

CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) is a method of supportingmultiple voice calls within an allocated frequency band using specialcodes to differentiate the calls.

The PCS CDMA standard is defined within the IS-95 document, whichwas produced by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)TR45.5 Subcommittee on Wideband Spectrum Digital Technology.

Contents PCS CDMA Overview 1-3• Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes - - - - - - - 1-4• PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6• PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment 1-7• Channel Number vs. PCS Frequency Assignment - - - - - - 1-9

Call Processing Overview 1-11• PCS System Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12• PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell - - - - - - - - - 1-13• Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC) - - - - - - - - - - 1-16• Key Parts: PCS Access Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-17• Key Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform - - - - - - - -1-19• CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21• Packet Pipe Connection -- Minicell Interface - - - - - - - - 1-23• Key Parts: The Minicell Site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25



1 - 2 Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMA

• Packet Pipe Connection - Daisy Chain - - - - - - - - - - - 1-27• CDMA Implementation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-29• CDMA Channel Element Encoding - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-32• Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission - - - - - - - - - - - 1-34• Display of Walsh Codes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-36• Details of Walsh Codes Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-37• The CDMA Interference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-39• Diversity and CDMA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-40• CDMA Traffic Channels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-43



Introduction to PCS CDMA


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Overview

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................OverviewObjectives

Purpose This unit provides an introduction to the Personal CommunicationsServices (PCS) System. It describes the distributed architectureapproach on which this system is based.

Review and Identification This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to identify thecomponents and define the major functions of the PCS CDMA Systemby doing the following:

• Naming elements of a PCS CDMA architecture

• Identifying the components of a PCS CDMA Minicell

• Stating the functions performed by Data Links

• Naming the Walsh codes assigned to specific communicationchannels

• Stating the role of the different codes used in CDMAtransmissions




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAComparison between Multiple Access Schemes

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes

Definitions Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) This access scheme

divides the spectrum into a series of 30-kHz channels. Each channelsupports a single user.

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) TDMA divides each 30-kHzchannel into six time slots. The present TDMA standard allocates twotime slots per user, enabling three simultaneous users per 30-kHzchannel.

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) This access scheme dividesthe spectrum into a series of 1.25-MHz channels. Each channel allowsmultiple users. Each user is assigned a unique code to differentiate

each call.The CDMA standard allows up to 61 simultaneous users in one1.2288-MHz channel. By processing each voice packet with two PNcodes, it is virtually impossible to monitor a CDMA conversation orfraudulently access ESNs, PINs, or credit card numbers.

Although there are 61 Walsh codes available to differentiate calls andtheoretical limits are around 40 calls, the operational limitations andquality issues will reduce the maximum number of calls somewhatbelow this value.

Multiple Access SchemesDiagram

The diagram below compares the ability of an encoding scheme toutilize a frequency band.

30 kHz TDMAThree users (2 timeslots per user) per channel

12 27404

14 43

3254

62

16

17

8 47

30

7552

3921

28

63

3515

24

5944

5

366018

648

2923

13

4556

19 57

31

3

100

58

25

41

229

523353

20

1 4251 34

3746

11 49 50

38 26

61

1.2288 MHz CDMA ChannelAs many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.2288 MHz channel

30 kHz 30 kHz 30 kHzFDMAOne user per channel



Introduction to PCS CDMAComparison between Multiple Access Schemes


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Selected Features ofLucent Technologies

CDMA Implementation

The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicells implement thefeatures of the PCS CDMA standard. In particular, they enable:

• Up to 10 times the capacity of analog cellular

• Soft handoff (which improves dropped call performance and voice

quality at the edges of the cell)• An air interface compatible with the IS-41 switch interface for

intersystem operations (handoff, call delivery, and roaming),ISUP (trunk signaling, delivery of calling party number, and otheradvanced services), enhanced privacy, and INAP (intelligentnetwork protocols)

• Superior voice quality (supports 13-kbps speech codingalgorithms that can provide voice quality comparable to landline)

• Higher quality RF coverage

• Simplified RF engineering and planning (allows the support of “N=1 frequency reuse pattern”)

• Low power consumption and enhanced terminal battery life




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAPCS CDMA Frequency Assignments

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments

Overview PCS transmissions occur in the 1.8-GHz to 2.0-GHz frequency range,

which has been divided into six bands, labelled from A to F. TheLucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell can support customers inall bands.

Frequency AssignmentsDiagram

The diagram shows a call in the A-band spectrum begins with 1850.000MHz for receiving and 1930.000 MHz for transmitting channel number0. Likewise, the B-band spectrum begins at 1870.000 MHz forreceiving and 1950.000 MHz for transmitting. The remaining bands areshown in the graphic.

CF

EB

D

A1850

18651870

18851890

1895

1910

1930

19451950

19651970

1975

1990

CF

EB

D

A

PCS Minicell ReceiveFrequency

Bands (MHz)

PCS Minicell TransmitFrequency

Bands (MHz)



Introduction to PCS CDMAPCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands andChannel Assignment


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment

Overview The PCS spectrum is divided into 1200 50-kHz wide channels,

numbered consecutively, in both receive and transmit frequencies. Fora given channel, the Receive Frequency is 80 MHz lower than theTransmit Frequency.

Channel Assignment Table Frequency up-conversion is the process by which channels in the 800-MHz band are converted to the 1900-MHz band. Frequency down-conversion is the process by which channels in the 1900-MHz PCSband are converted to corresponding channels in the 800-MHz band.

The table shows the relationship between channel number and thetransmit and receive frequency ranges.

Allowed Channels Note that channels 0-24 and channels 1176-1199 are not allowed, andthat there are upper and lower limits for each band.

TransmitFrequency

Range(MHz)

ReceiveFrequency

Range(MHz)

PCS CDMAChannelNumbers

PCS ChannelBand

A

D

B

E

F

C

000-299

300-399

400-699

700-799

800-899

900-1199

1850-1865

1865-1870

1870-1885

1885-1890

1890-1895

1895-1910

1930-1945

1945-1950

1950-1965

1965-1970

1970-1975

1975-1990

FrequencyBand

AllowedChannels

A 25-275

D 325-375

B 425-675

E 725-775

F 825-875

C 925-1175




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAPCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands andChannel Assignment

Frequencies for KoreanInstallations

The frequency band used for the Korean market consists of 600 pairs of radio frequencies, divided into three bands. Each band is 10-MHz wide.

K-PCSChannel Block

K-PCS CDMAChannel Numbers

Tx FrequencyRange (MHz)

Rx FrequencyRange (MHz)

Ak 0-199 1840-1850 1750-1760

Bk 200-399 1850-1860 1760-1770

Ck 400-599 1860-1870 1770-1780



Introduction to PCS CDMAChannel Number vs. PCS Frequency Assignment


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Channel Number vs. PCS Frequency Assignment

Overview Center frequency for a given channel can be computed from the

channel number, using a simple arithmetic formula.

Formula for FrequencyAssignment

The formula for frequency assignment is as follows:

Channel Frequency = [Channel Number] * 0.050MHz + Lower BandFrequency. The asterisk (*) stands for the multiplication sign.

Where lower band frequency is:

• 1850 MHz for a Receive Channel

• 1930 MHz for a Transmit Channel.

Computing Center ChannelFrequency Table For PCS channel number and PCS frequency assignments, refer to thefollowing table. The center frequency in megahertz corresponding toany channel number (N) can be calculated as shown in the table.

Computing Center ChannelFrequency Example 1

For Handset transmit and Minicell receive:

Computing Center ChannelFrequency Example 2

For Minicell transmit and Handset receive:

MinicellReceive

MinicellTransmit

1<N<1199

1<N<1199

0.05N+1850

0.05N+1930

(N) (MHz)

Channel # CenterFrequency

Step Value Example

1 First Channel 325

2 Times Constant 0.05 MHz

3 Equals 16.25 MHz

4 Plus 1850.000 MHz

5 Equals 1866.2250 MHz



1 - 1 0 Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Step Value Example

1 First Channel 325

2 Times Constant 0.05 MHz

3 Equals 16.25 MHz4 Plus 1930.000 MHz

5 Equals 1946.2250 MHz




1 - 1 1Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Call Processing Overview

System Overview

Purpose This unit is designed to enable you to identify the components anddefine the major functions of the PCS CDMA System by doing thefollowing:

• Naming elements of a PCS CDMA architecture

• Identifying the components of a PCS CDMA Minicell

• Stating the functions performed by Data Links

• Naming the Walsh codes assigned to specific communicationchannels

• Stating the role of the different codes used in CDMAtransmissions.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAPCS System Description

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS System Description

Operational Perspective of

the PCS CDMA SystemArchitecture

From an operational perspective, the PCS CDMA System is centered

about a distributed architecture approach that consists of four essentialelements:

1. PCS Switching Center (PCSC)

2. Associated T1(or E1) network interfaces

3. Minicell or Base Station

4. Mobile terminal

Switching Center Diagram The four components of a PCS System are shown in the followingdiagram:

Centralized Control Center In addition to these elements, a separate centralized control center maybe employed to monitor and control system functions from onelocation. The centralized control center may be staffed on a 24-hour,7-day per week basis, and it is capable of monitoring and controllingseveral service areas (different cities) simultaneously. Under these

circumstances, the MSC is normally unattended. However, the MSC isstaffed and used as a centralized control center when a separatecentralized control center is not used.

OperationsNetwork

T1 or E1 BaseStation

Public Networks

SS7 X.25

Lucent Technologies PCS Switching Center (PCSC)

OMP

5ESS Switch

PCS AccessManager



Introduction to PCS CDMAPCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell

Overview Maintenance of the Minicell requires an understanding of the

components that connect the Minicell to the phone network.

PCS CDMA Environment From a structural standpoint, the key parts of a PCS CDMAenvironment are the:

• PCS Switching Center

• T1/E1 Network

• PCS CDMA Minicell, which is the subject of this course

• Receive/Transmit Antenna at the Minicell site

• User mobile terminal, at the mobile user location.

Under normal conditions, the two data links between the Switch andthe Minicell are assigned the following roles:

• DL0 (Data Link 0) carries call processing messages.

• DL1 (Data Link 1) carries maintenance messages.

PCS CDMA MinicellEnvironment Diagram

The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS CDMA system:

DL0DL1

GPS

Pilot ChannelSync ChannelPaging Channel

PCSC

CSN

5ESS -2000 DCS5E10AM

CM

NCTSM

PSU2

PHV

FRPH

PHA

TSI

DLTU2 ECSU DLTU2

CNI

IMS

ECP

OMPPCS ACCESS

MANAGER

CE

CECCC

RCC CSC

SCT

CDMA minicell Site

DFI

ACU

BCR

RFTG

CTU

Interference Rake Receiver

Rake Receiver SoftHand-Off

PublicSwitched

TelephoneNetwork

T1/E1Network




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Acronyms The following table lists some of the acronyms used in a PCS CDMAenvironment.

PCSC The PCSC is equipped with switching and interface equipment andprovides all the cellular network switching required to process calls toand from the cellular subscriber. The PCSC also provides an interfaceinto the PSTN. Calls from and to the standard telephone network andcalls from cellular subscriber to cellular subscriber pass through thePCSC.

Base Station The base station consists of a primary radio cabinet, up to two optionalgrowth cabinets (for adding up to two additional carriers for 3-sectorapplications), a power cabinet, and an optional battery cabinet or anoptional DC generator cabinet. The system can be installed indoors oroutdoors.

ACU Analog Conversion Unit FRPH Frame Relay Protocol Handler

AM Administrative Module GPS Global Positioning SystemBCR Baseband Combiner Radio IMS Interprocessor Message Switch

CCC CDMA Cluster Controller NCT Network Communication Trunk

CE Channel Element OMP Operations and Management Platform

CM Communication Module PCSC PCS Switching Center

CNI Common Network Interface PHA Protocol Handler ATM (AsynchronousTransfer Mode)

CSC Cell Site Controller PHV Protocol Handler Voice

CSN Cell Site Node PSU2 Packet Switching Unit Version 2

CTU CDMA Transmit Unit RCC Radio Control Complex

DFI Digital Facility Interface RFTG Reference Frequency and TimingGenerator

DLTU2 Digital Line Trunk UnitVersion 2

SCT Synchronized Clock and Tone

ECP Executive Cellular Processor SM Switch Module

ECSU Echo Cancelling Unit TSI Time Slot Interchange





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network Interfaces The T1 network is a digital transmission system using time divisionmultiplexing to carry 24 DS0 channels. A DS0 channel is a digitalsignal of up to 64-kbps for a total on the T1 of 1.544-Mbps.

Transmit/Receive Antenna One transmit and two receive antennas are provided for each face of thecell site when using simplex filters. For example, on a three sector cellsite there would be 6 receive antennas and 3 transmit antennas.

For duplex filters there are 2 antennas for the Tx and 2 Rx’s. The Txshares an antenna with one of the Rx filters.

Mobile Terminals Two categories of units are used by the cellular subscriber: vehicle-mounted and transportable units (Class I) and hand-held units (ClassIII). A variety of styles and options are available in each category;however, the basic functional operations of the vehicle-mounted unitsand the hand-held units are identical. The subscriber’s unit contains amicroprocessor and is continually performing operations andcommunicating with the cell site, even when not being used by thesubscriber. The subscriber’s unit performs these functions so that it canbe ready to receive an incoming call or make a call.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC)

PCSC Components A PCSC has three components:

• An Operation and Maintenance Platform (OMP), which providesa computer platform dedicated to the support of all operation,administration, and maintenance activities, including the supportof remote data communication with the Minicell site

• A PCS Access Manager, which performs the mobilitymanagement functions between base station and the switch

• The 5ESS-2000 Switch Platform, which provides the network connectivity with other PCS Switching Centers, PSTN, and localcarriers.

PCSC Diagram The diagram below provides a view of the switching center.

5ESS-2000 DCS

CNI

SS7 Links

PCS ACCESSMANAGER

CSN

Soft Handoff

PublicSwitched

TelephoneNetwork

SMPSU2

PHV

FRPH

PHA

TSI

DLTU2 ECSU DLTU2

ECP

OMP

5E10AM

CMNCT

IMS



Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: PCS Access Manager


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Key Parts: PCS Access Manager

PCS Access Manager

Components

The Access Manager is composed of the Executive Cellular Processor

(ECP).The ECP controls the operation of the AUTOPLEX ® System 1000.The ECP is responsible for mobility management, call processing,system maintenance, technician interface, and system integrity. Inparticular, the ECP maintains the database and the translation tablesthat contain the operating parameters of the cells connected to theswitch.

Access Manager Diagram The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS Access Manager:

Access ManagerKey Features

The PCS Access Manager provides Wireless terminal mobilitymanagement, including:

• Home Location Register/Visitor Location Register (HLR/VLR)paging

• Autonomous registrations

• Subscriber management

• Roaming support

• Intelligent Network support

• Authentication and enciphering.

The Access Manager also supports stand-alone HLR capabilities.

SS7 LinksIMS

ECP

OMP

PCSC

CSN

PCS ACCESSMANAGER




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: PCS Access Manager

Access ManagerCapabilities

The PCS Access Manager supports:

• The expected traffic loads (plus sparing) of the various call typesup to the engineered capacity of the platform. Depending on thesesystem traffic loads, some number of Wireless Call Processing

Servers will be equipped (where each Call Processing Serverhandles a specific engineered capacity)

• The desired number of subscriber records (HLR). The HLRsupports incremental growth up to the platform capacity.

Each Access Manager is sized to support the desired number of PCSBase Stations.



Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Key Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform

5ESS®-2000 Switching

Platform Key Features

The following list describes the key features of the 5ESS®-2000

Switching Platform:• Provides the PCS switching function between PCS Base Stations

and various networks

• Supports both wireless and wired applications simultaneously

• Is a proven market leader

• Provides multiple applications on the same switch

• Provides increased switching capacity

• Provides highest reliability

• Co-exists with existing module or reduced footprint 5ESSequipment.

5ESS Overview Diagram The diagram below shows the main components of the 5ESS-2000Switching Platform.

Functions The PCS Switch is based on the 5ESS-2000 switch. The PCS switchingfunction manages the connectivity between the PCS Base Stations andthe various networks (Local Exchange Carrier (LEC), Inter-ExchangeCarrier (IEC), Private, Signaling, Intelligent Networks, etc.).

To PCS CDMA Minicell

5ESS -2000 DCS5E10AM

CMNCT

SMPSU2

PHV

FRPH

PHA

TSI

DLTU2 ECSU DLTU2

CNISoft

Hand-Off

PublicSwitched

TelephoneNetwork

DL0DL1

To PCS CDMA Minicell




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform

The 5ESS-2000 switch is engineered to support the expected trafficloads, up to the engineered capacity of the platform. Depending onthese traffic loads, a certain number of traffic-handler channels andnetwork trunks will be equipped.



Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group

Overview All communications are carried by the T1/E1 line. Voice

communications between the switch and a minicell are carried bypacket pipes.

Packet Pipe Sizes Packet pipes are the result of multiplexing 64-kB wide or 56-kB widebandwidths (DSOs) on a T1 span, going from the Digital CellularSwitch (DCS) to the minicell site.

The number of DSOs (packet pipe size) that can be accommodated in apacket pipe depends on RF Engineering considerations (processinggain, voice activity, intersector interference, required service level),and on the minicell configuration. The packet pipe size for a given

minicell is defined in the minicell translation tables maintained by theECP. Changes in minicell configuration may require changes in thePacket Pipe size.

In ECP 12, the packet pipe size is from two DS0s to eight DS0s.

In ECP 13, the packet pipe size is increased from eight DS0 to 16DS0s. The packet pipe size can then be of variable length from twoDS0s to 16 DS0s. This enhancement of packet pipe size furtherprovides the flexibility and efficiency of the usage of the T1 line.

Packet Pipe Trunk Group In the minicell translation table, each Packet Pipe is assigned a PacketPipe Trunk Group Member (PPTM) number. This number correspondsto the number assigned to a circuit CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) inthe Minicell frame that provides the interface to the Minicell TimeDivision Multiplex (TDM) bus. Therefore, there is a one-to-onemapping between PPTM number and CCC number. When a PPT M of a given number is equipped, it is associated with the CCC with thesame number at the Minicell site.

Packet Pipe Definition andAllocation

Packet pipes are defined in the minicell translation table and must becontained within the same T1 line. Packet pipes do not need to be

assigned to contiguous DSOs.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group

Packet Pipe Diagram The diagram below shows the data path in the Switch and Minicell.Packet Pipes originate at the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH)and terminate at a CDMA Cluster Controller.

Packet Pipe Creation The definition of the Packet Pipe is done through the PPTG (PacketPipe Trunk Group) form of the AUTOPLEX RC/V system.

A further discussion on Packet Pipes is provided in Unit 9.

PSTN

T1 Fac.(PCM)

DFI CCC CE

CE

CE

DFI-2 ECSU

DLTU2

TSI

PSU2 DLTU2

PHV FRPH DFI

Switch Module(s)

Nailed-up Packet Pipes(20ms packets)



Introduction to PCS CDMAPacket Pipe Connection -- Minicell Interface


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Packet Pipe Connection -- Minicell Interface

Overview The Packet Pipe’s physical interface with the Minicell is through the

Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) that provides serial-to-parallel andparallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 lines and the TDMbuses internal to the Minicell. The Packet Pipe terminates at the CDMACluster Controller.

Cluster Controller The CDMA Cluster Controller passes the signals to Channel Elements(CEs) contained in the CCU.

Channel Elements A CE contains the circuitry necessary to support a full duplex CDMAchannel, i.e., to perform forward link and reverse link CDMAspread-spectrum processing. Each CE supports one CDMA channel. ACE is capable of performing the modulation/demodulation of a CDMAchannel, or in some cases, more than one channel.

Cluster A Cluster is a logically associated group of CEs that can be controlledby a single CCC. All of the conversations on the CEs within a Clusterare backhauled to the PCSC through the same Packet Pipe.

Subcell A Subcell is a group of interconnected Clusters that allow all the CEwithin the Subcell to act as share resources for the sectors.

Minicell Interface Diagram The diagram below shows the Packet Pipe connection to the Minicell.

Role of the ChannelElement

Each CE can be assigned to perform one or more of the followingfunctions:

Nailed-upPacket Pipe

1

24

DFI CCC

PCS CDMA Minicell Site

CE

CE

CE




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAPacket Pipe Connection -- Minicell Interface

• Pilot Channel functions, which enables the CDMA mobile toestablish communication with the Minicell

• Sync Channel functions, used by the mobile to acquire initial timesynchronization

• Access Channel, reverse of the Paging Channel, is used to receivevarious types of messages from the mobile

• Paging Channel functions, used by the Minicell to transmit systemoverhead information to the mobile

• Traffic (User) Channel, which carries voice communication

Several functions can be combined into a single CE.

TCU and ECU The PCS CDMA Minicell can presently support two different CUs, theThirteen Kilobit Channel Unit (TCU) and the Enhanced Channel Unit(ECU).

The Packet Pipe size (i.e., the number of 64-kB DSOs allocated to aPacket Pipe) is, at most, four for CCCs equipped with TCU ChannelElements; more than four DSOs will be unused, unless channel poolingis enabled. CCCs equipped with ECUs may be configured for “larger”size Packet Pipes, up to a maximum of 16 DSOs on the same T1 line.RF Engineering considerations determine that maximum.

Line Support Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port.



Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: The Minicell Site


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Key Parts: The Minicell Site

The PCS CDMA Minicell

Site

The PCS CDMA Minicell Site contains a PCS CDMA Minicell that is

designed to optimize performance for voice and data services at the1.8-GHz to 2.0-GHz range. The Minicell maintains maximumcommonality with 800-MHz standards for CDMA (that is, IS-95 and itsextensions for PCS).

Minicell Diagram The diagram below represents the key components in a Minicellreceive or transmit path.

Important! The acronyms RCC and CSC represent the samepiece of equipment.

Advantages of PCS CDMAMinicells

The PCS CDMA Minicell offers the following advantages:

• Offers high capacity - ten times the capacity of analog cellular

• Has larger Minicell radii - three to four times that of GSM• Uses multipath to enhance signal strength and to combat fading

• Offers good voice quality (i.e., lower frame error rates withreduced fading, multiple base station communication, softhandoffs, and no recognizable noise or cross talk)

• Imposes lower power requirements for mobiles providing longerbattery life for handheld units

CE

CECCC

RCC CSC

SCT CDMA Minicell Site

DFI

ACU

BCR

RFTG

CTU

19.6608 MHz




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAKey Parts: The Minicell Site

• Provides a degree of built-in privacy

Minicell Translation Forms All configuration and operating parameters relative to a given Minicellare stored in data tables called Translation Forms. These forms aremaintained in the PCSC (Access Manager) computer. With properauthorization, these forms can be updated via a laptop and a modemconnection, therefore enabling changes in a Minicell configurationfrom a remote location.

About Vocoders Current vocoders do not support data transmission, even if the celldesign is optimized for that mode of operation.



Introduction to PCS CDMAPacket Pipe Connection - Daisy Chain


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Packet Pipe Connection - Daisy Chain

Overview This feature provides Lucent customers with a more efficient

utilization of T1/E1 transport facilities. This is also called Fractional T-1 facilities.

Fractional T1 ExampleDiagram

The figure below illustrates an example of daisy chaining three cellssolely on the downstream path from the MSC to the cell sites. Theanalogous upstream path is not depicted in the picture.

Detailed OperationDescription

In PCS networks, every Cell is connected to the DCS via T1/E1transport, even if a fraction of the T1/E1 facility is in use. This featureprovides a mechanism for customers to drop/insert any number of DS0s to/from multiple cells daisy chained together via T1/E1 facilities.

This example describes one T1 line daisy chained across three cellsites.

1. A full T1 comes into the first CSU from the MSC. This CSU reads

the first eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-1 through 8)and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to BaseStation 1. The 8th line is the POTS line.

The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to the secondCSU. In this example they occupy the last 16 DS0s (i.e. DS1-9through 24).

1-8 9-16 17-24

1-8 9-16 17-24

1-8 9-16 17-24

Full T1

Cell Site 11-7 CDMA

Radio

CSU8

Cell Site 31-7

CDMARadio

CSU8

Cell Site 21-7

CDMARadio

CSU8




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMAPacket Pipe Connection - Daisy Chain

2. At the second CSU we have a similar situation. This CSU readsthe second eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-9 through16) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to BaseStation 2. The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to thethird CSU. In this example they occupy the last eight DS0s (i.e.DS1-17 through 24)

3. At the third CSU we again have a similar situation. This CSUreads the last eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-17through 24) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 goingto Base Station 3. This is the last cell in the chain.

POTS Line The POTS sub-feature work as follows. When the customer would liketo use the POTS line, they will provision a particular DSO for thatpurpose. This DS0 will be dedicated as a POTS line until it isdeprovisioned by an operator.

Administrative Port The remotely accessible administrative port sub-feature works in afashion similar to the POTS line. When a technician wishes to accessthe port locally, they only need to connect their laptop to the RS-232port. When a technician wishes to access the port remotely, an operatormay need to provision a particular DS0 for that purpose.

Data Lines Each cell site needs two DS0s allocated for DL1 and DL0. The CSUwill translate the packet to the expected position of DS0 13 and 24. Forsimplicity the example shows each eight DSOs allocated to the nextcell site. Actual use of this feature will likely be different.



Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Implementation


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Implementation

Overview Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell implementation is

compliant with the IS-95 Standard. Transmit and Receive functions areperformed in hardware.

T1/E1 Lines Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port.

Transmit On the Transmit Path: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The PCSC has speech handling circuitry to encode land-originatedcommunications. Once encoded, communications destined to a givenMinicell are bundled into Packet Pipes assigned to that Minicell and sent

to the Minicell site over a T1 line.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Minicell site unbundles the Packet Pipes, provides channelencoding and bit interleaving to reduce communication errors, provideslong code encryption, Walsh function modulation, signal spreading, andcarrier modulation.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Bit interleaving is used to reduce the effects of RF fading and large

interference bursts.

Receive On the Receive Path: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The Minicell site provides carrier demodulation, signal despreading, de-encryption, Walsh function demodulation, deinterleaving, channeldecoding, and sends the resulting signal to the PCSC in a Packet Pipeover a T1 line.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The PCSC converts the received signal into a voice communication andsends it over the PSTN.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


CDMA Encoding ProcessDiagram

The following diagram shows the signal encoding that occurs in theMinicell.

CDMA Encoding Process The call process steps are as follows: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 PSTN: Phone call originates

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Encode the digitized signal

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Channel coding: (see page 1-32) duplicate the signal

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Bit Interleaving: rearrange the bits to limit “burst” errors

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Encryption, long code scrambling: apply the users long code to providesecure transmission (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Signal spreading, Walsh function modulation (see page 1-32)

L3805 - L1V7.0

CDMA Cluster Controller

CDMA Channel Element

Bus Interface Unit

Baseband Combiner & Radio

CTU

CRC

BBA

CCU

minicell Site

11

Channel Coding

33

Bit Interleaving44

Encryption: LongCode Scrambling55

Signal Spreading,Walsh function

Modulation66

PN Offset77Carrier Modulation

88

99 1010

Carrier Demodulation 1111

Signal Despreading1212

64 bit OrthogonalSymbol Demodulation

1313

Decryption: Long CodeUnscrambling 1414

Bit Deinterleaving1515

Channel Decoding

1616MSC

Speech Handler: Variable Low BitRate Speech Coding

Frame Relay

Decoding1717

PSTN

18

Analog Conversion Unit

T1/E1T1/E1

Packet Pipe

Packet Pipe in

DS1

Encoding22





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 PN offset (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Carrier modulation: prepare the encoded signal for transmission...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Transmit to mobile terminal: the handset decodes the signal and encodesthe mobile users voice

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Mobile phone responds: Receive signal from mobile terminal

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Carrier demodulation...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Signal despreading (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

13 64 bit orthogonal symbol demodulation

...........................................................................................................................................................................

14 Decryption, long code unscrambling (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

15 Bit deinterleaving

...........................................................................................................................................................................

16 Channel decoding

...........................................................................................................................................................................

17 Decoding: convert voice data from vocoder to 64-kB digitized data

...........................................................................................................................................................................

18 PSTN: the send and return sides of a call are completed




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Channel Element Encoding

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Channel Element Encoding

Overview The Channel Elements encode the signal three ways to maintain

privacy and identify the call to the receiver.

Encoding the TransmitSignal

The encoding process is as follows:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The forward traffic is encoded with the Long Mask code, and providedthrough multiplexing with a power control bit that will be used by themobile to maintain its receive/transmit level.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Walsh function is then applied to ensure the orthogonality of thechannel against the remaining channels.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The encoded signal is then assigned codes that are used to identify thebase station and sector to the mobile.

Channel Element EncodingDiagram

The diagram below shows the CDMA channel element encoding:

Power Control The Power control bit is used during call processing to maintain therelative power of each individual active traffic channel, and to power it

BlockInterleaver

MUX

Long CodeMask forUser m

1.2288 Mbps

Power ControlBits (800 bps)

Walsh Function

I Channel Pilot PNSequence 1.2288 Mbps

I

Q

Q Channel Pilot PNSequence 1.2288 Mbps

sin

cos

s(t)Σ

19.2 kbps

Σ = summed

Legend:

9.6 kbpsor 14.4 kbps

19.2 kbps

SpeechProcessor

Long CodeGenerator

Decimator1/64

BasebandFilter

BasebandFilter



Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Channel Element Encoding


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

up or down to maintain acceptable Frame Error Rate (FER)measurements by the mobile on the channel.

Units Used These relative power settings are defined in the Minicell translationtables, and expressed in terms of digital gain units.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMACodes Used in a CDMA Transmission

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission

Overview The codes used in a CDMA transmission are assigned specific

functions.

Long Code The Long Code is used to encrypt the content of the transmitted signal,and thus ensures privacy.

Pilot Channel PN Code This code, transmitted from the base station to the mobile, informs themobile which antenna face and base station the mobile iscommunicating with.

Walsh Function This function provides orthogonal encoding.

Orthogonal encoding is characterized by the following properties whenthey are combined (multiplexed):

• If they were encoded with the same code, the result isacknowledged by the receiving system.

• If they were encoded with different codes, the result is ignored bythe receiving system.

Walsh codes are “orthogonal” mathematical codes. As such, if twoWalsh codes are correlated, the result is intelligible only if these twocodes are the same. As a result, when a Walsh-encoded signal isreceived by a PCS CDMA-capable mobile terminal it appears asrandom noise to that terminal, unless that terminal uses the same codeas the one encoding the incoming signal.



Introduction to PCS CDMACodes Used in a CDMA Transmission


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CDMA Codes Table This table provides a summary of the various CDMA coding functions.

Result of CDMA Encoding The illustration below depicts different voice communications, mixedwithin a 1.2288-MHz bandwidth.

Code Name Description Function

Walsh functionA 64-bit orthogonal code. Walsh functionsare used to provide orthogonalchannelization among all code CDMAforward channels (pilot, paging, sync, andtraffic).

A 64-bit orthogonal code. Walsh functionsare used to provide orthogonalchannelization among all code CDMAforward channels (pilot, paging, sync, andtraffic).

Channel Formation,0 - 63

Pilot channel PNcode (short code)

A 15 bit code with 512 combinations thatis unique to minicell face (sectorized oromni).

A 15 bit code with 512 combinations thatis unique to minicell face (sectorized or

omni).

Time Offset

Long code mask Voice privacyA random, 42-bit binary number,providing 16 trillion combinations of 0’sand 1’s.

A random, 42-bit binary number,

providing 16 trillion combinations of 0’sand 1’s.

12 2740

4

1443

3254

62

16

21

8 4730

7

552

3917 28

433515

2459

4144

39

5

366018

648

2923

13

455619

57

31

3

01040

58

25

41

229

5233

5320

1 4251 34

3746

1149

5038 2663

1.2288 MHz CDMA ChannelAs many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.2288 MHz channel




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMADisplay of Walsh Codes

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Display of Walsh Codes

Overview PCS CDMA transmissions require two types of channels:

• Supervision channels (Pilot, Paging, Sync)• Traffic (Voice) channels

PCS CDMA Channels When the CDMA signal is monitored on a test set running in the codedomain mode, each channel is represented by a separate barcorresponding to its assigned Walsh code.

Walsh Code DisplayDiagram

On the display, the supervision channels will have a higher power levelthan the voice channels. The Pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is always thefirst on the left of the display.



Introduction to PCS CDMADetails of Walsh Codes Display


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Details of Walsh Codes Display

Overview Total transmit power is distributed among the different Walsh codes.

Signal strengths for the CDMA channels can be displayed with relativepowers shown. The supervision channels are set to stronger values.

The Pilot Channel The pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is transmitted at all times by theMinicell site on each active carrier. The following actions take place:

• The CDMA mobile constantly monitors the pilot channel andmeasures the signal strength of the pilot signal.

• Prior to origination, the mobile monitors the pilot channel andestimates the power level to use for origination (open-loop powercontrol).

• The mobile unit also assists the Minicell site in the handoff process by measuring and reporting the strengths of the receivedpilot signals.

Because the power of the pilot channel determines the initial power of the mobile’s transmitting origination, page response, or autonomousregistration messages, the mobile unit’s relative power level isadjustable. Its maximum value is 1.2W (or 108 Digital Gain Units(DGUs) representing 15% of the 8W total power when using a normalCTU.

The Sync Channel The sync channel is used by mobile units operating within the coveragearea of the Minicell site to acquire initial time synchronization. Thesync channel is always spread with Walsh function 32, transmits at1200 bps, and its function is assigned to the same CE as the pilot for theMinicell site or face.

Its nominal strength is 0.12 W (34DGUs) or 1.5% of total power.

Paging Channels Paging channels are used by the Minicell site to transmit systemoverhead information and mobile-specific information (such as pages)

to the mobiles, as follows:• Paging channel 1 is the primary paging channel

• The paging channel is divided into 2048 80-ms timeslots




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMADetails of Walsh Codes Display

Mobiles may monitor all slots, referred to as nonslotted mode.Mobiles may also monitor certain slots, referred to as slottedmode. The slotted mode is required for optional mobile featuressuch as sleep mode.

• Paging channels:– Are spread with Walsh functions 1 through 7

– Transmit data at either 9600 or 4800 kbps

– Are assigned to specific CEs at the Minicell or face

Because there may be one or as many as seven paging channels fromMinicell to Minicell, an unused paging channel (Walsh code) may beused randomly by the Minicell to handle voice traffic. Strength of Paging Channel is 0.44 W (64DGUs), or 5.5% of a total 8W signal.

Access Channel The access channel is used to receive various types of messages fromthe mobiles, such as call origination requests, autonomousregistrations, and page responses. Functionally, it is the reverse of thepaging channel. Physically, it is on the receive side of the CE used forthe pilot and sync channels.

Traffic Channels The rest of the CDMA Walsh codes (or 78%) will be used to carryvoice traffic.

Walsh Code Relative PowerLevels Diagram

The diagram below provides a comparison of the power levelsallocated to the Walsh codes shown as channels on a meter display.

Pilot (W0)

Paging (W1-7)

Sync (W32)

Voice Tra ffic Voice Tra ffic



Introduction to PCS CDMAThe CDMA Interference


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................The CDMA Interference

Overview CDMA is based on the use of a spread-spectrum form of modulation to

encode a signal for its transmission and retrieval.

Noise Sources In spread-spectrum technology, radio signals are spread across a single1.23-MHz wide frequency band. Each subscriber is assigned PN(pseudorandom noise) codes. Signals that match the PN codes aredecoded and processed. Signals that do not contain the code matchesare treated as noise and ignored.

The predominant interference to CDMA users are other CDMA users.A CDMA signal experiences high levels of interference dominated bythe coded signals of other CDMA users. This takes two forms:

interference from other users in the same Minicell, and interferencefrom adjacent cells. The total interference also includes backgroundnoise and other spurious signals.

Signal Processing:Transmit

CDMA starts with an encoded narrowband signal, shown at the fulldata rate of 9600 bps. This is spread with the use of the PN codes to abandwidth of 1.23 MHz.

Signal Processing: Receive When the signal is received, it is filtered and processed to recover thedesired signal. This processing is done by a correlator that eliminates

interference sources because they are uncorrelated with the desiredsignal. By using this method, a large number of CDMA calls mayoccupy the same frequency spectrum simultaneously.

Frame Error Rate The number of transmission errors, measured in terms of Frame ErrorRate (FER), increases with the number of calls. To overcome thisproblem, both the Minicell site and mobile can increase power untilneither the mobile nor the Minicell site can power up further todecrease FER to an acceptable amount. This event gives a “soft limit”of calls of a particular Minicell, and depends on:

• The noise floor - naturally occurring and man-made interference• Interference from calls on this Minicell

• Interference from calls on other cells

Noise Source Diagram The diagram below displays the four sources of interference to aCDMA call. This includes the “noise” of other CDMA calls.





Introduction to PCS CDMADiversity and CDMA


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rake Receivers A rake receiver significantly improves reception reliability, particularlyin areas where most signals are weak.

A rake receiver contains multiple tuning fingers, which arecontinuously trying to lock into the three strongest signals. Additionalcircuitry is used to correlate signals, and search for alternate multipathsand neighboring base station signals.

Rake receivers:• Enable soft handoffs

• Provide significant gain

• Protect against fading

• Enable diversity

The base station rake receiver has four fingers that can access multipleantennas, whereas the handset rake receiver has one antenna with threeelements.

Time Delay With time delay, each digital bit of information in the data packet thatis received by the cell site over the Packet Pipe is duplicated (9.6 kbpsbecomes 19.2 kbps). The position of each new bit in the data stream isrearranged in relation to the original bit. Thus, a loss of consecutive bitsduring transmission will have little or no effect on the entire datamessage. This is because their near duplicates are stored elsewhere in

MSC

Interference

Rake Receiver

Rake Receiver

Interference Interference




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMADiversity and CDMA

the data stream and can be used to recreate the data. This common timedelay method is used to improve digital transmission of data packets.

Path Delay In multipath data streams, identical data is received from more than onepath. It is received several microseconds apart due to the varyinglengths of the paths. Because the CDMA mobile has a rake receiverwith three receiver elements, as many as three multipath data streamsmay be received independently. The mobile selects the best (lowestFER (frame error rate)) packet of voice data in 20-ms frames from theavailable signal source.

Frequency Delay Frequency changes are inherent in spread-spectrum systems due tofading. Fading is caused by, and is a function of, the time delays in thealternate multipaths. A fade appears as a notch filter that moves acrossa band. As the user moves, the frequency of the notch changes. Thewidth of the notch is on the order of one over the difference in arrivaltime of two signals. For a 1-ms delay, the notch is approximately 1-MHz wide. The CDMA system uses a 1.23-MHz bandwidth. So onlythose delays in time of less than 1 microsecond, actually cause thesignal to experience a deep fade.



Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Traffic Channels


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Traffic Channels

Overview CDMA traffic channels are used to transmit user and signaling

information between the Minicell site and the mobile unit during a call.

Signal Transmission Transmission occurs in the following ways:

• CDMA traffic channels transmit at variable data rates of 9600,4800, 2400, and 1200 bps.

• The rate is based on the activity of the speech sample.

• Traffic channels transmit data packets containing 20 ms of speechsamples.

• All data rates include a frame quality indicator as part of the 20-

ms packet, which is also called a frame.

Primary Traffic Data andSignaling Data

Traffic channels may simultaneously handle voice and signaling data,such as powerup/powerdown commands.

• When voice data is present, signaling data is transmitted via dimand burst, where both primary traffic and signaling data share thesame frame.

• When primary data is not present, signaling data is transmitted viablank and burst, where signaling data uses the entire frame.

Traffic channels are assigned to unique CEs in the Minicell site or face.

Number of Traffic Channelsper Minicell Site

The maximum number of traffic channels per Minicell site isdetermined by the elements installed in the PCS CDMA Minicellprimary frame, and by engineering (Packet Pipes and RF)considerations.

• Traffic channels are randomly assigned by call processing toWalsh functions 8 through 63 (but not 32) during a call. Thisyields 55 possible Walsh codes.

• In addition, Walsh functions for unused paging channels may alsobe selected during call processing. This means that as many as sixadditional Walsh codes may be selected during call processing, fora combined total of 61 possible Walsh codes that may be used fortraffic channels.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction to PCS CDMACDMA Traffic Channels

• Because each additional traffic channel creates additionalinterference for each established call, the number of simultaneoustraffic channels is less than the theoretical value of 61.




401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 PCS CDMA Minicell Physical

Description

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Objectives This unit provides the cell site technician with the ability to locateMinicell components that will need to be worked on as part of themaintenance process.

The objectives to be achieved are as follows:

1. Locate Components

This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to locate thephysical components in a Minicell so that they can maintain and/ or perform maintenance actions on them.

2. Identify Functions

Another objective is to enable cell technicians to identify the roleof the different components that they have located.

3. List Components in the Data and RF Paths

The objective here is to enable cell technicians to follow the dataand RF path, in order to perform troubleshooting procedures.

About the Signal Path A PCS CDMA Minicell provides connectivity between the land-basedtelephone network and wireless terminals, and between wirelessterminals that are within the wireless coverage area. The physicaldescription of Minicell components will enable the Cell Site technicianto perform necessary maintenance tasks. Receive and Transmit paths




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description

are part of the Minicell overall signal path that also includes signalingand control paths.

Contents PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description 2-4• CDMA Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-5• Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station 2-6• The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station - - - - - - - - - - - -2-7

Primary Cabinet Layout and Signal Flows 2-9• Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front) - - - - - - - - - - 2-10• Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back) - - - - - - - - - - 2-11• Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail - - - - - - 2-12• Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4. - 2-13• Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard Minicell) - - - - 2-15• PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16• PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path - - - - - - - - - - 2-18• PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20

Primary Cabinet Shelf Descriptions 2-22• CDMA Radio Test Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23• CDMA Radio Test Unit Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25• Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-27• Radio Switch Panel Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-28• Channel Service Unit (Optional) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator - - - - - - - - 2-32• Radio Control Complex Shelf - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-34• Radio Control Complex Shelf Description - - - - - - - - - 2-35

• CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-37• CTU Assembly Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39• Front Filter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-40• Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-42• CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves - - - - - - - - - - 2-43• CRC Shelf Details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-45• CRC Shelf Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-47• Digital Facilities Interface Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-49• Frame Pedestal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-50• Circuit Breaker Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-51• Alarm Interface Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-53

• Alarm Interface Panel -- User Alarm Board - - - - - - - - - 2-55Side and Rear Panel Descriptions 2-56• Side Panel (Version 2 Only) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57• Rear Interface Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-58• Heat Exchanger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Other Base Station Cabinets 2-62• Special Omni - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-63• Growth Cabinets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-64• Growth I Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-65• Growth II Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-66• Growth III Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-67• Rack-Mounted Growth - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69• Range Extension Option - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-74• Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional) - - - - - - - - - 2-76• Minicell Power Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-79• Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-80




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


PCS CDMA Minicell PhysicalDescription

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The PCS CDMA Minicell is the physical interface between the T1 linefrom the 5ESS-2000 system and the wireless system antenna.Equipment designed for a base station includes radio and powercabinets.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Overview


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Overview

Overview A PCS CDMA Minicell provides connectivity between the switch and

wireless terminals. The switch is connected to a caller on the land-based telephone network or another wireless terminal that is within thewireless coverage area of the switch.

Features The Minicell features are as follows:

• Omni, 2-sector, or 3-sector operation in a single cabinet

• Environmentally-hardened cabinets

• Can be installed outdoors on rooftop or concrete slab

• Sub-rate multiplexing (allows multiple packet pipes to occupy the

same facility) on base station-to-switch links• Works with existing AUTOPLEX® System 1000 equipment

• CDMA technology.

Transmit Configurations The Minicell supports a maximum of three transmit antennas and sixreceive antennas (including diversity receive) per carrier. Thefollowing configurations are supported:

• Omni antenna with one CDMA carrier

• 3-sector directional antennas with one CDMA carrier

• Omni and 3-sector directional antennas with up to three CDMAcarriers (requires growth cabinets).




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionConcepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell BaseStation

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station

Overview The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station is the physical interface

between the T1 line from the 5ESS-2000 System and a wireless mobile.Because CDMA requires synchronization between all the cells in thenetwork, each cell receives timing signals from GPS satellites using aGPS antenna.

Acronyms CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

GPS Global Positioning System

PCS Personal Communications Services

TDM Time Division Multiplex

T-Smart Channel Service Unit

DFI Digital Facilities Interface

CDMA MinicellConnections Diagram

The diagram below shows the external connections to a PCS CDMAMinicell.

.0

PCSCDMA

Minicell

PowerCabinet

BatteryBackupPower

Cabinet(Optional)

CommercialPower (220 VAC)

Power and Alarms

T1/E1 from5ESS ® -2000

GPS Antenna

GrowthCabinets(Optional)

l

l

l

Receive (RF)Transmit (RF)

Timing Ref.T-Smart-to-DFI

AlarmsTDM Bus



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionThe PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station

Overview A PCS CDMA Base Station contains the PCS CDMA Minicell and the

Receive/Transmit Antenna. The Minicell itself is composed, at aminimum, of a Primary Radio Cabinet and a Primary Power Cabinet.Optional cabinets include one or more Growth Cabinets and one ormore types of Backup Power Cabinets.

Base Station Graphic The graphic below shows one of the possible layouts of a base station.

Primary Radio Cabinets The Primary Radio Cabinet contains the foundational complement of radios for a Minicell. When ECU equipped, a primary cabinet cansupport up to 120 control and traffic channels. Two functionallyequivalent models of Primary Radio Cabinets (Version 2 and Version4) are currently available. Differences between these two models areessentially related to the physical location of some of their electroniccomponents.

Growth Radio Cabinets Two growth cabinets are available to support larger traffic volumes,and also give the possibility of using different carriers. These cabinetsare Growth I and Growth II.

Growth IWhen equipped with ECUs, the Growth I cabinet can support anadditional 120 control and traffic channels to those available in thePrimary Radio Cabinet.

PrimaryRadio

Cabinet

Battery BackupCabinet (Optional)

PowerCabinet

Growth CabinetsLocation (Optional)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Growth II

When equipped with ECUs, the Growth II cabinet can support anadditional 120 control and traffic channels to those available in thePrimary Radio Cabinet and the Growth I Cabinet.

Primary Power Cabinet The primary power cabinet provides the power (240 VAC and 24VDC) necessary for the functioning of the various circuits in theprimary and growth cabinets.

Backup Battery Cabinet The backup battery cabinet is an optional piece of equipment thatprovides temporary power in case of failure of primary power.

Backup Generator Cabinet The backup power cabinet is an optional piece of equipment thatprovides generator supplied power in case of failure of primary power.

Antenna Receives and transmits RF signals.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Primary Cabinet Layout and SignalFlows

Overview

Purpose This section provides an overview of the PCS CDMA primary Minicellhardware and signal flows.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPrimary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front)

Primary Radio Cabinet

Diagram (Front)

This is the front view of the PCS CDMA Minicell with the receive

units and filters on the left side.

Primary Radio CabinetComponents

The front of a primary cabinet shows the radio components, from top tobottom:

HeatExchanger

(RUs 1,3,5behind TFUs)

SideInterface

Panel

CTUs(Hidden behind Fan)

PCU

PCUACB

Filters CRC

CSC

ACB

CCC 2

CCC 4

CCC 6

CSC 0

SIDE 1

CSC 1

RFTG-m Rb RFTG-m X0

RSP

CRTUm

CSU

TFU

RFU

TFU TFU

RFU RFU

SIDE 0

0 1 2

C C CTU

TU

TU

AlarmPanel

RCC

Component Description

CRTUm CDMA Radio Test Unit Module for testing cell operationRSP Radio Switch Panel, for switching signals to and from the CRTU

CSU Channel Service Unit, for interface with the T1 line(s)

RFTG Reference Frequency Timing Generator to maintain cell timing.

RCC Radio Control Complex contains two CSCs for redundancy

CSC Cell Site Controller, Part of the RCC, for control of the cell operations

CRC CDMA Radio Complex (Labeled CCC2, 4, and 6 for historical reasons)

CTU CDMA Transmit Unit for transmission to a filter for clean-up of transmitsignals

Filters Filters for the transmit and receive paths.

RU Receive Unit passes the received signal to a filter for clean-up

PCU Power Conversion Unit provides +15V output from a +24V input

ACB Alarm Control Board, routes alarm signals to the switch



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPrimary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back)

Overview The back of the cabinet contains the antenna and power connections.

DANGERElectrical Burns

Serious burns may occur.

Antennas may need to be disconnected to perform measurements. Make sure that there is no RF Power applied to the antenna leads before disconnecting.

Components The back of the primary cabinet has limited service or maintenancerequirements by cell technicians.

Primary Radio CabinetDiagram (Back)

The diagram below shows the components on the back of a Version 3Minicell..

Connections The following connections are accessible from the back of the radiocabinet:

• Antennas, which are connected through the Antenna InterfacePanel (AIP)

• BCR to CTU connectors (CTU Backplane)

• Access to CSU connections

• Power distribution, which is made through the Power DistributionAssembly (PDA).

T X T X TX T X T X T X

S3P S3G S2P S2G S1P S1GSAGE

R X R X R X R X R X R X

S3D0 S3D1 S2D0 S2D1 S1D0S1D1 GPS

AIP

CCC2BACK PLANE

CCC4BACK PLANE

CCC6BACK PLANE

RCCBACK PLANE

CSUBACK PLANE

LIGHTNINGPLATE

CRTU

Side InterfacePanel

Power DistributionAssembly

Antenna Interface Panel




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPrimary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail

Primary Radio Cabinet

Layout

The diagram below shows the layout of the primary radio cabinet.

Shelf Layout Each shelf is composed of individual boards. Exact position of boardson a given shelf may differ from site to site. However, shelf locationwill not be affected. Details on the individual boards are provided lateron in this unit.

CSC0 CSC1

CCC2

CCC4

CCC6

CRTU

SIUCSU 1

CSU 2CSU 3

CTU0

CTU

CTU

1 2

ACB

PCUPCU

TX TX TXS1P S2P S3P

RX 0 RX 0 RX 0

CircuitBreakers

AirDuct

RFTG 0 RFTG 1

C

CC

4

AC

BBA Group

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BI

U

ACU

BCR

SCT / DFI

1 2 3 4

415AC

****

DUPLEX

J8 J7

J6

J4

J5

J3

J9 J10

-50

-50

-40

-40

RSP

EXT ALM 6

CLOSEON

ALARM

OPENON

ALARM

AIM0SIDE

AIM1SIDE

EXT ALM 0

J1

AIM 1 AIM 0

CSU RemoteOptioning Port

INTERFACEPANEL

ccc

MEM

CPI

NCI

415AC

AFI

CPU0

CRTUi

MEM

NCI

CPI

AFI

415AC

CPU1



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionConfiguration Changes in PCS CDMA MinicellVersion 4.


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4.

Overview The Version 4.0 Minicell functions like its predecessor, with some

rearrangement of components to ease access and manufacturing, and toenhance reliability.

The PCS CDMA MinicellVersion 4

The PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4 enables a smaller footprint than aVersion 2 installation when it includes Growth cabinets. This isachieved by making all filters accessible from the front of the cabinet.Version 4 also presents a more efficient cooling system, eliminating theneed for a second heat exchanger when using High Power CTUs.

PCS CDMA MinicellVersion 4 Diagram

The components moved to new locations are shown in the picturebelow:

Physical Differencesbetween Version 2 and

Version 4

The major physical differences between the two versions are asfollows:

• The RFTGms have been moved below the CTUs. In their placeare air ducts that enable vertical air flow for cooling the inside of the Minicell. The RFTGms are now placed on top of each other,rather than side-by-side.

• The Heat Exchanger is larger than in the Version 2 Minicell,eliminating the need for a back panel Heat Exchanger.

Larger HeatExchanger

FrontFront

RFTGm

Air Ducts

6 Filters

CombinedCRTUm and RSP BackBack

CTU




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionConfiguration Changes in PCS CDMA MinicellVersion 4.

• The CTU cooling fan is now in the back of the Primary Cabinet.This leaves clear access to the CTUs for replacement or upgradeto HPCTU. That configuration, coupled with the more powerfulHeat Exchanger and the improved cooling air flow eliminates theneed for a secondary Heat Exchanger for either HPCTU operation,or high temperature environments.

• Receive Filters that were in the Side Panel have been moved andthere are now six filters accessible from the front of the primarycabinet.

• The Network Facilities Interface (NFI) has been moved to theback of the Primary Cabinet, providing easier access to the bottompart of the front of that cabinet.

• The CRTUm has been combined with the RSP into one unit andmoved to the bottom right front corner. It is now called a CDMA

Test Module.

Location Changes The following components remain in the same location as the PrimaryMinicell but the functionality has changed.

• The heat exchanger is now larger, so that only one exchanger isneeded for all configurations.

• Air ducts and fans have been put where the RFTGm was formerlylocated.

The following components have been moved:

Equipment Primary LocationV2

Enhanced PrimaryLocation V4

CTU Fan front, CTU shelf back, CTU shelf

NFI front, bottom left back center

Filters front and side panel front, bottom left

RFTGm front, top front, center left

CRTUm/ RSP

front, top front, bottom rightt






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows

Overview The signal flow through a PCS CDMA Minicell has three components:

• Traffic (Voice) data: carries communication• Control (Date Link) data: carries signals that manage the cell

operation

• Test data: enables verification of the good health of the cell.

PCS CDMA Minicell FlowDiagram

The following diagram shows the three signal flows (i.e., traffic;control; and test) through the Minicell.

Transmit path The following describes the Transmit path process: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Digitally encoded signals from the switch (voice and control data) gothrough a Protector Block.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Signals are fed to an optioned CSU connecting with the switch.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Signals go then to a DFI board that interfaces them to the TDM bus.

CL3805 - L2V7.0 Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

CPU

MEM

NCI

CPI

CRTUi

AFI

CRTUm

RSP

TDM BUSBIU

TxRx

ANT

C R T U T e s t i n g

Tx

Rx

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

ACU

BCR

CTU F

I L T E RTx

Rx

AIP

CCC

Analog Signal

RU

CSC1CSC1

T1

Tx

RxRx

TxPCSC

PSU

P R O T E C T O R B L O C K

CSU

DFI

8

3

8

3

Packet Pipe Data Link

Packet Pipe

Depending on configuration,can be ECUs or TCUs



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The signal is split with voice data directed by a CCC in the CRC andthe control data sent to the CSC.

Voice Data The voice data is processed and transmitted.1. Processed in a CCU for digital baseband signal.

2. Converted by an ACU from digital encoding to analog.

3. Processed by the BCR as an RF signal.

4. Upbanded and amplified in the CTU.

5. Filtered and sent to the antenna through the AIP.

Control Data Control data is processed in the CPI and sent from the NCI to theother CSC units on the TDM bus.

Receive path The Receive path is essentially the reverse of the Transmit path, exceptthat the signals go through the RU while bypassing the CTU.

Test data Test data is supported by a CRTUm that feeds test signals emulating amobile. Test data will be covered in more detail in unit 3.

Acronyms Acronyms in the Minicell have the following meanings:

ACU Analog Conversion Unit AFI Alarm and Fits Interface

AIP Antenna Interface Panel ANT AntennaBCR Baseband Combiner Radio BIU Bus Interface UnitCCC CDMA Cluster Controller CCU CDMA Channel UnitCSC Cell Site Controller CPI Core Processing UnitCPU Communication Processing Interface CRTU CDMA Radio Test UnitCRTUi CRTU Interface CRTUm CRTU ModuleCSU Channel Service Unit CTU CDMA Transmit UnitDFI Digital Facilities Interface MEM Memory UnitNCI Network Control Interface PCSC PCS Switching CenterPSU Packet Switch Unit RCC Radio Control Complex - 2 CSCsRSP Radio Switching Panel RU Receive UnitRx Receive Tx Transmit




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path

Overview The receive path for the Minicell follows 10 main steps. Note that the

antenna connections are at the back of the cell.

Receive Path Diagram The following diagram shows the receive path for the PCS CDMAMinicell. The antenna feed, item 1, enters the back of the Minicell.

From Mobile to Switch Signals from a mobile source are received by the Antenna. Their paththrough the cell is:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 From the Antenna to the Antenna Interface Panel

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Antenna Interface Panel to the Receive Filter

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Receive Filter to the Receive Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Receive Unit to the Baseband Combiner/Radio

CL3805 - L2V7.004/08/1 11 Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

n Antenna

1

o Antenna Interface Panel

2

p Receive Filter and Receive Unit

3

q Baseband Combiner/Radio4 r Analog Converter Unit5

s CDMA Channel Unit

6

t CDMA Cluster Controller

7

u Digital Facilities Interface8

v Channel Service Unit

9

w Protector Block 10

T1 Line to the MSC



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Baseband/Combiner/Radio to the Analog Converter Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Analog Converter Unit to the CDMA Channel Unit...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the CDMA Channel Unit to the Cluster Controller

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the Cluster Controller to the Digital Facilities Interface

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 From the Digital Facilities Interface to the Channel Service Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 From the Channel Service Unit to the Protector Block

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 From the Protector Block to the Switch through the T1 line




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionPCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path

Overview The transmit path covers 10 main steps and is almost the reverse of the

receive path.

Transmit Path Diagram The follwoing diagram shows the transmit path of the PCS CDMAMinicell. The antenna feed, Item 10, comes out the back of the cabinet.

From Switch to Mobile Signals from land-based sources are carried to the cell through a T1line, connected at a protector block. Their path through the cell is:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 From the protector block to the Channel Service Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Channel Service Unit to the Digital Facilities Interface

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Digital Facilities Interface to the CDMA Cluster Controllers

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 From a CDMA Cluster Controller to its assigned CDMA Channel Unit

T1 Line from the MSCn Protector Block

1

o Channel Service Unit

2

p Digital Facilities Interface

3

q CDMA Cluster Controller4r CDMA Channel Unit

5

s Analog Conversion Unit

6

t Baseband Combiner/Radio

7

u CTU and Transmit Filter

8

v Antenna Interface Panel9

w Antenna

10





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the CDMA Channel Unit to the Analog Conversion Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Analog Conversion Unit to the Baseband Combiner/Radio...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the Baseband Combiner/Radio to the CDMA Transmit Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the CDMA Transmit Unit to the Transmit Filter

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 From the Transmit Filter to the Antenna Interface Panel

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 From the Antenna Interface Panel to the Antenna




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Primary Cabinet Shelf Descriptions

Overview

Objectives The primary cabinet consists of the following shelves:• CDMA Radio Test Unit

• Channel Service Unit

• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator

• Radio Control Complex Shelf

• CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf

• CTU Shelf -- Alarm Control Board

• Filter Assembly

• Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters• CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Radio Test Unit


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Radio Test Unit

Overview The CDMA Radio Test Unit enables the testing of a Minicell by

emulating a mobile unit. Under the current software release, its use islimited to functional tests (overhead channels, traffic path and pilotpower setting).

The CRTU is composed of three major subassemblies: the CDMARadio Test Unit Module (CRTUm), the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel(RSP), and the CDMA Radio Test Unit Interface (CRTUi).

CRTU Diagram The diagram below shows the location of the CRTU components in thePCS CDMA Minicell.

CRTU Detailed Description The CDMA Radio Test Unit enables the testing of a Minicell byemulating a mobile unit. It is composed of three major subassembliesas follows:

• CRTUm - occupies the top shelf in the Primary Radio Cabinet. Itconsists of an IS-95A compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-modemobile, a duplexer containing a three-port RF circulator, an EIA-422 to TTL signal converter, and a 24-V DC to 12-V DC powerconverter. The duplexer provides separate RF transmit and receivepaths for the single-ported CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile.

• RSP - the Radio Switch Panel contains RF switches, combiners,and splitters that provides connectivity to the selected test face.

CSU

RFTG-m Rb RFTG-m X0

CCC2

CCC4

CCC6TFU TFU TFU

RFU RFU RFU

CSC0

CTU

0

CTU

1

CTU

2

ACB

PDA

CSC1

FRONTCRTUm

RTU SwitchPanel (RSP)

CRTUi

(Frame 1, Slot 15)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Radio Test Unit

• CRTUi - The CRTUi is a plug-in board installed in the CSC1, thatprovides a transparent communications interface between theRadio Control Complex (RCC) and the CRTUm, and between theRCC and the RSP.

CRTUi FunctionalDescription

The CRTUi contains the firmware needed to run the CDMA functionaltests. In response to functional test messages from the RCC, the CRTUicarries out the specified actions and returns the test information to theRCC. The message exchange is through TDM bus 0.

CRTUi FaceplateDescription

The CRTUi faceplate has three light-emitting diode(LED) indicators,one red, one yellow, and one green. Their meanings are as follows:

• The RED LED is:

– Controlled by the CRTUi

– Lighted during the self-test initiated upon power-up or after areset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test

– Lighted during normal operation if the CRTUi has a boarderror or is insane

• The YELLOW LED is:

– Controlled by cell site system software

– Lighted during non-volatile memory (NVM) update

• The GREEN LED is:

– Controlled by the CRTUi

– Lighted when a CDMA functional test is executing

The term CRTU will be used in this document to refer to bothcomponents except when it is necessary to distinguish between theCRTUi and CRTUm.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Radio Test Unit Module


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Radio Test Unit Module

Overview The CRTUm is connected to the directional couplers of the transmit

and receive filter panels through the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel.

CRTUm Position in theSignal Flow

The diagram below shows the CRTUm position in the Minicell signalflow.

CRTUm Functions The CRTUm has RF connections to the directional couplers of thetransmit and receive filter panels.

The CRTUm communicates with the CRTUi through an EIA-422asynchronous data link. It is over this data link that the CRTUi, underthe direction of the RCC, instructs the CRTUm to perform individualCDMA functional tests, and over which the CRTUi and RCC collectthe test results. The CRTUi or RCC can turn off the CRTUm bydisabling power to the CRTUm.

More about the CRTU The CRTUm is a full-featured wireless terminal, that has been

programmed to respond to specific signals from the PCSC. The CRTUcan be invoked through the RCC either on schedule, automatically, ormanually.

In all cases, the RCC instructs the CRTU to dial a specific MOST(Mobile Operating System Test) number stored at the PCSC. The ECPat the PCSC identifies the MOST call and initiates Functional Tests.

Tx

Rx

CPU

MEM

NCI

CPI

CRTUi

AFI

CRTUm

RSP

TDM BUS BIU

ANT


Tx

Rx

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

ACU

BCR

CTU

F I L T E RTx

Rx

AIP

CCC

Analog Signal

RU

CSC1

T1

Tx

RxRx

Tx

PCSC

PSU

P R O T E C T O R B L O C

K

CSU

DFI

8

3

8

3


Packet Pipe

Depending on configuration, can be ECUs or TCUs





PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRadio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP)

Overview The RSP connects the CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm) and

the PCS Receive and Transmit chains for functional and diagnostictests.

Physical Location In the Version 2 Minicell, the RSP is located directly under theCRTUm shelf. In the Version 4 Minicell, the RSP is in the same circuitpack as the CRTUm.

RSP Position in the SignalFlow

The diagram below shows the RSP position in the Minicell signal flow.

Function The CRTUm transmit output power is fed to the PCS receive chaindual directional couplers. The coupled transmit output ports of the PCSTX chain is fed to the CRTUm receive input port.

RSP Combiner Minicells with more than one CDMA carrier require combining RF

signals from the primary and growth transmit carriers. The RSPcombiner performs this function. The combiner is attached directly tothe rear of the RSP. Omni and three sector Minicell configurations usedifferent combiners.

Tx

Rx

CPU

MEM

NCI

CPI

CRTUi

AFI

CRTUm

RSP

TDM BUS BIU

ANT


Tx

Rx

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

ACU

BCR

CTU

F I L T E RTx

Rx

AIP

CCC

Analog Signal

RU

CSC1

T1

Tx

RxRx

Tx

PCSC

PSU


CSU

DFI

8

3

8

3


Packet Pipe





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRadio Switch Panel Connections

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Radio Switch Panel Connections

RSP Connections Diagram The diagram below shows the RSP.

Operation The RSP is controlled by the CRTUi via an RS422 control bus. TheRSP contains a microcontroller board, and SP6T and SP12T RFswitches.

RSP Connections The table shows the RSP connections for 3-sector, 1-carrierconfiguration.

L3805 - L2V7.0 Lucent Technolo ies - Pro rietar

J2 from CRTUm Tx

Removable microprocessor boardwith lightning arrestors

RF Ports to and from dual directional couplers

J1 to CRTUm Rx

J3 TX Test Monitor

J29 9-pin(Unused)J30 15-pin (14.25 to 30V)

Power Switch

J4 RX Test Monitor

J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15J16 J17

J18 J19 J20 J21 J22 J23 J24 J25 J26 J27 J28Tx Rx

RSPPort

WH1Cable #Into RSP

WH1 Cable #Out ofCoupler

Filter AssyLocationCoupler Port

CarrierTx SectorRx Sector /Diversity

Forward -50 dBReflected -40 dB

J5 P1 P28 A1 J6 C1 Tx 1 Fwd -50

J6 P2 P48 A13 J6 C2 Tx 1 * Fwd -50

J7 P3 P27 A1 J5 C1 Tx 1 Ref -40

J8 P4 P47 A13 J5 C2 Tx 1 * Ref -40

J9 P5 P30 A2 J6 C1 Tx 2 Fwd -50



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionChannel Service Unit (Optional)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Channel Service Unit (Optional)

OverviewOverview The Channel Service Unit (CSU) is an optional component and shelf,for which space is provided at the top of the cabinet.

J10 P6 P43 A15 J6 C2 Tx 2 * Fwd -50

J11 P7 P29 A2 J5 C1 Tx 2 Ref -40

J12 P8 P44 A15 J5 C2 Tx 2 * Fwd -40

J13 P9 P33 A3 J6 C1 Tx 3 Fwd -50

J14 P10 P40 A17 J6 C2 Tx 3 * Fwd -50

J15 P11 P34 A3 J5 C1 Tx 3 Ref -40

J16 P12 P39 A17 J5 C2 Tx 3 * Ref -40

J17 P13 P25 A1 J4 Rx 1 / D0 Fwd -50

J18 P14 P26 A1 J3 Rx 1 / D0 Ref -40

J19 P15 P46 A13 J4 Rx 1 / D1 Fwd -50

J20 P16 P45 A13 J3 Rx 1 / D1 Ref -40

J21 P17 P32 A2 J4 Rx 2 / D0 Fwd -50

J22 P18 P31 A2 J3 Rx 2 / D0 Ref -40

J23 P19 P41 A15 J4 Rx 2 / D1 Fwd -50

J24 P20 P42 A15 J3 Rx 2 / D1 Ref -40

J25 P21 P35 A3 J4 Rx 3 / D0 Fwd -50

J26 P22 P36 A3 J3 Rx 3 / D0 Ref -40

J27 P23 P37 A17 J4 Rx 3 / D1 Fwd -50

J28 P24 P38 A17 J3 Rx 3 / D1 Ref -40

RSPPort

WH1Cable #Into RSP

WH1 Cable #Out ofCoupler

Filter AssyLocationCoupler Port

CarrierTx SectorRx Sector /Diversity

Forward -50 dBReflected -40 dB





PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionChannel Service Unit (Optional)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CSU Connections The CSUs connect to the digital facilities interfaces (DFIs) in theCDMA Radio Complex Shelf 2 to provide the T1 or E1 signals. TheDFI is selectable for either a T1 or E1.

• The T1 (network) side of the interface will be connected to a T1

terminal lightning protection block, which is also used to lightningprotect external user alarms.

• The terminal side of the CSU is connected to the DFI.

CSU Option This description is for a “standard” CSU. Because the device is anoptioned item, some customers have selected other brands, or adoptedalternate configurations, such as having the CSU mounted on a walladjacent to the cell.

By-passing the CSU In case of failure of the CSU, it is possible to maintain service by

bypassing the device altogether.If the DFI board options are set the same as the network side of theCSU, the CSU can be bypassed.

Remove the plugs from the back of the unit and connect the linestogether. The lines are gendered correctly to allow this connection.

Reference Find more information in the Kentrox Documentation. This can beordered from the CIC. The bus connections are described on page 3-8.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionReference Frequency and Timing Generator

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Reference Frequency and Timing Generator

Overview The Reference Frequency and Timing Generator for the Minicell

(RFTG-m) provides the reference frequency and timing source for theMinicell.

RFTG Position in theMinicell

The diagram below shows the RFTG position in the Minicell cabinet.

Description The RFTGm consists of the following:

• Side 0, a rubidium (Rb) oscillator

• Side 1, a crystal controlled oscillator with a Global PositioningSystem (GPS) receiver (the GPS receiver is located inside thecrystal controlled unit)

• GPS antenna interface

• RF circuits for receiving GPS signals.

Normal Operation Only one unit is active at a time and during normal operation therubidium unit:

• Is active

• Provides a 1-pulse-per-second (1 PPS) timing signal which issynchronized to the receive signal from the GPS satellite throughan antenna

• Provides a 15-MHz reference frequency for all receiver units(RUs), CDMA Transmit Units (CTUs), baseband combiner/radio(BCR) assemblies, and the synchronized clock-and-tone (SCT)units on the CRC0 and CRC1

Version 2 Version 4



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionReference Frequency and Timing Generator


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Backup Operation The crystal controlled unit gets activated by an automatic failuretriggered sequence when the rubidium unit experiences failure.

RFTG-m Specifications The rubidium and crystal controlled reference signal output level is(+17.0 +/- 2.0) dBm.

The RFTG-m provides a 1-PPS signal output which is synchronized tothe GPS time clock. The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24-hour period.

The maximum loss of the GPS antenna cable can be 10 dB without theneed for an additional external antenna mounted amplifier.

The RFTG-m operates over an input voltage range of +19 to +32 VDC. A minimum of +22 V DC is required during a 5 minute warm-upperiod. The crystal oscillator also provides the 5 V DC power requiredby the GPS receiver.

An RS-485 data cable provides RFTG signals to the growth cabinets.

RFTG Testing Program The RFTG testing program can be ordered from the CIC. The orderincludes the program, manual, and cables.

SDP There is an icon on the Status Display Page 2138 to warn of a possiblesynchronization problem. This icon is labeled “Cell_Sync”. Acombination of errors from the RFTG units, SCT board, and the CCCare used to display MINOR, MAJOR, or CRITICAL Cell_Sync Status.

Other Information For more information on the GPS, see Lucent 401-660-128.

About the need for GPS The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24-hour period. In theabsence of GPS signal, the Minicell goes into a “flywheel” mode,where the Minicell continues to operate for up to 24 hours on therubidium oscillator, or up to 4 hours on the crystal unit. This isexplained in more detail in Lucent 401-660-128 .





PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRadio Control Complex Shelf Description


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Radio Control Complex Shelf Description

Overview Shelf components are referenced by their slot number and the position

of their connection pins in the backplane.

RCC Shelf Diagram The diagram below shows the board positions on the RCC shelf.

Operation The controller is equipped with two identical sides; one is active whilethe other is on stand-by. The active side receives/sends control and datainformation from/to the PCSC and other cell site components. The

stand-by side tracks what the on-line side is doing so that it may comeon-line as needed. Only one side is on-line at a time.

Acronyms Acronyms in the table below are used for the boards of the RCC shelf.

Core Processor Unit The core processor controls the cell site controller which is made up of the alarm/FITS board, NCI board, MEM board, and the CPI board.

CSC0 CSC1

MEM

CPI

NCI

415AC

AFI

+5V 2 D 1 D 0D

CPU0

CRTUi

4D 5D 6D +5V

CPU1

MEM

NCI

CPI

AFI

415AC

CSC Cell Site Controller

CPI Communications Processor Interface

CPU Core Processor Unit

NCI Network Control Interface

AFI Alarm FITS Interface

MEM Memory




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRadio Control Complex Shelf Description

Each side of the controller uses one core processor board. Thisarrangement comprises a duplex controller that provides reliabilitythrough redundancy. In this arrangement, the CPU in one side (activeside) is always in control of the call processing, while the CPU in theother side (the mate) is kept in a stand-by state, and its memory iscontinually being updated via the update bus. In the event of a failure inthe active side of the controller, this mode allows an immediate transferof control from the active CPU to the mate with a minimum loss of control information. On each side of the controller, the CPU uses thesystem bus to communicate with the other circuit boards on the sameside.

Alarm/FITS Interface The Alarm and Factory Installation Test Set (FITS) Interface circuitpack provide the interface required to store/process cell site alarms andto send alarm status to the MSC via the Core Processor Unit (CPU). Inaddition, the circuit pack contains the circuitry necessary to interfacethe FITS to the cell site. The FITS provides a number of diagnostictests used to initially check out the Minicell after installation by LucentTechnologies.

Network Control Interface(NCI)

The NCI provides synchronization of control channel messagesbetween the CPU and the distributed network of port circuit packs thatare connected to the TDM bus. The NCI interfaces with the CPUthrough a 512-byte System Dual-Port Memory. The NCI functions as afull-duplex message switch (Archangel function) between the CPU and

the microprocessors (Angels) in the port boards. Besides being themediator of the CPU, the NCI monitors the sanity of all themicroprocessors and reports any changes it detects to the CPU.

8-Megabyte Memory One memory board is used with each side of the controller. Thememory circuit pack has a storage capacity of 8 Mb. It contains amemory array which includes a 32-bit data array with one parity bit forevery eight bits of data. The memory and interrupt controllogic-write-protect and parity error latching functions are contained ineach circuit pack, which provides independent operation on a per-pack

level.Communication Processor

InterfaceThe CPI board is part of the core processor complex. The CPI is amultiprocessor circuit pack that provides the data connectivity betweenthe controller and any of the other terminating entities in the cellularsystem. The CPI manages two point-to-point programmable, fullduplex, independent data links that implement the X.25 protocol.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf

CTU Position Diagram The diagram below shows the CTU position in the Minicell and signal

flow.

Components The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) shelf contains the following circuitpacks:

• CDMA Transmit Unit Assembly (three total in the primarycabinet), which houses circuitry to convert the cellular band

frequencies (800-MHz range) to PCS frequency bands (1.91-to1.99 GHz) and to amplify the signal to an eight or 16 Watt level

• Alarm Control Board (1), used in the primary frame

• Power Conversion Unit (2), used only in the primary frame (the+24 V DC is input from the frame and +15 V DC is output to theReceive Units via the ACB)

• Alarm light on each CTU (these lights are difficult to see with thefan in place)

CDMA Transmit UnitDescription

The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) consists of:

• The transmit upconverter— a fiberglass circuit board with a sheetmetal shield that takes the +24 V DC power and returns from thebackplane and feeds them to the transmit amplifier

• The transmit amplifier — a cast aluminum housing/heat sink provided with cavities for shielding between circuit boards

Tx

Rx

CPU

MEM

NCI

CPI

CRTUi

AFI

CRTUm

RSP

TDM BUS BIU

ANT


Tx

Rx

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

ACU

BCR

CTU

F I L T E RTx

Rx

AIP

CCC

Analog Signal

RU

CSC1

T1

Tx

RxRx

Tx

PCSC

PSU


CSU

DFI

8

3

8

3


Packet Pipe





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf

The upconverter and the amplifier sections connect together to form acircuit pack which slides into the CTU card cage. Two lateralconnectors provide interconnections with the TX upconverter section.

Each Minicell primary frame contains only one CTU backplane.

A frame cooling fan is located in front of the CTU card cage forcooling purposes.

High Power CTU (HPCTU) The HPCTU is designed to provide 16 W output and may be useful tocompensate for the use of dual pole antennas, or to overcomeintermodulation problems caused by nearby TDMA cell sites.

If output power is set in translation to eight W instead of 16 W,HPCTUs will draw more power than CTUs. When replacing CTUs byHPCTUs, ensure that the output power set in translation has beenchanged to 16 W before bringing the Minicell back into service.

No CTUs with HPCTUs inthe Same Cell Site

Because all amplifiers in a single shelf and in a single sector must be of the same amplifier type, HPCTUs and CTUs cannot coexist in a cellsite.

Swap-Out Rules A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs. However, theHPCTUs are bigger than the CTUs. To install HPCTUs in a radiocabinet, it will be necessary to:

• Remove the cooling fan

• Remove the card cage

• Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install that unit directly inthe cabinet

• Replace the cooling fan.

Cooling Cooling for HPCTUs is provided by fans in the front of the radiocabinet, and, if necessary, by a heat exchanger mounted on the radiocabinet back panel.

Enhanced Primary Minicell On the Enhanced Minicell the cooling fan is in the back of the CTUshelf.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCTU Assembly Description


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CTU Assembly Description

Overview The Transmit Unit Boards (CTUs or HPCTUs) are mounted within an

overall cage. The CTUs are mounted into individual frames within thatcage. The thicker HPCTUs are directly mounted on that cage.

CTU Shelf Diagram The diagram below shows the components on the CTU shelf.

Growth Frame CTU FilterConnections

The Growth Frame CTU can be connected to either a simplex or duplexfilter unit. Connection to a duplex filter uses the original RX1/Gantenna as its TX/G antenna, thus not requiring additional antennas.

ACB and FrequencyAssignment The ACB also contains switches that determine the frequency Receiveand Transmit bands used by the Minicell. The settings of these switchesare used to set the CTU and RU filters.

Alarm Control Board The Alarm Control Board (ACB) monitors the alarms from theMinicell frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the AFIboard located within the Radio Control Complex (RCC).

The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipmentsector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports bothamplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to

the AFI. The LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit(CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports powerconverter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf. The AFI can send outup to 32 unique polling requests in approximately a two-second periodof time.

Fan*(Version 2 Only)

CTU 0/1/2

Power Conversion Units

Alarm Control Board(ACB)

*In Version 4, CTU Fan isin the back of the Cabinet

ALMSTBYACTALM 1ALM 2ALM 3ALM 4ALM 5ALM 6ALM

RST

RU

AMP




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionFront Filter Assembly

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Front Filter Assembly

Filter Assembly Diagram The diagram below shows the position of the filters in the Minicell

cabinet and the signal flow. There is a view of the side panel filters onpage 2-57.

Duplex and Simplex Filters The Primary Radio Cabinet can be fitted with either duplex or simplexfilters.

Up to three sets of filters (transmit and receive diversity 0 and diversity1) are installed:

• Inside the primary cabinet

• On the left side of the primary cabinet for receive diversity 1.

Each receive filter contains a receiver unit (RU) which amplifies areceived signal and converts it from the PCS band (1.85-to 1.91GHz) tothe cellular band (850-MHz frequency).

For duplex configuration, the Transmit Filter Unit (TFU) and theReceive Filter Diversity 0 Unit (RFU) will be replaced by the DuplexFilter Unit (DFU).

Tx

Rx

CPU

MEM

NCI

CPI

CRTUi

AFI

CRTUm

RSP

TDM BUS BIU

ANT


Tx

Rx

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

ACU

BCR

CTU

F I L T E RTx

Rx

AIP

CCC

Analog Signal

RU

CSC1

T1

Tx

RxRx

Tx

PCSC

PSU


CSU

DFI

8

3

8

3


Packet Pipe




PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionFront Filter Assembly


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Filters / RU Shelf Interfacesand Connections

The following table shows the interfaces and connections to thedifferent types of filter units.

Enhanced Primary inicell The PCS CDMA Enhanced Primary Minicell has all 6 filters in thefront.

Range Extension Option(REO)

The REO means there are two filter types for replacement purposes.The Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier (TTLNA) portion of the REOrequires new filter types to account for the Masthead Amplifier Unit(MAU).

Filter Unit... Interfaces the primary frameto...

Is connected to the Filter/RU andhas...

TFU The transmit antenna in thesimplex operation

Four coaxial connections to the TFU inputsignal:

• Input from CTU• Antenna connection• Two test path signals

RFU Div0 The receive antenna in thesimplex mode

Four coaxial connections:

• Receive signal• Antenna connection• Two test path signals

DFU(CombinedTFU andRFU Div0)

Antenna Eight coaxial connections:

• 15-MHz Reference Signal• Transmit signal• Antenna interface• Receive signal• Four test path signals




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionFilter Assembly--Simplex Filters

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters

Simplex Filters Diagram The diagram below shows the components of the simplex filters.

Simplex Configuration The simplex configuration includes:

• A TFU, interfacing the primary cabinet to the transmit antenna

• An RFU, interfacing the primary cabinet to the receive antenna

• An RU, that provides amplification and down conversion of thereceived signal

Simplex Filter Connections There are three coaxial connections to the RU assembly:

• Input PCS signal

• Output cellular band signal

• 15-MHZ reference signal

A 9-pin, D-subminiature connector is used for connecting regulated+15 V DC power and alarm signals.

TransmitFilter Unit(TFU)

ReceiveFilter Unit(RFU)

Receive Unit (RU)



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves

Overview A PCS CDMA Minicell Primary cabinet contains three CDMA Radio

Complex (CRC) shelves arranged in a cross-connected configuration.

CRC Shelf PositionDiagram

The diagram below shows the position of the CRC shelf in the Minicellcabinet and the signal flow.

Description Each shelf supports up to four CDMA Channel Units (CCUs) forming

one cluster, which is supported by a CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC).In addition to the CCC and CCU, each shelf contains:

• One analog conversion unit (ACU)

• One baseband combiner/radio unit (BCR)

• One bus interface unit (BIU)

• One 415 AC converter

In addition, shelves CRC0 and CRC1 have Synchronized Clock andTone (SCT) circuit packs to generate the 19.6608 MHz, GPS time of day, EVENSEC TIC and bus clocks.

On shelf CRC2, the Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) circuit pack is putin place of the SCT board.

The BIU contains the TDM bus interface to support the BBA trio. HasDC-DC converter to supply voltages other than digital +5 volts neededby the ACU, BIU, and BCR.

Tx

Rx

CPU

MEM

NCI

CPI

CRTUi

AFI

CRTUm

RSP

TDM BUS BIU

ANT


Tx

Rx

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

ACU

BCR

CTU

F I L T E RTx

Rx

AIP

CCC

Analog Signal

RU

CSC1

T1

Tx

RxRx

Tx

PCSC

PSU

P R O T E C T O R

B L O C K

CSU

D

FI

8

3

8

3


Packet Pipe





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves

The 415 AC converter makes the conversion of the +24 V DC feedervoltage to +5 V DC. The +5 V DC output gets distributed to the CDMAcircuit packs.

BCR and OperatingFrequency

The Channel Number, set in translation, determines the frequency atwhich the BCR operates.

Frequency Distribution The 19.6608-MHz primary and delayed clock signals, which aregenerated on the SCT circuit pack, are distributed to the three CRCshelves’ ACU.

15 MHz ReferenceFrequency

The 15-MHz reference frequency is separately received by each SCTon the CRC shelves 0 and 1, as well as by the BCR in each CRC.

There is no 15-MHz reference input to shelf 2, except for the BCR.

Backplane SignalTerminations

The CRC backplane also supports the terminations for the 19.6608-MHz clocks, the GPS time-of-day clock, the Cluster bus clocks, theTDM bus, and other control signals.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCRC Shelf Details


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRC Shelf Details

CRC Shelf Diagram The diagram shows the board for the three CRC shelves.

Clusters and ClusterControllers

Clusters are logically associated groups of CEs associated to a singlePacket Pipe. A CCC is a circuit pack that controls one cluster. Whilethere can be only one Packet Pipe per CCC, it is possible to haveconfigurations where Clusters are not assigned to a Packet Pipe so thattheir CEs can be shared resources (overhead channels) in a subcell.

A Cluster must be homogeneous with respect to the type of CCU thatcan be equipped on a given shelf, but there can be a mixture of TCUand ECU shelves.

Mixing TCUs and ECUs in aMinicell

This ability to mix shelves provides flexibility in growing the capacityof a Minicell.

The ECU may be used within a CDMA cluster in exactly the samemanner as the TCU.

The maximum number of ECUs is currently set at 4 to provide 40 CEs,but only 30 of those may be used for traffic channels. The remaining 10CEs may be used for overhead channels. (A 3-sector configurationrequires 6 overhead channels, leaving 4 unallocated CEs forredundancy.)

The Subcell concept enables softer handoff, and provides greaterefficiency, allowing fewer CEs to be equipped to support a givencommunication load.

Shelf 0

Shelf 1

Shelf 2

Slot #

P3EQL016

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P4EQL022

P5EQL025

P6EQL034

P7EQL040

P8EQL046

P10EQL052

P11EQL062

P13EQL072

P19EQL080

CCU1

CCU2

CCU3

CCU4

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT

415

AC

CCC

P3EQL016

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P4EQL022

P5EQL025

P6EQL034

P7EQL040

P8EQL046

P10EQL052

P11EQL062

P13EQL072

P19EQL080

C

CU1

C

CU2

C

CU3

C

CU4

B

IU

A

CU

B

CR

D

FI

4

15AC

C

CC

P3EQL016

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P4EQL022

P5EQL025

P6EQL034

P7EQL040

P8EQL046

P10EQL052

P11EQL062

P13EQL072

P19EQL080

CCU1

CCU2

CCU3

CCU4

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT

415

AC

CCC

Slot #

Slot #




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCRC Shelf Details

ECU Board Numbers There are going to be three (3) types of ECUs (Enhanced ChannelUnits), that are functionally the same. The various ECU circuit packscan be mixed and matched on the shelves or in the cabinet. Thedesignations for the ECUs are TN 1711, TN 1716 (available December1998), and TN 1718 (available in 1999).



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCRC Shelf Descriptions


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRC Shelf Descriptions

CRC Shelf Boards The boards on the CRC Shelf are as follows:

CDMA Cluster Controller(CCC) Board TN1852

The CCC provides a control and data interface between the TDM busand up to four 13-kbps CDMA channel units (CCUs). The CCCmanages the CCUs.

A CCC and its CCUs form a CDMA cluster; there is one cluster pershelf.

Each CCC terminates the dedicated packet pipe associated with itsCDMA cluster. The CCC extracts the voice data from the incomingpackets and distributes the data to the appropriate CCUs for processing.

In the reverse direction, the CCC receives voice data from its CCUs,assembles the data into packets, and then multiplexes the packets ontothe packet pipe.

CDMA Channel Unit (TCU/ECU)

The TCU/ECU performs the digital baseband signal processing,including spreading and despreading.

TCU Capacity

Each TCU contains two CEs; thus, a fully loaded CDMA clustercontains 8 CEs.

ECU Capacity

Each ECU contains 10 CEs; thus a fully loaded CDMA cluster contains40 CEs. Each CE is configured to interface with a 13-kbps vocoder andcan support 8-kbps as well.

CCC CDMA Cluster Controller

BCR Baseband Combiner and Radio

ACU Analog Conversion Unit

BIU Bus Interface Unit

CCU CDMA Channel Unit (TCU or ECU)


SCT CDMA Synchronized Clock and Tone

415AC Power Converter Unit




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCRC Shelf Descriptions

Vocoder Rates For earlier releases an entire Cellular Geographic Service Area(CGSA) must operate at the same vocoder rate; the mixing of 13-kbpsand 8-kbps vocoders in a CGSA is not supported in the early release of CDMA.

CDMA Bus Interface Unit(BIU) TN1702

The BIU provides a control bus interface between the TDM bus and itsassociated ACU and BCR. It also provides power conversion for itsassociated ACU and BCR as explained below.

The BIU has an on-board converter circuit that converts +24 V DC to aprecise +5 V DC, -5.2 V DC, and +12 V DC. The ACU uses the +5 VDC and -5.2 V DC, while the BCR uses all three voltages.

Analog Conversion Unit(ACU) TN1853

The ACU combines the digital transmit signals from the cluster andthen converts the signals to analog for input to the BCR.

In the reverse direction, the ACU converts the analog receive signalsfrom the BCR to digital and then distributes the digital signals to thecluster.

CDMA BasebandCombiner/Radio (BCR)

44WR1

The BCR accepts analog signals from and sends analog signals to itsassociated ACU. The BCR is responsible for RF transmission andreception.

CDMA Synchronized Clockand Tone (SCT) Unit

TN1703

The SCT generates the CDMA clock signals for the Minicell. The SCTperforms the following TDM bus functions: bus clock generation andmonitoring for the TDM bus, maintenance tone generation, andmaintenance tone detection.

Digital Facilities Interface(DFI) Board TN3500B

The DFI provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial dataconversion between the T1 or E1 lines and the TDM buses internal tothe Minicell. Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interfaceport.

Power Converter 415ACBoard (+5 V)

This is the same unit used with each side of the RCC and has thefollowing features:

• output current rating of 43 amperes

• built-in programmable over-current protection circuit

Each circuit board that is plugged into the power plane has aprogrammable resistor that corresponds to the current drawn by theboard.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionDigital Facilities Interface Board


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Digital Facilities Interface Board

DFI Board Diagram The diagram below shows the switches on the DFI board for a T1 line.

Function The DFI provides the interface between the TDM bus and the CSU.One DFI can be accommodated in the primary frame.

DFI Functionality The Minicell platform uses TDM timeslots to “nail up” the logicalconnection between a packet pipe on the T1 or E1 line and theassociated CDMA cluster. The TN3500B supports two T1/E1 linesalthough the system supports only one. The newer DFI board,TN1713B, supports only one T1/E1 line.

The DFI is located in shelf 2 (lowest shelf) of the CRC.

ON

OFFSW 1

ON

OFFSW 2

ON

OFFSW 3

ON

OFFSW 4

ON

OFFSW 5

ON

OFF

1 2 3

ON

OFF

1 2 3

SW 6

SW 7




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionFrame Pedestal

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Frame Pedestal

Frame Pedestal Diagram This diagram below shows the positions of the components near the

bottom of the Minicell.

Description In Minicell Version 2, the Frame Pedestal contains interface panels thatconnect the Primary Radio Cabinet to signals and power sources.

In Version 4, the Frame Pedestal also contains the combined CRTU

and RSP.

Composed of – Circuit Breaker Panel– Alarm Interface Panel– Side Interface Panel– Rear Interface Assembly



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionCircuit Breaker Panel


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Circuit Breaker Panel

Service Interruption

There is a chance of unnecessarily powering downequipment causing service interruptions.

Some of the breakers are easy to trip. Be careful not to touch them inadvertently when working around them.

Circuit Breaker Diagram The circuit breaker panel diagram:

Function The circuit breaker panel distributes the DC and AC power in theframe.

If it becomes necessary to power down one of the radio cabinets, theprescribed sequence is to turn off all the BCR faceplate switches, thenturn off the circuit breakers in the following order:

1. CB19

2. CB17

3. CB15

4. CB20

5. CB18

6. CB167. the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14 (except CB6 &

7)

To power the radio cabinet back up, the prescribed sequence is CB1 toCB20, and then the BCR faceplate switches.





PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionAlarm Interface Module


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Interface Module

AIM Position Diagram The diagram below shows the position of the alarm panel in the

Minicell cabinet.

Description The Alarm Interface Module:

• Collects all alarm connections

• Handles both equipment and user alarms

• Alarm Interface Panel provides connections to user defined alarms

The User Alarm Cross Connect Board provides the customer with apre-wired (fixed) user alarm interface board. It is wired duringinstallation as per the customer requirement for external user alarms.Two alarm interface modules connect to the primary frame. They are asfollows:

• AIM0, which connects to a board on the backplane and ultimatelyroutes alarm signals back to the switch

• AIM1, which connects to the lightning protection block andprovides 18 opto-isolator user alarms, of which eight are availablefor customer assignment to equipment external to the cell.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionAlarm Interface Module

User and User ReservedAlarms

Equipment that is part of the Minicell assembly (namely, the primarycabinet, power cabinet, battery or generator backup cabinet) uses someof the user alarms for reporting their status to the PCSC and thereforehave been categorized as external user alarms.

User Alarms are discussed in detail in Unit 6.

User Alarms The external user alarms can be wired to monitor equipment alarms intwo states:

• Open on alarm (normally closed)

• Close on alarm (normally open)

There are eight alarms available to the user, and seven can be set to“open on alarm” or “close on alarm,” but the 8th alarm is “close onalarm” only.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionAlarm Interface Panel -- User Alarm Board


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Interface Panel -- User Alarm Board

User Alarm Board Diagram The diagram below shows the user alarm board.

Description User alarm connection definitions are made using slide switches on thecircuit board and are located in the primary cabinet just above the T1facilities and alarm interface board.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionAlarm Interface Panel -- User Alarm Board

Side and Rear Panel Descriptions

Overview

Objectives - Side and BackPanels

The side and rear panels contain fewer components than the front panelbut are still important to maintenance of the Minicell. This sectionconsists of information on the side and back of the Minicell:

• Side Panel

• Rear Interface Panel

• Heat Exchangers



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionSide Panel (Version 2 Only)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Side Panel (Version 2 Only)

Side Panel Diagram The diagram below shows the components on the left side of the

Minicell.

Description This panel, equipped only in Minicell Version 2, is located on the leftof the primary cabinet to provide access to the RX1 ReceiveAssemblies.

In Minicell Version 4, the filter assembly is accessible from the front of the cabinet.

In both versions, the bottom of that panel has a side interface panel(SIP) that is used for connections to the Growth Cabinets.

x

Receive Filter/RX1Receive Unit Assemblies(Simplex only)

Side InterfacePanel for Growth

FRONTReceive Units

RX1




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRear Interface Panel

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Rear Interface Panel

Overview The Rear Interface Panel (RIP) contains the Antenna Interface Panel

(AIP) and the Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).Electrical Burn Danger

Risk of serious burns.

To avoid injury be sure that the cell cannot transmit when disconnecting the antennas.

Rear Interface Diagram The diagram below shows the rear interface panel.

Function The rear interface panel provides the interface for the antenna cables,power cables (AC/DC), T1/E1 lines, and external user alarms.

Antenna Interface Panel The Antenna Interface Panel (AIP) provides access to antenna leadsand is used to input or measure test signals during performance testing.

Connections are clearly marked according to a simple code, thatidentifies sector (S) and frame (P=Primary, G=Growth). For example,S1D0/P is Sector 1 Transmit and Receive (Diversity) zero for aPrimary frame with duplex filter panels.

Three-Sector Configuration For a three-sector configuration, the rear interface panel shows:

• The “TX” section (top) is where the transmit antennas areterminated when SIMPLEX FILTERS are equipped.

2 or 3 Sector

S3P S3G S2P S2G S1P S1G

TX

RX/DX

GPSS3D0/P S3D1/G S2D0/P S2D1/G S1D0/P S1D1/G

RFTest

C3P C6G C5G C4G

TX

DX

GPSD1(C2P) D0(C1P)

RFTest

OMNI



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRear Interface Panel


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• The “RX/DX” section (bottom) is where the transmit antennas areterminated when DUPLEX FILTERS are equipped.

• The “RX/DX” section (bottom) is also where RX0 and RX1receive antennas are terminated for any filter type.

• Antennas are hooked to the appropriate sectors.Connections, identified in the table below, are the same for each sector,and depend on the type of equipped filter.

Omni Configuration For an omni configuration, the rear interface panel shows:

1. D0 (C1P) is always Duplex. It is the first Carrier Transmit andDiversity 0 Receive.

2. D1 (C2P) is always Duplex. It is the Diversity 1 Receive and, if equipped, the second Carrier Transmit.

3. C3P is the Transmit for Carrier 3 (Primary) and C4G - C6G areCarrier 4 - 6 and may be equipped in a Growth Frame.

Power DistributionAssembly

Has power cables (AC/DC), T1/E1 lines, and external user alarms.

Primary FiltersGrowth Filters

Primary SimplexGrowth Simplex

Primary SimplexGrowth Duplex

Primary DuplexGrowth Simplex

Primary DuplexGrowth Duplex

TX Primary S1/P (Top row) S1/P (Top Row) S1D0/P(Bottom Row)

S1D0/P(Bottom Row)

TX Growth S1/G (Top Row) S1D1/G (BottomRow) (Splitter)

S1/G (Top Row) S1D1/G(Bottom Row)

RX0 Primary / RX0 Growth S1D0/P (BottomRow) (Splitter) S1D0/P (BottomRow) (Splitter) S1D0/P (BottomRow) (Splitter) S1D0/P (BottomRow) (Splitter)RX1 Primary / RX1 Growth

S1D1/G (BottomRow) (Splitter)







401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionHeat Exchanger

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Heat Exchanger

Overview Outdoor applications require a heat exchanger that is mounted on the

front panel. The heat exchanger regulates the internal temperature of the Primary Radio Cabinet, and is activated when the outside ambienttemperature reaches 70º F.

Heat Exchanger Diagram The diagram below shows the heat exchanger for the Minicell.

Before Working on a

Minicell Cabinet

When opening a door fitted with a heat exchanger, make sure that you

have secured it in the open position.

Structure of a Version 2Primary Cabinet Heat

Exchanger

The heat exchanger does not have a redundant set of internal andexternal blowers, mounts on the front door of the primary cabinet and isdesigned for the outdoor application. Insect screens are mounted insidethe door in the lower area.

The heat exchanger supports cooling fans and heaters, and is alarmed.

• There is one internal and one external blower powered by thesame +24 V feeder.

• There are also 240 V AC heaters within the heat exchanger,necessitating 240 V AC input from the Minicell power system.

Minicell Air Movers not Partof the Heat Exchanger

The only other air movers within the Minicell primary cabinet are asingle CTU shelf fan for cooling the CTUs, and a frame fan (locatedbelow the bottom CRC shelf).





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Minicell Fan Alarms The conditions for, and the reporting of, fan alarms follows:

• A fan failure, loss of +24 V, or rotation, causes an alarm of failure(logic 0) for each fan which gets reported back to the AFI viaseparate interface cabling.

• A heater alarm is activated when the +24 V powered controllercircuit is calling for heat and it is not provided. If the controller isnot calling for heat, the alarm will not be activated even if the ACpower is disconnected.

Fan Electrical and AlarmConnections

Five electrical wires (two for +24V and +24V return, and three foralarms) are connected to each of these fans.

• The three alarm output connections are isolated from the two+24V input connections.

• Fan alarm electronics are powered from the +15 V CTU shelf power converter. The output is an open collector type, whichswitches on low if fan speed drops below a predetermined level.

These fan alarms are run to the AFI circuit pack and have the sameground reference.

Self Test Panel Some heat exchangers have self-testing key pads. See page 8-63 formore information.

High Power CTUApplications (Version 2

Only)

High Power CTU applications require an additional heat exchanger thatis mounted on the back of the Primary Radio Cabinet.

Enhanced Minicell Primary The heat exchanger for the Enhanced Primary Minicell is able to coolthe cell and no back unit is needed for HPCTU equipped Minicells. Theassociated heater can put out 1100 watts.

CAUTIONHandling the HPCTU Heat Exchanger Panel

The HPCTU exchanger is a heavy unit.Seek assistance before removing the heat exchanger to preventinjury.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Other Base Station Cabinets

Overview

Objectives - Other Cabinets The Minicell can contain other cabinets and are described in thissection. These cabinets are as follows:

• Special Omni: page 2-63

• Growth I Cabinet Layout: page 2-65

• Growth II Cabinet Layout: page 2-66

• Growth III Cabinet Layout: page 2-67

• Rack-Mounted Growth: page 2-69

• Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional): page 2-76

• Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional): page 2-80



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionSpecial Omni


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Special Omni

Special Omni The Special Omni PCS CDMA Minicell is a single-sector,

single-carrier configuration of the PCS CDMA Minicell. It can beupgraded to a two-or three sector Minicell as needed. The kit containsthe steps needed to upgrade the cell from omni to two-or-three sector,depending on the kit used.





PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionGrowth I Cabinet Layout


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Growth I Cabinet Layout

Growth I Layout The Growth I Cabinet contains CRC and CTU Shelves.

CTU fans are located in the back of the cabinet.

Growth I Layout Diagram The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth I cabinet.

CTU Air Exhaust

Digital Cables

CRC Blower

CRC Air IntakeCTU1

CTU2

CTU3

ACB

PCU1PCU2

P D A

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW

AC DC

P D A

CTU Blower

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT2

PCU

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT

3

PCU

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

IB

U

ACU

BCR

DFI2

PCU




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionGrowth II Cabinet Layout

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Growth II Cabinet Layout

Growth II Cabinet Layout In addition to CRC and CTU shelves, Growth II contains filters for

additional carrier operation.

Growth II Cabinet LayoutDiagram

The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth II cabinet.

CTU Air Exhaust

CRC Blower

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT4

PCU

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT5

PCU

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

IB

U

ACU

BCR

DFI3

PCU

CRC Air Intake

CTU1

CTU2

CTU3

ACB

PCU1

PCU2

P D A

Digital Cables


AC DC

P D A

CTU Blower

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

AIP

TFU

TFU

TFU



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionGrowth III Cabinet Layout


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Growth III Cabinet Layout

Growth III Cabinet Layout In addition to CRC and CTU shelves, Growth III contains filters and

CSU for additional carrier operation. It is to be available Autumn 1998.

Growth III Simplex FilterConfiguration Changes

from Growth II

The Growth III Simplex filter configuration is the same as the GrowthII, including simplex filter cage and simplex transmit filters, except for:

• Addition of a 5 AMP circuit breaker to the PDA for the CSU

• Addition of the Minicell Primary water tight connector to the AIPfor a T1 line

• Addition of the Minicell Primary CSU, mounted where the duplexfilter plate would be

• Addition of the 110ANA (6 pair) lightning protection block to thefloor of the cabinet

• Addition of a 24:6 combiner mounted where the CATV transmitcouplers would be mounted

• Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU

• Change in the length of the interconnection cables.

Growth III Duplex FilterConfiguration Changes

from Growth II

The Growth III Duplex filter configuration is the same as the GrowthII, except for:

• Addition of a 5 AMP circuit breaker to the PDA for the CSU

• Addition of the Minicell Primary water tight connector to the AIPfor a T1 line

• Addition of the Minicell Primary CSU, mounted where the duplexfilter plate would be

• Addition of the 110ANA (6 pair) lightning protection block to thefloor of the cabinet

• Addition of a 24:6 combiner mounted where the CATV transmitcouplers would be mounted

• Deletion of the Simplex Filter Cage and Simplex Filter TrayAssemblies

• Addition of the Simplex Filter Plate

• Addition of a new AIP with longer cables to reach duplex filters

• Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU

• Change in the length of the interconnection cables.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionGrowth III Cabinet Layout

Growth III Cabinet LayoutDiagram

The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth III cabinet.


AC DC

P D A

CTU Blower

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

AIP

CTU Air Exhaust

CRC Blower

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT4

PCU

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

SCT5

PCU

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

IB

U

ACU

BCR

DFI3

PCU

CRC Air Intake

CTU1

CTU2

CTU3

ACB

PCU1PCU2

P D A

Digital Cables

TFU

TFU

TFU

CSU



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRack-Mounted Growth


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Rack-Mounted Growth

Overview The rack-mounted growth cabinet supports up to two PCS CDMA

carriers in two- or three-sector configurations. It provides the followingitems:

• Indoor cabinet

• Smaller footprint

• CTU and Fan

• Integrated interface panel including antenna, power, T1/E1

Component Differences The components of the rack-mounted growth cabinet vary from thoseof the primary and growth cabinets. The following table provides

information on these differences.:

Carrier Locations Within a cabinet, the location of the carriers varies by component.

• For CRC shelves, the first carrier number goes on the right. Thesecond carrier goes on the left CRC.

Cabinet Rack-mounted growth cabinet is being designed only forindoor installations.

CTU The CTU is same as the current module of PCS CDMAMinicell.

TDM Bus Since the capacity of a TDM bus is limited supporting up tonine radio shelves, a second TDM bus will be added beyonda nine radio shelf configuration.

CSU Because the rack-mounted growth cabinet does not containsufficient internal space to install a CSU shelf, it onlyprovides an external indoor CSU shelf. Since the primarycabinet affords an internal CSU shelf for the first three T1connections, the external CSU shelf supports T1/E1connections beyond nine radio shelf configuration.

Interface Panel The interface panel integrates the power, antenna, and T1/E1interface. This interface is protected from lightning andelectronic surge.

Power Same power sources are supported as the current PCSCDMA Mincell.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


• The bottom CTU gets the first carrier and the upper CTU gets thesecond carrier.

• The circuit breakers at the top of the cabinet are the reverse of theCRC shelves. The circuit breaker for the first carrier is on the left

and the second carrier is on the right.

Antenna ReductionProgram

This feature will ensure that the number of antennas required to supporta PCS CDMA Minicell with up to six CDMA carriers (up to fivegrowth cabinets) is within limits imposed on service providers byzoning restrictions. The current limit is believed to be 12 antennas percell tower. The number of antennas will be minimized with the use of duplexers, dual-carrier linear amplifiers, or high-power combiners.

Rack Mounted GrowthFilter Configuration

According to the RF and antenna conditions, either a simplex ordiplexer filter supports the transmission. The receive filter in theprimary cabinet is shared by all CDMA carriers.

Carrier Assignments Each rack-mounted growth cabinet contains two carriers. The cabinetservices the next two carriers in the minicell configuration. Forexample, a minicell site with a primary, growth 1 and rack-mountedgrowth 2 would place carrier 2 in growth 1 and carriers 3 and 4 in RG2.A similar minicell arrangement would contain the primary cabinet,RG1, and growth III with carriers 2 and 3 in the RG1 cabinet andcarrier 4 in growth III.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rack Mounted GrowthCabinet

The diagram below shows the layout of the rack-mounted growthcabinet.

CTU Logical Number vs.

Physical Number

The table below shows the CTU logical number versus physical

number in Status Display Page 2136.

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

CRC FAN

15MHZ 1:8 SPL 15MHZ 1:8 SPL

CTUFAN 2

CTUFAN 1

S0

S1

S2

PDA

REAR VIEW

C2 C3

FRONT VIEW

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

CRC FANS

S0

S1

S2

PDA

CTU0

CTU1

CTU2

CTU0

CTU1

CTU215MHZ 1:6 SPL

Sector

CircuitID

CTU No.Carriers

1 29 0 1

2 30 1 1

3 31 2 1

1 4 3 2

2 5 4 23 6 5 2

1 1 6 3

2 2 7 3

3 3 8 3




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


CTU/RU Hardware ShelfEquipment Name

The table below shows the CTU/RU hardware shelf equipment name(physical ID and the logical ID) for various cell configurations.

1 7 9 4

2 8 10 43 9 11 4

1 10 12 5

2 11 13 5

3 12 14 5

1 13 15 6

2 14 16 6

3 15 17 6

Sector

CircuitID

CTU No.Carriers

p.e

RU/CTUNameSDP/TI

3 sector/3 carrier 6 sector/1 carrier 9 carrier OMNI 3 sector shared-carrier

PCAAddressName

Usagesector-carrier

PCAAddressName

Usagesector-carrier

PCAAddressName

UsageSector-carrier

PCAAddressName

Usagesectorcarrier

1 CTU29 LAC29 Sl-C1 LAC29 Sl-Cl LAC29 Cl LAC29 Sl-Cl-BA

RU29-0 LAC29 S1-D0 LAC29 Sl-D0 LAC29 D0 LAC29 S1-D0-BA

RU29-1 LAC29 Sl-D1 LAC29 Sl-Dl LAC29 D1 LAC29 Sl-Dl-BA

2 CTU30 LAC30 S2-C1 LAC30 S2-Cl LAC30 C2 LAC30 S2-Cl-BA

RU30-0 LAC30 S2-D0 LAC30 S2-D0 na na LAC30 S2-D0-BA

RU30-l LAC30 S2-D1 LAC30 S2-D1 na na LAC30 S2-D1-BA

3 CTU31 LAC31 S3-C1 LAC31 S3-Cl LAC31 C3 LAC31 S3-C1-BA



4 CTU4 LAC4 S1-C2 LAC4 S4-C1 LAC4 C4 LAC4 Sl-Cl-BE

RU4-0 na na LAC4 S4-D0 na na LAC4 S1-D0-BE

RU4-1 na na LAC4 S4-D1 na na LAC4 Sl-Dl-BE






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRange Extension Option

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Range Extension Option

Overview The Range Extension Option (REO) requires a Tower Top Low Noise

Amplifier (TTLNA) and a cell equipped with HPCTUs. Its purpose isto extend the range of the Minicell.

Principle of the REO Increasing the Minicell range requires a balanced link budget. Gainmust be increased in the transmit path and the noise figure must bereduced in the receive path.

• The HPCTU improves the transmit (downlink) performance of theMinicell.

• The TTLNA improves the receiver signal-to-noise ratio on thereceive path (uplink), potentially extending the range andlowering the average reverse link power required of mobiles.

TTLNA Diagram The diagram below shows the components of the TTLNA as attachedto the Minicell.

DC BIAS/ ALARM

TX RX

DC BIAS/ ALARM

TX RX

PowerDistribution

Unit

PCS CDMA

Minicell

DC Bias Tees(six used)

MastheadAmplifier Unit

(six used)

DC BIAS/ ALARM

TX RX

+24 V FromPower Cabinet

Two

Alarm Outputs

AlphaSector

Diversity 1

GammaSector

Diversity 1AlphaSector

Diversity 0

TX/RX Duplex Coaxial Cables

HPCTU

HPCTU

HPCTU

High PowerAmplifiers

MASRU

MASRU

MASRU

Masthead Amplifier SystemReceiver Units



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionRange Extension Option


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Structure of the TTLNA The TTLNA is composed of:

• Masthead Amplifiers (one per diversity antenna)

• A Power Distribution Unit (mounted on a panel, placed in theback of the Primary Cabinet frame pedestal).

The TTLNA PowerDistribution Unit

The Power Distribution Unit is composed of one main power switchassembly, and one power unit for each of the amplifiers.

Each Amplifier Power Unit is provided with separate ON/OFFswitches for Power and Alarm.

Each TTLNA is provided with two alarms: one for power, and the otherfor the DC bias applied to the amplifier.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionMinicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional)

Primary Power Cabinet The primary power cabinet provides the rectifiers for converting 220 V

AC to +24 V DC as needed by the Minicell. The power cabinet shownis the 60C.

Primary Power CabinetDiagram

The diagram below shows the Minicell power cabinet.

Key Components The key components of the PCS primary power cabinet include:

• Ten Rectifiers (five per shelf)

– 750 W each

– Engineered based on Minicell load requirements

– N + 1 redundancy

• Two Battery Strings (IR-125)

– 30 minutes @ 3 kW each• Engineered based on holdover required

• Maximum holdover

– 30 minutes @ 6 kW (Max. Minicell config.)

– 60 minutes @ 3 kW

RectifierAssemblies

BackupBatteries

Fan Unit

Secondary Shelf

Primary Shelf

DC Distribution

Alarm Panel

AC Input Panel

Battery String 1Battery String 2

1 2 1 2





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– 90 minutes @ 2 kW (Typical for three-sector Minicell withten effective voice channels per sector)

• AC Service Entrance

Backup BatteriesThe power cabinet contains batteries capable of providing up to 6 kWof DC power holdover for a minimum of 30 minutes in the event of either a 208/240 volt AC (local utility) power interruption or any powersystem failure resulting in loss of DC output power.

The power cabinet has temperature-compensated float chargingcapability for the batteries in both the power cabinet and the batterycabinet; the maximum battery recharge is no greater than 6 times thebattery discharge time. The temperature of the batteries in these twocabinets is maintained within a range specified by the battery vendor toprevent overcharging or damage to one of the battery strings.

The power cabinet contains a low voltage disconnect circuit whichactivates when the batteries discharge to 20.25 volts DC. This preventsvoltage reversal of battery cells and severe performance degradation of the connected equipment. The low voltage disconnect is setable in thepower cabinet.

The combination of the power cabinet and battery cabinet provides aminimum of 4 hours of holdover at end of life.

Battery Reserve Time The table gives approximate battery reserve times for an installation atfull load conditions for new battery strings. For batteries near then end

of their life these times are reduced approximately 25%.

PCS CDMA Minicell Configuration MaximumDC Load

Battery Reserve TimeInitial Capacity (hours)

Number of Battery Strings 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Primary with Standard CTUs 1600 W 2.9 6.9 11.4 16.4 21.6 27.2 33.0 38.9

Primary and 1 Growth with StandardCTUs

3100 W 1.3 3.0 5.0 7.2 9.5 11.9 14.4 17.0

Primary and 2 Growth with Standard

CTUs

4600 W 0.8 1.8 3.1 4.4 5.8 7.3 8.8 10.4

Primary with High Power CTU 2100 W 2.1 4.9 8.1 11.7 15.4 19.3 23.5 27.7

Primary and 1 Growth with High PowerCTU

4050 W 0.9 2.2 3.6 5.1 6.8 8.5 10.3 12.2

Primary and 2 Growth with High PowerCTUs

6000 W 0.6 1.3 2.2 3.1 4.1 5.2 6.3 7.5




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


For More Information More information on Minicell power requirements can be found in PCSCDMA Minicell Site Preparation Guidelines, 401-703-025 .

Indoor Version There is a version of the power cabinet made for indoor Minicells. Theindoor primary doesn’t need heat exchangers. Their physicalappearance may change from installation to installation, with powerbays usually built without the protective enclosure required for outdooroperation.

Optioned Items The Power Cabinets and Power Bays are optional items.



PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionMinicell Power Cabinet Layout


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell Power Cabinet Layout

Power Cabinet Layout

Diagram

The diagram below shows the layout of the Minicell power cabinet.

Components of a PowerCabinet

The main components of a Power Cabinet are batteries and rectifiers.

In a Power Cabinet, batteries are placed into 2 battery strings. A batterystring is formed by placing 2 batteries in series to provide +24 voltsDC. Each battery string is placed in parallel to provide 6 kW of DCpower holdover for about 30 minutes in the event of a commercialpower failure.

Up to four rectifiers are needed for the primary cabinet.

FAN UNIT

CPS(2)(SECONDARY SHELF)

CPS (1)(PRIMARY SHELF)

DC DISTRIBUTION

ALARMPANEL

BATTERIES

STRING 1

1 2STRING 2

31 in./79 cm

AC INPUTPOWERPANEL

1 2

.ppt




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical DescriptionBackup Battery Cabinet (Optional)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional)

OverviewDescription The battery backup cabinet is linked to the primary cabinet to provide

extended holdover time.

Backup Battery CabinetDiagram

The diagram below shows the layout of the backup battery cabinet.

Backup Battery CabinetComponents The key components/features of the PCS battery backup cabinetinclude:

• Ten Battery strings

– Four hours @ 600 W each

– Engineered based on holdover required

• Maximum holdover

– Four hours @ 6 kW (Max. Minicell configuration)

– Eight hours @ 3 kW

• 12 Hours @ 2 kW (typical for three-sector Minicell with teneffective voice channels per sector)

1 2S tr in g 1

1 2S tr in g 2

1 2S tr in g 3

1 2S tr in g 4

1 2S tr in g 5

1 2S tr in g 6

1 2S tr in g 7

1 2S tr in g 8

1 2S tr in g 9

1 2S tr in g 1 0 Output Bus

and Protection




401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Cabling, Connections, and

Software

Overview

Purpose Minicell components are internally connected through cables that carryvoice/traffic data (receive and transmit paths), controls (alarms andtiming signals), and services (DC and AC power). The data and controlpaths are also used for testing purposes.

Data paths were outlined in Unit 2. The purpose of this unit is toidentify the cabling and connections that support the delivery of data,controls, and services to the cell components.

Connections andSchematic Drawings (SDs)

Schematic drawings (SDs) are discussed in unit 4, as part of thediscussion of the “tools” used to communicate with the cell.

Contents Minicell Connections 3-3• Filter and Antenna Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5• Signal Buses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6• Minicell TDM Bus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7• Channel Service Unit, TDM Bus, and MSC Interface - - - - 3-8• Minicell Omni Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9• Minicell Three-Sector Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - -3-10• Signal Path Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11• 15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution - - - - - - - - -3-12• Power Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-14• Network Facilities Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-18• User Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19• Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections - - - - - - - - - -3-20• Growth II Cabinet Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and Software

Test Paths 3-22• Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-23• Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-24• Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration 3-25• Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26• Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging - 3-27• Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access Channel - - 3-29• Functional Tests -- Traffic Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31• Functional Tests -- Pilot Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33• Functional Tests -- Antenna - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35• Functional Tests -- Single Channel Selective - - - - - - - - 3-37





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Minicell Connections

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The three major types of connections that support the functioning of aMinicell are:

• Voice (traffic)

• Data Links (control)

• Power.

Cable View The picture below shows the cabling connections at the back of the

primary cabinet.

Identifying Data, Control,and Service Paths

The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell can support differentoperating modes. One objective of this unit is to identify the differentpaths that support these operating modes.

Identifying Cables andConnections

Cables running through the cell are dedicated to specific functions.Understanding their role is necessary to the performance of troubleshooting tasks. Testing for the Minicell is done via theconnections that are part of the voice and data link paths.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Cell Configuration and DataPath

A PCS CDMA Minicell can be configured to support one to sixinterconnected antenna faces.

Control Signal Distribution Timing signals are critical to CDMA encoding. This unit outlines thepath followed by these control signals.

Power Distribution andGrounding

AC and DC power is distributed throughout the cell, and propergrounding ensures isolation of the signal path from stray current fromthe power distribution system.



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFilter and Antenna Connections


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Filter and Antenna Connections

Minicell Version 2 Filter

Configurations

Two filter configurations are available for Version 2 Minicells:

Simplex

Simplex configurations require three filters:

• One filter for Receive Diversity 0 signals

• One filter for Transmit signals

• One filter for Receive Diversity 1 signals on the side panel

Duplex:

Duplex configuration require two filters:

• One filter for Receive Diversity 0 and Transmit signals• One filter for Receive Diversity 1 signals on the side panel

Antenna ConnectionsDiagram

The diagram below shows the simplex and duplex antenna connectionsfor the Minicell.

Minicell Version 4Configuration

All Receive and Transmit filters are placed side-by-side and areaccessible from the front of the Version 4 Primary Cabinet.

Growth Cabinet II Filters are placed side-by-side and are accessible from the front of theGrowth II Cabinet.

Rx0

TxRx1

Simplex Filters

Rx0 and Tx

Rx1

Duplex Filters

Version 2.0

Rx0 and TxRx1

Version 4.0




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareSignal Buses

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Signal Buses

Overview Buses are physical connections mounted on the radio cabinet backplane

that link the different circuit packs on the RCC Shelf, and are used tocarry a variety of signals.

Update Bus This bus carries signals that enable the stand-by CPU to shadow theprimary CPU, so that it can take over cell operation whenever theprimary CPU experiences a failure.

System Bus There are two separate system buses to enable communication betweencircuit packs within each CSC.

TDM Bus The Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus is used to carry signalsbetween RCC and CRC shelves.

Cluster Bus This bus connects a CCC to all the CEs it controls. There is one Clusterbus for each Cluster Controller.

Signal Bus Diagram The diagram below shows the various system buses.

CPU 0

AFI

NCI

CPI

MEM

CPU 1

AFI

NCI

CPI

MEM

UPDATE BUS

SYSTEM BUSES

TDM BUS

DDFFII

CCCCCC

CCCCCC

CCCCCC

BBIIUU

BBIIUU

BBIIUU

SSCCTT

SSCCTT

Cluster Bus

CECE ACUACU BCRBCR

BBA TRIOBBA TRIO

TX TO CTU

BBIIUU

ACU BCRACU BCRRX 0

RX 1

CRTUi



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareMinicell TDM Bus


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell TDM Bus

TDM Bus Diagram The diagram shows the TDM bus.

Legend The following are devices connected to the TDM and System buses:

Description The TDM bus permits voice, data, or control connectivity to any circuitpack connected to the TDM bus. The bus is separated into twophysically separate buses to improve system reliability.Synchronization of TDM bus control channel messages between theCPU and a circuit pack connected to the TDM bus is performed by theNCI.

CCC

CPI

NCI

MEM

BI

U

SCT

CCC

BI

U

SCT

CPI

NCI

MEM

CCC

BI

U

DFI

S y s t e m B u s 0 S y s t e m B u s 1

T D M B u s A

T D M B u s B

CPU

CPU

U p d a t e B u s

C R C 0 C R C 1 C R C 2

C P U - C o r e P r o c es s U n i tC P I - C o m m u n i c a ti o n s P r o c e s s o r In t e rf a c eN C I - N e t w o r k C o n t r o l I n te r fa c eM E M - M e m o r yB I U - B u s I n t e rf a c e U n i tC C C - C D M A C l u s te r C o n t ro l le rD F I - D i g i t a l F a c i l i t ie s I n t e r f a c eT D M - T i m e D i v is i o n M u l ti p le x

. p p t

Acronym Text

BIU Bus Interface Unit

CCC CDMA Cluster Controller

CPI Communications Processor Interface

CPU Core Process Unit


MEM Memory

NCI Network Control Interface

TDM Time Division Multiplex




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareChannel Service Unit, TDM Bus, and MSCInterface

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Channel Service Unit, TDM Bus, and MSC Interface

Channel Service Unit (CSU)

Shelf

The optional CSU shelf is an ADC Kentrox 4-slot shelf housing one to

three T-SMART CSUs and one Shelf Interface Unit (SIU). The SIUprovides a common interface for all CSUs within a shelf for a singleVideo Display Terminal (VDT) or a Network Management System(NMS). The VDT is required to option the T-SMART CSU. VDTinterface options are switch selectable. Default options are 9600 bps,one stop bit, 8 bits per word/character, and no parity. Refer toKentrox® Operator’s Manual 77000-GD for detailed information onthe T-SMART CSU.

The CSUs connect to the DFI(s) in CRC shelf 2 (lowest shelf) on theMinicell (terminal) side of the interface. The T1 (network) side of the

interface is connected to a T1 terminal lightning protection block,which is also used to protect external user alarms. The DFI circuit pack can be optioned for either a T1 or E1/CEPT interface, and each DFIprovides two DS1 lines. Each CSU handles only one DS1 line, so eachfully loaded DFI requires two CSUs. Each DS1 line is a 4-wireconnection.

T-SMART

T-SMART is a registered trademark of ADC Kentrox Industries.

KentroxKentrox is a registered trademark of ADC Kentrox Industries.

TDM Bus The TDM bus in the primary cabinet provides communication betweencomponents in the CRC and the RCC. It can be expanded toaccommodate growth cabinets.

MSC Interface The primary cabinet is connected to the MSC via T1/E1 facilities. Thenumber of facility interfaces is determined by the number of voicecircuits and data links that the cell supports. Voice traffic is transmitted

between the cell and the MSC over packet pipes. Control and statusinformation is transmitted via one or two data links.

Reference For more information on the CSU see 2-29.



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareMinicell Omni Configuration


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell Omni Configuration

Omni Configuration In Omni configuration, the three CDMA Clusters are logically

connected to provide one CDMA train.

Omni Diagram The diagram below is a schematic of the signal paths from the CDMAcluster to the antenna.

Shelf CDMA Cluster CDMA RF Train





Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareSignal Path Distribution


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Signal Path Distribution

Packet Pipe Allocation Every CCC that has Traffic CEs is assigned a Packet Pipe to carry

traffic to/from the MSC.

CE Pooling CE pooling enables cross-connection between Clusters. Consequently,there is no relationship between the packet pipe and the RF sector thatis being broadcast by the BCR equipped on the corresponding shelf. Asa result, to reach a given level of service, a cluster may need to beequipped with more CEs than required from RF engineeringcomputations.

Signal Path Diagram The diagram below shows the signal path cross connections betweenthe ACU’s and the BCRs.

TDM BusCSC

BIU

ACUCCU

BIU

ACU

BC

RCCU

BIU

ACU

BCR

CCU

BCR




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and Software15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution

Overview Reference signals are generated by the active Reference Frequency and

Timing Generator. These signals are synchronized by a GPS signal.The GPS receiver is in the Crystal Oscillator.

Reference FrequencyDistribution Diagram

The diagram below shows the distribution of the reference signal to theMinicell.

Signal Divider Reference signals are fed through dividers to four different groups of circuits:

• Receiver Units

• CDMA Transmit Units

• Baseband Combiner/Radio and the Sync Clock and Tone boards

• Side Interface Panel for distribution to the Growth Cabinets.

Timing Signals Timing signals are routed out of the P1 connector (RS485 connector) toprovide timing to each individual frame.

2-to-4 Splitter The primary cabinet is equipped with one 2-to-4 splitter. The splitterhas two inputs, but only one is present at a time (The Rb oscillator isthe primary input unless it is down, in which case the XO ocillator

Rubidium Crystal

2:42:4

SIP

RFTGRFTG

P25

RU6 (S3D1)

RU4 (S2D1)

RU1 (S1D0)

RU3 (S2D0)

RU5 (S3D0)

RU2 (S1D1)1:6

P31 P40P30P29

P28P27

P26

P39

P38

P15P13

P11

1

2

34

5

6

J7

P35 P34

P36P37 P44P45

1:3

CTU 2 (S3P)

CTU 0 (S1P)

CTU 1 (S2P)

P52

P54

P56

P48

P49

P50

1

2

3

P47

1:6

BCR 0

SCT 0

50 ohmterminator

BCR 2

SCT 1

BCR 1

CRC0

CRC1

CRC2

P46

1

2

34

56

P61

P60P59

P58

P57

P75

P73

P70

P68

P64

GPS

J7

J4 J4

J7






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwarePower Distribution

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Power Distribution

Overview The PCS Minicell requires a +24 V DC and 220 V AC power source.

24 Volt Power Source The following applies to the +24 V DC power source:

• The primary frame is supplied by five pairs of +24 V DC and +24return (RTN) feeds from the power cabinet.

• Power cables are first connected to the terminal block on the PDAand then to the DC power conditioners.

• Each set of power and return cables is then connected to theoptional feed through capacitors for ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) protection.

• The +24 V DC power feeds are then distributed to their respectivecircuit breakers, while the +24 RTN connects to a common busbar on the circuit breaker panel assembly which is isolated fromthe frame ground.

• The +24 V DC power is distributed to the different components inthe system from these breakers.

220 Volt Power Source In addition to DC power, the PCS CDMA Minicell also requires ACpower for the heating elements of the heat exchanger; 220 V AC poweris supplied to the primary frame by the power cabinet.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power DistributionDiagram

The diagram below shows the +24-V power distribution in theMinicell.

Power Distribution

Assembly Diagram

The diagram below shows the power distribution assembly.

RFTG Side 0

CRC 0CTU 0

C i r c u

i t

B r e a

k e r s

T r a n s

i e n

t C a p a c

i t o r

G r o u n

d B u s

22

2

6

5

Transient Capacitors

EMC Feed-through Capacitors

Terminal Lugs

Lightning ProtectorsFeeder Circuit Breakers35 A 35 A 35 A 35 A 35 A

5

DC Power Conditioner

Terminal Lugs

+ 24v from DC Power Plant 24v RTN to DC Power Plant2 1345

CRTU

CSU Shelf

CTU Shelf - PCU2 (15v)

Heat Exc. Fans

CTU Shelf - PCU1 (15v )

220AC1G2

Heat ExchangerLightning Protector

CRC 1CTU 1

CRC 2CTU 2

RFTG Side 1

CB3 (5A)CB2 (5A)CB1 (7.5A)CB12 (2.5A)

CB13 (15A)CB14 (5A)

CB20 (25A)CB19 (10A)

CB18 (25A)CB17 (10A)

CB11

CB10 (10A)CB9 (7.5A)CB8 (2.5A)CB5 (15A)CB4 (5A) Fan 0

CB6 (5A) RCC Side 0

CB16 (25A)CB15 (25A)

Fan 1

CB7 (5A) RCC Side 1

AC Feeder DC Feeder

T1 Facilities Access Hole

Antenna Interface

Antenna Receive C onnectionFor GPS

Power Cabinet Alarm Access Hole

External User AlarmAccess Hole

5 4 3 2 1Dc Feed

L1 L2Gnd

240 Ac

TxS3p S3g S2p S2g S 1p S1g

S3d0/pS3d1/gS2 d0/pS2 d1/gS 1d0/p S1d1/gGps

Pw rCab

Alarms

T1/e1 ExtU ser

Alarms

6

RF Test

Rx/dx




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Note

The diagram depicts the 3-sector Minicell. The omni Minicell is quitedifferent.

Panel Description The panel consists of the following components:

• Antenna lightning protector (also known as antenna interface)(14)

• DC power conditioner (5)

• AC power conditioner (1)

• +24-volt return common bus bar (1)

• Transient capacitors (5)

• 0.25-inch copper grounding plate with grounding studs andterminal blocks.

Circuit Breaker Panel The circuit breaker panel distributes the DC and AC power in thecabinet through the circuit breakers. The components used in the circuitbreaker panel are shown in the table below.

Circuit breaker values in this table depend on the version of PDA thecustomer might have.

Powering Sequence If it becomes necessary to power down one of the radio cabinets, theprescribed sequence is to turn off all the BCR faceplate switches, thenturn off the circuit breakers in the order CB19, CB17, CB15, CB20,CB18, CB16, and the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14.

To power the radio cabinet back up, the prescribed sequence is CB1 toCB20, and then the BCR faceplate switches.

Component Name Qty

25A Circuit Breaker (CRC) 3

15A Circuit Breaker (RCC) 2

20A Circuit Breaker (CTU) 4

10A Circuit Breaker (15 V PCU) 25A Circuit Breaker (RFTG and Fans) 4

5A Circuit Breaker (CRTU and CSU) 2

10A AC Circuit Breaker (Heat Exchanger) 1





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Whenever it is necessary to turn the power off on a radio cabinet, it willbe necessary to wait at least 15 minutes after power has been restoredbefore the RFTGs can be put back into service.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareNetwork Facilities Interface

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Network Facilities Interface

T1 Facilities Interface

Diagram

The diagram below shows the T1 facilities interface.

Description The Network Facilities Interface is connected to the Primary Cabinet

by way of an interface board located at the bottom of the PrimaryCabinet (left hand side front in Minicell Version 2, and right hand sideback in Minicell Version 4). The interface board provides the circuitpath back to the carrier facilities and also provides lightning protectionto this path. Lightning protectors plug into one half of the board whilealarm punch-down connections occupy the other half.

Punch downs 3 and 8 for Primary T1/E1Punch downs 1 and 6 for Growth I T1/E1Punch downs 5 and 10 for Growth II T1/E1

Power Cabinet Alarm Protectors

External User Alarm Protectors

Transmit CSU Lightning Protector

Receive CSU Lightning Protector

XMT to TELCO

RCV From Telco

From CSUTo CSU

.T

R

OSP (Network Side)CPE (Terminal Side)

GND01

.

05

06 10

11 15

16

21

20

25

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 2521 22 23 24 25

.

..

.

.

.

.

.Lightning ProtectorPositions for:•Growth I: 1 and 6•Growth II: 5 and 10•Primary: 3 and 8

OSP(Network

Side)

CPE(Terminal

Side)

Front of Cabinet



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareUser Alarms


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................User Alarms

User Alarm Connections Setting user alarm connections to open or close on alarm is done by

using the slide switches on a circuit board located in the Primarycabinet just above the T1 facilities and alarm interface board.

User Alarm Diagram The diagram below shows the user alarm standard cross connect.

Wiring Options The user alarms can be wired through slide switches to monitorequipment alarms in two states:

• Open on alarm (normally closed)

• Close on alarm (normally open)

More information on alarms is provided in Unit 6.

EXT ALM 6

AIM0 AIM1

USER ALARMSTANDARD CROSS CONNECT

ASSY 847576303

SIDE SIDE

OPENON

ALARM

CLOSEON

ALARM




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwarePrimary to Growth I Cabinet Connections

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections

Connections Signal cables running through the Side Interface Panel connect the

Primary and Growth I cabinets. These cables carry the Receive andTransmit RF signals, the 15MHz reference, and the Alarm signals. Inaddition, there are connections from the CSU in the Primary to theGrowth I DFI, and from the primary RFTG to the Growth I CRC0,terminating at the SCT board.

24V DC and 240 V AC power is directly provided to the Growth I fromthe Power cabinet.

Growth I CabinetConnections Diagram

The diagram below shows the Growth I cabinet connections to theMinicell primary cabinet and the power cabinet.

Up to six Receive Ant.Up to six Transmit Ant

GPS Receive Ant .

240 V AC 50/60 Hz

GrowthCabinet 1

PrimaryCabinet

Alarms+24 V DC240 V AC

+ 24 V DC240 V AC

T1/E1 LinesExternal User Alarms

Receive (RF)Transmit (RF)15 MHz Ref

RS-485 Bus(RFTG to SCT)

CSU to DFIAlarms

TDM Bus

SIP

PowerCabinet



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareGrowth II Cabinet Connections


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Growth II Cabinet Connections

Growth II Cabinet

Connections Diagram

The diagram below shows the Growth II connections to the antennas,

Growth I cabinet, and the power cabinet.

Connections The Growth II cabinet sends digital and control signals to the Primarythrough the Growth I cabinet. The Primary cabinet sends RF receive,digital and control signals to the Growth II cabinet through the GrowthI cabinet.

The 24 V DC and 240 V AC power is directly fed by the power cabinetto the Growth II cabinet.

GrowthCabinet 2

Up to three Transmit Ant.

Up to six Receive Ant.

Up to six Transmit Ant

GPS Receive Ant

240 V AC 50/60 Hz

GrowthCabinet 1

PrimaryCabinet

Alarms+24 V DC240 V AC

+ 24 V DC240 V AC

T1/E1 Lines

External User Alarms

Receive (RF)Transmit (RF)15 MHz Ref

RS-485 Bus

(RFTG to SCT)CSU to DFI

Alarms

TDM Bus

SIP

PowerCabinet

+ 24 V DC

240 V AC

Digital &ControlSignals

Receive RFSignals




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareGrowth II Cabinet Connections

Test Paths

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose Test paths are used to verify that the cell Receive and Transmit controlpaths are operating properly. These paths make use of the CRTU unit.







Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareExample of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a DuplexConfiguration


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration

Overview The CRTU can also be used to measure incident and reflected signals

in case the Minicell is equipped with duplex filters. The complexity of the diagram reflects the increased number of components affected bythe test beyond those of the test paths for the simplex receive andsimplex transmit. The test path shows:

• Transmit filters

• Receive filters

• Incident and reflected RF energy for:

– Antenna 1

– Antenna 2

• Reflected and incident RF energy for:

– Diversity 0

– Diversity 1

Test Path Rx and Tx(Duplex)

The diagram below shows the test path for transmission and receptionin a duplex configuration.

{

Reflected Ant1 TX

CRTU

Incident Ant1 TXCDMA PCS RSP

LNA / Downconverter (RX Module)

Duplexer Coupler

Duplexer Coupler

} other sectors

} other sectors

LNA / Downconverter (RX Module)

PowerAmpl.

Upconverter

TX Module

{{

Incident Div 0 RX

Reflected Div 0 RX}other sectors

}other sectors

{

{{

Incident Div 1 RX

Reflected Div 1 RX

Incident Ant2 TXReflected Ant2 TX

} other sectors

} other sectors{{

Ant1 Ant2

RX 0

RX 1

BCR

TX

RS-422 Control bus

-50 -40Rx

-50 -40Tx

-50 -40Rxother sectors }

{

}other sectors




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests

Overview The CDMA Radio Test unit (CRTU) can perform functional tests on

the minicell.

Test Types There are several aspects of the minicell which are tested withfunctional tests. These are as follows:

• Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging

• Overhead Channel-- Access Channel

• Traffic Path

• Pilot Level

• Antenna

• Single Channel Selective Functional Test

Manual Overhead ChannelPlacement

Manual overhead channel placement addresses the issue of overheadchannels being moved to less than optimum locations as a result of routine diagnostics or fault recovery. This allows a customer tomanually select the location of overhead channels. Once a channel hasbeen manually placed, it will not be re-migrated by the "AutomaticOverhead Channel Placement Algorithm Feature." Fault recovery orroutine diagnostics, however, can cause the migration of the overheadchannels. At this time, the "Automatic Overhead Channel Placement

Algorithm Feature" will become operable again.

HEH Functions if OverheadChannels Fail

If any of the overhead channels fail, then the Functional Test (FT) willinform the Hardware Error Handler (HEH) of the failure. HEH willthen instruct the Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) tomigrate the overhead channel assignment to a different CE. If HEHdetermines that the overhead channel FT has detected three failures ona minicell within a 15-minute period then HEH will request MRA toremove the CRTUm from service. The reason for this is that it issuspected that the CRTUm is faulty and not the CEs. If a faulty

CRTUm is left in-service it could cause overhead channel migration tomigrate through all available traffic CEs and eventually none would beleft to handle calls.



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/ Sync/Paging


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging

Overview This test verifies that the cell can transmit overhead channels and that

the mobile can access the overhead channel. The test uses the CRTU.

Overhead Channel Test The overhead channel functional test is used to verify that the pilot,sync, page, and access special purpose channels are working properlyby establishing a CDMA MOST call. This functional test first checksthe status of the mobile, then instructs the CRTUm to originate a call.When the call is established, FT requests the status of CDMA overheadchannels from the CRTUm. When the call completes, it demonstratesthe proper operation of the carrier on which the call was made.

Test Overview Depending on the test command, either one or all faces can be tested.The test proceeds automatically, as follows:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The CRTU interface (CRTUi) instructs the CRTUm to connect to oneantenna face through the RSP.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The “mobile” in the CRTUm acquires the pilot, sync, and pagingchannels for that face.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The “mobile” transitions to the system idle state.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The CRTUi queries the status of the CRTUm.

Result:

If the response indicates that the system is idle, the test has passed.

If the response indicates otherwise, the test has failed.

Pilot/Sync/PagingFunctional Test Diagram

The diagram below shows the overhead channel functional test signalflows for the pilot/sync/paging channels. The line between the CRTUi




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/ Sync/Paging

and the RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm arecontrol lines. All other lines are voice.

Nature of the Test Signals The signals sent to and received from the CRTUm simulatecommunication with a wireless terminal. Because the CRTUm is ahard-wired mobile, the test signals do not need to be sent over the air.

RCC CRTUi RSPMOBILECRTUm

COUPLERS

CCC

BCR

CCU

ACU

CTU

TX

ANTPILOT/SYNCPAGE CEs



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- AccessChannel


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access Channel

Overview This test verifies that the cell can receive Overhead Channels. The test

uses the CRTU.

Access Channel FunctionalTest Diagram

The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional test of theoverhead channel access channel. The line between the CRTUi and theRSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are controllines. All other lines are voice.

Test Overview Depending on the test command, either one or all faces can be tested.The test proceeds as follows:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The CRTUi performs the pilot/sync/paging tests as before.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 If this test has passed, the CRTUi instructs the CRTUm to dial the(MOST) directory number.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Pilot/Sync/Access Channel element receives an “over the air”origination message and passes it to the CDMA Cluster Controller.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The CCC instructs the Page Channel to acknowledge the “mobile”origination.


COUPLERS

CCC

BCR

CCU

ACU

RU

CTUTX

ANT

RXANT




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- AccessChannel

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 The Page CE sends an “over the air” acknowledgment to the “mobile”.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 The CCC informs the RCC (CRTUi) that the “mobile” has originated acall.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 The RCC instructs the “mobile” to release the MOST number, and theCRTUm releases the call and control of the RSP.



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Traffic Path


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests -- Traffic Path

Overview This test checks the entire traffic path in active and idle states, using the

CRTU. The objective of the traffic path functional test is to ensure thata CDMA traffic path can be established through every traffic CE in theMinicell and the established path is operational when used in a call.

Resource Usage In order to perform the traffic path functional test, the CRTUm willoriginate a call to a speech handler on the DCS and then the call ishanded-off to the next active non-busy CE in the Minicell. This hand-off continues until all active, non-busy traffic CEs are tested. A CDMAMOST call will be established to the DCS and forced handoff will beperformed to verify the traffic channel functionality. This test is very

resource intensive at the cell as the call is cycled through all CEs. Thedesign goal is to make this test less resource intensive at the ECP andDCS and at the same time automate the process of CE selection forhandoff.

Error Handling When a Traffic Path test is executed, an Overhead Channel test isperformed. If any failures are detected during the execution of theOverhead Channel portion of the Traffic Path test, then FT will notifyHEH of the failure. HEH will apply the same recovery and migrationstrategy as described in the page 26. If the Overhead Channel portion of the test passes, then the Traffic Path part of the test is executed. If anyCEs fail during the Traffic Path test, then HEH is informed and HEHwill report only to the technician. HEH does not take any recoveryaction on failed CEs.


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The CRTUi selects an antenna face through the RSP.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The complete Overhead Channel Functional Test is performed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The RCC requests message and subscriber validation to the ECP.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Traffic Path

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The ECP:

1. Identifies the call as a CRTU-designated MOST call

2. Sends a traffic-channel assignment message to the RCC3. Sets up PHV at the switch

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 The RCC instructs a CCC to select a specific CE assigned to the antennaface being tested to handle the CRTU origination.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 The RCC queries the status of the CRTUm. The CRTUm returns thetraffic channel state, indicating that the CRTUm is in a talk state.

Handoff procedures follow.

Traffic ChannelsFunctional Test Diagram

The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional tests onthe traffic channels. The line between the CRTUi and the RSP and theline between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control lines. All otherlines are voice.


COUPLERS

CCC

BCR

CCU

ACU

RU

CTU

TX ANT

RX ANT

DFI

ACCESS MGR/ SWITCH

DFI

ECP

MOST



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Pilot Level


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests -- Pilot Level

Overview This functional test provides the technician with the power level (in

dBm) of the CDMA pilot channel. This is an important factor indetermining the physical size of the Minicell coverage area.

Through the automatic initiated request, this test provides continuousmonitoring of the pilot signal strength and will report when the valuebecomes out-of -tolerance. This test provides the technician with moreinformation to help detect and isolate hardware faults within theMinicell.

Calibration Settings During the calibration procedure for the Minicell, a value is determinedthat compensates for attenuation variances in the CRTU’s RF signal

path due to differing cable lengths, unit variations, different cellconfigurations, etc. This calibration value is assigned to a translatableparameter and is used by FT to adjust the CRTU’s reported pilot signalstrength.


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 When a Pilot Level test is executed, an Overhead Channel test isperformed.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Result: If any failures are detected during the execution of the OverheadChannel portion of the Pilot Level test, then FT will notify HEH of thefailure. HEH will apply the same recovery and migration strategy asdescribed on page 3-26.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 If the Overhead Channel portion of the test passes then the pilot signalstrength measurement is taken.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the signal is out-of-tolerance then HEH is informed and HEH willreport only to the technician.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Pilot Level

Recovery: No recovery action is done by HEH if the pilot signal isout-of-tolerance. Also, if the pilot signal is out-of-tolerance, an alarmindication is set on the CDMA Minicell Equipment status display page.

Pilot Level Functional TestDescription

The test is a modified version of the Overhead Channel FT. Like otherFTs, PL can be executed manually or automatically. Frequency of automatic (scheduled) PLFT is set in translations.

PLFT Errors and Output PLFT generates ROP output and alarms on the Status Display Pages(Cartoon Pages) for out-of-tolerance Pilot Levels. The ROP indicatesthe actual measured pilot level value and the expected pilot level value(calculated by the software, based on amplifier type, pilot dgu, andBCR attenuation values in translations).

Pilot Level Calibration

Occurrence

The Pilot Levels need to be calibrated when any of these procedures are

performed on the Minicell:• Initial load of cell generic or installation of new cell

• Changing of components in the RF test path (CRTUm, RSP,cabling, filters)

• Changing of amplifier type, pilot dgu, or BCR attenuation fields intranslations

PLFT Diagnostics A failed PLFT will cause the cell status to show a major alarm (red) onthe 2121 page. The 2131 page will show CDMA equipment in trouble

(red). The 2138 page will show the affected CCC and PAF as degraded(yellow). The PLFT must be executed with ATP results, or the cellmust be stable cleared to clear the alarm.

As with OCFT and TPFT, a manually initiated PL test will generateROP output. Scheduled PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs.



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Antenna


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests -- Antenna

Overview This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not

operating correctly.

Reason for the Test A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. Themost common is damage to the antenna from adverse weather. Withoutthis test the operator might be unaware that there is no transmissionfrom a sector of a cell which appears to be operating correctly.

CRTU fault Isolation - Antenna Test, commonly referred to as theAntenna Functional Test (ANT FT) provides a means for maintenancetechnicians to verify the proper operation of the CDMA cell sites. ANTFT provides an alarmed output report on the ROP and an alarm

indication on the status and display page (SDP) when the tests indicatethat the antenna is not operating properly. This feature can be executedin the manual mode or automatic mode.

Description The CRTU Transmit Antenna Test is done by comparing the incidentpower to the antenna with reflected power from the antenna. The PilotChannel shall be measured for this comparison. The incident powerbeing much larger than the reflected power shows that the transmitantenna does not have a fault.

The value by which the incident power must be greater than the

reflected power to show that the transmit antenna does not have a faultwill be determined in testing. An expected value is 7 dB, with anadditional allowance for uncertainties in the measurement.

When the CRTU is used for antenna testing in the automatic mode,results are reported only when the results indicate an antenna fault.

Antenna Test Process The test is performed on a specified sector by measuring the RF energyincident to and reflected from the transmit antenna.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The CRTU is switched by the RSP between directional couplers thatextract RF energy in the two directions from the transmit antenna.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The CRTU measures the strength of the incident and reflected pilotsignal.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Antenna

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the energy reflected from the antenna is excessive, the test indicatesthat insufficient RF energy may be being transmitted from the antennaunder test and therefore there may be an antenna fault.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The antenna is not taken out of service if the test fails.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Transmit Antenna Tests on that sector are inhibited and the operator isnotified, who then decides on further maintenance action.



Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Single Channel Selective


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Tests -- Single Channel Selective

Overview Although this is a functional test, it is not executed as a part of routine

functional testing but on demand by a TI command.

Reason for the Test This capability extends the traffic path functional test so that theoperator can isolate a fault along the traffic channel from a specifiedCE to a specified sector. In addition, Markov signals will betransmitted between the CRTU and the CE so that even minordistortions in the transmission path can be detected.

Description A typical way to identify a fault on a traffic channel is with the trafficpath functional test, which tests all the equipped CEs in a cell insequence. If a fault is detected, however, it is not known in which of theequipment items on the channel the fault is located. The fault could bein the CCU, the CCC, the ACU, BCR, or on the path connecting two of the equipment items. The operator can apply the single channelselective functional test several times on channels that partly overlapthe channel on which the fault was found. The fault can be isolated onthe basis of which tests succeed and which tests fail. A second way thistest may be used is to verify a repair after it is completed.

More Information For more information see the section "Single Channel SelectiveFunctional Test" on page 7-22.

Single Channel SelectiveFunctional Test Process

For this test, the operator selects the CE, carrier, and sector on whichthe test is to be performed and enters this information through a TIinput command. The carrier is specified because a CE may be able tooperate on different carriers. When the cell receives the messageassociated with the test, it will perform one of the following:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 If the CE is idle, the cell will instruct the CRTU to originate a call to apre-defined DN. When the cell sees the call origination from the CRTUmobile, normal traffic channel allocation will be bypassed and the pre-selected CE is assigned to this call. If the call reaches the talk state, thetest will have passed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 If the CE is busy with a call the cell, will attempt to execute the test witha camp-on or other mechanism. If the attempt is successful, the test




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cabling, Connections, and SoftwareFunctional Tests -- Single Channel Selective

described in item 1 will be performed on the CE that is designated;otherwise the test will be canceled.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the CE is maintenance busy or unequipped, the test will be canceled.

Result:

Possible results returned to the operator are as follows:

1. The test was satisfactory.

2. The test was performed but the test identified deficiencies that aregiven in the results.

3. It was not possible to perform the test (together with the reasonwhy it was not possible to perform the test).

The results of the test will identify the speech handler (SH) in the testpath, the cell, the CE, the CCC, the BBA, the sector, and the carrier.The CE implies a specific carrier and it is included as a convenience tothe operator. No recovery or fault isolation will be attempted if the testfails.




401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Communicating with the PCS

CDMA Minicell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose

Contents Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell 4-3• Objectives - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4

Interfacing with the Minicell 4-5• The User Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6• Access Options to the PCSC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8• Operation and Management Platform - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9• Accessing the OMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-10

Craftshell Interface and Read Only Printer Basics 4-12• Purpose of Craftshell Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13• Craftshell Commands Syntax - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-14• Output Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15• Sample of Craftshell Listing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-16• Read-Only Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-17

Status Display Pages Basics 4-18• SDP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-19• Status Display Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-20• Status Display Pages Linkage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21• Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP - - - - - - -4-23• SDP Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25• Video States of SDP Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-27





Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMAMinicell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose Operators need to interface with the Minicell to enter commands andreceive status reports on the condition of the Minicell.

This unit covers the different ways to perform these actions.

SDP/ROP Screens The screen images in the graphic below show the 2121 SDP and asample of the ROP output.

SDP Reference The SDPs are covered in detail in Chapter 10 of the 401-610-160manual.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellObjectives

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Objectives

Identifying the Tools Several tools are available to support communication between the

Minicell and the PCSC. This lesson is designed to enable students toidentify them and to differentiate the conditions of their use.

Using the Tools This lesson is also designed to enable students to identify the format of commands and responses for each of the described tools.



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellObjectives


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Interfacing with the Minicell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The operational status (“health”) of the PCS CDMA Minicell may beviewed via the following:

• Equipment status read-only reports (ROPs)

• Graphical Status Display Pages (SDPs)

• A command line interface tool called a craftshell




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellThe User Interface

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................The User Interface

Electronic Access to the

PCSC

Electronic access to the ECP at the PCSC can be done through a user

interface, using a laptop computer, provided that the Minicell site isequipped with a regular telephone line. Depending on configurationand login authorization, access to the ECP may be provided directly orthrough the OMP.

Interfaces Supported at thePCSC

The PCS CDMA Minicell user interfaces are supported by theAUTOPLEX® 1000 system.

Craftshell

This is a command line interface that enables you to perform

diagnostics. Craftshell can be invoked:• Through a dial-up modem, using a communication package, such

as ProComm Plus®

• Through a data line, using the Unix® command “TIpdunix” at theUnix prompt.

Status Display Pages (SDP or “Cartoon Page”)

This is a graphic interface available on the OMP. The cell site isconnected to the PCSC and controlled by the OMP with appropriateauthorization.

Read (Receive) Only Printer (ROP)

This is a one-way interface that provides a running report of activitiesseen from the MSC. Display of only those activities that are relevant toa specific Minicell is possible through specific craftshell commands.

Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) Screens

Forms provide a means to change and view the operating parameters of a Minicell. Forms are accessed through a command line. Two types of screens are available from the PCSC:

• Forms — used for interactions with the Access Manager• Views — used for interactions with the 5ESS-2000 Switch.

Craftshell Interface vs.Status Display Page (SDP)

The craftshell interface and the SDP are two different ways of obtaining information pertinent to PCS CDMA Minicell performance,and responding to that information. Although the ways are not thesame, the information that is returned is identical in scope.



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellThe User Interface


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The craftshell interface demands a higher level of knowledge on thepart of the user, compared to SDPs, but it covers the entire spectrum of commands that may be needed to perform complex troubleshooting.

The SDPs are simpler to use than the craftshell, and are well designed

to provide a “bird’s eye” view of the status of a Minicell. Alarms aredisplayed on SDPs and printed to the ROP as soon as they areactivated. Commands and output messages are displayed in real timeon the craftshell and the ROP. However, corresponding updates of SDPdisplays are done at preset intervals and may lag by a few minutesbehind craftshell and ROP outputs.

When access to SDP is allowed, specific keystrokes can be used totoggle back and forth between SDP and craftshell, giving the operatorthe flexibility of selecting the best tool for the task at hand.





Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellOperation and Management Platform


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Operation and Management Platform

Overview The OMP is a workstation that acts as a front end to the ECP.

Using the OMP From a user perspective, the OMP provides the combined flexibility of all user interfaces in a multi-tasking environment.

• Adjunct Processor

– Provides additional terminal support

– Provides off-line processing

– Provides enhanced data management

– Provides added interfaces to the APX-1000

• Main purpose of the OMP is to improve operation andmaintenance effectiveness by providing a single point access to alluser interfaces and multi-tasking from the same terminal.

Reference More information on the OMP can be found in the 401-610-160manual.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellAccessing the OMP

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Accessing the OMP

Overview Communication with the Minicell is done through the OMP.

Depending on the type of connection installed at the Minicell, thatcommunication may be through a dial-up line.

Accessing the CraftshellInterface

Be aware of the following when accessing the craftshell interface:

• PC (laptop) software settings:

– E-7-1, 9600 baud

– Termtype emulation = vt-100, or similar

• You may have to set certain Unix environment variables at thelogin prompt, to achieve correct terminal behavior. For instance,

you may have to set terminal type (by typing TERM =<termtype>; export TERM) at the system prompt if this variable isnot present in your user . profile (or . login ) file.

Your system administrator will advise you if you must enterenvironment variables at the Unix command line.

Your system administrator will explain how to use the historycommand, and similar commands, for reviewing entries you have madeat the Unix prompt.

Once logged in, your system displays an AUTOPLEX main menu andwindows that provide a path to the craftshell.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Craftshell Access Diagram The graphic below depicts menus the user passes through to access thecraftshell.

Site Dependencies Number and nature of windows for accessing the craftshell, as well asaccess methods, may vary from installation to installation.

1 Autoplex(R) OMP Technican menu

AUTOPLEX(R) System 1000 ECP Access5ESS(R)-2000 Switch DCS AccessDEFINITY(R) DCS Translations and MaintenanceDEFINITY(R) DCS Hardcopy control

> OMP StatusMiscellaneous ApplicationsExit

2 Autoplex(R) System 1000 ECP Access menuECP Recent Change/Verify

> ECP Craft ShellECP RTR ShellECP Control and DisplayECP EAI MCRTms Inc. SunOS 5.5.1 Generic May 1996ECP ROP Log Viewererase characterECP Physical ROP (Including PRMs) Log Viewer




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Craftshell Interface and Read OnlyPrinter Basics

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The craftshell provides the most flexible means to input commandsinto, and get output messages from, a Minicell. The output messagesoccur in response to craftshell commands and ROP output.



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellPurpose of Craftshell Commands


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Purpose of Craftshell Commands

Standard Craftshell Craftshell commands are used to:

• Identify operational status• Remove and restore a unit from service

• Diagnose a unit

• Download Non-Volatile Memory

• Stop a command

• Initialize a site




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellCraftshell Commands Syntax

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Craftshell Commands Syntax

Craftshell Syntax Entering commands at the craftshell requires attention to precise

syntax.

Syntax Diagram The graphic below shows a sample command line and explanations of the various elements.

For More Information Lucent Technologie’s Cell Site/DCS Input/Output Messages, 410-610-107

Follow strict syntax, punctuation, spacing (space before a numeral) andcapitalization rules.

– Action : What is to be performed, e.g., DGN, followed by “:”.

DGN:

– Identification : Where to perform the task, e.g., “cell #”, with a spacebetween the word “cell” and the cell number, and a comma betweenelements.

CELL 21,CRTU

– Options (if applicable), e.g., “ucl”, preceded by a “;”.

;UCL

– Data (if applicable), e.g., “tlp”, preceded by a “:”.

:TLP



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellOutput Messages


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Output Messages

Overview Output messages are formatted system responses to technician

commands or events in the system.

Output Messages Diagram The graphic below shows an example of output from the DGNcraftshell command and explanations of the fields.

For More Information Output messages are explained in detail in Lucent documentation CellSite/DCS Input/Output Messages, 401-610-107 .

• Include the following fields:– Priority : Alarm (*C = Critical, ** = Major, * = Minor); M = Manual,

A = Automatically generated. Field is blank for informationalmessage.

– Abbreviated time, Message body, Date, Sequence Number.

M 52 DGN:CELL 21 CRTU ATPM 52 DGN:CELL 21 CRTU ATP

05/14/96 08:52:45 #03438905/14/96 08:52:45 #034389M 52 REPT:CELL 21 CRTU OOS. MANUAL. RMVDM 52 REPT:CELL 21 CRTU OOS. MANUAL. RMVD05/14/96 08:52:45 #03439005/14/96 08:52:45 #034390




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSample of Craftshell Listing

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Sample of Craftshell Listing

Overview A craftshell display is a continuous listing of input commands and

output messages.

Sample Listing Graphic The graphic below shows the listing received when issuing theOP:CELL craftshell command.

Craftshell Syntax Entering commands at the craftshell requires attention to precisesyntax. See page Craftshell Commands Syntax: page 4-14 for thesyntax

M 47 OP:CELL 1 COMPLETEDDEVICE - tty&

02/17/97 47 #001816

M 47 OP:CELL 1 DL 0 CONNECTEDDEVICE - tty&

02/17/97 47 #001817M 47 OP:CELL 1 DL 1 CONNECTED

DEVICE - tty&

02/17/97 47 #001818

M 47 OP:CELL 1 STATUS & CONTROLSBOOT ALW, CP ALW, PH MON ALW, PH STATE ACTIVE, DL(S) UPFORWARD SETUP CHANNEL CONTROL NORMAL (INH)

DEVICE - tty&

02/17/97 47 #001821dgn:cell 1, crtu



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellRead-Only Printer


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Read-Only Printer

Description The Read-Only Printer (ROP) is a continuous report of system

activities, that can be configured by a “Selective Cell Site Messages”command from a Minicell to the PCSC to display only data related tothe operation of a Minicell or a group of Minicells.

Appearance The ROP appears as a craftshell output.

Sample ROP Output The graphic shows a selected portion of the ROP output as samples of the messages displayed.

Report Types There are two types of output reports: solicited and spontaneous.Solicited reports are generated in response to the commands entered bythe technician. Spontaneous reports are generated without any inputfrom the technician; they are initiated automatically by system eventsor conditions. An example of a spontaneous report is the reporting of acell site hardware error and corresponding automatic recovery action.

Report Access The HEH and CPFail messages are printed at the ROP and may reflectproblems not displayed on the SDPs. The ROP printouts should bereviewed at least once a day for CDMA-related messages. To make thiseasier, tools will be provided which will allow these messages to befiltered from the normal stream of ROP messages and routed to aCDMA log file at the OMP. These tools will also analyze thesemessages and sort and summarize them by specific equipment unit.

Reference Format and meaning of ROP output are explained in the LucentTechnologies AUTOPLEX® 1000 Output Messages Manual, 401-610-107 .

M 05 RST:CELL 169 CRTU, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS PASSED10/22/96 14:05:20 #084038

* 05 OP:CELL 169, CRTU, ACTIVE10/22/96 14:05:20 #084039





Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSDP


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................SDP

Overview SDPs provide a “user friendly” tool to monitor the status of a Minicell,

using a consistent display format.

SDP Sample The graphic below is a sample of the 2131 SDP.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellStatus Display Pages

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Status Display Pages

Overview SDPs provide a “birds-eye” view of the Minicell site.

Status display pages (SDPs) graphically represent the hardware andsoftware subsystems of the Minicell site, DCS, ECP, and IMS. Theyalso provide tools for interaction between the Switch and the Minicell.

SDPs make extensive use of colors and flashing indicators (statusdisplay pages are often referred to as cartoon pages).

Interaction with the Minicell Interaction with the Minicell can be done through:

• “Poke” commands

• Craftshell commands

Depending on the volume of activities on the network, there may be anoticeable delay between completion of a command and itsacknowledgment by display on the SDP.







Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellAccessing Status Display Pages from the OMP


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP

Purpose Status display pages can be accessed from the OMP or the MCRT.

Backing Out of the Menus To back out of the menus, simultaneously press the Control-f and 6keys. To exit, simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 4-1. Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP

This is one method of accessing the SDPs. Local practice may vary.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select OMP Software Applications from the Workspace menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access from the OMPTechnician menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX® System 1000ECP Access menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The cursor is positioned at the CMD<line and appears as CMD<The CMD function allows graphic display and menu command input;MSG allows message keyboard input.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 To open the display, enter the unique status display page number

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

(command) and press RETURN.

ResultThe requested SDP is displayed.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 4-2. Accessing Status Display Pages from the MCRT

This is one method of accessing the SDPs. Local practice may vary.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellAccessing Status Display Pages from the OMP

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 At MCRT, press F2 (NORM DISP) function key.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select command mode by pressing the F3 (CMD/MSG) function key.

The CMD< prompt is displayed (Cursor is in CMDinput area).

The CMD function allows graphic display and menu command input;MSG allows message keyboard input.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 To open the display, enter the unique status display page number(command) and press RETURN.

Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) underthe CMDheading on the System 1000 index pages ( 100 - PageIndex page and/or 2100 - APX Index page).

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

Result

The status display page is shown.



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSDP Layout


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................SDP Layout

General Layout The following identifies the different areas of an SDP:

• A = Header area– 1st line - ECP location, generic release, terminal id, date,

time & time zone

– 2nd & 3rd lines - system status

• B = Command entry (CMD<) to enter “poke” commands on thisline

• C = Page contents area

• D = Scrolling area

– User enters messages in Craft Shell mode

SDP Sample The graphic below shows a sample of a Status Display Page to showthe main screen area is an SDP.

SDPs You Use with thePCS CDMA Minicell

While there are dozens of SDPs that are available at the MCRT foranalyzing PCS equipment, the following are most useful in analyzingPCS CDMA Minicell performance. These SDPs are:

• 2100 - APX Index Page

• 2121 - Minicell Site Status Summary

Dublin ECP 01 APX-1000 L7.0 ttyj-cdJ TTY 07SYS EMER CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR IMS CELL CDN CCS7 SYS NORMOVERLOAD SYS INH CU CU PERPH LINK MSC DCS TRUNK

CMD< 2100 - APX INDEX

CMD PAGE TITLE CMD PAGE TITLE2120 - APX System Status 2140 - DCS Status Summary2121 - System Equipage Summary 2141,d - DCS d Equipment Status

2130 - Cell Site Status Summary 2142,d - DCS d TMS/MC Status

2131,c - Cell c Equipment Status 2143,d - DCS d DS-1/AFAC Status2132,c - Cell c Software Status 2150,d - DCS d TRKGRP Summary2133 , c SI Cell c VRG Status 2151,d,t - DCS d TRKGRP t Status2133,c,sg,a SII Cell c VR Status 2152,d,t - DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status2134,c - Cell c DS-1 Unit Status 2160 - CDN Status Summary2135,c - Cell c LC/SU/BC Status 2170 - Direct Networked-MSC Summary2136 , c - Cell c LAC Status 2171,m - MSC m [B]X.25 Link Status2137,c - Cell c OTU/LMT Status 2180 - CCS7 Link Set Summary

2181 - CCS7 Link Set Specifics2182 - CCS7 Link Summary

2138,c - Cell c CDMA Equipment Status 2183 - CCS7 Link Specifics2139,c,n - Cell c CCC n CCU Status 2184 - CCS7 Point Code SS Status

A REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE

AB

C

D




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSDP Layout

• 2131 - Minicell Equipment - Status Page

• 2132 - Minicell Software Status Page

• 2134 - Minicell DS-1 Unit Status Page

• 2136 - Minicell LAC Status Page

• 2138 - Minicell CDMA Equipment Status Page

• 2139 - Minicell CCC CCU Status Page

• 2150 - TRKGRP Summary Page

• 2152 - DCS Minicell TRKGRP Status Page



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellVideo States of SDP Display


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Video States of SDP Display

Color Scheme In the PCS CDMA Minicell, the color red on an SDP generally

signifies a non-normal condition; the color green denotes normalcy.Other background colors are used to signify specific conditions thatmay or may not require attention.

SDP Video States Table The graphic below lists the more common video states seen on StatusDisplay Pages.

Steady or FlashingIndicators

The table below shows the alarm types for indicators.

Critical: white on red

Major : white on red

Minor: white on red

Normal: black on green steady

Active: black on green steady

critical

major

minor

<none>

act

• Standby: white on blue steady

• O.O.S.: black on red steady

• Unavail.: black on purple steady

• Alarm: white on red flashing

• Trouble: white on red steady

stby

oos

unav

alarm

trbl

LogicalState

TextDisplayed

ColorTerminal

critical alarm <none> or critical white on red

major alarm <none> or major white on red

minor alarm <none> or minor white on red

alarm alarm white on red




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Indicators—Black Text The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with black text.

Indicators—White Text The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with white text.

LogicalState

TextDisplayed

ColorTerminal

system normal <none> black on greenactive act black on green

out-of-service oos or <none> black on red

unavailable unav black on cyan

initialization pending Init black on magenta

overload ovld black on white

diagnose dgn black on red

inhibit inh black on white

indeterminate indt or <none> black on yellowbusy busy black on green

warning warn or <none> black on yellow

soft fault soft black on yellow

DS1 alarm ds1a black on red

OOS limit exceeded oos_ex black on red

WARNING isolated WARNING or<none>

black on yellow

LogicalState

TextDisplayed

ColorTerminal

unknown <none> white on black

standby stby white on blue

trouble trbl white on red

equipped equip white on black

growth growor <none>

white on magentablack on blue

initializing init white on magenta

idle idle white on black

reverse busy rbsy white on red





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indicators—Colored Text The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with colored text.

assigned asgn white on magenta

transient tran white on red

guard gard white on red

periodic reset rset white on redaudit aud white on magenta

no_psa (nopilot/sync/access)

<none> white on red

normal norm white on green

out-of-service isolated OOS ISOL white on red (Ring)

out-of-service normal OOS NORM white on red (Ring)

arr_oos <none> white on red

LogicalState

TextDisplayed

ColorTerminal

off-line OFL blue-green on red (Ring)

arr_warning <none > blue on yellow

blocked <none> blue on yellow

arr_active (automatic

radio reconfiguration)

<none > green on black

unequipped uneqor <none>

magenta on black red on yellow (Ring)

OTU alarm otu red on yellow

camp_on camp_on or <none> red on green

LAC alarm lac or <none> red on yellow

no_page <none> yellow on red




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellAPX Index

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................APX Index

2100 Snapshot Description The 2100 - APX Index page lists all the display pages that are

accessible for the application.

SDP Index Graphic The graphic below is SDP 2100: the APX INDEX.

Legend The APX INDEX gives a summary of the syntax to access a given SDPand a description of the information provided on that SDP.

SDP Access Example To view CDMA equipment status for cell 81, enter the command:2138,81

Dublin ECP 01 APX-1000 L7.0 ttyj-cdJ TTY 07SYS EMER CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR IMS CELL CDN CCS7 SYS NORMOVERLOAD SYS INH CU CU PERPH LINK MSC DCS TRUNK

CMD< 2100 - APX INDEX

CMD PAGE TITLE CMD PAGE TITLE2120 - APX System Status 2140 - DCS Status Summary2121 - System Equipage Summary 2141,d - DCS d Equipment Status2130 - Cell Site Status Summary 2142,d - DCS d TMS/MC Status2131,c - Cell c Equipment Sta tus 2143,d - DCS d DS-1/AFAC Status2132,c - Cell c Software Status 2150,d - DCS d TRKGRP Summary2133 , c - SI Cell c VRG Status 2151,d,t - DCS d TRKGRP t Status

2133,c,sg,a SII Cell c VR Status 2152,d,t - DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status2134,c - Cell c DS-1 Unit Status 2160 - CDN Status Summary2135,c - Cell c LC/SU/BC Status 2170 - Direct Networked-MSC Summary2136 , c - Cell c LAC Status 2171,m - MSC m [B]X.25 Link Status2137,c - Cell c OTU/LMT Status 2180 - CCS7 Link Set Summary

2181 - CCS7 Link Set Specifics2182 - CCS7 Link Summary

2138,c - Cell c CDMA Equipment Status 2183 - CCS7 Link Specifics2139,c,n - Cell c CCC n CCU Status 2184 - CCS7 Point Code SS Status

A REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE

SDP code Descriptiona Physical Antenna Face

c Minicell Site Numbers

d DCS Number

n CDMA Cluster Controller Number

sg Server Group

t Trunk Group Number

VR Voice Radio

VRG Voice Radio Groupm Mobile Switching Center



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSDP 2121


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................SDP 2121

Snapshot Description The 2121 - System Equipage Status page displays the disposition of the

Minicell sites.

2121 Sample The graphic below is a sample of the 2121 SDP. Each cell is shown bythe cell site number using the color codes (4-27) to indicate the cellstatus.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSDP 2131

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................SDP 2131

2131 Snapshot Description The 2131 - Minicell Equipment Status page displays the configuration

of the Minicell site hardware units and provides a status summary of each unit or group of units.

In addition, this page also has maintenance commands which can beused to:

• Change the Minicell hardware configuration

• Generate a Minicell status output message report

• Dump the Minicell maintenance request administrator queue(MRAQ)

2131 Sample The graphic below shows the 2131 SDP. The status of variousequipment groups is shown using the color codes (4-27).



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page

Overview The 2138 and 2139 SDPs are the only CDMA specific pages.

Screen The diagram below shows the 2138 Status Display Page.

Fields of the 2138 SDP Fields of interest in the 2138 SDP:

• Tells which CCC is equipped and its status

• Gives the operating channel number (set in translations) for theBBA





Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSample Status Display Page - 2139


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RC/V Screens Basics

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose Minicell configuration data, ranging from its operating frequencies toits equipage, is stored in a database. Any change in that Minicellconfiguration must be reflected in its database. This is done throughinteractive Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) screens.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellRC/V Screens Overview

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RC/V Screens Overview

Purpose of the RC/V

Screens

RC/V screens provide the user interface to a Minicell database.

RC/V Screen Functions andFeatures • Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) screens are used to change and

check on the configuration of a cell.

• All RC/V screens share the same “look and feel”.

• Inputs to the cell database corresponding to a given configurationare called translations.

• Some of the changes are service affecting.



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellAccess Manager Forms


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Access Manager Forms

Overview Forms are used to access the Access Manager, to view and set the

Minicell operating parameters.

Screen Formats Two different screen formats are used to access the 5ESS-2000 and theAccess Manager:

• Switch screen views relate to the 5ESS-2000 operating parameters

• Access Manager forms relate to the Minicell operating parameters

5ESS-2000 Switch Views The RC/V screens are grouped into 28 classes for accessing the 5ESS-2000 switch.

Access Manager Forms The forms of particular interest to the Minicell functioning are asfollows:

Reference See Lucent Technologies 235-118-251 for RC/V procedures.

For the recommended recommended translation parameter values forCDMA look up the CTSO Fax Flashes and Bulletins on the CD-ROM.

ecp Executive cellular processor

cell2 Basic Minicell equipage

ceqcom2 Specific Minicell equipage

ceqface Specific Minicell face equipage

ceqccu Specific Minicell CDMA CCU equipage.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell5ESS®-2000 Switch Views

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5ESS®-2000 Switch Views

Overview Switch views define the configuration of the switch that controls a

Minicell. Given the fact that they make it possible to change an entiresystem configuration, access to views is highly controlled.

Use of Switch Views Switch views are rarely used for cell site maintenance. One instance of access is as part of a cell update that requires re-configuration at theswitch, such as change in packet pipe size to accommodate new CCU.

Access to the switch views will normally be done under the control of aswitch technician.

Switch View RC/V Graphic The graphic below is a sample of the Recent Change and Verify

Classes for the 5ESS switch.

Reference For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies401-610-036 .



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellExample of Switch Views


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example of Switch Views

Format Switch views have a header that resembles SDP headers. The body of

the view lists and displays the value of the switch database fields thatare covered by that view.

The lower part of the view is a craftshell command line.

Switch Views Sample The graphic below is a sample of a 5ESS switch view.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellRC/V Access Manager Forms

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RC/V Access Manager Forms

RC/V Forms layout The graphic shows the common areas to the RC/V forms.

Form Essentials All RC/V forms share the same “look” and “feel”, and display threeessential elements:

1. User Prompt - an AUTOPLEX system feature that points you to afield in which you may enter information

2. RC/V Form Fields - place holders that store and display RC/V

information3. Help Message or System Status - Context-sensitive text that

prompts you to enter a value in a field or provides system-levelinformation

The Common Look Forms are arranged in screens, each of which contains a number of fields.

Screen numbers are displayed on the top-right corner.

Fields are assigned field numbers. The field names are arranged incolumns on the left of the form while the assigned numberscorresponding data is displayed on the right.Position of a given field name, on a given screen or field number maychange from time to time to accommodate different software releases.

Reference For more information on the access manager views see LucentTechnologies 401-610-036 .

User Prompt

Form Fields

Help Messageor System Status

Form Name

Screen Number



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellAccessing the RC/V Form


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Accessing the RC/V Form

Purpose Access to any RC/V form requires input of the form name at the

prompt of a data entry screen.

RC/V Access Screen This screen accepts legitimate values for RC/V screen names. Enteringa question mark (?) will list all allowed values.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 4-3. Procedure to Access RC/V Forms

To access an RC/V form:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type the form name at the prompt

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

2 Press Enter




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellInserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/VForm

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Inserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/V Form

Purpose When accessing the RC/V Forms, the user must declare if they are

going to insert, review without changing, or update information in theform.

Non-Updatable ParameterList

All the translation parameters can be changed and 'updated' throughRC/V screens. The translations will then be downloaded to the cells.However, some of the translations will not take effect immediately, dueto the need to reset the hardware or due to 'camp-on' for the live calls.These parameters are classified as 'non-updatable' parameters.

The 'non-updatable' TR (Trunk reservation) parameters eventually willtake effect through TR and/or the MRA audit. It may take a long time,

depending on how soon the audits come up. In addition, the audits haveup to five minutes (camp-on time) to reset the maintenance objectsbefore killing the live calls for the service-affecting TR parameter totake effect. It may be possible to unconditionally restore the associatedmaintenance objects or stable clear the cell to speed up the update onthe TR parameters. The actions described in the non-updatableparameter list apply to 'equipped' maintenance objects only. For'unequipping', the unit should be removed from service. Audits willchange the status of the unit from OOS to unequipped and clear all thenecessary software status fields.

This list can be found on the CD-ROM in the section on CTSO FaxFlashes and Bulletins.



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellInserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/VForm


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert, Review, or UpdateScreen Sample

The sample screen below shows the confirmation screen for the type of access required on the RC/V screen requested.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 4-4. Accessing the RC/V Forms

To insert, review, or update data in an RC/V form:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 First access that form by entering its name at the prompt of the formaccess screen. The resulting screen gives the choice of action.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Selection is done by entering the proper letter (I for insert, R for Review,

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

and U for update) at the prompt.

Result

The requested form is displayed with the mode selected.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellRequired Fields

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Required Fields

Identifying the Required

Fields

Some fields need to be populated with legal data before the form can

display the contents of the Minicell data base. These required fields areindicated by an asterisk (*).

A field that can be changed by another form is indicated by a (+).

ECP Sample Screen The sample screen below is the ecp screen 1 of 15. Only the first field isrequired to identify the executive cellular processor accessed.

Reference For more information on the switch views see 401-610-036 .



Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellRequired Fields -- Results


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Required Fields -- Results

Completed Form Once the required fields have been populated, the remaining fields are

automatically filled and displayed on the completed form.

ECP Sample Populated The screen below shows the ecp screen 1 of 15 populated with thesetup information for Executive Cellular Processor Identification 1.

Getting Help At any time, help is available from any RC/V form screen. The helpscreens are accessed by entering a question mark (?) at the prompt.





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellGetting Help For RC/V Screens

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Getting Help For RC/V Screens

Sample RC/V Help Screens The figure below shows representative help screens.




Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicellceqccu Form


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ceqccu Form

Purpose of the Form The ceqccu form indicates the status of CCU equipment.

ceqccu Screen Sample The screen sample below is ceqccu screen 1 of 2 populated with theshelf equipage settings for cell 168.





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicellcell2 Form

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................cell2 Form

Purpose of the Form The cell2 form is a multi screen form used to make both hardware and

call processing assignments. Screen formats change with the fielddisplayed.

Failure to properly update the "cell2" RC/V form when transitioning asystem to a PERMANENT CDMA ON state may cause a loss of CDMA traffic after a RTR initialization of the ECP.

cell 2 Sample Screen The screen sample below shows cell2, screen 1 of 14 populated withthe information for cell site number 8. The fields marked with a plus(fields 2, 3, and 4) are optional.







401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicellceqface Form

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ceqface Form

Purpose of the Form The ceqface form contains call processing parameters for an individual

face.

ceqface Screen Sample The sample screen below is ceqcom2, screen 1 of 10 shown populatedwith settings for face 3 of cell site number 8.




Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicellceqface Form


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Getting Information

Overview

Purpose Two sets of information tools will help you to perform your tasks.These tools are as follows:

• The AUTOPLEX® documentation on CD-ROM (The interfacefor reading information products on the CD-ROM)

• The Schematic Drawings (SDs)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA MinicellSchematic Drawings

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Schematic Drawings

Overview Schematic diagrams (SDs) are multi-page (sheet) documents. They

support a particular application. Of direct interest to maintenancepersonnel will be the SDs that relate to cabling and connections. TheseSDs document the circuit paths used in troubleshooting.

Schematic DrawingsSample

The drawing below shows the drawing identification informationlocated in the lower right corner of all schematic drawings.

Layout All SDs provide an SD number, a sheet number, and an issue number.Coordinates to items in the SD are provided in the margin.

Additional information includes proprietary information and productname.

SD Sheets SDs are arranged by A to H sheets. These sheets are arranged asfollows:

SchematicDrawing Number

Sheet Number

Issue Number

Coordinates

Drawing Size

Product Identification

Proprietary Information

H

G

F

9876

SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE

PCS-CDMAPRIMARY RADIO FRAME

CIRCUIT

LUCENT SD-2R-380-01

DECEMBER 6, 1995

SHEET

B42

DWG SIZE

C2

ISSUE

W2

SDSheets

Sheet Name Sheet Contains

A Index Issue date(s), sheet indices to all SD pages





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SD issue number is located on the top right corner of sheet A1.

Sheet A1 contains a count of the total number of sheets in the SD in thelower right corner of sheet A1.

Page designations, such as A1 or B17, are located on the lower right of each sheet.

B FSs (FunctionalSchematics)

Graphic information about the circuit(s)

C Apparatus Figures Component specific information, such as AT&Tcomcodes and manufacturer numbers

D Circuit Notes Explanation of notes referenced within FSs

E Circuit Description Text description of the circuits appearing in SD-2R349 (Note that most SDs do not contain a CD)

F Not used in this SD Not used in this SD

G CADs (CablingDiagrams)

Specific interconnection cabling information

H BDs (Block Diagrams ) High-level interconnections between major units

SDSheets

Sheet Name Sheet Contains




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 PCS CDMA Minicell

Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose There are essentially two different levels of maintenance:

• Preventive (or Routine) maintenance covers the activitiesnecessary to prevent cell malfunction

• Corrective maintenance covers the activities that take place tocorrect a cell malfunction.

Excluding housekeeping tasks (leaf and snow removal, cleaning of filters, etc.), most of the preventive maintenance, such as routinediagnostics, can be done from the PCSC.

Contents Maintenance Overview 5-3• Operation vs. Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4• Reasons for Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5• The Maintenance Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6• Maintenance Targets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7• Required Maintenance Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8• Domestic Storage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9

Preventive Maintenance 5-13• Preventive Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14• Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks - - - - 5-17• Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment - - - - -5-20• Building and Environmental Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21• Servicing the Heat Exchangers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

Corrective Maintenance 5-25• Test Equipment Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26• Precautionary Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27• Automatic Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28• Manual Routine Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30• Maintenance Records - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-32• Corrective Maintenance Triggers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-33• Maintenance Actions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-36• Maintenance Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-37• Maintenance Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39• Maintenance States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40• Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages - - - - 5-41• Conditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42• Unconditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-44• Conditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-45• Unconditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-46• Diagnose Command - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47• Stop a Diagnostic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48• Initialize a Site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-49• Switch to Redundant Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50• Operational Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-51• Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose - - - - - - - - - 5-52• Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -- Examples - - - - - - - - 5-53



PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance Overview

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose This unit is designed to enable you to:

• Name major maintenance commands

• Define maintenance actions and maintenance states

• List conditions that trigger a warning message during a restoreprocess

• Identify the conditions under which the diagnose maintenanceaction can be applied to a redundant unit in the active state





PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceReasons for Maintenance


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Reasons for Maintenance

Purpose The purpose of maintenance is to minimize the possibility and effects

of a system failure. To support that purpose, the maintenance processmust be able, in the event of a system failure, to collect information asto its cause, and to provide the tools necessary to correct the situation.

Objectives The objective of the maintenance process is to maximize systemavailability at the lowest cost possible. Ways to reduce these costsinclude the elimination of unnecessary initialization, diagnostics, andcell site visits.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceThe Maintenance Process

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................The Maintenance Process

Maintenance Activities/

Maintenance Levels

The maintenance process is carried out through different paths:

• Preventive (or routine) maintenance is concerned with tasks thatwill reduce the probability of failure. Examples of such tasks arecleaning and monitoring of performance.

• Corrective maintenance is concerned with the speedy eliminationof a cause or potential source of failure. An example of correctivemaintenance is the replacement of failing circuit boards.

• On-demand maintenance concerns tasks that are performed on aMinicell, even though the Minicell is still operating properly. Anexample of on-demand maintenance is the addition of capacity.

Responsibilities Responsibilities for maintenance are shared between the cell site (thatreports and analyzes any Minicell malfunction to the ECP), the ECP(that attempts to correct these malfunctions through software), and theMinicell technician (who performs any required physical intervention).



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceMaintenance Targets


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Maintenance Targets

Overview PCS CDMA Minicell maintenance addresses specific targets:

• Facility• Cabinets

• Equipment

Facility Performance and scheduling of facility maintenance (building, antenna,access roads, fences, etc.) are determined according to local practices,and may be contracted out.

For instance, maintenance and repairs to the Minicell antenna mast maybe provided by an outside vendor, but Minicell technicians would be

expected to visually inspect the antenna whenever they happen to be atthe cell site. Such inspection would include checking the guy wires,tower lights, grounding connections, etc.

Cabinets Maintenance of the cabinets (primary and growth radio cabinets, andpower cabinets) involves both physical and functional inspection,either on schedule or as part of a diagnostic action to respond to anequipment failure.

Equipment In addition to cell specific maintenance tasks, it is recommended thatperiodic maintenance be performed on the test and other maintenanceequipment. Such maintenance should be conducted according tomanufacturer’s instructions. Of critical importance will be themaintenance and calibration of reference standards, such as calibratedattenuators used to calibrate performance measurement equipment.

Inspection and Testing Some of the inspections may involve actual measurements. Forinstance, verification of the cell ground connection may require ameasure of its electrical resistance.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceRequired Maintenance Equipment

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Required Maintenance Equipment

Overview Equipment required for maintenance:

• Radio and Control Equipment• Power Measurement Equipment

• Building and Facility Maintenance Equipment

Radio and ControlEquipment

Radio and control equipment includes frequency generators, analyzers(Test Sets), and calibrated connectors and cables.

Power MeasurementEquipment

Test sets can be used to measure and analyze RF power. In addition,equipment such as multimeters should be available to check theoperation of AC and DC components.

Building and FacilityMaintenance Equipment

To maintain the Minicell site, it will usually be necessary to have toolsand equipment for general “handyman” work available at the site.






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceDomestic Storage

• Exposure to 95% relative humidity at 40°C (104°F) for no longerthan 96 hours.

• Atmosphere must be clear of airborne contaminants such as, butnot limited to, oils and salts.

• Adequate protective measures must be taken to prevent PhysicalDamage to Cabinet.

• If this operation is performed outdoors, it must be conducted on adry day and all steps in this procedure must be achieved.

• If this operation is performed indoors, it must be conducted in awell ventilated area.

• Ensure appropriate environmental protection measures are takenbefore opening the front, side, and rear door(s) of the cabinet.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 5-1.

Cabinet Damage

There is a possibility of ESD damage.

Wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside of the Minicell cabinet before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure the ESD wrist strap is grounded to the Minicell cabinet. ESD plugs are provided both in the front and back of the cabinet.

Cabinet Damage

The components in the cabinet could be damaged by adverseweather.

If this procedure is performed outdoors it must be conducted on a dry day and all steps in this procedure achieved.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove protective wrapping, cushioning, and exterior corner bumpers.Use Extreme Caution not to scratch, scuff, or scrape cabinet when usingsharp instruments to pierce and remove protective packaging. Allpackaging removed must be handled in a manner that is in compliance

with all applicable local, state, and federal recycling regulations.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install the VCI-105 and VCI-111 on the interior right-hand side asviewed looking into the cabinet from the cabinet front door. Locationmust be approximately 20 inches from the floor and 2 inches from the





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CRC for the VCI-105, and approximately 24 inches from the floor and2 inches from the CRC for the VCI-111.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If cabinet is installed at cell site and ancillary hardware housing is inplace and rear of cabinet is sealed, skip to the final step.

WARNING

............................................................................................................................................................................

Hazardous Chemicals

Danger of exposure to potentially hazardous chemicals.

Personnel involved with cleaning the cabinet must use necessary personal protective equipment (PPE), and be trained in its proper use. The most common ways personnel could potentially be exposed to the materials listed in these guidelines are through the skin, inhalation, ingestion, and through the eyes. The information about the required personal protective equipment required may be obtained from material safety data sheet (MSDS).

4 Prepare the cabinet for external protection.

5 Dampen ( Do Not Soak ) one entire clean cloth with isopropyl alcohol

(IPA). Wipe the area around the PDA and AIP. Repeat this process untilthe final cleaning of the surface leaves no residue on the cloth. After thearea is clean of debris, wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth and removeany excess IPA.

6 All waste generated must be handled in a manner that is in compliancewith all applicable local, state, and federal regulations.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Place external protection.

(This step in unnecessary if cabinet is installed at cell site and ancillaryhardware housing is in place and rear of cabinet is sealed.)

Cut a piece of Film, Cor-Pak‰ EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene)or MIL-B-131, Class 1 Barrier Material large enough to cover the PDAand AIP area.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Position the drab side of the film facing cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Fold bottom corners over............................................................................................................................................................................

10 Place a continuous piece of tape along entire bottom edge (PackagingTape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven Cloth Backing, Color Class1).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Fold top corners over.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Tape right and left sides using a continuous piece of tape overlappingthe bottom tape (Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, WovenCloth Backing, Color Class 1).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

13 Insert VCI-101, between film and cabinet (for use only with MIL-B-131, Class 1 Barrier Material).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

14 Place a continuous piece of tape along entire top edge overlapping sides(Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven Cloth Backing,Color Class 1).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

15 Verify that all seams, corners, and edges are taped.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

16 Unlatch and close cabinet front door and replace side and rear door(s) if

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

removed.

Result

The cabinets are prepared for storage for up to one year.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preventive Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................OverviewOverview

Purpose Preventive maintenance is done to prevent cell malfunction and mayidentify potential sources of Minicell failures before they interfere withservice. For instance, preventive maintenance may locate a failingboard in a redundant unit, and thus allow its timely replacement.

Outside the Minicell Already mentioned earlier, some of the preventive maintenance tasksoutside a Minicell are often contracted out. They include:

• Visual inspection of antenna mast, grounding, etc., to identify andremedy potential sources of hazards

• Maintenance of the site, such as removing snow or trimmingshrubberies

Drive Testing is a maintenance task performed on a periodic basis tomeet regulatory requirements and to identify progressive degradationof performance. It involves measuring and comparing wireless signalsto original specifications.

Inside the Minicell Preventive maintenance inside the Minicell covers:

• Inspection of cabinet hardware to verify proper functioning of fans, batteries, intrusions switches, and other hardware

• Automatic software diagnostics to identify failing units, especiallyfor standby equipment (such diagnostics are scheduled tominimize impact on service)

• Inspection of ancillary equipment, such as air conditioning, orlights to verify its proper functioning and/or to replace worn outparts




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenancePreventive Maintenance Schedule

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Overview Preventive maintenance is done according to a schedule that reflects

local operating requirements.

Sample Preventive Check The table below shows some suggestions for preventive maintenancechecks on PCS CDMA Minicells.

Equipment Test List The cell site ETL is divided into equipment areas: radio/controlequipment, power and battery equipment, and building and

environmental equipment. The Lucent Technologies Practice containsa reference to the procedural information required to perform themaintennce task.

Radio/Control EquipmentTask List

The table below lists the tasks necessary to monitor the operations of the Minicell.

• Radio/Control Equipment– Clean Fans 6 Mo.

FCC Measurements– Perform Setup Radio FCC Measurements 1 Mo.– Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements 1 Mo.

• Power and Battery Plant Equipment 1 Mo.

Storage Battery 1 Mo.– Check Float Voltage Alarm 12 Mo.– Check Fuse Alarms 12 Mo.

Rectifier– Check High- and Low-Voltage and 12 Mo.

Rectifier Failure Alarms

PREVENTIVE CHECK INTERVAL

TASK MAINTENANCE TASK FREQUENCY REFERENCE

1 Perform and Review Functional Tests Specified in cellsite translations

401-660-101

401-703-203

2 Perform and Review Software Audits Controlled by RCC 401-660-101

401-703-203

3 Perform and Review Service Measurements Daily 401-610-135

CIB 117-8A





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lucent TechnologiesPower & Battery Equipment

Task List

The table below lists the tasks to monitor and maintain the physicalcondition of the Minicell.

Building & EnvironmentalEquipment Task List

The table below lists the tasks to maintain the the Minicell’senvironment.

4 Perform and Review Plant Measurements Controlled by RCC 254-341-116

5 Perform and Review Voice ChannelSelection Activity Measurements

Monthly 401-660-108

6 Perform and Review Power-LevelMeasurements

Monthly 401-660-108



7 Check Generator Fuel Level Weekly 401-703-300

8 Operate Generator Under Load Monthly 401-703-3009 Check Battery Float Voltage 6 months 157-601-701

10 Replace Maintenance Control UnitAlkaline Battery

Annually 401-703-300


11 Perform Visual Inspection Weekly N/A12 Check Tower Light Weekly N/A

13 Check Heat Exchanger & Fans Weekly 401-703-301

14 Clear Brush away from Cabinets Weekly N/A

15 Vacuum and wash fan screens Monthly 401-703-301

15.1 Flush Heat Exchanger Core 6 Months 401-703-301

16 (Indoor Only) Change front and rearMinicell air filters

Monthly 401-703-300

17 (Indoor Only) Check Emergency Lighting Monthly N/A18 (Indoor Only) Check Exhaust Fan Monthly N/A

19 Check Fire & Safety Equipment Monthly N/A

20 (Indoor Only) Check Air Dryer 6 Months N/A

21 Dust Cell Site Equipment 6 Months N/A




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


22 Clean Fire Alarm Sensor 6 Months N/A

23 Check Peripheral Alarms

(Door, Fire, AC, Heat)

6 Months 401-703-301

24 (Indoor Only) Check Smoke Alarm 6 Months N/A25 (Indoor Only) Check Heaters 6 Months N/A

26 Perform Set Up Radio FCC Measurements Annually 401-660-100

27 Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements Annually 401-660-100



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceRadio/Control Equipment Routine MaintenanceTasks


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks

Task 1 - Perform and

Review Functional Tests

Functional tests can be performed on a manual or a scheduled basis.

For the latter case, functional tests are initiated and controlled from theECP; the cell site performs the requested functional test and returns theresults to the ECP.

Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not activefor calls during testing. Running functional tests on a regularlyscheduled basis (routine functional tests) is a way of checking theintegrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths. The frequency of routine functional tests is specified in the cell site translations (unlikeroutine diagnostic testing, the exact time of day cannot be specified).The test results, pass/fail, are reported to the ECP, when the tests are

run manually. Only the failed results are reported when the tests are runautomatically.

Functional tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit,test it, and then free it for normal call processing traffic. These testsverify the operation of the following cell site equipment:

• Transmit path

• Receive path

• Access channel

• Paging channel

• Sync channel

• Pilot channel

• Traffic channels

• Antenna

Task 2 - Perform andReview Software Audits

Software audits can be performed on a manual or a scheduled basis.For the latter case, the audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP;the cell site performs the requested audit and returns the results to theECP.

Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service. Runningsoftware audits on a regularly scheduled basis (routine audits) is a wayof detecting, confining, and correcting software data errors before theerrors adversely affect system performance. When audits detect errors,they recover any lost resources and, if necessary, invoke appropriatesystem initialization.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


The frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the RadioControl Complex (RCC); there is no scheduling translation associatedwith audits. Audit test errors are reported to the ECP.

Task 3 - Perform andReview ServiceMeasurements

Service measurements provide statistical information (cumulativecounts) on call traffic, various failure events, and the usage of systemresources. The data is used to troubleshoot the system, to evaluate howwell the system is operating, and to engineer its growth.

Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis (scheduledhourly by the ECP) or a manual basis. On a scheduled basis, the RCCcontinually gathers service measurements and reports the data hourly tothe ECP.

At the ECP, the collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files, onefile for every hour of the day. The files are overwritten with new data

beginning at the start of a new day.The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and thencopied to the OMP.

Task 4 - Perform andReview Plant

Measurements

Plant measurements provide information on the performance of cellsite equipment including failure occurrences, failure durations (out-of-service time), audit failures, diagnostic failures, and initialization. Thedata can be used to evaluate cell site hardware deficiencies and theirimpact on subscriber service.

The number of failures is the number of times a hardware unit is taken

out-of-service automatically. That count does not include manualremovals.

Plant measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis or manualbasis. Scheduling of plant measurements is controlled exclusively bythe RCC, which automatically reports the data to the ECP every day atthe set time.

Task 5 - Perform andReview Voice Channel

Selection ActivityMeasurements

Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements providedetailed information about traffic movement within a cellular systemby recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processing

events at specified cell sites. VCSA can also be run in a special mode tocollect data only for a single specified mobile. Each record indicateswhat type of event occurred, the time it occurred, the telephone numberof the involved mobile station, and other data.

VCSA measurements can be collected only if a VCSA study isrequested (manual basis). For the time period specified by the user, the





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECPduring and after the measurements are made.

Task 6 - Perform andReview Power-level

Measurements

Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information aboutthe distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site. Thisstudy can also collect the distribution of noise detected by trafficchannels. The data is used to investigate system troubles, add or alterradio frequencies, fine-tune a system, and plan growth.

Power-level measurements can be collected only if a PLM study isrequested (manual basis). For the time period specified by the user, theRCC gathers the PLMs and reports the data to the ECP after the studyis completed.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceLucent Technologies Power and BatteryEquipment

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment

Task 7 - Check Generator

Fuel Level

If a Standby Generator Cabinet is used, its fuel level must be checked

on a weekly basis. This can be done by removing the cap on thegenerator fuel tank and observing the fuel level indicated on the cap dipstick.

Task 8 - Operate GeneratorUnder Load

The Standby Generator vendor requires that the engine be operatedunder load for 30 minutes once per month to satisfy the manufacturer’swarranty. To provide this feature, a programmable maintenancecontroller is provided to run the engine and apply load in a fail-safemanner. If the engine fails to start and assume the load, the systemrectifiers continue to power the load.

The four procedures required to program the maintenance controllerinvolve programming the following:

1. The current time, the day of week and the date

2. The month and date of the 12 monthly 30-minute maintenanceintervals

3. The on and off time for the 30-minute maintenance intervals

4. The alarm relay

Detailed instructions for these procedures can be found in Chapter 13of 401-703-300 .

Task 9 - Check BatteryFloat Voltage

To insure the operation of the batteries, check the battery float voltagesemi-annually per Lucent Technologies Practice 157-601-701 .

Task 10 - ReplaceMaintenance Control Unit

Alkaline Battery

The Generator Cabinet Maintenance Control Unit contains an alkalinebattery that should be replaced annually. A battery log is provided torecord battery replacement dates. (Do not use any type of cleaningagent on the Maintenance Control Unit’s liquid crystal display.)



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceBuilding and Environmental Equipment


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Building and Environmental Equipment

Task 11 - Perform Visual

Inspection

Visual inspections at the cell site should be made on a weekly basis.

Typical visual indicators to look for are listed below:• Alarm lamp indication

• Smoke

• Broken cables

• Blown fuses

• Clogged heat exchanger screens.

Task 12 - Check TowerLight

A visual check of the tower light should be made each week.

Task 13 - Check HeatExchanger and Fans

Verify that heat exchanger and cabinet fans are functioning. If there isindication of a problem, replace the faulty unit.

Task 14 - Clear Brush awayfrom Cabinets

Brush, grass, and tree limbs should be removed from the immediatevicinity of the cabinets.

Task 15 - Vacuum andWash Fan Screens

Cabinet fan screens must be kept free of insects and other debris. Thiscan be done with a portable industrial vacuum. The screens should alsobe washed with a medium cleaning solution or brushed to removedebris.

Task 15.1 - Flush HeatExchanger Core

The external sides of the heat exchanger cores should be flushed every6 months with a non-acid, self rinsing, core cleaner . See "Servicing theHeat Exchangers" on page 5-23 for more information.

Task 16 - (Indoor Only)Change Front & Rear

Minicell Air Filters

The Indoor Primary Minicell Cabinet has an air filter on its front doorand rear panel. These filters must be removed and replaced on amonthly basis.

Task 17 - (Indoor Only)

Check Emergency Lighting

If the cabinet area is equipped with an emergency lighting system, it

should be checked on a monthly basis per local procedures.

Task 18 - (Indoor Only)Check Exhaust Fan

If the cabinet area is equipped with an exhaust fan, it should be checkedon a monthly basis per local instructions.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceBuilding and Environmental Equipment

Task 19 - Check Fire andSafety Equipment

Check the service due dates on all fire and safety equipment. Contact aqualified fire & safety equipment vendor for maintenance as specifiedby local instructions.

Task 20 - (Indoor Only)Check Air Dryer

If the cabinet area is equipped with an air dryer, its operation should bechecked on a semi-annual basis per local instructions.

Task 21 - Dust Cell SiteEquipment

This section is under review. ESD is a major consideration here.

Task 22 - Clean Fire AlarmSensor

The fire alarm sensor should be checked and any accumulation of dustor other foreign debris should be removed.

Task 23 - Check PeripheralAlarms

Verify that all peripheral alarms are functioning properly. This includesdoor, fire, AC, and heat alarms. Detailed instructions can be found in

this manual.

Task 24 - (Indoor Only)Check Smoke Alarm

The smoke alarm should be tested and verified for its properfunctioning. If it is battery powered, the battery should be replacedduring this process.

Task 25 - (Indoor Only)Check Heaters

All heaters should be tested and verified that they are functional. Thethermostatic control should be tested to ensure that the heaters areactivated at the proper temperature level.

Task 26 - Perform Set UpRadio FCC Measurements

The FCC requires that Set Up Radio test measurements be made on anannual basis. Detailed instructions regarding these measurements canbe found in 401- 660-100 .

Task 27 - Perform VoiceRadio FCC Measurements

The FCC requires that Voice Radio test measurements be made on anannual basis. Detailed instructions regarding these measurements canbe found in 401-660-100 .



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceServicing the Heat Exchangers


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Servicing the Heat Exchangers

Purpose The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the

air-to-air type that provides thermal environmental control for theseelectronic equipment cabinets.

Components The heat exchangers consist of an Ambient Fan, Internal Fan,Microcontroller, a heater cartridge, and a sheet metal housing. TheMicrocontroller, which operates from a 26 V DC source, provides thelogic to perform the following:

• Vary the speed of the Internal and Ambient Fans to maintain theinternal cabinet temperature between 0° and 65° C

• Control of the Heater in maintaining the internal cabinettemperature at or above 0° C during cold cabinet temperatures

• Provide alarms for fan failures, heater failures, cabinet high andlow temperature conditions both on the heat exchangers and theAlarm Facilities Interface

Alarm Conditions The heat exchangers report alarms under the following conditions:

• Loss of 24 V DC power to the heat exchanger

• Cabinet internal air temperature below 0° C

• Cabinet internal air temperature above 65° C

Cleaning the Screens The following tasks should be carried out on a weekly basis:

• Inspect the screens on the exterior of the cabinet

• Brush to remove anything blocking the air flow

If the material blocking the air flow resists brushing, wash off with anappropriate cleaning solution.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 5-2. Flushing the Core

WARNINGThe heat exchanger can be damaged if the incorrect clening

solution is used.

Follow the cleaning solution manufacturers instruction’s for handling the solution.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Every six months clean the external side of the heat exchanger cores byflushing with a non-acid, self rinsing, core cleaner, using the followingprocedure:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Turn off power to the heat exchanger

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check to see all the internal components are protected (check that thedoor is closed securely)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Spray the cleaning solution back and forth across the upper screen of theheat exchanger to sufficiently wet the heat exchanger surface

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

4 Turn the heat exchanger power back on

Replacing the Blowers If a blower needs to be replaced, do so according to the manufacturer’s

instructions included with the replacement blower.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Corrective Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose Corrective maintenance is event driven. Except for repairs required byphysical damage to the cell, corrective maintenance will usually betriggered by an alarm.

Corrective MaintenanceDescription

Corrective maintenance addresses the detection of failing units while inservice.

By contrast, Preventive (or Routine) maintenance covers the activitiesnecessary to prevent cell malfunction, before an outage occurs.

Procedures to remedy a failing unit, whether it has been diagnosed aspart of preventive or corrective maintenance, are the same once thecause of failure has been identified.

PCSC Level These are maintenance actions that do not need intervention at the cell.These actions are software initiated, such as through a restorecommand to reset the cell after an outage.

Minicell Level This type of maintenance corresponds to the need to replace a Minicellcomponent.

Advanced This level of maintenance corresponds to situations where correctiveactions require expert assistance. Examples of such situations would bethe replacement of components destroyed by lightning.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceTest Equipment Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Test Equipment Maintenance

Overview Test equipment needs to be maintained to ensure that its outputs are

meaningful.

Equipment MaintenanceChecks

The components that need to be maintained are cables and probes, aswell as calibration devices such as attenuators.

Maintenance that should be performed according to manufacturer’sspecifications also includes ensuring that the software used is up-to-date.



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenancePrecautionary Steps


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Precautionary Steps

ESD Procedures Following proper ESD practices is required whenever handling circuit

packs or working inside a Minicell cabinet.

ESD Reference Follow the electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures listed in401-660-125 , chapters 1 and 4. If using the Lucent TechnologiesAutoplex Documentation CD-ROM, search for “esd.”

When handling equipment or working in the backplane area, agrounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn to protect the equipmentfrom electrostatic discharge (ESD). The following guidelines should beused when handling circuit packs.

• Turn off power before inserting or removing a circuit pack (unlessotherwise specified by the procedure)

• Carry the circuit pack in its packing materials to the replacementsite before removing it from packaging (do not remove the circuitpack from the box and walk with it).

• Check the identification code before replacing a circuit pack toensure the proper board is being used.

• Identify and count circuit packs before removing the pack from itsantistatic packaging material.

Other Precautions Whenever handling cables and connections:• Avoid sharp bends

• Follow required procedures for the handling of connections,especially those requiring the use of torque wrenches

Never disconnect a live RF cable or apply power to an RF unit that is ina transmit mode.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceAutomatic Diagnostic Tests

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Automatic Diagnostic Tests

Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic tests are run:

• Automatically on schedule as part of routine maintenance• Automatically by software control when a fault is detected

• Under manual control

Before a diagnostic test is run, the unit to be tested will beautomatically (or must be manually) placed out of service.

Grouping Tests that are performed automatically by the PCSC are run in groups,and they address specific areas of a wireless system.

Within each group, individual tests are broken into phases, which arethen broken down into segments.

When a test fails, the user interface displays the number of the phaseand segment that failed, enabling the identification of the failing unit.

Locating a Failing Unit Each diagnostic test is supported by a Trouble Locating Procedure(TLP) that identifies the suspect unit(s) at fault when the diagnostic

Test Name DescriptionAL Alarm Diagnostic

BBA BCR-BIU-ACU Diagnostic

CAT Clock and Tone Diagnostic

CCC CDMA Cluster Controller Diagnostic

CCU CDMA Channel Unit Diagnostic

CPI Communications Processor Interface Diagnostic

CPU Core Processing Unit Diagnostic

CRTU CDMA Radio Test Unit DiagnosticDCCH Digital Control Channel Diagnostics

DL Data Link Diagnostic

DS1 Digital Switch Interface Diagnostic

MEM Memory Diagnostic

NCI Network Control Interface Diagnostic

SCT Synchronized Clock and Tone Diagnostic



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceAutomatic Diagnostic Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

encounters a failure. The location of suspect units at fault is given inhard-copy table format.

Out-of-Service Limits Some activities will be rejected if the OOS limit is exceeded. In orderto allow these activities a separate OOS maintenance limit exists.

Interpreting FailingMessages

Messages are described in Lucent’s AUTOPLEX® Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000 Series II Cell Site

Diagnostic Test Descriptions401-660-101

.

For More Information For a complete listing of manual call input messages, see the latestissue of the Lucent’s Cell Site Input/Output (I/O) Manual, 401-660-107 .




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceManual Routine Diagnostics

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Manual Routine Diagnostics

Purpose Manual routine diagnostics are performed under operator control to

check on the health of the entire Minicell, circuit by circuit.

Diagnostic Sequence The list below shows the sequence of commands used to diagnose theMinicell.

CAUTIONService Outage

A stable clear will cause service outage for approximately 8 minutes.

Perform the test without the stable clear or run in off hours.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 5-3. Diagnostic Description

Prior to running the test, it is necessary to invoke the following:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Stable clear command, to ensure that the Minicell is using the properoperating parameters

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Selective cell site message (scsm) to display the ROP entries that relateto the Minicell

(Routine diagnostics verify all circuits, and therefore may take over one

hour to complete, thus the value of the scsm for monitoring of Minicellactivities.)

– init:cell#:sc Initiate Stable Clear– alw:cell#,scsm Allow Selective Cell Site Messaging– exc:cell#,rtdiag Perform Diagnostics– inh:cell#,scsm Inhibit SCSM



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceManual Routine Diagnostics


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Selective cell site messages will need to be disabled once the routine

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

diagnostics have been run.

Systems Response

Upon receiving an input command, the system acknowledges thecommand with one of the following messages:

• OK = Good. The message was received; the appropriate processwas initiated; and work was completed.

• IP = In Progress. Request received and initiated. Further outputwill follow.

• RL = Repeat later. Request cannot be executed now because of unavailable system resources, such as system overload, excessivequeue lengths, or the requested process is busy.

• NG = No Good. The message was received; the appropriateprocess was initiated, but the request conflicts with the currentsystem or equipment status. For example, action was requestedfor a unit that is being diagnosed.

• PF = Printout Follows: The request was received and action willbe taken. A printout will follow sometime later to explain, indetail, the results of the work initiated by the input message. Theprintout will be a termination report that may include the result of the work initiated by the input message.

Once the diagnostics have been completed, the test results (All TestsPassed (ATP) or Some Test Failed (STF)) are displayed.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceMaintenance Records

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Maintenance Records

Need for Maintenance

Records

Maintenance Records keep a history of maintenance activities. They

are necessary to document Minicell operation, and facilitate theperformance of any required corrective action.

Types of MaintenanceRecords

Typical records would include:

• Dates of maintenance visits to the Minicell

• Description of maintenance tasks performed

• Repair and performance logs, such as performance measurements

• Reference documents (such as Minicell installation andengineering diagrams)

• Up-to-date Minicell configuration data (e.g., software release)

Guidelines for Maintenanceof Records

Maintenance records should be kept at the Minicell site formaintenance personnel use and for audit purposes.

Maintenance records should be neatly organized in folders, withdrawings and logs kept in a “clean” format, to ensure their long-termavailability.



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceCorrective Maintenance Triggers


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Corrective Maintenance Triggers

Overview Preventive maintenance may identify potential sources of Minicell

failures before they interfere with service. For instance, preventivemaintenance may locate a failing board in a redundant unit, and thusallow its timely replacement.

Corrective maintenance addresses the detection of failing units while inservice.

Procedures to remedy a failing unit, whether it has been diagnosed aspart of preventive or corrective maintenance, are the same once thecause of failure has been identified.

Sources of Errors Sources of errors that will require corrective actions are as follows:

• Hardware errors due to, for instance, a faulty microprocessor, or asynthesizer out of lock (these errors are detected by on-board self tests)

• Software errors due to, for instance, loss of program control (suchas synchronization signal)

• Voice channel errors (such as access/failure rates)

• Mobile errors due to, for instance, poor transmission conditions.

Handling of Errors All errors are analyzed by the Hardware Error Handler (HEH). HEH

receives errors from hardware units, functional tests, and call-processing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore orremove) is needed and then issues a request to the MaintenanceRequest Administrator (MRA) to carry out the action.

Depending upon the severity of the error, HEH either takes immediaterecovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefinednumber of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH prints onlyan error report.

A throttling mechanism at the cell limits the number of alarms reportedon a per board basis to the ECP. Within each 15-minute period, HEHreports no more than one alarm for any particular board.

HEH Error Analysis HEH performs the following types of error analysis:

• Immediate Action

• All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis

• Single Time-period Analysis




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Fail/Pass Analysis

• Leaky Bucket Analysis

Depending on the severity of the error, the MRA will trigger a messagefor corrective action, or the error will only be reported on the ROP.

Immediate Action For severe errors that are service-affecting, such as loss of communication between the MSC and the cell, HEH takes immediateaction. For most on-board hardware errors, HEH will request aconditional restore of the suspect unit.

The conditional restore maintenance action schedules an event orprocess to restore the suspect unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test.If the unit fails the diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. Thefailed unit remains in the out-of-service state.

All Tests Pass (ATP)Analysis For an HEH-initiated conditional restore request, if the unit passes alldiagnostic tests, the unit is restored to service and HEH adds a count toan ATP counter for the unit. If that count exceeds an assigned thresholdwithin a predefined time period (typically three in 40 minutes or five in24 hours), HEH will request a conditional remove of the unit.(Possibly, the diagnostic tests for the unit are not robust enough todetect the problem, or the problem is external to the unit.) This type of error analysis prevents a recovery cycle that might otherwise continueindefinitely.

Single Time-periodAnalysis Refers to the use of error counters assigned to each hardware unit (DS1,DFI, CAT, and so on). If an error count for a unit remains below apredefined threshold for a specific period of time, HEH clears thecounter. This type of error analysis is based on the theory that if a unithas remained reliable for an extended period of time, its error historyshould be forgotten completely. A timer value of 40 minutes is used.

Fail/Pass Analysis HEH performs this type of error analysis on call-processing detectederrors such as voice channel confirmation failures. When the number of failures exceeds some predefined value relative to the number of successful attempts (such as 2400 failures in 4000 attempts), HEHtakes recovery action.

Leaky Bucket Analysis Refers to the decrementing of non-zero error counters for theconfigurable hardware units. The decrementing is done at set timeintervals. This technique is more flexible than a simple analysis basedon the number of errors in a single fixed period of time.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

That is, the count is incremented each time the error being trackedoccurs on the circuit involved. If a specified number of errors haveaccumulated in a specific amount of time, the circuit is usually takenout-of-service. If the error has not occurred in a given amount of time,the count will be decremented. If the count reaches zero, the error block is released.

Reference For more information on HEH messages, see the 401-610-055 , 401-610-057 and 401-610-107 manuals.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceMaintenance Actions

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Maintenance Actions

Definition Maintenance Actions Instructions that lead to a change in cell status.

Allowed MaintenanceActions

Allowed maintenance actions depend on the hardware element.

Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units throughcommands from the ECP or by cell site software processes. Themaintenance actions are listed in the Lucent’s System 1000 Cell Site

DCS I/O Manual, 401-610-107 .

Conditional orUnconditional Requests

Some maintenance requests, such as remove and restore, can beconditional or unconditional. In general, a conditional maintenancerequest will not result in any action that causes calls to be dropped or

service to be denied to a user during the course of command execution;if executing a conditional request would violate either condition, MRArejects the request. In contrast, an unconditional maintenance requestwill result in the execution of the request immediately or within fiveminutes of MRA accepting the request, with little concern that calls aredropped or service is denied to a user during the course of commandexecution.

Maintenance ActionReporting and Control

All maintenance actions ( remove , restore , diagnose , stop a diagnostic ,switch to redundant unit , and operational status ) are reported to the

ECP.Once a maintenance action has started on a maintenance unit, MRAwill reject any subsequent maintenance-action requests for that unituntil the current action has completed (except for stopping a diagnostic,which it will honor immediately).



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceMaintenance Units


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Maintenance Units

Definition Maintenance Units Hardware elements that report their status to the

ECP.

Description Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units throughcommands from the ECP or by cell site software processes.

The RFTG-m is denoted as RG (for reference generator) in the statusdisplay pages.

Maintenance Units andActions

The table below shows the maintenance unit, subunit (if any), and theability to perform a maintenance action.

Yes/No Entries The yes and no entries under the maintenance actions in the tableindicate whether a maintenance action is permitted for a maintenanceunit. In the rows of the table that have NULL in the Subunit column,the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Unitcolumn; in the rows of the table that do not have NULL in the Subunit

Unit Subunit Maintenance ActionRemove Restore Diagnose Stop aDiagnostic

Switch toRedundantUnit

ObtainStatus

RCC* NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesRCC CPU no no yes yes no noRCC MEM no no yes yes no noRCC NCI no no yes yes no noRCC CPI no no yes yes no noRCC AFI no no yes yes no no

DS1 NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesDFI NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesDL NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesSCT† NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesCCC NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesCCU NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesCCU CE no no no no no noBBA NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yes* The RCC is denoted as CSC (for cell site controller) in the status display pages.

† SCT is denoted as CAT (for clock and tone) in the status display pages.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceMaintenance Units

column, the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in theSubunit column.

c/u Entries The c and u entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicatewhether a remove or restore maintenance action is conditional orunconditional. See Maintenance Actions (5-36) for further explanationof c and u entries.






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceMaintenance States

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Maintenance States

Definition Maintenance states Corresponds to the condition of a piece of

equipment. During installation, each unit is assigned an equipment state of unequipped, growth, or equipped via translations (systemconfiguration parameter settings). Each equipped unit is further assigned a state of active, out-of-service, or standby (redundant unit only) via maintenance requests sent to the Maintenance Request

Administrator (MRA) subsystem.

Maintenance StateDescriptions

The meanings of the maintenance states are as follows:

• Active: Unit is available for its intended use.

• Standby: Unit is available to be placed into the active state;applies only to redundant CSCs and SCTs (for RFTG, RFTG1 ison stand-by, and is switched only when RFTG0 fails).

• Out-of-service: Unit is not available for its intended use (exactopposite of active state), but is available to be diagnosed orupdated with NVM.

• Growth state: Unit is not available to be placed in use, but isavailable to be diagnosed or updated with NVM.

• Unequipped: Unit exists in the translations database strictly as aplace holder. MRA will reject any maintenance request targeted

for an unequipped unit.Throughout the maintenance process, MRA records locally themaintenance status of the cell site equipment in the equipment statustable. The maintenance status of equipment is reported to the ECPwhen the status changes or the ECP requests an update. The status of cell site equipment appears in the SDPs.



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceExamples of Input Commands and OutputMessages


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages

Introduction Craftshell commands are used to instruct the PCSC to perform specific

activities.

More CommonMaintenance Commands

From a maintenance perspective, the op:cell and dgn:cell commandsare the most common.

Theop:cell

command, in particular, is used to obtain the status on a cell, or one of its components (or cell site unit). The use of options enables specificresponses. For instance:

• The use of the option EXTERN yields a list of outstandingexternal and environmental alarms.

The dgn:cell command, already mentioned in Unit 4, is used todiagnose a cell site unit. Its use will be discussed in more detail later inthis lesson.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceConditional Remove

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Conditional Remove

Definition Conditional remove Maintenance action that changes the state of a

maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service. It schedulesan event or process to place the specified maintenance unit to out-of-service assuming that it is NOT busy (in active state and currently

performing its intended purpose), such as a CE supporting an activecall.

Busy CCC If the unit is a busy CCC or CCU when the conditional remove action isapplied, the unit is blocked (not allowed to accept new calls), and theremove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as the unit becomesidle (free of all calls) during the five-minute interval, it is removed

from service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, the conditionalremove aborts with no action taken.

Redundant Units For redundant units, if the unit is in the standby state when theconditional remove action is applied, the unit is removed from serviceimmediately. If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is inthe standby state when the conditional remove action is applied, MRAautomatically executes a switch before removing the unit from service.If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in the out-of-service state when the conditional remove action is applied, theconditional remove aborts with no action taken.

Out-of-Service If the unit is already out-of-service when a remove action (conditionalor unconditional) is applied, the unit is taken out-of-service again andtagged with the qualifier OOS-RMV. This tag indicates that the unit isout-of-service due to a remove request—as opposed to being out-of-service due to a diagnose request, for example.

Conditional remove action will abort with no action taken if:

• The unit is in the growth state

• Placing the unit out-of-service would result in exceeding the out-

of-service threshold limit for that type of unit, as set in translations(form cell2)

• The action is applied on the last data link to a cell site (to removethe last data link from service, use unconditional remove action)

• The action involves an SCT involved in diagnostics of anotherunit—that is, SCT supplying a digital tone source (this restrictionavoids false error that may be generated upon premature



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceConditional Remove


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

termination of the diagnostic test involving the SCT).

A conditional remove action on a DFI is not permitted if that unitcontrols the last data link to a cell site.

ReferencesFor more information on the remove maintenance action, refer to theRMV CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messagesmanual (401-610-107 ).




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceUnconditional Remove

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Unconditional Remove

Definition Unconditional remove Maintenance action that changes the state of a

maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service.

Unconditional RemoveFormat

The format for unconditional remove is:

Service Effects Unconditional remove requests may be service-affecting because of theout-of-service limits that may be exceeded.

It promptly places the specified maintenance unit in the out-of-service

state unless any of the following conditions are in effect:• The unconditional remove action is targeted for a busy CCC or

CCU. The remove is deferred for up to 5 minutes. If the unit is stillbusy after 5 minutes, MRA drops the calls and removes the unitfrom service.

• The unconditional remove action is targeted for a unit in thegrowth state. The unconditional remove aborts with no actiontaken.

• The unconditional remove action is targeted for a redundant CSC

or SCT having an out-of-service mate. The unconditional removeaborts with no action taken.

If an SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit, an unconditionalremove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics, whichmay result in the generation of false errors upon premature terminationof the diagnostic test.

rmv:cell ̂a,b;ucl a: cell number, b= unit to be removed






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceUnconditional Restore

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Unconditional Restore

Definition Unconditional Restore Similar to the conditional restore command,

except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state,the first step in an unconditional restore maintenance action is theautomatic execution of an unconditional remove. Therefore, the lack of restrictions associated with an unconditional remove—unconditionalremove requests may be service-affecting—applies to an unconditionalrestore as well.

Unconditional RestoreFormat

The format of the unconditional restore is:

Conditions Keeping theUnit OOS

The unconditional restore maintenance action changes the state of amaintenance unit from out-of-service to active unless the commandspecifies a standby state. It schedules an event or process to restore thespecified maintenance unit without first running a diagnostic test on theunit.

Conditions Applying toRestore Requests

The following are other conditions pertaining to conditional andunconditional restore requests that you need to be aware of:

• For data links (DLs): A conditional restore request reverts to

unconditional if there is no link currently in-service; no diagnostictest is run.

• No action is performed if an unconditional restore request is madeon the currently in-service link.

• For redundant units: A CSC conditional restore request comparesthe active and redundant unit memories of the controller sides(CSC0 and CSC1) after the CSC being restored has elevated to thestandby state. A mismatch in memory drops the CSC back to theout-of-service state and aborts the restore request.

• An active CSC or SCT having an out-of-service redundant unitcannot be restored conditionally or unconditionally.

References For more information on the restore maintenance action, refer to theRST CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messagesmanual (401-610-107 ).

rst:cell ̂a,b;ucl a: cell number, b= unit being restored



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceDiagnose Command


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Diagnose Command

Definition Diagnose (dgn) Maintenance action that can be applied to a unit in

the out-of-service or growth state, to a redundant unit in the standbystate, or to a redundant unit in the active state. In the latter case, MRAinitiates a switch before executing the diagnose request.

Format of DiagnoseCommand

The dgn command format is:

Use of the Command For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the active state, but themate is out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with no action taken.

Diagnosing a CCC or CCU In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCCor CCU in the active state. The first step in a diagnose maintenanceaction for an active CCC or CCU is the automatic execution of aconditional remove.

Whether a unit passes or fails diagnostics, the unit is left in theout-of-service state except for a unit in the growth state. A unit initiallyin the growth state remains in the growth state. The diagnostic testresults (pass, fail) are reported to the ECP.

Diagnosing a CSC A diagnostic test can be called for the whole CSC (in which allcontroller circuit boards are tested), or a diagnostic test can be calledfor an individual controller circuit board (for example, CPU).

For More Information For more information on the diagnose maintenance action, refer to theDGN CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messagesmanual (401-610-107) .

dgn:cell ̂a,b[;ucl][:tlp] a: cell number, b= unit being diagnosed




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceStop a Diagnostic

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Stop a Diagnostic

Definition Stop This maintenance action stops a diagnostic test on a

maintenance unit. If the diagnostic test request is still in the job queue, MRA removes the request from the queue. If the diagnostic test isrunning, MRA aborts the test.

Format of the StopCommand

The format of the stop command is:

Use of the Command MRA leaves the unit in the out-of-service or growth state unless theunit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. Upon terminating a diagnostic test forone of those units, MRA returns the unit to the state it was in just priorto the diagnostic request (out-of-service, growth, or active).

For More Information For more information on the diagnostic maintenance action, refer to theSTOP DGN commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Messages Manual(401-610-107).

stop:dgn;cell ̂a,ba: cell number, b= unit being diagnosed



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceInitialize a Site


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Initialize a Site

Purpose of the Command The purpose of this command (init) is to reset a cell site operating

parameters to their specified values.

Command Format The table shows the command formats to initialize a cell site.

To request a … Enter...

system process purge at a specificcell site

INIT:CELL a:SPP b[ CLASSc]

specific cell site phase INIT:CELL a:{TC|SC}[ CLASSc]

cell site memory boot INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE ][ CLASSc]

cell site memory boot andcontroller switch

INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE ];SW




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceSwitch to Redundant Unit

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Switch to Redundant Unit

Definition Switch (sw) The switch to redundant unit maintenance action changes

the state of a maintenance unit from active to another state while at thesame time changing the state of a second unit (the associated redundant unit) from standby to active. The purpose of the maintenanceaction is to transfer the functions of the first unit to the second unit.

Format of the SwitchCommand

The format of the switch command is:

Redundant Units If either of the redundant units is in the out-of-service state, the switchrequest aborts with no action taken. For the SCT, the switch requestwill fail if the SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit.

This maintenance action applies only to CSCs and SCTs.

References For more information on the switch to redundant unit maintenanceaction, refer to the SW CELL command in the Input Messages manual(401-610-107) .

sw:cell ̂a,ba: cell number, b= unit being switched



PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceOperational Status


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Operational Status

Use of the Command Op The Operational Status maintenance action determines the status

(state) of a maintenance unit; that is, Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) reads the recorded status from the equipment status table and forwards the status to the Access Manager.

Format of the OperationalStatus Command

The format of the operational status command is:

Operational StatusCommand SDP Reporting

In addition, MRA automatically reports the maintenance status of equipment to the Access Manager whenever the status changes. Astatus display page is refreshed with new maintenance status every 15seconds.

For More Information For more information on the obtain status maintenance action, refer tothe OP CELL, OP CELL DL, OP CELL DLOPTS, OP CELLEXTERN, OP CELL GENERIC, OP CELL OVLD, OP CELL SCSM,

OP CELL SG, and OP CELL VERSION commands in the Cell Site/ DCS Input Messages manual (401-610-107).

op:cell ̂x

op:cell ̂x,unit^

y

op:cell ^

x,extern

op:cell, generic




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceOut-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose

Definition State qualifier A message from the MRA to indicate the reason why a

particular unit is in an out-of-service state.

Need for an Out-Of-ServiceQualifier

A unit can be out-of-service for a variety of reasons. The out-of-servicequalifier in an output message identifies the source of that state.

Assigning of the Qualifier When a maintenance unit is placed OOS, the MRA assigns a qualifier.The qualifier helps define the OOS condition.

Both the qualifier and the final state of the unit are reported to theAccess Manager. Both appear in the ROP message.






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PCS CDMA Minicell MaintenanceOut-Of-Service State Qualifiers -- Examples




401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Diagnostics

Overview

Purpose Diagnostics are indications of system failures that need to be corrected.Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indicationsand diagnostic test results.

• Alarm indications, in most instances, are generated by dedicatedmonitoring circuits, which provide identification of troubles andindications of faulty or suspect units.

• Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines runon a functional circuit block and, in most instances, identify faultsto one or more suspected units within a functional area.

This unit provides an introduction to the principles and tools availableto diagnose a cell site.

Contents Fault Detection and Recovery Mechanisms 6-3• Fault Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4• Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5• Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6• Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7

• Software Asserts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8• Hardware Error Handler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9

Alarms and Diagnostics 6-11• Alarm Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12• Alarm Scanning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-14• Alarm Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-15• Alarm Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnostics

• Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20• Alarms, Physical Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21• Alarm Display Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22• Detailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms - - - - - - - - - 6-26• Detailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm - - - - - - - - 6-27• User Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29

Fault Detection and Recovery Tools 6-30• Performance Measurement 6-31• Automatic Recovery Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32• Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual Recovery - - - - - 6-33• OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor - - - - - - - - - - 6-34• RF Call Trace - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35• Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator - - - - - - - - - - - 6-36



Diagnostics


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Detection and RecoveryMechanisms

Overview

Purpose This section describes the system fault indicators and the types of toolsused to identify the faults.

Types of Fault Detectionand Recovery Mechanisms

PCS CDMA Minicells support two complementary types of faultdetection and recovery mechanisms:

• Fault detection is either automated or manual:

– Automated mode constantly monitors and reports the resultsof periodic self-tests

– Manual mode enables maintenance technicians to identifythe source of equipment failure.

• Fault recovery mechanisms are also either automated or manual:

– Automated fault recovery is software driven. It is initiatedautomatically by the Switch as soon as it has detected a faultin the system under its control.

– Manual fault recovery is executed under operator control aspart of physical intervention to correct equipment failure.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsFault Detection

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Fault Detection

Overview Fault detection, whether automated or manual, is based on an

indication at the MCSC and recorded on the Read Only Printer (ROP),which provides a running record of all Minicell activities.

Alarm Indications The majority of alarm conditions reported to the MCSC can be visuallyidentified at the cell site by observing equipment alarm indicators.Some alarm indications are latched — that is, they remain until they arereported. Other alarm indications (non-latched) may or may not remainlong enough to be read and reported.

Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic tests are run either automatically or manually. Their results

provide the starting point for clearing diagnostic faults (non-alarm). Itshould be noted that alarm conditions (such as power, fuse, etc.) cancause diagnostic faults to appear. Therefore, alarm indications shouldbe cleared before attempting to clear diagnostic troubles. In someinstances, it may be difficult to relate an existing alarm condition to adiagnostic fault condition.

Cell Site HousekeepingSoftware

The cell site has excellent housekeeping software; faults such astransmitter failure, power and entry alarms, and speech path conditionsare constantly monitored and are automatically reported to theExecutive Cellular Processor (ECP). In most cases, fault detection,diagnosis, and recovery are automatic.

Type of HousekeepingSoftware

The cell site detects faults by various means, including:

• Diagnostic tests (see page 6-5)

• Functional tests (see page 6-6)

• Software audits (see page 6-7)

• Software asserts (see page 6-8)

• Board self-tests

• Hardware integrity checks• Hardware alarm scanning



DiagnosticsDiagnostic Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Diagnostic Tests

Overview Diagnostic tests can be performed on an automatic (error-driven),

scheduled, or manual basis. Diagnostic tests are initiated and controlledfrom the ECP; the cell site performs the requested diagnostic test andreturns the test results to the ECP.

Running Diagnostic Tests Running diagnostic tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routinediagnostic tests) is a way of determining if the cell site hardware unitsare operational. Routine diagnostic tests are run once a day; the time of day at which these tests are run is specified in the cell site translations.The test results are reported to the ECP.

For equipment that is down, manual diagnostics can be done.

Related Documents Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions (401-660-101) .




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsFunctional Tests


Type of Functional Tests Functional tests can be performed on a scheduled or manual basis.

Functional tests are initiated and controlled from the ECP; the cell siteperforms the requested functional test and returns the results to theECP.

Running Functional Tests Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not active.Running functional tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routinefunctional tests) is a way of checking the integrity of the cell sitetransmit and receive paths. The frequency of routine functional tests isspecified in the cell site translations. (Unlike routine diagnostic testing,the exact time of day cannot be specified.) The test results (pass, fail)

are reported to the ECP.Functional Test Types Functional tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit,

test it, and then free it for normal call processing traffic. These testsverify the operation of the following cell site equipment:

• Transmit path

• Receive path

• Access channel

• Paging channel

• Sync Channel• Pilot Channel

• Traffic Channel

• Pilot Level

• Antenna.



DiagnosticsSoftware Audits


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Software Audits

Software Audits Software audits can be performed on a scheduled or manual basis. the

audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP; the cell site performsthe requested audit and returns the results to the ECP.

Running Software Audits Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service. Runningsoftware audits on a regularly scheduled basis (routine audits) is a wayof detecting, confining, and correcting software data errors before theerrors adversely affect system performance. When audits detect errors,they recover any lost resources and, if necessary, invoke appropriatesystem initialization.

Software Audit Frequency The frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the RCC;there is no scheduling translation associated with audits. Audit testerrors are reported to the ECP.

Related Documents Series II Cell Site Audits Manual (401-610-078) .




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsSoftware Asserts

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Software Asserts

Description Asserts occur when software encounters an unusual or unexpected

condition. For example, a software program calls a routine and expectsthree choices but is presented with four. Such errors are reported toassert-handling software on the RCC, which is responsible forformatting assert output messages and sending the messages to theECP.

Handling Asserts The assert-handling software may be one of two software subsystemson the RCC:

• Assert Handler: Receives and handles asserts from units on theTDM bus. Most asserts come from the radios or the

Communications Processor Interface (CPI) board. The asserthandler does not initiate any recovery.

• SIassert: Receives and handles asserts from the applicationsoftware running on the RCC. SIassert can initiate different levelsof recovery depending upon the severity of the assert.

When an assert occurs, an assert macro provides the assert-handlingsoftware with the information it needs to process the assert failure.What output message prints at the ECP depends upon the macro thatcalled the assert-handling software.

Assert messages are often difficult to analyze and may requireescalation to the next level of technical support.



DiagnosticsHardware Error Handler


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Hardware Error Handler

Hardware Error Handler The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the

Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem. The HEHreceives error reports from hardware units, functional tests, and call-processing software. It determines when a recovery action (remove,restore) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.

Depending upon the severity of the error, either the HEH takesimmediate recovery action or waits until the error has occurred apredefined number of times before taking action. For other errors, theHEH sends only an error report to the ECP.

Autonomous Error Types The cell site will autonomously report four types of errors to HEH to

allow appropriate diagnostics recovery to be scheduled. The error typesare hardware errors, program-control errors, radio-channel errors, andmobile station errors.

• Hardware errors include malfunctioning microprocessor errors,memory read/write errors, trap errors, or synthesizer lock errors.These errors come from on-board self tests.

• Program control errors include stack pointer errors, divide by zeroerrors, or overflow and underflow errors.

• Radio-channel errors include frame errors and access-attemptsuccess and failure errors. These errors are “bursty” in nature andwill be reported to the ECP after a predefined threshold has beenpassed. In some cases, the threshold is an engineering parameter,that is, it is hardcoded into the software. In other cases, thethreshold is tunable via translations.

• Mobile station errors include improper or illogical messagecontent in the received message from a mobile transceiver or theabsence of a response message. An error message will be returnedto the RCC.

Hardware Alarm Scanning Some faults, referred to as scanned alarms, are gathered by dedicatedmonitoring circuits at the cell site and then reported to the ECP.Scanned alarms include power converter and fan alarm conditions.There is no automatic recovery for scanned alarms. In time, theoperational parameter that caused the alarm may return to its normaloperating range, thereby clearing the alarm. Otherwise, a technicianmust visit the site and manually clear the alarm.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Related Documents Output Messages manual (401-610-057) ; see RPT CELL HEH





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms and Diagnostics

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose Diagnostics are indications of system failures that need to be corrected.Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indicationsand diagnostic test results.

• Alarm indications, in most instances, are generated by dedicatedmonitoring circuits, which provide identification of troubles andindications of faulty or suspect units.

• Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines runon a functional circuit block and, in most instances, identify faultsto one or more suspected units within a functional area.

This unit provides an introduction to the principles and tools availableto diagnose a cell site.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsAlarm Overview

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Overview

Overview Alarms are the first indication of cell site trouble, indicating one of the

following conditions:• Software failure

• Hardware failure

• User-defined condition

Latched Alarms Alarms are either “latched” (remain until removed by operator action)or “unlatched” (are retired without operator intervention as soon as thedefect has been cleared).

Severity Alarms are also classified by level of severity/priority of requiredaction.

Alarm Reporting PCS CDMA Minicell alarms are reported to the Switch by the Alarm/ FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the Radio Control Complex (RCC)shelf. In addition, some alarms activate an LED display on theappropriate circuit pack.

User alarms are numbered, as indicated in the following table.

UserAlarm #

Minicell Suite Equipment Alarm State

0 External Alarm 6 Minicell Primary Switchable







7 Generator Alarm Generator Cabinet Normally Open

8 Power Major Alarm Power Cabinet Normally Open

9 CSU Alarm Minicell Primary Normally Open



DiagnosticsAlarm Overview


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Door / IntrusionAlarm

All Normally Open

11 Heat Exchanger Hi/ Lo Temp Alarm

Minicell Primary& Growth

Normally Open

12 Battery DischargeAlarm

Battery Cabinet Normally Open

13 Growth 0 Alarm Minicell Growth Normally Open

14 Sage Alarm Minicell Primary Normally Open

15 External Alarm 7 Minicell Primary Normally Open

16 Power Minor Alarm Power Cabinet Normally Open

17 AC Fail Alarm Power Cabinet Normally Open




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsAlarm Scanning

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Scanning

Overview The Switch continuously monitors the Minicell operation, through a

process called Alarm Scanning. All the Minicell alarms eventually arereported by the alarm and FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the RCCShelf. The alarms are connected to the AFI at the RCC shelf backplanevia an AYD5 connector.

Alarms Scanned into theAFI

The alarms scanned into the AFI can be classified as follows:

• Amplifier alarms (displayed as “LAC” alarms)

• Frame alarms (fan and power converter alarms)

• User alarms (18 maximum)

• Miscellaneous alarms (RFTGm side 0 or side 1)

The Alarm Control Board The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from theMinicell’s frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to theAFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC).

The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipmentsector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports bothamplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information tothe AFI. LAC alarms are used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit(CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power

converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.

AFI Polling Rate The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests inapproximately a two-second period of time.

For More Information onAlarms

For more information look at the alarm section in Chapter 7 of LucentTechnologies PCS System Acceptance Guidelines and Procedures 401-703-203 ,

.



DiagnosticsAlarm Types


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Types

Overview Alarms of direct interest to Maintenance Personnel are those that are

related to hardware malfunctions. Some of these alarms may be retiredremotely, others will require a physical intervention at the Minicell site.

Amplifier Alarms These are commonly called LAC alarms, LACALTX± andLACALRX±.

These alarms are static signals sent from each CTU and RU (in primarycabinet only) to the Alarm Control Board (ACB) to indicate thefailures. The ACB, via a primary cabinet CTU shelf backplaneconnector, communicates to the AFI (in the RCC shelf) via an RS-422interface. The primary cabinet CTUs send their alarms to the ACB via

internal CTU backplane connections, while the growth cabinet CTUssend their alarms to the ACB (in the primary cabinet) via a cableharness between the CTU backplanes in the growth and primarycabinets. The RU alarms (all contained in the primary cabinet) arecollected by the ACB via cable harness connections to the primarycabinet’s CTU shelf backplane.

Frame Alarms Frame alarms can be broken into 2 classes:

1. Fan alarms (xxFALxL): TTL signal, pulled low to indicate fanfailure. Six possible connections per cabinet.

2. Power converter alarms (xxSHALxL): TTL signal, pulled low toindicate power converter failure. Usually connected to ALM1contact on back of power converter (pin 113) while ALM2 isconnected to ground (pin 114). On alarm, a relay closure connectsALM1 to ALM2 (ground). Six possible connections per cabinet.

User Alarms There are a maximum of 18 user alarms.

These are opto-isolator type alarms. Current to drive the opto-isolator isplaced on the USERALxx+pin and is expected to be returned to theAFI on the USERALxx-pin. As long as the circuit is complete, then theopto-isolator LED is lit and no alarm is registered. An alarm can betriggered by the customer by cutting off this current in one of twoways:

1. Breaking the circuit with the opening of a relay contact (open onalarm)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsAlarm Types

2. Shunting the current from the USERALxx+ leads to an AFIground pin with the closure of a relay contact (close on alarm)

Spare alarms There are 4 spare TTL alarms (ALSPx), 2 spare alarms (SPAUSEL_1and SPARE4_1).



DiagnosticsAlarm Functions


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Functions

Overview The alarm inputs to the AFI are accessed at AFI1 slot (P20) via an

AYD5 connector paddle board. The alarm signal names originate fromthe Series II Macrocell project, and may be used for different purposesin the Minicell.

CTU and RU Alarm Bus

Alarms from RFTG

Primary Cabinet Fan/Blower Alarms (TTL Low

Indicates Failure)

LACALTX ±LACALRX ±

CTU and RU (LAC) alarm bus from primary cabinet ACBvia CTU backplane connector.

RFGEN0 ± RFTG Side 0 Alarm.

RFGEN1 ± RFTG Side 1 Alarm.

RFGENSEL ± Not used

PRFAL5L Rear Heat Exchanger (Optional)

PRFAL4L Rear Heat Exchanger (Optional)

PRFAL3L Cabinet Blower

PRFAL2L CTU Shelf Fan

PRFAL1L Heat Exchanger Blower 1

PRFAL0L Heat Exchanger Blower 0




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Primary Cabinet PCUAlarms (TTL Low Indicates

Failure)

Growth Cabinet Fan/BlowerAlarms (TTL Low Indicates

Failure)

Growth Cabinet PCUAlarms (TTL Low Indicates

Failure)

18 User Alarms Available (2wires each)

USRAL(0-17) ±

User alarm inputs to AFI are wired permanently to AIM0 forcross-connect capability. AIM1 connects directly to primary cabinetuser alarms, or to lightning protection block for power cabinet alarms

PRSHAL5L CTU Shelf PCU2 Alarm from ACB via CTU BackplaneConnector.

PRSHAL4L CTU Shelf PCU1 Alarm from ACB via CTU BackplaneConnector.

PRSHAL3L CRC Shelf2 415AC Alarm.



PROCPWRL Internal Backplane Wired-or Alarm for the two RCC Shelf 415ACs

G0FAL5L Not used

G0FAL4L Reserved for Possible Cabinet Blower 2

G0FAL3L Reserved for Cabinet Blower 1 (only active when door is open)

G0FAL2L CTU Shelf Fan

G0FAL1L Heat Exchanger Blower 1

G0FAL0L Heat Exchanger Blower 0

G0SHAL5L PCU2

G0SHAL4L PCU1

G0SHAL3L CRC2

G0SHAL2L CRC1

G0SHAL1L CRC0

G0SHAL0L Not used





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

and external user alarms. The 18 alarms are as follows (with quantity inparenthesis):

• CSU alarm (1)

• Heat Exchanger alarms (1) - high temp and low temp

• Intrusion alarms (1) - all door intrusion switches in both primaryand growth cabinets are connected in series (if one fails, thecurrent loop is broken indicating an alarm)

• Power Cabinet Alarms (6) - major, minor, AC fail, batteries ondischarge, generator running, and generator failure. Each of thesemust be wire-ORed (or connected in series) with like signals frombackup battery cabinet if used. These must be lightning protectedwhen received into the primary cabinet

• Reserved for Growth Frame (1)

• CRTU (1)• Extra External User Alarms (7) - these must also be lightning

protected if coming from outside the primary or growth cabinets

External User Alarm 7 External User Alarm 7 is used for Generator Fail when equipped with agenerator. This alarm is not programmable and is “Close ON Alarm”.External User Alarm 7 may be used for other purposes if theinstallation does not include a generator cabinet.

Locating Rack-Mounted

Growth Alarms

Alarm locations for rack-mount growth cabinets correspond to the

carrier for the equivalent growth cabinet. For example, alarms for aminicell with a primary cabinet, Growth 1, and RG2 (rack growth 2):

• Growth 1 (carrier 2) alarms are for the growth 1 cabinet.

• Growth 2 (carrier 3) CRC alarms are for the right side of RG2.

• Growth 3 (carrier 4) CRC alarms are for the left side of RG2.

• Growth 2 (carrier 3) CTU alarms are for the lower CTU.

• Growth 3 (carrier 4) CTU alarms are for the upper CTU.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsAlarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces

Overview The ACB (located in the Primary Cabinet CTU Shelf) formats alarms

collected from the CTU, RUs and PCUs before sending them to theAlarm FITS Interface (AFI) board (located in the RCC shelf).

Alarm Inputs to the ACB The alarm signals reported to the AFI are shown in the following table,.

AFI Interface Two types of alarm status information are sent to the AFI Interface:• LAC alarms

• Frame (cabinet) alarms.

The following two paragraphs describe the interface for LAC alarmand cabinet alarm message reporting.

LAC Alarm Interface LAC alarms cover any CTU and/or RU failure(s).

The RS-422 Interface carrying the ACB LAC alarm status signals tothe AFI board uses 4 wires: 2 for the transmit function and 2 for the

receive function.

Frame Alarm Interface Frame alarms cover the two PCUs located in the same CTU shelf in theprimary cabinet. These alarms are reported to the AFI circuit pack located in the RCC via a cable assembly connected to the CTU shelf backplane.

Subassembly Alarms

Alarm Type Qty Alarm Condition Leads ACB Signal Name

RU Alarms 6 Synthesizer out-of-lock, LNAfailure

6 RX_ALmn (n = 1 to6)

Primary CabinetCTU Alarms 3 Synthesizer out-of-lock, DCOver Current, OverTemperature, and MalfunctionAlarm

3 TX_ALMn (n = 1 to3)

Growth ICabinet CTUAlarms

3 Same as Primary Frame CTUAlarms

3 TX_ALMn (n = 4 to6)

CTU Shelf PCUAlarms

2 Output Voltage Variation (±3%) 2 DCI_ALMn (n =1.2)



DiagnosticsAlarms, Physical Display


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarms, Physical Display

ACB Alarm LEDs “ON” means the LED is illuminated; “OFF” means LED is not

illuminated.

Description The LEDs are used to depict a unit’s functional condition (status)within the PCS CDMA Minicell. The alarm control board (ACB) of theMinicell has 10 faceplate LEDs, grouped as follows:

• A group of three LEDs (ALM, STBY, ACT) that depict the statusof the ACB

• A group of six (ALM 1 to ALM 6) that depict the status of diversity receive RU1 through RU6

• A lone LED (ALM AMP) that reports on the status of the CTUs.

The ACB’s three LEDs are red, yellow, and green. ACB LEDs aredisplayed at power-up or when there is an RU receiver failure. A redLED indicates an alarm state, a yellow LED a standby state, and agreen LED an active state. All RU and ALM AMP LEDs are red.Faceplate text is used to distinguish the ACB and RU LEDs from oneanother. An illuminated RU LED indicates that the RU is bad. If thereis a CTU failure, the ALM AMP LED is displayed and latched.

System Alarms System alarms are always sent to the Read-Only Printer (ROP) andsome are displayed on the SDPs.

Unit LED LED Faceplate Alarm ConditionColor State Text Description

ACB RED ON ALM Power-up/self-test failure ACB YELLOW ON STBY Busy mode/Stand-by mode ACB GREEN ON ACT Passed all tests and/or is active RU 1 RED ON ALM1 RU 1 Failure/Alarm RU 2 RED ON ALM2 RU 2 Failure/Alarm RU 3 RED ON ALM3 RU 3 Failure/Alarm RU 4 RED ON ALM4 RU 4 Failure/Alarm RU 5 RED ON ALM5 RU 5 Failure/Alarm

RU 6 RED ON ALM6 RU 6 Failure/AlarmCTU RED ON ALM/AMP CTU Failure/Alarm

ALMSTBYACTALM 1ALM 2ALM 3ALM 4ALM 5ALM 6ALM

RST

RU

AMP




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsAlarm Display Description

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Display Description

Overview Alarms are displayed by various means and at different locations.

Switch Settings and FailureLED Display

The LEDs can also indicate an error when there is a mismatch betweenthe cell operating parameters set in translation and the physical settingsof the switches on the ACB. The right column of the table below showsLED failure display for invalid switch settings.

P r o v i s i o n

#

R

e f e r e n c e

D

e s i g n a t i o n

T y p e

F u n c t i o n

S t a t e / S e t t i n g

S t a t e / S e t t i n g

D

e s c r i p t i o n

F a i l u r e

L E D

NA S1 Push-button(momentary)

Unit Reset PressedIn

Pressingactuator resetsunit

NotApplicable

4 S2 Rotary Select PCS CDMAAccess Mode

2

3

4 to F

3 Sector

Omni

Unassigned

DS 3,(ACT)

1 S3 Rotary Select customer’slicensed frequencyband forsynthesizerprogramming

0 to 9

A to F

Unassigned

Band A to BandF

DS 4,(ALM0)

2 S4 Rotary Select AFI pollingLAC addressassignments

0

4 to F

Minicell

Unassigned

DS 5,(ALM1)

3 S5 Rotary Select ACB testmodes; in-circuittest (ICT) anddiagnostic tests

0

1

23 to F

None (NormalOperation)

Diagnostic

ICT mode

Unassigned

DS 2,(STBY)





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LED for TX_UP There are two alarm conditions for the TX_UP. The description of these conditions are listed in the table below.

System alarms System alarms are always sent to the read-only printer (ROP) and someare sent to the SDPs, as discussed in Unit 3. The following tablesummarizes this:

Condition LED Causes State

Alarm Red Synthesizer in out-of-lock condition or Alarm from theAmplifier

Pin number D20 of the P1connector will be HIGH (or closeto 5 volts)

No-Alarm Green None. Synthesizer not in out-of-lock condition

Pin number D20 of the P1connector will be LOW (or closeto 0 volt)

ALARM SDP NUMBER

User Defined Alarms NO

Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 1 2136

Primary Frame Amplifier Shelf Fan Alarm 2136

Primary Frame Main Fan Alarm NO

Reference Frequency Generator 1 Alarm 2131

Controller Shelf Power Converter Alarm 2131,2138, 2139

Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 2 2136

Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 1 Alarm NO

Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 0 Alarm NO

Reference Frequency Generator 0 Alarm 2131, 2138

Primary Frame Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter 2131, 2138, 2139

CTU Alarms 2131, 2136

CCU 2131, 2138, 2139

CCC 2131, 2138, 2139

SCT 2131 AS “CAT”

RECEIVE UNITS 2131, 2136

BCR 2138, 2139

ACU 2138, 2139




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Importance Levels Alarms are assigned a level of importance, ranging from MIN (Minor)to CRITICAL reflecting the potential of the detected failure on theability of the Minicell to provide service. The ROP enables the CellTechnician to identify which alarm has been triggered through thedisplay of offset codes. The following table indicates these codes.

BIU 2138, 2139

ACB

Primary Frame Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter 2131,2138, 2139

ALARM SDP NUMBER

ROP TEXT MESSAGE

L E V E L

S 2 U S E R

A L A R M

O F F S E T

B I T C B A I M

1

T E R M

. N O

.

P U N C H

D O W N

( O S P )

External User Alarm 6 (ROP text is user definable) Min 0 0 0 - 17 22






External User Alarm 0 (ROP text is user definable) Min 6 0 6 - 11 16Power Cabinet Generator On Maj 7 0 7 - 10 15

Power Cabinet Major Alarm Maj 8 1 0 - 9 14

CSU Alarm Maj 9 1 1 CB8 8 -

Intrusion Alarm (all frames) Maj 10 1 2 - 7 13 Grw-Frm

Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temperature Min 11 1 3 CB10 6 -

Battery Discharge Alarm Maj 12 1 4 - 5 9

Growth 0 Alarm (Growth 0 Heat Exchanger) Min 13 1 5 - 4 -

CRTU Min 14 1 6 CB12 3 -External User Alarm 7 Min 15 1 7 - 2 7

Power Cabinet Minor Alarm Min 16 2 0 - 1 12

Power Cabinet AC Failure Alarm Maj 17 2 1 - 0 11

Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 1 Min - 3 4 CB1 - -





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Primary Frame Amplifier Shelf Fan Alarm Min - 7 2 CB2 - -Primary Frame Main Fan Alarm Min - 7 3 CB3 - -

Reference Frequency Generator 1 Alarm Maj - 2 6 CB4 - -

Controller Shelf Power Converter Alarm Min - 3 0 CB5CB13

- -

Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 2 Min - 3 5 CB9 - -

Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 1 Alarm Min - 7 1 CB10 - -

Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 0 Alarm Min - 7 0 CB10 - -

Reference Frequency Generator 0 Alarm Maj - 2 5 CB14 - -Primary Frame Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter Min - 3 2 CB18 - -

Primary Frame Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter Min - 3 1 CB20 - -

ROP TEXT MESSAGE

L E V E L

S 2 U S E R

A L A R M

O F F S E T

B I T

C B

A I M 1

T E R M

. N O

.

P U N C H

D O W N

( O S P )




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsDetailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Detailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms

Function Amplifier alarms report on CTU power loss and Receive Unit failure.

Receiver Unit Alarms Each RU has two alarm conditions: LNA failure and RU downconverter Synthesizer Out-of-Lock. If either of these alarm conditionsoccur, a red LED on the faceplate is turned on and a “logical 1" is sentto the ACB.

CDMA Transmitter UnitAlarms

The Transmitter Unit has two functional components: a TX Amplifierand a TX Upconverter. Each component checks for different alarmconditions. In order to minimize alarm reporting to the ACB, all thealarm conditions for both components are ORed together before

reporting. If the CTU is not powered up, an alarm will be reported.Synthesizer Out-of-Lock

The TX Upconverter’s frequency synthesizer in each CTU indicates anOut-of-Lock Alarm by turning on a red LED on the CTU faceplate andsending a “logical 1” to the ACB via a backplane connection from eachCTU alarm output to the appropriate ACB input.

TX Amplifier Alarms

Each TX Amplifier will have three alarm conditions: synthesizerout-of-lock, amplifier over-temperature, and over-current. If any or allof these alarm conditions occur, a red LED on the TU faceplate isturned on and a “logical 1” is sent to ACB.

Low Noise AmplifierAlarms

Failure in a Low Noise Amplifier will result in an alarm, with an LEDdisplay on the ACB.



DiagnosticsDetailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Detailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm

Function Frame alarms report on CTU failures. Frame alarms are composed of

Shelf Power Converter Alarms and Fan Alarms.

415AC Power ConverterUnit Alarms

The 415AC PCUs have the following alarm types.

• Low output voltage alarm if the output voltage falls below 97% of nominal (RED LED turns on, relay contacts close).

• High voltage alarm if the output voltage is greater than 103% of nominal (output turns OFF, unit latches OFF, ~RED LED turnsON, relay contacts close). The input voltage must be disconnectedbefore the latch will clear.

• Red alarm LED on faceplate.

• Green LED on faceplate (indicates presence of input voltage).

• Single isolated contact closure upon LV alarm or HV shutdown.

The relay contacts of the 415AC are connected to the backplane(ALM1, pin 113 and ALM2, pin 114). The ALM2 pin is connected toground. A relay closure connects ALM1 to ALM2 which indicates analarm (Logic 0).

The RCC Side 0 and 1 415AC PCU ALM1 pins are connected togetheron the RCC backplane and run to the AFI on the backplane (pin 442‘PROCPWRL’).

The alarms for each 415AC in a CRC shelf are separately returned tothe AFI board (UN166) in the RCC for processing via interfacecabling.

CTU Backplane PowerConverter Alarms

The PCU used in the CTU shelf has the following alarms:

1. Low output voltage alarm: If the output voltage falls below 3% of nominal, one of two green LEDs on the Power Converter goes outand a “logical 1” is sent to the ACB.

2. High voltage alarm: If the output voltage is greater than 3% of

nominal, one of two green LEDs on the Power Converter goes outand a “logical 1” is sent to the ACB.

The CTU shelf PCU alarms are connected to the ACB via internalbackplane traces. The ACB will then invert this signal to logic low foralarm condition and outputs to the AFI via a CTU shelf backplaneconnector.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsDetailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm

Fan Alarms A fan or heat exchanger blower failure (loss of +24 volt power orreduction in fan/blower speed) triggers a failure alarm for each fan,which is reported back to the AFI via separate interface cabling.



DiagnosticsUser Alarms


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................User Alarms

Overview The PCS CDMA Minicell supports a total of 18 user alarms, ten of

them being predefined, and the other eight being customer-assignedalarms.

User alarm inputs to the AFI are wired for cross-connect capability.AIM1 connects directly to primary frame user alarms, or to lightning-protection blocks or power cabinet alarms and external user alarms.

Miscellaneous Alarms Other alarms are reported to the Switch, and provide visible indicationon an associated LED display:

• RFTG-m Alarm: It has the various LED indicators on the unitfront panel, which indicate either operational or alarm conditions.

The RFTG-m, when in trouble, transmits a major alarm.

• CDMA Radio Shelf Circuit Pack LED Indicators: The CDMAradio shelf circuit packs have various LED indicators on theirfaceplates. These LEDs indicate either operational or alarm

conditions.

User AlarmName

Number ofAlarms

Function

CSU 1 CSU alarm indicates a loss of signal.Heat Exchanger 3 These alarms are meant for high temperature, low temperature, and

heater failure.Intrusion 1 This alarm is triggered whenever a door or side panel is opened.Power Cabinet 5 These alarms cover intrusion, rectifier/circuit failure, AC power

failure, common fan failure, and generator failure. If applicable,these alarms are also wired into the backup battery frame. Outdoorcabinets have lightning-protected alarms.

External --Userdefined

8 These alarms are user defined, and report on failures such asAntenna lights failure. These alarms should also be lightning-protected whenever they protect components that are outside theMinicell housing.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsUser Alarms

Fault Detection and Recovery Tools

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose In some cases, such as in the case of a temporary loss of power, theSwitch can automatically correct a system failure. This section containsdescriptions of the detection and automatic recovery tools that areprovided by the Switch to restore the system when faults occur.

Introduction Diagnostics cover the processes involved in identifying the cause of aMinicell failure, whether indicated by an alarm or not.

Diagnostics can be run automatically or on demand.

Routine and DemandDiagnostics

Routine diagnostics are run automatically by the MSC, according to aspecified schedule. Demand diagnostics are run by the Switch or CellSite Technician. Actual input commands and resulting output messageshave been discussed in Lessons 3 and 4.

In some cases, such as equipment upgrade, you will need to performcomplete diagnostics before running functional tests. In that case, youshould run your diagnostics in the order shown in the following list.When the diagnostics are complete, functional tests must be run.

Diagnostics should be run in the following order:

1. Radio Control Complex (RCC) Diagnostics

2. Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) Diagnostics

3. CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) Diagnostics

4. CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) Diagnostics.



DiagnosticsPerformance Measurement


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Performance Measurement

Overview Performance measurement corresponds to the verification that the cell

is performing as specified.

Types of PerformanceTesting

Examples of performance testing include Rho and powermeasurements, functional tests, and drive testing.

Performance testing is also sometimes used as a diagnostic tool toidentify failures that are not sufficiently severe to trigger an alarm, suchas a slow degradation of output level.

Performance Testing as aDiagnostic Tool

Performance Measurement can be used as a diagnostic tool to identifypotential sources of problems. This is especially true when measured

data differ from cell specifications, but when these differences are toosmall to trigger an alarm.

Definitions of Tests Performance Measurement and the FCC Used as a tool to verifythat the Minicell functions within the parameters of its FCC license.

Rho Measurement, Power Measurement Measures the quality and strength of the signal as generated by the Minicell.

Functional Tests Uses the CRTU to verify that signals are correctly processed by the Minicell.

Drive Testing Conducted to check on the Minicell health from the“user” perspective.

Configure Configure (CFR) Command requesting cell site equipment configurations for FCC testing.

For more Information onDrive Testing

A detailed description of drive testing can be found in LucentTechnologies PCS System Acceptance Guidelines and Procedures 401-703-203 .




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsAutomatic Recovery Tools

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Automatic Recovery Tools

Description The PCS CDMA Minicell has fault-recovery software that allows it to

recover automatically from internally and externally detected faults. Nosingle failure causes the complete loss of frame functionality. This isachieved, in part, by building redundancy into the system for criticalsystem components. The strategy is to switch the standby or sparecomponent into service when there is a fault in the active component.Once the faulty component is out-of-service, it can be diagnosed,repaired, and placed back into service when needed. In general,requests for removing a faulty unit from service come from theautomatic fault-recovery software or from the ECP.

Automatic Recovery The cell site automatic fault recovery software consists of two mainsoftware subsystems: the HEH and the maintenance requestadministrator (MRA). The MRA subsystem not only responds toexternal requests from the MSC, but also responds to internal requestssubmitted by other software subsystems such as HEH. MRA handlesrequests to return information about the cell site, to remove (deactivate)cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site equipment, to performdiagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on.

Throughout the maintenance process, the maintenance status of equipment (hardware) is recorded, and the maintenance status of

equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECPrequests an update. The status of cell site equipment is displayed at theECP.






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsOMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor

Description The OMP ROP monitor contains a copy of all system communications,

thereby forming a history of system operations. All entered inputcommands and generated system responses (including faults reportedautomatically by a network element such as the cell site) are stored atthe OMP for up to 30 days. This same information is printed at theROP.

The ECP technician can use the information to track and analyze cellsite actions, hardware errors, and audit reports. Each entry has anassociated time stamp.

Report Types There are two types of output reports: solicited and spontaneous.

Solicited reports are generated in response to the commands entered bythe technician. Spontaneous reports are generated without any inputfrom the technician; they are initiated automatically by system eventsor conditions. An example of a spontaneous report is the reporting of acell site hardware error and corresponding automatic recovery action.



DiagnosticsRF Call Trace


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RF Call Trace

Description RF call trace (RF CALL) allows a technician to study the strength of

the signal received from a selected mobile station as it travels throughthe cellular system. Signal strength measurements can be collectedfrom as many as eight cell sites. A log of the measurements can bedisplayed showing both measurements from the serving cell site andthe strongest measurements for the strongest non-service cell site. RFcall trace is available for AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA mobile stations.

Call Trace Uses RF call trace is useful for:

• Handoff studies

• Optimizing neighbor lists

• Identifying poor coverage areas

• Studying uplink-downlink balance

• Verifying subscriber complaints

Technicians can use this tool to analyze the mobile RF environmentand fine tune translations (system parameters) relating to handoffs andinterference.

Related Documents These documents provide additional information on RF call trace:

• RF Call Trace Optional Feature (401-612-052)

• CDMA RF Call Trace (401-601-055)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DiagnosticsOrthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator

Description Orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS) is a CDMA-specific

feature in which a special software personality is loaded into one ormore CDMA channel elements (CEs) at the cell site. OCNS-configuredCEs are used to generate radio signals that simulate the effect of multiple users, so that CDMA system capacity can be estimated in thepresence of actual electrical noise from the environment.

A CE contains the necessary circuitry to support one CDMA channel. Itcan be configured as an overhead channel, a traffic channel, or - fortesting purposes - an OCNS channel.

OCNS Uses The OCNS feature is a convenient way to perform load testing on the

forward link of the CDMA system. It eliminates the need for mobilestations and reduces the number of cell site resources needed for thetests.

Requirements The OCNS feature requires the use of a mobile diagnostic monitor(MDM) at the cell site. The MDM is used to collect data for off-lineanalysis.

An OCNS session is on a per sector and carrier basis and isindependent of any other OCNS session. The OCNS design can supportmultiple sessions at the same cell site. No existing or in-progress calls

are dropped by starting an OCNS session. Any CE configured as anoverhead or traffic channel is not directly affected by OCNS activity.

For More Information See Lucent’s System 1000 Cell Site DCS I/O Manual401-610-107 .




401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Troubleshooting

Overview

Purpose In many instances, diagnostic results indicate that more than one unitmay be at fault. This is often true in circuits involving both digital andRF functions. Some corrective action situations involve replacing oneor more circuit cards within a group of two or three suspect cards. Forthis situation, the most effective corrective action is to replace eachcard and rerun the diagnostic test until the trouble is cleared.

There are other cases in which corrective action is not so

straightforward, because diagnostic definition is lacking and/or suspectunits are not easy to replace. To support this type of trouble-locatingsituation, where possible, trouble isolation procedures must be used.

Contents CRTU Measurement Fundamentals 7-3• CRTU Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4• Functional Tests using the CRTU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6• Testing using MOST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9• Testing Overhead Channels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-11• Testing Overhead Paths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-13• Testing Traffic Paths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16• Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18• CRTU Transmit Antenna Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21• Single Channel Selective Functional Test - - - - - - - - - -7-22

Performance Measurements 7-24• Service Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25• Plant Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-26




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Troubleshooting

• Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements - - - - - - 7-27• Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements - - - - - 7-28• Subscriber Complaints - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-29• CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30• Call Setup Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31• Alarm Test Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-33

Minicell Alarm Testing Procedures 7-36• PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures - - - - - - - - 7-37• Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature - - - - - - - 7-38• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) 0 - - - 7-40• CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-41• Power-Level Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-44• CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-45• CTU Shelf Converters Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-49• Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test - - - - - - - - 7-56

• External Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-59• Power Cabinet Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-61• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1 - - - - 7-65• Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - 7-67• PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-68• Minicell Alarm Definition File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-71

Troubleshooting Procedures 7-72• Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell - - - - - - - - - 7-73• Optioning the CSU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-76• Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set - - - - - - - - - - 7-79

• CDMA Clock Verification Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-82• Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-86• Power Measurement Transmit Levels - - - - - - - - - - - 7-88• Rho Measurement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-93



Troubleshooting


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CRTU Measurement Fundamentals

Overview

Purpose

Preparation for Working atthe Cell Site

It is assumed that the technician is familiar with the following or thatsuch conditions are otherwise met:

• Wrist grounding straps must always be attached before workingon any component or handling the circuit packs (CPs). This is toprevent or reduce electrostatic discharge that may damage ordestroy circuit packs containing integrated circuits.

• Handling CPs by the edges and the faceplates to avoid damagingcontacts and deforming components.

• Powering down the failing unit (when required), re-seating CPs,powering up the unit, and repeating diagnostics when an initialSTF message is received to verify the corrective action.

• Replacing one CP at a time when several are suspected, thenreplacing the next questionable CP, and repeating the diagnostics.

• Understanding operations of the terminal to include modechanging, page manipulation, and message conventions.

• Tagging faulty CPs with office location, mounting location,diagnostic phase and test that failed, and date removed.

• All test equipment is known to be calibrated and functioningproperly.

• A replacement unit or CP is known to be good.

• Burned out lamps or LEDs are replaced without instruction.

• Audible alarms are retired without instruction.

• The technician knows how to operate the test equipment toperform the recommended tests.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingCRTU Function

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRTU Function

What the CRTU Does The CRTU makes it possible to test the functionality of the RF train

subsystem of a working Minicell by emulating a mobile unit. Toaccomplish this, the CRTU permits you to test:

1. Overhead (Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A), Paging) channel elements:

Verification that the P/S/A channel elements (CEs) and page CEsare working

2. Traffic channel elements:

Verification that the Minicell traffic CEs are working.

3. Pilot Level functional test:

Checking the power level of the pilot channel and by inference thepower of the Minicell.

Test Sequence As the CRTU tests the Minicell, the following events take place,roughly in this order:

1. The CRTU tests parts of the Minicell, including the RF train,using a battery of test sequences. A MOST facility in the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS (the figure on 7-9) supports the CRTU as it testsactive, idle CEs in sequence.

2. While testing, the CRTU evaluates the operational aspects of in-

service channel elements and antenna sectors (if not anomni-configured Minicell) or face (if an omni configuration).

3. The status of the tests (e.g., pass/fail) may be reported by:

• the Read Only Printer (ROP)

• Status Display Page (SDP) 2131

How the CRTU works There are two ways to invoke a CRTU functional test: automatically(scheduled) or manually.

Whether under automatic or manual control, when a CRTU testsequence is invoked, the RCC instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOST number. If the ECP receives the call for theparticular test, the ECP at the DCS identifies it as a MOST call andterminates the test call to a source (MOST NUMBER) as a MOST callfrom the CRTU.



TroubleshootingCRTU Function


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions includingforced handoff. (The term “forced handoff” means to change to anotherChannel Element.)

During the traffic path functional test, the RCC uses the MOST forced

handoff function to transfer the call to idle (active and non-busy) trafficCEs within the same physical antenna face, or sector, until the call hasbeen handled by each idle traffic CE available to the antenna face.After a face is tested the other faces are tested.





TroubleshootingFunctional Tests using the CRTU


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-1. Initiate Traffic Path(TP) Functional Test(FT)

To verify that the Traffic Path is operating properly, perform thefollowing command and wait for system response to proceed to thenext step. This example will run across all sectors.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 exc:cell x,ft tp <cr>,x = Minicell # 1-222

Response

Output may be different depending on the configuration of theMinicell.M 22 EXC,CELL x FT TP, STARTED

DEVICE - ttyc

(a time/date/id#)

M 22 EXC:CELL x FT TP, COMPLETED

TP 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED

CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED


CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSEDCCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED



DEVICE - ttyc

(This is just an example. The sequence of CEs will vary)

(a time/date/id#)


TP 2 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED








401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingFunctional Tests using the CRTU


DEVICE - ttyc

(a time/date/id#)


TP 3 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED







DEVICE - ttyc

(a time/date/id#)



TroubleshootingTesting using MOST


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Testing using MOST

Overview The CDMA functional tests require that the CRTU set up test calls

using the mobile station test (MOST) feature.The type of CDMA MOST call described in this unit is originated bythe CRTU.

Both the Executive Call Processor (ECP) and the Radio ControlComplex (RCC) in the PCS CDMA Minicell can distinguish a MOSTcall type because each has a unique Mobile Directory Number Typevalue designated via the RC/V subform.

Relationship of 5ESS-2000to PCS CDMA Minicell with

CRTU

The figure below illustrates the relationship between the 5ESS-2000Switch and the PCS CDMA Minicell base station with a CRTUsubsystem. The CRTU in the figure is represented as CRTUi andCRTUm, respectively.

MOST Test Process

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Software at the RCC determines how the CE forced handoff willfunction.

TXANT

RCC

BCR

CTU

RX ANTs

DIV0 DIV1

RSP

CRTUmCRTUi

5ESS®-2000 SWITCH DCS

TO/FROM

TIME SLOTINTERCHANGE

UNIT

PCM PACKET PIPE

T1 LINES

PSTN

MSC

FRAME RELAYPROTOCOLHANDLER

MOST

NUMBER

DIGITALFACILITIESINTERFACE

DIGITALFACILITIESINTERFACE

PROTOCOLHANDLER

FOR VOICE

CRTU m

CRTU i

DEFINITIONS:

CDMA RADIO TEST UNIT MODULE

CDMA RADIO TEST UNIT INTERFACE MOST

RSP

MOBILE STATION TEST (FEATURE)

RADIO SWITCH PANEL

PCS CDMA Minicell

DFI

CDMA PATH

TDMBUS

TDMBUS RF

CRTU Components

T1/E1

SPAN




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingTesting using MOST

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 After FT triggers a MOST forced handoff, the CE selection algorithmstarts at the CE currently handling the call and searches forward throughthe ordered list of CEs until it finds an idle traffic CE to hand the call.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The RCC then hands off to the selected CE.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 After executing the handoff, the RCC can either trigger another forcedhandoff to continue the test session or release the MOST call if all idletraffic CEs have been tested.



TroubleshootingTesting Overhead Channels


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Testing Overhead Channels

Overview The overhead channel functional test verifies the following for each

antenna face (or sector) of the cell:• pilot

• sync

• paging

• access.

The testing of one antenna face (non-sectored) takes approximately 30seconds to complete, if successful.

Test Phases The overhead channel functional test consists of two phases, in this

order: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Pilot, sync, and paging channel acquisition test.Results: Verifies that the overhead-channel forward path (base-to-mobile path) is functioning.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Access-paging channel test.

Results: Verifies that the overhead-channel reverse path (mobile-to-

base path) is functioning.

Test Process The following process takes place during overhead channel functionaltesting:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The CRTU acquires the pilot, sync, and paging channels, known as theCDMA forward control channels, by locking on a particular CDMAcenter frequency (carrier) and pilot pseudo-noise (PN) offset.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 During the final portion of the testing, the CRTU calls the CRTU-designated MOST directory number to verify access and pagingoperation.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingTesting Overhead Channels

Initiating a Test The overhead channel functional test may be initiated in one of threeways:

1. Manually requested

2. Timer-scheduled

3. RCC-initiated.

RCC Initiated Actions If the RCC senses a failure in an overhead channel or a failure in theCCU carrying the overhead channel, the RCC will automaticallymigrate the overhead channel to another CE. The RCC does this byselecting and configuring another CE as the overhead channel. Insingle-carrier operation, the overhead CEs for a sector or omni cellmust be on the same CDMA cluster; that is, the overhead CEs must becontrolled by the same CDMA cluster controller (CCC).

Tests in Multiple-SectorCell For a multiple-sector cell, the RCC performs both parts of the overheadchannel functional test on sector 1 (alpha), then performs both parts of the overhead channel functional test on sector 2 (beta), and so on, untilthe RCC has tested all sectors of the cell.



TroubleshootingTesting Overhead Paths


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Testing Overhead Paths

Overview The overhead channels are tested with the execution of the FT OC test.

The various aspects of the overhead channels are tested as shown.

Testing the PSA Channel To do a pilot, sync, and paging channel acquisition test, the followingactions occur:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect to a certain antenna facethrough the Radio Switch Panel (RSP).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The mobile acquires the pilot, sync, and paging channels for the face.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The mobile transitions to the system idle state.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The CRTUi queries the status of the CRTUm.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 To pass, the CRTUm must return the system idle state.

Testing Access PagingChannel

To do an access paging channel test, the following actions occur:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The RCC instructs the CRTU to initiate a CRTU-designated MOST call

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 To pass, the network must be able to set up the call.

Testing a Forward Path(Phase 1)

To do an overhead channel functional test (forward path), the followingactions occur:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The RCC selects an antenna face to test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect the RSP to that face




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingTesting Overhead Paths

.

The CRTU connects the RSP to the transmit path and the diversity 0receive path.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The RCC queries the status of the CRTU.

The CRTU can only go to the system idle state if it acquires all three(pilot, sync and paging) forward control channels. If the CRTU neverresponds to the status query or returns a status other than system idle,the overhead channel functional test reports that it is a failure and thenaborts.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The CRTU returns the mobile idle state to the RCC, indicating that the

CRTU has acquired the pilot, sync, and paging channels.

Testing a Reverse Path(Phase 2)

Once it confirms that the overhead-channel forward path is functioning,the RCC tests the overhead-channel reverse path (performs the accesspaging channel test). The following sequence of events occurs:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The RCC instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOSTdirectory number.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The CRTUm dials the MOST directory number.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The P/S/A CE for the selected antenna face receives an “over the air”origination message from the CRTU and passes the message to itscontrolling CCC.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The controlling CCC:

• instructs its page CE to acknowledge the CRTU origination. Thepage CE sends an “over the air” acknowledgment message to theCRTU.

• informs the RCC that the CRTUm has originated a call.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 The RCC instructs the CRTU to release the MOST call.






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingTesting Traffic Paths

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Testing Traffic Paths

Overview The traffic path functional test verifies that a CDMA traffic path can be

established and maintained through every active and idle traffic CE onevery antenna face, or sector, of the cell. A CE configured as a trafficchannel contains the necessary circuitry to process one CDMA trafficchannel. The RCC repeats the MOST call origination and handoff foreach antenna face of the cell.

The testing time of one antenna face varies from less than one minuteto more than three or four minutes, depending upon how many idletraffic CEs are available to the antenna face.

Testing a Traffic Path To do traffic path functional testing, the RCC does the following:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Selects an antenna face and then performs an overhead channelfunctional test on that face.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOST directorynumber to test the access-paging portion of the overhead channel test.

The RCC continues to Step 3 only if the overhead channel test passes.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Requests message and subscriber validation to the ECP.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The ECP:

1. identifies the call as a CRTU-designated MOST call during digitanalysis

2. terminates the test call to the MOST source at the DCS

3. sends a traffic-channel assignment message to the RCC

4. sets up the proper speech handler connections at the DCS

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Instructs a CCC to select a specific traffic CE available to the antennaface being tested to handle the CRTU origination, and also sends achannel confirmation message to the ECP, which completes the call paththrough the DCS (the MOST low tone is received by the CRTU).



TroubleshootingTesting Traffic Paths


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Queries the status of the CRTU. The CRTU returns the traffic channelstate to the RCC, verifying that the CRTU is in the talk state.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Instructs the CRTU to send a certain 3-digit feature code to trigger theMOST forced handoff function. The CRTU sends the feature code,which is received by the RCC as an “over the air” flash-with-information message.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Sends the message to the ECP, which sends a MOST forced handoff command to the RCC.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Selects the next CE to which the call should be handed off.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Writes data pertaining to the selected CE (CE, CCU, CCC, and sector)into a global data area and then attempts to hand off the MOST call tothe selected CE.

Proceeds to Step 10 if handoff succeeded, or to Step 11 if handoff failed

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 If handoff succeeded, the RCC reports the results to the ECP and sendsan “over the air” flash-with-information message to the CRTU. Itupdates the global data area for the selected CE with the successful testresult.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 If handoff failed, the RCC reports the results to the ECP and does notsend an “over the air” flash-with-information message to the CRTU.The RCC updates the global data area for the selected CE with the failed

test result.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingPilot Level Functional Test (PLFT)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT)

Purpose The purpose of the PLFT is to test the power level of the pilot signal to

facilitate performance measurement.

Preparations The customer is required to populate several database fields via RecentChange and Verify (RC/V). Without these necessary database updates,the PLFT feature will occasionally print PLFT failures on the ROP andthe pilots will turn yellow (pilot degraded) on the Status Display Pages(SDP’s). The interval can be set via the RC/V forms.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-2. PLFT

The procedure to initialize the data needed for the PLFT feature is asfollows:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 [OPTIONAL] Adjust Pilot Power — Verify that the pilot channel signalstrengths are within tolerance at the J4, transmit antenna test point, testpoint for each carrier/sector pair.Lab support may choose to skip this step; however, customers (serviceproviders) should not. If the cell is not properly adjusted, the calibrationvalue may be used to compensate for the condition, but the values

reported by the PLFT feature will not be correct............................................................................................................................................................................

2 Inhibit the PLFT — INH:CELL x, FT PL at the craft shell.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Initialize Calibration Value — Set the “CDMA Pilot Level Calibration”value for the sector/carrier pair(s) of interest (those that are equipped) to0 dB using RC/V. The translation can be found on the CEQFACE form,screen 14.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Execute the PLFT for the Sector — EXC:CELL x, FT PL y at the craftshell. (It will most likely “fail” i.e., the pilot will be out-of-tolerance.However, it is the ROP output that is of interest.)






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingPilot Level Functional Test (PLFT)

Result

The above procedure should be performed on every cell with a CRTUequipped in the system. Also, it should be noted that this procedureshould be carried out again, after:

• changing the BCR attenuation factor by n or more (CEQCOM2)• changing the pilot channel’s digital gain by m or more

(CEQFACE)

• HW modifications to the RF test path

• growing in new carriers or sectors on the cell.



TroubleshootingCRTU Transmit Antenna Test


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRTU Transmit Antenna Test

Purpose This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not

operating correctly.

Reason for the Test A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. Themost common reason is damage to the antenna from adverse weather.Without this test, the operator might be unaware that there is notransmission from a sector of a cell which appears to be operatingcorrectly.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-3. When to Execute

The test is a functional test and can be performed manually orautomatically.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Initiate the FT via the EXC command.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Allow or inhibit the automatic (scheduled) test via the ALW and INHcommands, respectively.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 In addition, the technician can specify the interval at which thescheduled ANT FT executes in a manner identical to what is currentlyperformed for the OC (Overhead Channel), TP (Traffic Path) and PL

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

(Pilot Level) FT’s.

Result

When executed as automatically, only test failures are reported. Whenexecuted manually, a report will be made of the result of the testwhether the test was successful or not.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingSingle Channel Selective Functional Test

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Single Channel Selective Functional Test

Purpose This Single Channel selective Functional Test (SC FT) provides the

technician with the ability to evaluate the quality of a call on a specificTraffic CE (TCE). This feature uses a markov service option whichprovides pseudo-random data for testing the traffic channel betweenthe mobile and the basestation and RF Call Trace capability to collectMarkov data. The SC FT will provide a ROP report with the Markovstatistics collected for both forward and reverse links.

CE States on the SDP The Status Display Pages (SDP) subsystem currently supports anddisplays different CE statuses. The three states that SC FT is interestedin are camp-on, idle, and busy.

When executing SC FT, the technician can look at the SDP 2139 to findout if the CE requested is busy and being camped on. When the CE is

being camped on for SC FT, the SDP will display the CE status as“camp” (red/green).

When the CE is in reserve state for SC FT and waiting for a call tocome up, the CE is idle. However, it is not available for normal callprocessing to make calls on it. Its status will be displayed as “idle”(white/black).

When a call is up on the reserved CE, the CE is considered traffic busyand its status will be displayed as “busy” (black/green).

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-4.

This test is executed on manual mode only (via a TI command). It is notsupported for automatic mode (via a timer scheduled at the specifiedinterval).

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 At the command prompt, execute the functional test.EXC: CELL a, FT SC c, CCC d, CCU e, CE f [,VORATE g]!

CE state StatusDisplay

Color (foreground onbackground)

camp-on camp red on green

idle idle white on black

traffic busy busy black on green





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

where

• a = A single cell site number (1 - 222)

• c = The sector number (0 - 6)

• d = The CDMA Cluster Controller number (1 - 30)• e = The CDMA Channel Unit number (1 - 7)

• f = The CDMA Channel Element (0 - 9)

• g = Optional Vocoder rate (8, 13)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Performance Measurements

System Performance Measurements

Purpose Periodically, the ECP collects various measurements from the cell siteand stores them in files at the ECP. The measurements containinformation about system performance including traffic data,subscriber (mobile) data, and cell site equipment data.

Need for PerformanceMeasurements

Measurements are unique in that they can be used to identify cell-site-related faults that cannot be detected by the RCC, such as call-processing coverage problems and hardware units having partialperformance degradation. As explanation, catastrophic and severefailures will be detected by the RCC, but less severe failures may

escape detection by the RCC.

Examples of PerformanceDegradation

The following problems can cause reduction of radiated power (andtherefore reduced coverage) without detection:

• Damaged antenna

• Partial lightning damage to antenna/cable

• Damaged feeder

• Damaged, faulty, or waterlogged connectors

• New (since the Minicell installation) buildings, foliage growth,

and other obstructions

Measurement Types There are four types of measurements collected by the RCC andreported to the ECP:

• Service measurements

• Plant measurements

• Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements

• Power-level measurements.



TroubleshootingService Measurements


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Service Measurements

Overview Service measurements provide statistical information (cumulative

counts) on call traffic, various failure events, and the usage of systemresources. The data is used to troubleshoot the system, to evaluate howwell the system is operating, and to engineer its growth.

Collecting ServiceMeasurements

Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis (scheduledhourly by the ECP) or on a manual basis. On the scheduled basis, theRCC continually gathers service measurements and reports the datahourly to the ECP.

At the ECP, the collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files, onefile for every hour of the day. The files are overwritten with new data

beginning at the start of a new day.The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and thencopied to the OMP.

Per-Carrier ServiceMeasurements

Starting ECP 13 Service Measurements are collected on a per-carrierbasis. This assists isolating system faults.

The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and thencopied to the OMP.

Related Documents These documents provide more detailed information for servicemeasurements.• Service Measurements (401-610-135)

• Special Studies Measurements (CIB 117-8A) .




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingPlant Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Plant Measurements

Overview Plant measurements provide information on the performance of cell

site equipment including failure occurrences, failure durations (out-of-service time), audit failures, diagnostic failures, and initialization. Thedata can be used to evaluate cell site hardware deficiencies and theirimpact on subscriber service.

The number of failures is the number of times a hardware unit is takenout-of-service automatically. That count does not include manualremovals.

Collecting PlantMeasurements

Plant measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis or manualbasis. Scheduling of plant measurements is controlled exclusively by

the RCC, which automatically reports the data to the ECP every day atthe set time.

Related Documents ECP Plant Measurements System (254-341-116) .



TroubleshootingVoice Channel Selection Activity Measurements


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements

Overview Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements provide

detailed information about traffic movement within a cellular systemby recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processingevents at specified cell sites. VCSA can also be run in a special mode tocollect data only for a single specified mobile. Each record indicateswhat type of event occurred, the time it occurred, the telephone numberof the involved mobile station, and other data. Off-line processing of this data by the AutoPACE system provides information about voicechannel selection and handoffs during call processing.

Collecting VCSAMeasurements

VCSA measurements can be collected only if a VCSA study is

requested (manual basis). For the time period specified by the user, theRCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECPduring and after the measurements are made.

Related Documents Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide (401-660-108) .




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingFrame Error Rate and Power-LevelMeasurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements

Overview Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information about

the distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site. Thisstudy can also collect the distribution of noise detected by trafficchannels. The data is used by the AutoPACE system to investigatesystem troubles, add or alter radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, andplan growth.

Collecting Power-LevelMeasurements


Related Documents Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide (401-660-108) .

CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power Level Measurement (PLM) Optional Feature Document (401-612-203)



TroubleshootingSubscriber Complaints


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Subscriber Complaints

Description Subscriber (customer) complaints can be used to help identify

problems of poor or reduced coverage, assuming that the problems arerepeatable and not due to operator error. There can be a number of reasons why a customer reports less than satisfactory service,including:

• The mobile station or installation is faulty.

• The customer has incorrectly operated the mobile equipment.

• The customer is outside the normal coverage area.

• A cell site fault is evident.

• The customer attempted calls during the down time of the system/

cell.

Drive Testing Drive testing, which equates to driving a motor vehicle (complete withmobile transceiver) in a specific area of coverage while attempting tocomplete or monitor mobile calls, is a performance analysis activitythat may be used to find service-affecting problems. Drive testing anentire cellular system to find problems is very effective at directlyassessing system performance; however, it is very time consuming andexpensive. Therefore, system-level drive testing is not normally

performed except after a re-tune or major configuration change.Drive testing may be performed using a normal mobile or a test mobile.The test mobile is virtually identical to a normal mobile but hasincorporated an automatic answer and the ability to loop back the lineto the cell site. It can also check RF propagation, because the testreceiver measures the cell site RF off-air.

Trouble Isolation For a system fault involving the cell site, it is important to diagnosewhether the fault is from the DCS, the transmission link, the sitecontroller, or the RF. The test mobile is an important tool to

differentiate between these categories.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingCRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test

Purpose If a CRTU is not equipped, skip the procedures in this subsection.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-5. Running the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Verify the CRTU is in service.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Run the CRTUm traffic path functional test. The test should pass oneach channel element (two channel elements per TCU or 10 channelsper ECU.) for all antenna faces; on all CRC shelves. The command

(from the switch) is listed below.exc:cell x, ft tp

The Traffic Path Functional test is run only on diversity 0. Other

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

procedures will test diversity.



TroubleshootingCall Setup Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Call Setup Tests

Purpose This section describes the various Call Setup Tests.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-6. Diversity 1/Transmit Face Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove power from diversity 0 RUs by turning OFF CB1.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Make a call (to the switch) using each CCU on ALPHA face (removefrom service the BBA for BETA and GAMMA) of the growth cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Repeat the above step for the BETA face. Then repeat the above step forthe GAMMA face.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

4 Restore power to diversity 0 RU’s by turning ON CB1.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-7. Diversity 0 Tests

These tests are not required if the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Testtest was completed. Diversity 0 was tested in that section.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove power from diversity 1 RU by turning OFF CB9.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Place a call (to the switch) using any CCU (only one is necessary) onALPHA face of the growth cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Repeat the above step for the BETA face. Then repeat the above step forthe GAMMA face.





TroubleshootingAlarm Test Procedure


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Test Procedure

Purpose Alarm testing will be done via the switch. The procedure will be to

perform an action (e.g., turn off a CB) on the growth cabinet, and verifythe result (i.e., an alarm going active) at the switch on the ROP.

Enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login]terminal to show the alarms to the terminal as they change state:

alw:cell x,scsm <cr>

x = Minicell #

Preliminary To override the Intrusion Alarms (door open, User Alarm 10), gentlypull the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop. Do thesame for the Power and Backup Cabinet door alarm switches, if equipped.

At the Power Cabinet, ensure that both the MAJOR and MINOR LEDson the CPS ACU (cabinet power system alarm control unit) areextinguished.

If External User Alarms have been wired and equipped in theTranslations set, place the switch or sensor in a non-alarming or“Normal” state.

Verify if the gray protector caps have been installed in the PowerCabinet.

Alarm Scans Call the cell to see which alarms are active.

The cell under test should indicate no alarms.

If the Radio Cabinet door is left open on a cold day (outsidetemperature below freezing), then User 11, High/Low Temp, may bereported.

Growth Cabinet AlarmTests

The table below shows the alarms associated with the given circuitbreaker.

CircuitBreaker

Alarm Scan Reported

20 Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter (CRC 0)

18 Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter (CRC1)

16 Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 2 Power Converter (CRC2)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Testing of Growth Cabinet 1 is complete.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-8. Power Cabinet Alarms

This subsection tests the top rectifier shelf in the Power Cabinet (whererectifiers were added for Growth Cabinet power).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Place the first two rectifiers in the top rectifier shelf to STBY Mode.

Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarms 8 and 16.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Return the second rectifier to ON.Result: User Alarm 8 should clear, but User Alarm 16 shouldremain active.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn the remaining STBY rectifier to ON.

Result: This should clear the Power Minor Alarm (User Alarm16).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 (There is no need to perform this step on the two rectifiers tested forMajor Alarm.) Verify if each remaining rectifier generates a Minor

1 Growth Frame 1 Radio Amplifier Power Converter 4 (PCU1on CTU Shelf)

2 Growth Frame 1 Radio Amplifier Power Converter 5(PCU2 on CTU Shelf)

3 Growth Frame 1 Amplifier Fan Alarm (CTU Fan)4 Growth Frame 1 CRC Fan Alarm (Pedestal Fan)

19 CTU 3 CTU Critical Alarm (CTU 0)







401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm by placing it in STBY until it scans as User Alarm 16. Turn therectifier back ON before testing the next rectifier.

Result: All equipped rectifiers should individually generate User

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm 16.

Result

The power cabinet alarms have all been tested.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-9. Growth Cabinet Alarms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 To create a Door Intrusion Alarm (User Alarm 10), push on the door

alarm switch in the front of the Growth Cabinet.

Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarm 10.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Return the door switch to the alarm bypass position.

Result: The User Alarm will clear.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Repeat steps using the side door switch and then the rear door switch on

the Growth Cabinet.Result: These also appear in the scans as User Alarm 10.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Test all the alarms in the table on page 7-33 by turning OFF the listedbreaker and verifying that the associated alarm comes up at the switch.After the alarm is indicated, turn the breaker back ON and verify that the

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

alarm has cleared before proceeding to the next listed alarm.

Result

The growth cabinet door alarms have been tested.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Minicell Alarm Testing Procedures

General Description

Purpose This section provides the procedures for performing equipment anduser alarm tests on the CDMA Personal Communication Services(PCS) Minicell. This procedure should be performed on any newCDMA cell site equipment as part of an initial acceptance test orwhenever problems are suspected at the cell.

Sequence of Tests The alarm testing procedures contained in this section can beperformed any time after the Minicell has been successfully booted.

Records The results of these procedures should be recorded by obtaining the

Read Only Printer (ROP) output.References The following documents may be useful as references during the

performance of the procedures described in this section.

• APX-1000 Input Message Manual401-610-055

• APX-1000 Output Message Manual401-610-057

• PCS Minicell Desc. Operation & Maintenance401-703-301

• User Definable Alarms Feature 401-612-057

• Selectable Cell Site Messaging Feature401-601-003



TroubleshootingPCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures

Overview Even though alarm testing was performed during the factory test and

installation phases of the Minicell growth, it should be repeated againduring integration. The tests will verify alarm continuity of the alarmpaths from the various electrical components to the Alarm and FitsInterface (AFI) board of the CSC, but they do not test the ability of thecell software to autonomously detect the fault and report it with thecorrect text message string on the ROP.

Input Commands/OutputMessages

Each input message required to perform a step during alarm testingshould be entered from an Input Message (craftshell or UNIX[TIpdunix login]) terminal. In this document, the input and output

messages are shown in table form. Each table will provide thefollowing information:

1. Purpose of the action as the “Action Purpose”

2. Required action or input message as the “Stimulus”

3. Expected output message as “Response”




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingEnabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature

Purpose Alarm scanning is the subsystem in the cell which detects and reports

alarm messages to the ECP.

Message Routing These messages are not routed to the craftshell maintenance terminalsbut will be printed on the ROP. An optional feature, Selectable CellSite Messaging (SCSM), makes it possible to route all messages for asingle cell or group of cells to the terminal on which you are working.The SCSM feature should be used whenever it is active in a system.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-10. Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature

Procedure for enabling the SCSM feature:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 See if SCSM is available. The SCSM feature will be active after thiscommand is entered.alw:cell x,scsm <CR>x = Minicell # 1-222

Result: OK (Feature is available and activated for the specifiedMinicell)

orFEATURE NOT ACTIVE (SCSM not activated in featureactivation file)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clear registers and report alarms that are currently invoked. An alarmwill report only when its state (OFF NORMAL or NORMAL) changes.

init:cell x:spp as <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222

Result: OK (When no alarms are present)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Produce list of cells in which the SCSM feature is routing messages to aspecific terminal. If ROP messages are not being routed to the terminalon which they were ‘allowed’, reenter the alw:cell x, scsm command.



TroubleshootingEnabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

op:cell,scsm <CR>

Result

A list of cells is displayed and SCSM is enabled.





TroubleshootingCSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms

Purpose This section is for CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-12. CSC Shelf Power Convertors Alarm Tests

The following procedure tests CSC Shelf Power Convertor Alarms.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify CSCsí states.**This could also be determined by looking at theCell c Status Screen on the MCRT: 2131,c.<CR>

op:cell x,csc 0 <CR>

op:cell x,csc 1


Result: OP:CELL x CSC 0,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVEOP:CELL xCSC 1,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVE

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Make CSC 0 STBY and CSC 1 ACTIVE (if necessary)

sw:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,STBYOP:CELL x CSC 1, ACTIVE

CAUTION

............................................................................................................................................................................


The cell could be rendered out-ot-service.

CSC 0 should be STBY and CSC 1 should be ACTIVE before proceeding.

3 Remove CSC 0 from service

rmv:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 0,COMPLETED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Test CSC 0 Alarm ReportingTurn OFF CB13

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTERALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Test CSC 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn ON CB13

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTERALARMSTATE:NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Restore CSC 0 to STBY

rst:cell x,csc 0;ucl:stby <CR>


Result: RST:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,STBY

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Make CSC 0 ACTIVE and CSC 1 STBY

sw:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>


Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,ACTIVEOP:CELL x CSC 1, STBY

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Remove CSC 1 from service

rmv:cell x,csc 1;ucl <CR>


Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 1,COMPLETED





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................


Turn OFF CB5

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTERALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................


Turn ON CB5

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTERALARMSTATE:NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Restore CSC 1 to STBY

rst:cell x, csc 1;ucl:stby <CR>

Result: RST:CELL x CSC 1, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 1,

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

STBY




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingPower-Level Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Power-Level Measurements

Overview Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information about

the distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site. Thisstudy can also collect the distribution of noise detected by trafficchannels. The data is used by the AutoPACE system to investigatesystem troubles, add or alter radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, andplan growth.

Collecting Power-LevelMeasurements


Related Documents Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide(401-660-108) .



TroubleshootingCRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm

Purpose This section is for the CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-13. Testing CRC Shelf Power Converter Alarm


Switching OFF CB16 will cause the Minicell data links to drop OOS.

Do not attempt to test CB16 that supplies DC power to theTN3500B DFI board on CRC 2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Verify SCTs’ states. This could also be determined by looking at theCell c Status Screen on the MCRT: 2131,c.

op:cell x,cat 0 <CR>

op:cell x,cat 1 <CR>

Result: OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,[ ]

[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,[ ]

[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Make SCT 0 STBY and SCT 1 ACTIVE (if necessary)

rst:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>


Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, ACTIVE

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, STBY




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


CAUTION

............................................................................................................................................................................


The Minicell needs at least one active SCT.

SCT 0 should be STBY and SCT 1 should be ACTIVE before proceeding.

3 Remove SCT 0

rmv:cell x,cat 0;ucl <CR>


Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,COMPLETED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Test CRC 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB20

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 1

ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 0 POWERCONVERTER

STATE:OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Test CRC 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn ON CB20


ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 0 POWERCONVERTER

STATE:NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Restore SCT 0 to STBY

rst:cell x, cat 0;ucl:stby <CR>






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Restore SCT 1 to STBY

rst:cell x, cat 1;ucl:stby <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED


...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Make SCT 1 ACTIVE and SCT 0 STBY

sw:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>


Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, ACTIVE

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................


Result

SCT 1 MUST be ACTIVE and SCT 0 MUST be STBY when thissection of alarm testing is completed.



TroubleshootingCTU Shelf Converters Alarm


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

Purpose The CTU shelf is equipped with two +15 VDC Power Conversion

Units (PCUs). Each PCU has a single alarm which is used to report thepresence of any of the following alarm conditions:

• Low Output Voltage Alarm

• High Output Voltage Alarm

• Over Current Alarm

• Over Temperature Alarm.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-14. Testing the CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

Procedures for testing the CRTU (for ecp release 10.0 and earlier)converters are outlined in the following.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Test PCU 1 Alarm Reporting




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Turn OFF CB1


ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 1

ALARMSTATE: OFF NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18, BIT 2

ALARM: CTU 0 CTU ALARM CLEARED

STATE: NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL


ALARM: CTU 1 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: OFF NORMAL





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Turn ON CB1


ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 1ALARM

STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5

ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED

STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Turn OFF CB9


ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 2ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: OFF NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: OFF NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: OFF NORMAL





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................


Turn ON CB9

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 5ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 2ALARM

STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL


ALARM: CTU 1 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEAREDSTATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL



E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

STATE: NORMAL




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingFan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test

Purpose This section is for the Fan and Heat Blower Alarm Test.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-15. Testing the Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm

Procedures for testing proper functioning of a PCS CDMA MinicellHeat Exchanger Fan alarm are outlined in the following procedural list.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Test CTU Shelf Fan Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB2


ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER SHELF FANALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Test CTU Shelf Fan Alarm Reporting

Turn ON CB2


ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER SHELF FANALARM

STATE: NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Test Frame Fan Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB3

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7, BIT 3ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Test Frame Fan Alarm Reporting





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Turn ON CB3


ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN ALARM

STATE: NORMAL...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Test Heat Exchanger Alarm Reporting

**The Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temp alarm will not report when testingalarms on an Indoor Primary Cabinet.

Turn OFF CB10


ALARM: HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP

STATE: OFF NORMAL


ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGERBLOWER 0

STATE: OFF NORMAL


ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGERBLOWER 1

STATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Test Heat Exchanger Alarm Reporting

**The Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temp alarm will not report when testing

alarms on an Indoor Primary Cabinet.Turn ON CB10

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1, BIT 3ALARM: HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMPSTATE: NORMAL





401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGERBLOWER 0STATE: NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7, BIT 1ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGERBLOWER 1

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

STATE: NORMAL



TroubleshootingExternal Alarms


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................External Alarms

Purpose External alarms are pre-wired mechanical alarms, and are composed of

user defined alarms, and of cell-site intrusion alarms.

Advance Preparations To test User Alarms, verify that all of the External Alarm Switches onthe Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the closed (left-most) position. If external user alarms have been wired into the OSPside of the Lightning Protection Block, it will be necessary to removethe cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard User Alarm CrossConnect Panel.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-16. Testing External Alarms

Testing procedures for these alarms are outlined below.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Move the External Alarm Switch 0 to the open position (right-most).


ALARM: EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0

STATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for External Alarms 1 - 6.

Result: Same as above

**OFFSET 0, BIT (5-0)

Reconnect the cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard UserAlarm Cross Connect Panel if it was removed earlier.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Move the External Alarm Switch 0 to the closed position (left-most).

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 0, BIT 6ALARM: EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

STATE: NORMAL




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingExternal Alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-17. Testing the Cell Site Intrusion Alarms

Testing the Cell Site intrusion alarms is done by activating doorsensors.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Pull out the peg on the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor andpush it back in. (Simulates opening the door.)


ALARM: INTRUSION ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Push in the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor. (Simulates closingthe door.)


ALARM: INTRUSION ALARM

STATE: NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Primary Power Cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Growth Radio Cabinet, if one has beeninstalled.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Backup Power Cabinet , if one has been

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

installed.

ResultAll intrusion alarms at the Minicell have been tested.



TroubleshootingPower Cabinet Alarms


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Power Cabinet Alarms

Purpose This section is for the Power Cabineet Alarms.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-18. Testing the Power Cabinets

The tests outlined in below are for the Primary Power Cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Switch OFF one of the power rectifiers located in the Primary PowerCabinet.


ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARMSTATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Switch OFF a second power rectifier.


ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Switch one of the rectifiers back ON (only one rectifier should now beswitched OFF).



STATE: NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Switch ON the single rectifier that was left OFF in the previous step.Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 0

ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM

STATE: NORMAL




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Verify that there are batteries in the Primary Power Cabinet beforeproceeding.

CAUTION

............................................................................................................................................................................

Battery Damage

A Major Battery Discharge Alarm may appear OFF NORMAL if batteries are almost discharged.

If this happens, turn ON CB1 in the Power Cabinet IMMEDIATELY!

6 Switch OFF CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to TestAC Failure Alarm.

There is NOT a CB1 in the Indoor Power Cabinet. The Main ACbreaker should be turned OFF to test this alarm.



STATE: OFF NORMAL



STATE: OFF NORMAL


ALARM: POWER CABINET AC FAILURE

STATE: OFF NORMAL





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Switch ON CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to testAC Failure Alarm.



STATE: NORMAL



STATE: NORMAL


ALARM: POWER CABINET AC FAILURE

STATE: NORMAL

CAUTION

............................................................................................................................................................................


CB22 may be used as an auxiliary power supply for the facilities equipment (i.e. fiber drivers).

8 Turn OFF CB22 to Test Power Cabinet Fan Alarm.

The Indoor Power Cabinet does NOT have a fan.



STATE: OFF NORMAL




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Turn ON CB22 to test Power Cabinet Fan Alarm.

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1, BIT 0ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

STATE: NORMAL

Result

The power cabinet alarms have been tested.



TroubleshootingReference Frequency and Timing Generator(RFTG)1


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1

Purpose This section is for the RFTG1 alarm testing.

RFTG Errors The RFTG errors are reported to the ROP and are displayed on twoicons on the 2138 SDP. There is one icon for each RFTG unit.

The RFTG units must be able to be reset via a TI command. Thecommand must specify the cell site and the RFTG unit (0/1). A warningmessage must be displayed on the ECP console prior to the executionof this command. The warning message says:

You are about to reset a critical unit in the cellsite; execution of this command will disrupt CDMAservice on this cell site. Press "RETURN" tocontinue or "ESC" to abort.A message is provided to indicate that the command went through. Asecond message is provided to indicate that the RFTG unit returned toNORMAL status. If the RFTG unit does not return to NORMAL status,the second message will indicate: Unit did not responded orcommand failed.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-19. RFTG1 Alarm Testing

This test concludes the recommended alarm testing sequence.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared BEFORE testing the RFTG1alarm reporting.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Test RFTG 1 Alarm Reporting.

Turn OFF CB4.

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 6ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 1 ALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure GPS timing.

**Do NOT do this until the previous step’s response has been reported.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingReference Frequency and Timing Generator(RFTG)1

Turn OFF CB14, CB20, and CB18.

Result: A large number of alarms will report at this point. It is notnecessary to check for specific alarms.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure GPS timing and test RFTG 1 Alarm Reporting.

Turn ON CB14, CB 4, CB20, and CB18.

Result: A large number of alarms will report at this point. Thealarm that should be checked is as follows: SCAN POINT:OFFSET2, BIT 6ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 1 ALARMSTATE:NORMAL**This will take approximately 16 minutes to

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

report.

Result

Test of RFTG1 is complete.



TroubleshootingRestoring Out-Of-Service Equipment


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment

Purpose Alarm testing was done with the SCSM feature enabled, to facilitate

monitoring of the cell behavior. Because this feature generates a largenumber of messages, it should be disabled in normal operation.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-20. Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment

The procedure for restoring equipment to service is outlined below.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Inhibit the SCSM feature on the terminal for the Minicell being tested.**This must be done before restoring any equipment back into service.

inh:cell x,scsm <CR>x = Minicell # 1-222

Result: OK

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Ensure that the SCSM feature was inhibited on the terminal for theMinicell under test

op:cell,scsm <CR>

Result: OP:CELL,SCSM

CELL SITE

###

**The cell under test should NOT be listed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clean up and restore all OOS units

init:cell x:sc <CR>


E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

Result: OK

Result

The equipment is back in service.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingPCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map

Overview Thius section details the PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map.

The Alarm Map The following table gives the connections (AIM Terminal and PunchDown) for user alarms, as well as the offset that is used to interpretalarm messages.

ROP Text Message Level S2 UserAlarm #

Offset Bit CB AIM 1Term.No.

PunchDown(OSP)

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 6 Min 0 0 0 - 17 22







POWER CABINET GENERATOR

ON

Maj 7 0 7 - 10 15

POWER CABINET MAJORALARM

Maj 8 1 0 - 9 14

CSU ALARM Maj 9 1 1 CB8 8 -

INTRUSION ALARM(All Frames)

Maj 10 1 2 - 7 13Grw-Frm

HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LOTEMP

Min 11 1 3 CB10

6 -

BATTERY DISCHARGE ALARM Maj 12 1 4 - 5 9

GROWTH 0 ALARM(Growth 0 Heat Exchanger)

Min 13 1 5 - 4 -

CRTUm Min 14 1 6 CB12

3 -





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


POWER CABINET MINORALARM

Min 16 2 0 - 1 12

POWER CABINET AC FAILUREALARM

Maj 17 2 1 - 0 11

AMPLIFIER SHELF POWERCONVERTER 1

Min - 3 4 CB1 - -

PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIERSHELF FAN ALARM

Min - 7 2 CB2 - -

PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FANALARM

Min - 7 3 CB3 - -

REFERENCE FREQUENCYGENERATOR 1 ALARM

Maj - 2 6 CB4 - -

CONTROLLER SHELF POWERCONVERTER ALARM

Min - 3 0 CB5CB13

- -

AMPLIFIER SHELF POWERCONVERTER 2

Min - 3 5 CB9 - -

PRIMARY FRAME HEATEXCHANGER BLOWER 1ALARM

Min - 7 1 CB10

- -

PRIMARY FRAME HEATEXCHANGER BLOWER 0ALARM

Min - 7 0 CB10

- -

PRIMARY FRAME POWERCONVERTER ALARM 0

Min - 3 0 CB13

- -

REFERENCE FREQUENCYGENERATOR 0 ALARM

Maj - 2 5 CB14

- -



PunchDown(OSP)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


PRIMARY FRAME RADIOSHELF 1 POWER CONVERTER

Min - 3 2 CB18

- -

PRIMARY FRAME RADIOSHELF 0 POWER CONVERTER

Min - 3 1 CB20

- -



PunchDown(OSP)



TroubleshootingMinicell Alarm Definition File


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell Alarm Definition File

Overview This sections details the Minicell Alarm Definiation File.

Use of the Definition File One of the uses of the Alarm Definition File is in troubleshooting. Inparticular, it allows to trace an alarm signal in Schematic Diagrams.

The table below gives the Alarm Reference Numbers in SchematicDiagrams.

Alarm RefNumber

Alarm Level Usage

ALL 0 0 MIN EXTERNAL USER ALARM 6

ALL 0 1 MIN EXTERNAL USER ALARM 5ALL 0 2 MIN EXTERNAL USER ALARM 4





ALL 0 7 MAJ POWER CABINET GENERATOR ON

ALL 1 0 MAJ POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM

ALL 1 1 MAJ CSU ALARM

ALL 1 2 MAJ INTRUSION ALARM

ALL 1 3 MIN HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP

ALL 1 4 MAJ BATTERY DISCHARGE ALARM

ALL 1 5 MIN GROWTH 0 ALARM

ALL 1 6 MIN CRTUm


ALL 2 0 MIN POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM

ALL 2 1 MAJ POWER CABINET AC FAILURE




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingMinicell Alarm Definition File

Troubleshooting Procedures

Overview

Purpose This chapter contains procedures that you perform as PCS CDMAMinicell-related maintenance tasks.

Documentation The following documents are used as reference material in this Section:

• AUTOPLEX® System 1000 Input Message Manual(401-610-055)for ECP R7.0

• AUTOPLEX® System 1000 Output Message (401-610-057)Manual for ECP R7.0

• Series II Cell Site Hardware Description, Operation, and Maintenance (401-660-100) .



TroubleshootingCommunicating with the PCS CDMA Cell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell

Purpose This procedure is designed to enable you to:

• Access and exit the craftshell• Access Status Display Pages

Prerequisites Must have a log-in to the cell.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-21. Accessing the ECP Craftshell

Perform the following:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select AUTOPLEX® OMP menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select ECP and DCS OA&M from the AUTOPLEX® OMPmenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access from the ECP andDCS OA&Mmenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select ECP Craft Shell from the AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

Access menu.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-22. Exiting the ECP Craftshell


...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 With the 3 AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access menu active, pressthe Control - f - 6 keys, in the order shown.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Close the 2 ECP and DCS OA&M menu using the keystrokes you usedin Step 1. Do this to reach the 1 AUTOPLEX® OMP menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 At the 1 AUTOPLEX® OMP menu, highlight Exit using the cursor-upor cursor-down key. With Exit highlighted, press the Return key.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The system queries whether you want to exit the Craftshell. To provide

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

an affirmative response, press the Control-f-3 keys, in the order shown.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-23. Access Status Display Pages from the OMP


...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select AT&T OMP Software Applications from the Workspace menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access from the OMPApplications menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX® System 1000ECP Access Menu

The cursor is positioned at the CMD< line.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 The CMD function is used for poke commands (either as page numberor maintenance commands.). To open the display, enter the unique

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

status display page number (command) and press RETURN.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To back out of the menus, simultaneously press the Control-f and 6keys.To exit, simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys.

Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) underthe CMD heading on the System 1000 index pages (100 - Page Indexpage and/or 2100 - APX Index page).




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingOptioning the CSU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Optioning the CSU

Purpose This procedure is designed to enable you to determine the correct

settings of a Kentrox CSU.

Reference ADC Kentrox Operator Manual

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-24. Accessing the Terminal Cell Interface Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Connect the terminal to the 25-pin port on the lower front of the PCSCDMA Minicell cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Option your terminal as follows:

• Line rate = 9600 baud

• 8-bit / 1 stop bit / parity = none

• Direct connect (if applicable)

• Local echo = N (full duplex)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter ^D xx:00 ^E, where xx is the CSU number. This exercise uses

CSU 02. This sets up the link to the CSU. The ^D means to press theCTRL key and the D key at the same time. This input displays the MainMenu from the CSU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter TC and press the Enter key. This displays the terminal (cell)

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

interface options.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-25. Specify CSU Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Specify CSU options by typing the code corresponding to yourconfiguration parameters and pressing the Enter key. The options arelisted at the beginning of each line. For example, to change the terminalinterface to extended super frame, type TESF to specify the extended





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

super frame option. After setting an option, press the Enter key againand the CSU redisplays the terminal configuration for verification.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Type X after completing all desired terminal interface option changes............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Type NC and press the Enter key at the Main Menu to change thenetwork interface options (toward the T1 provider). This brings up thenetwork interface configuration submenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Make option changes in the same manner as you did the terminalinterface changes.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Return to the Main Menu by typing an X.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter ^D. This severs the control link with the CSU. Repeat these stepsif you have more CSUs equipped. Remember to establish each CSUcontrol link with the input ^D xx:00 ^E.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Type LD to enter the local diagnostics submenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Type DST to perform the self test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Observe the CSU under test. Observe the sequence of LED flashes

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

followed by the relighting of the green PWR/FAIL LED.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-26. Exiting the CSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Type X to leave the submenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter ^D to break the connection to the CSU under test.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the serial data cable from the jack on the lower front of the PCS

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

CDMA Minicell cabinet.

Result

Ensure that when you are done, all settings for the TC and NC are back to their original values.



TroubleshootingSetting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set

Purpose This procedure enables you to set up a PCS CDMA HP test set,

composed of an HP-8521A Spectrum analyzer, a HP-83205A CDMAadapter, and a HP-83236A PCS adapter.

Reference HP Documentation

Connections for theHP8521A and CDMA/PCS

Adapters

Set up HP Test Set as shown in the diagram below:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-27. Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Connect the HP-8521A Spectrum analyzer, the HP-83205A CDMA

adapter, and the HP-83236A PCS adapter as shown in the figure............................................................................................................................................................................

2 Power up both the 8521 and the 83236A for at least 15 minutes.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Press the "TESTS" button, middile of upper row. The test (main menu)screen will appear.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 If either/or both the "Select Procedure Location” or “Select ProcedureFilename” are blank, proceed with this step.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 If the "Select Procedure Location and the “Select Procedure Filename”have “Card” and “Manual” respectively, skip to the next step.

1. Press the "PRESET" button, upper right of main test set.

2. Insert the software card into right slot.

3. If you are in the "IBASIC TEST" screen, depress "PRESET";otherwise; press the "TESTS" button, middle of upper row.

4. Rotate knob to position the cursor at "SELECT PROCEDURELOCATION", press knob to highlight. A block appears with"Choices" at the top.

5. With the knob, position the cursor to "Card" and press knob toselect. A block appears with "Choices" at the top.

6. Rotate knob to "SELECT PROCEDURE FILE NAME", thenpress the knob.

7. With the knob, select "MANUAL"...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 At top right block on the screen, either depress k1 button or use the knobto position the cursor and select "RUN TEST". The load sequence will

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

take approximately 1.5 minutes.

Result

When load and run are done, screen shows Manual Control Main

Menu.

Equipment Functions:

• Turning the knob will move the cursor to the desired selection.

• Pressing the knob will highlight a selection or provide you withother selections.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• To enter numerical functions, use the keypad and then press theknob.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingCDMA Clock Verification Test

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Clock Verification Test

Purpose This procedure enables you to verify the clock source used for CDMA

BCRs by performing the following:• Preparing the cell site for CDMA clock verification

• Seting up the HP 8521A for CDMA clock verification

• Performing the CDMA clock verification test

Test equipment The following test equipment is required to complete this exercise:

• An HP8521A Test Set with PCS CDMA adapter

• Miscellaneous cables, connectors, and adapters

Background CDMA in the AUTOPLEX® System 1000 uses a clock signal tosynchronize the CDMA BCRs. The clock signal is derived from theglobal positioning system (GPS) signal timing component.

A GPS antenna connected to the reference frequency and timinggenerator (RFTG-m) provides the timing source. The clock signal isthen distributed to CDMA growth frames through cables connected tothe RFTG-m.

The derived clock signal is distributed by the active TN1703synchronized clock and tone (SCT) circuit pack. You will perform theclock verification test on each SCT circuit pack in the CDMA cell.

This section of the procedure ensures that the CDMA SCT circuit pack equipment is healthy and that it is in the proper state for test operationsto begin.

CDMA BCRs do not operate accurately without the timing sourceprovided by the SCT circuit pack. Take care to ensure that you do notdisable all SCT circuit packs at the same time.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RFTG Display The diagram shows the rftg.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-28. CDMA Clock Verification Testing

Perform the following steps to prepare for CDMA clock verificationtesting:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Ensure that there are no SCT circuit packs in the OOS (out of service)state by observing the 2131, x Status Display Page for the cell site being

tested, or using the OP:CELL x input message............................................................................................................................................................................

2 Observe the LEDs on the RFTG-m. If the LEDs do not indicate thepresence of an adequate GPS signal, you cannot perform the CDMAclock verification test on this cell.

If the LEDs do not indicate a proper GPS signal, STOP; you cannotcontinue this procedure.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn on the HP test set by pressing the POWER button and allow the setto warm up for 30 minutes if you have turned the test set off afterexercise 3.

RFTG-m-XO

NO GPSFAULTSTBYON

J4J6J5J3P1

J7

J2

REF IN +24V ALARM INTERFACE RS-485/1 PPS 15 MHz

GPS ANT

RFTG-m-RB

NO GPSFAULTSTBYON

J4J6J5J3P1J2

REF OUT +24V ALARM INTERFACE RS-485/1 PPS 15 MHz

J1




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use a standby SCT board. You can determine which SCT is in thestandby state by observing whether the ACT LED is lit. If lit, use the

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

other SCT circuit pack.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-29. Set up the HP Test Set

The procedure outlined below covers seting up the HP test set.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect a BNC(M)-SMA(M) cable from the EVEN SECOND SYNCIN connector of the HP test set to the 2PPS (J3) connector on the SCTcircuit pack to be tested.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Connect a BNC(M)-SMA(M) cable from the CDMA TIMEBASE INconnector of the HP test set to the CLK (J2) connector on the SCT circuitpack to be tested.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Make sure that the SCT circuit pack is connected to the HP Test Set forthe duration of all remaining procedures.

Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard theinformation on the next screen).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the To Screen menu area of the HP test set, select More.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select CDMA ANL under Choices to go to the CDMA Analyzer screen.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 On the CDMA Analyzer screen, select the field labeled SYNTH REF ............................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select 19.6608 under Choices.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 At the SCT board being tested, switch the TST CLK switch to OFF.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 At the HP 85203A, verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is lit,indicating that there is no 19.6608-MHz signal coming from the SCTboard.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 At the SCT board being tested, switch the TST CLK switch to ON.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 At the HP test set, verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is dark,indicating that there is an accurate 19.6608-MHz signal coming from theSCT board.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Press the PREV key (top middle key of the test set)............................................................................................................................................................................

13 Select continue (K2 key).

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Manual Main Menu should return to the screen.

Result

You have completed this procedure.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TroubleshootingAnalyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum

Purpose This procedure is designed to enable you to monitor and measure the

center frequency and bandwidth of the CDMA RF signal.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-30. Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum

The cable connection for this test is from the RF IN/OUT on theHP83236A to SECTOR ONE(S1D0/P) connector in the Hatch-plateand to include a 30db attenuator.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 On the Manual Control Main Menu, select:

• Change System Settings• Transmitter Test Cable Loss

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter 34.4db using keypad(for attenuator/cable loss).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Return to previous menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select Channel Number. Channel Number can be found by accessingthe Status Display Page 2138 for the appropriate cell. Enter channelnumber using the keypad.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard theinformation on the next screen).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select SPEC ANL from choices.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select Ref Lvl at bottom of screen - Enter 45 using keypad (adjust asnecessary/desired).



TroubleshootingAnalyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select Span at bottom of screen - Enter 5 using keypad(adjust asnecessary/desired).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Record center frequency reading ___________ (right side of screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Depress PREV key (top middle of test set).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Select continue (k2 key).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

12 Manual Main Menu should return to screen.

You have completed the procedure.





TroubleshootingPower Measurement Transmit Levels


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select Auto Set (Reminder: HP must be connected to the Hatch-plate)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Return to previous menu...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select: HP 83236A TX Power Measurement

Select: Change Power Measurement Settings

Select: Samples to Collect

Enter 4800 with Keypad

Select: update

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Return to previous menu

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

10 Select - Make Power Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-32. Modify the ceqface Power Settings

The procedure below are the steps to modify the ceqface powersettings.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 At the terminal access the Recent Change/Verify via apxrcv and accessthe ceqface form.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 On the ceqface form, edit the following fields:

• Enter cell number (Field 1)

• Enter face (1 = alpha) (Field 2)

• Pilot Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 111




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Paging Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 00

• Synch Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 00

• BCR Attenuation Factor (db) - change to 00

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Update the form

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

4 Disconnect from the ceqface form and apxrcv.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-33. Move the Paging Channel to Another CCU

The procedure below is to move the paging channel to another CCU

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Access the Status Display Pages.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Access 2139,a,b (a=cell b=ccc number).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the paging channel CCU .

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Observe paging channel move to another CCU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Restore the ccu that the paging channel was on.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 At the HP test set record the dbm reading on the screen, ________.(Should be approximately 39db for 8 watts and 42 db for 16 watts) Thisis the nominal power for the transmitter.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Using a adjustment tool, adjust the power in the BCR for maximumpower and record it ___________.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Adjust for the lowest power and record it ________.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Adjust back to the nominal power.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

10 At the terminal, disconnect from the Status Display Pages.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-34. Restore the ceqface Power Settings

The procedure below is to restore the ceqface Power Settings.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Access Recent Change/verify via the apxrcv and access the ceqfaceform.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select: update.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Edit the following fields

Enter cell number (Field 1)

Enter face (1=alpha) (Field 2)

Pilot Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 108Paging Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 64

Sync Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 34

BCR Attenuation Factor (db) - change to 8

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Update the form.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

5 Disconnect from ceqface form and apxrcv.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-35. Restore the Paging Channel to its Original CCU

The procedue below restores the Paging Channel to its original CCU




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Access the Status Display Pages.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Access 2139,a,b (a=cell number b=ccc number).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the ccu that the paging channel is on.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Observe the paging channel shift back to where it was previously.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Restore the ccu that you have just removed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

6 Disconnect from Status Display Pages.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-36. End the Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 At the HP-8521A, select:

• Prev Menu (k1 key)• Prev menu

You have completed the procedure.



TroubleshootingRho Measurement


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Rho Measurement

Purpose This procedure is designed to enable you to perform the CDMA

transmitter waveform quality measurement, better known as Rho.

Description Rho is a measurement of the transmitter modulation accuracy and givesthe percentage of transmitted power that correlates to the ideal code,where a measurement of 1 indicates perfect correlation. Uncorrelatedpower appears as white noise and is a source of interference for otherusers.

In order to perform Rho measurements on a Minicell, the clusters mustbe placed in a manual configuration (CFR) mode where the CDMAtransmitter is activated with just the Pilot channel being modulated.

The CDMA Base Station Standard for passing is a Rho measurement of 0.95 or greater. Anything lower suggests a problem with the BDR orACU.

System Requirements The test procedures can be performed on any CDMA PCS Minicell thatis controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center PCSC andthat is loaded with the minimum software release of PXB07.10.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-37. Start Rho Measurement

From the HP83236A Manual Control Main Menu, do the following:(The HP83236A Manual Control Main Menu should be on the screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select: Pause for Manual HP 892NX Measurements.

Result: A new screen will appear with a lot of information on it. Itis not necessary to read it.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select: More (from the bottom of the screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select: CDMA Anl

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select: Chan Pwr




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select: Rho

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Tune FreqResult: Will appear as an 850Mhz channel frequency range.

DO NOT CHANGE !! (The up-bander uses a different mixingfrequency than the CTU. The frequency was already inserted when

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

you selected the channel number in previous procedures.)

Result

The HP meter is setup to do CDMA analysis in the proper frequency

range.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-38. Set-Up Procedure

This procedure is to enter the values

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Input the following:

Atten 20Db

Port Ant( this selection must appear underlined)

Anl Special 0

Synth Ref 19.6608

CDMA TB Internal

PN Offset Use Data keys to enter the PN Offset assigned to this sectorin translations. (can be found on the ceqface form field 61)

Even Sec In Enable (this selection must appear underlined)Meas Intvl 0.50ms

Gain Auto

Anl Dir Fwd (this selection must appear underlined)





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A Rho measurement will appear in the top left screen, butthis is not correct because all overhead channels are still active.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select: More (from the bottom of the screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select: CODE DOM

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select:• Main

• Trigger (under choices)

• Trigger event

• Delay

Result: At this time the CDMA domain will appear on the screen

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

with P/S/A and paging.

Result

The meter is setup for Rho measurement.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-39. Configure the Session

At the Terminal access the Craft Shell and make the following entries.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 cfr:cell x,multi;start <cr>x = Minicell number 1 - 222

Result: M 02 CFR:CELL x MULTI, ALL WENT WELL

Analyzer Cont (this selection must appear underlined)

Qual Event 80ms

Trig Event Delay 100us




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Add the BBA for the first sector to be tested to the configure session.This also turns the transmitter off. (Observe that the CDMA DOM willdisappear from screen when you receive the response.)

cfr:cell x,multi bba b;config 150 <cr>

x = Minicell # 1-222, b = bba number 2 - 6 (2 = alpha 4 = beta 6 =gamma)

Result: M 02 CFR:CELL x MULTI, ALL WENT WELL BBARANGE (1-30)

BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Status

....s...................................

Config.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status

..........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn on the CDMA transmitter with next entry. Turns on transmitterwith just pilot channel. (Observe that CDMA DOM is back on screenwith just pilot after the response.)

cfr:cell x,multi bba b;xmitc 301 <cr>





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Status

....s...................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status

...........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Once the transmitter has been turned off, the CFR session can beterminated with the next entry. This puts the transmitter back on the airwith all channels. (Observe that the CDMA DOM screen has allchannels up after the response.)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 cfr:cell x,multi;mstop <cr>




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result: M 11 CFR;CELL 95 MULTI, ALL WENT WELL OICERADION RANGE (0-191)

BBA RANGE (1-30)

BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Status

........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status

...........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

M 11 CFR;CELL x MULTI, COMPLETED, ALL TESTSPASSED

BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Status

....s...................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status

...........................................

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Result

The meter is ready to measure the Rho value.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-40. Record Rho Value

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Push prev button to return to CDMA analyzer screen.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The measured Rho value should now be visible on the CDMA BaseStation test set.

The acceptable measured Rho values must be between 0.95 and 1.0 asdefined in the CDMA Base Station Standards.

Record Rho__________ Standard: 0.95 or greater...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Record two other standards from this screen:

Freq Error ___________Hz (Standard: +/- 44Hz)

Carrier Feedthru_____db (Standard: less than 25db)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Push prev button to return to the CDMA DOM screen.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 7-41. Restore Cell to Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 After the Rho measurement has been completed, turn off the CDMAtransmitter with the next entry. Observe the CDMA. DOM is gone fromthe screen after the response.

Enter the command:

cfr:cell x,multi bba b;xmitc 301<cr>



7 - 1 0 0 Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Status

....s...................................

Config.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status

...........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Put the transmitter back on the air with all channels. (Observe that theCDMA DOM screen has all channels up after the response)

Enter the command:

cfr:cell x,multi;mstop <cr>




7 - 1 0 1Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: M 11 CFR;CELL 95 MULTI, ALL WENT WELL VOICERADION RANGE (0-191)

....... ......... .......... ......... .......... .......... .........

BBA RANGE (1-30) BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 Status

........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status

...........................................

Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

M 11 CFR;CELL x MULTI, COMPLETED, ALL TEST PASSED



7 - 1 0 2 Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Repairs

Overview

Purpose

Contents Changing Filters 8-3• Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0) - - - 8-4• Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1). - - - 8-7• Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0) - - - -8-11• Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15• Call Processing Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-19• Minicell Cleanup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-21

Power Calibration Description 8-22• Preliminary Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-23• Test Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-25

CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues 8-26• Amplifier Type and Power Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-27• Translations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-28

Power Calibration Test Procedure 8-29• HP 437B Power Meter Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-31• Enter the Offset, If Known - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-33• Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell - - - - - - - - - -8-34• Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session - - - - - - - - - - 8-37• Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal - - - - - - - - - - - 8-39• Calibrate the Attenuator Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-42• Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-45• Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power 8-48




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Repairs

• Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power - - - - - 8-50• Remove Meter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-51• Calibrate Additional Shelves - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-53• Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations - - 8-54• RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet - - - - - - - - - 8-56

Heat Exchanger Repairs 8-57• Heat Exchanger Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-58• Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions - - - - - - 8-59• Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61• Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance - - - - - 8-62• Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-63• Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-66• Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-69• Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-71

Island Cell 8-73• Island Mode CDMA Cell Script - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-74

NVM Procedures 8-75• CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - 8-76



Repairs


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing Filters

Introduction

Purpose This section covers the converting and replacing of simplex and duplexfilters in the Minicell, as well as running Call Processing Tests andperforming Minicell cleanup.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsConvert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters(Diversity 0)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0)

Purpose This subsection describes the procedure to convert the Primary Cabinet

simplex transmit and simplex diversity 0 receive filters to one duplexfilter, for diversity 0.

RF Cables to beDisconnected on Simplex

Filter (Inside Cabinet)

The table below lists the RF Cables to be disconnected on simplex filterfor each face.

aThis label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only. It isnot on the cable.

CRTU Cables to beDisconnected on SimplexFilter (Inside Cabinet)

The table below lists the CRTU Cables to be disconnected on simplexfilter for each face.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-1. Remove the Simplex Filters (Diversity 0)

Change only one filter panel at a time. Only disconnect the cables to thefilter panel being removed.

CABLE TYPE ALPHADIVERSITY 0

BETADIVERSITY 0

GAMMADIVERSITY 0

SMA P10 P12 P14

SMA P11 P13 P15

SMA P1 P1 P1

N-TYPE P2 W101 a P2 W102 a P2 W103 a

N-TYPE P2 W104 a P2 W105 a P2 W106 a

DSUB (9-PIN) P7 P8 P9

CABLE TYPE ALPHADIVERSITY 0

BETADIVERSITY 0

GAMMADIVERSITY 0

SMA P28 P30 P33

SMA P27 P29 P34

SMA P25 P32 P35

SMA P26 P31 P36





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 If the Minicell is in service, call the PCSC to remove the Minicell fromservice.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the cables listed in the table for the filter panel being replaced.

For a simplex filter configuration, the RX filter is below the TX filter.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the two screws on the top of the simplex filter.

Before removing the simplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the simplex filterdoes not have enough room to slide out, then the CTU fan must beremoved.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the simplex filter.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-2. Install Duplex Filter (Diversity 0)

CAUTION Damage can occur to the cables.

Before installing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1 from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the duplex filter does not have enough room to slide in, then the CTU fan must be removed.

Install the new duplex filter.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to theMinicell frame.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter.

When reconnecting the SMA cables‘ use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).

The P2 W101, W102 and W103 cables are NOT connected to thenewly installed duplex filter panels.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove theAlarm Control Board “ACB” and change rotary switch 1 to the correctfrequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fanassembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Press the reset “RST” button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must be

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

done before you start testing the new filter panels.

Diagnostics Run diagnostics to test the working condition of the cell.

Call Processing Test If the Minicell is in service, the following call processing tests must beperformed. If the Minicell is not in service, this section can be skipped.

Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 0 as described in “CallProcessing Tests”.



RepairsConvert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters(Diversity 1).


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).

Purpose This subsection describes the procedure to change the Growth Cabinet

simplex diversity 1 receive filter (on side of cabinet) to a duplex filter,for diversity 1.

Filter Removal Sequence When replacing Simplex diversity 1 filter panels with duplex panels, itis recommended to remove the gamma panel first, then the beta panel,and then alpha. When facing the front of the Minicell, these diversity 1receive filter panels are located on the outside of the left side of theMinicell. Alpha is the top filter panel; beta is the middle panel; andgamma is the bottom panel.

The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during the

physical installation of these filters.

RF Cables to beDisconnected on SimplexFilter (On Side of Cabinet)

The table below lists the RF cables to be disconnected on simplex filteron side of cabinet.

CRTU Cables to beDisconnected on SimplexFilter (On Side of Cabinet)

The table below lists the CRTU cables to be disconnected on simplexfilter on side of cabinet.

Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma

SMA P41 P42 P43

SMB P38 P39 P40

DSUB (9 Pin) P5 P6 P4

N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2

Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma

SMA P46 P41 P37

SMA P45 P42 P38




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


RF Cables to beReconnected on Duplex

Filter (Side of Cabinet)

The table below lists the RF cables to be reconnected on duplex filterside of cabinet.

CTRU Cables to beReconnected on Duplex

Filter (Side of Cabinet)

The table below lists the CTRU cables to be reconnected on duplexfilter on the side of cabinet.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-3. Disconnect the Simplex Filters

This procedure outlines the steps to replace simplex filters with duplexfilters.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinetusing the 216C can wrench.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha, beta or gamma)that is being removed. Refer to 8-7.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the CRTU is installed in the Minicell, disconnect the cables listed in8-7 from the RU filter coupler assembly:

If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, there are no cablesconnected to the J3 and J4 coupler connectors.

Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma Reconnect ToDuplex Filter

SMA P41 P42 P43 J2

SMB P38 P39 P40 J4

9 Pin DSUB P5 P6 P4 J3

N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 J1

Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma Reconnect ToDuplex Filter

SMA P46 P41 P37 J6 (-50 RX)SMA P45 P42 P38 J5 (-40 RX)SMA P47 P44 P39 J4 (-40 TX)SMA P48 P43 P40 J3 (-50 TX)





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of theMinicell. One is located above the RU; the second is located below theRU; and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 On the alpha face, check the screw holding the power splitter for receivediversity 0 to see if it is obstructing the installation of the new duplexpanel. This power splitter is mounted on the top, left-side of the frontinside of the Minicell, right below the 15 MHz, 6 to 1, power splitter.The screw on the right side of the power splitter is the one that couldpossibly cause a problem. A shorter screw, (comcode 847743895),should be provided with the new duplex side panels. If the power splitter

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

is mounted on a L-bracket, this modification is not necessary.

Result

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-4. Install Duplex Filter

Install the new duplex side panel onto the Minicell frame. The three (3)mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta

filter side panels. For the gamma filter side panel, the three (3)mounting screws are left justified.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter. Use the tableon page 8-8 as a reference.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399(14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16 torquewrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use the table on page 8-8 as areference for the cables to be reconnected. The 50 ohm terminationshave to be removed from coupler connectors J3, J4, J5 and J6 on theduplex filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, leave the J3, J4, J5 and J6coupler connectors terminated.

If the CRTU is installed, but the Growth frame is not being installed,leave the J5 and J6 coupler connectors terminated.

...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................


Result

The duplex filters are installed.

Diagnostics Run diagnostics, including the Rho test, to test the working conditionof the cell.

Call Processing Test If the Minicell is in service, the following call processing tests must be

performed. If the Minicell is not in service, this section can be skipped.Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on 8-19.



RepairsReplace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/ Diversity 0)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0)

Purpose This subsection describes the procedure to replace the Primary Cabinet

Transmit /Diversity 0 duplex filter. This may be needed if changingfrequency bands or replacing defective filters.

RF Cables to beDisconnected on Duplex

Filter (Inside Cabinet)

The table below shows the RF cables to be disconnected on duplexfilter inside the cabinet.

* This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only. It isnot on the cable.

CRTU Cables to be

Disconnected on DuplexFilter (Inside Cabinet)

The table below shows the CRTU cables to be disconnected on duplex

filter inside the cabinet.

CableType

AlphaDiversity 0

BetaDiversity 0

GammaDiversity 0

SMA P10 P12 P14

SMA P11 P13 P15

SMA P1 P1 P1

N-TYPE P2 W104 * P2 W105 * P2 W106 *

DSUB(9-PIN)

P7 P8 P9

CableType

AlphaDiversity 0

BetaDiversity 0

GammaDiversity 0

SMA P28 P30 P33

SMA P27 P29 P34

SMA P25 P32 P35

SMA P26 P31 P36




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


RF Cables to be Installedon Duplex Filter (Inside

Cabinet)

The table below shows the RF cables to be installed on duplex filterinside the cabinet.

* This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only. It isnot on the cable.

CTRU Cables to beInstalled on Duplex Filter

(Inside Cabinet)

The table below shows the CTRU cables to be installed on duplex filterinside thw cabinet.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-5. Replacement Procedures

Change only one filter panel at a time. Only disconnect the cables to thefilter panel being removed. Use 8-11 as a reference for the cables to bedisconnected.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 If the Minicell is in service, call the PCSC to remove the Minicell fromservice.

CableType

AlphaDiversity 0

BetaDiversity 0

GammaDiversity 0

Reconnect ToDuplex Filter

SMA P10 P12 P14 J9

SMA P11 P13 P15 J10

SMA P1 P1 P1 J7

N-TYPE

P2 104 * P2 W105 * P2 W106 * J1(ON BOTTOMOF FILTER)

DSUB(9-PIN)

P7 P8 P9 J8

CableType

AlphaDiversity 0

BetaDiversity 0

GammaDiversity 0

Reconnect ToDuplex Filter

SMA P28 P30 P33 J6 (-50 TX)

SMA P27 P29 P34 J5 (-40 TX)

SMA P25 P32 P35 J4 (-50 RX)

SMA P26 P31 P36 J3 (-40 RX)





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the cables listed in 8-11 for the filter panel being replaced.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use 8-11 as a reference for thecables to be disconnected.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the two screws on the top of the duplex filter.

Before removing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the duplex filterdoes not have enough room to slide out, then the CTU fan must beremoved.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

6 Remove the duplex filter.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-6. Install Duplex Filter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to theMinicell frame.

Before installing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the duplex filterdoes not have enough room to slide in, then the CTU fan must beremoved.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter. Use 8-12 as areference.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).

The P2 W101, W102, and W103 cables are NOT connected to the

newly installed duplex filter panels............................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use 8-12 as a reference for thecables to be reconnected.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.

...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................


Diagnostics Run diagnostics to test the working condition of the cell.


Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 0 as described in “Call

Processing Tests”.



RepairsReplace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1)


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1)

Purpose This subsection describes the procedure to replace the Growth Cabinet

Diversity 1 simplex filter (on side of cabinet). This may be needed if changing frequency bands or replacing defective filters.

Sequence of Filter Removal When removing the simplex filter panels, it is recommended youremove the panels in the following order:

When facing the front of the Minicell, these diversity 1 receive filterpanels are located on the outside of the left side of the Minicell.

The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during thephysical installation of these filters.

RF Cables to beDisconnected on SimplexFilter (On Side of Cabinet)

The table below shows the RF cables to be disconnected on simplexfilter on the side of the cabinet.

CRTU Cables to beDisconnected on SimplexFilter (On Side of Cabinet)

The table below shows the CRTU cables to be disconnected on simplexfilter on the side of the cabinet.

Panel Location

1 gamma panel bottom

2 beta panel middle

3 alpha panel top

CABLE TYPE ALPHA BETA GAMMA

SMA P41 P42 P43

SMB P38 P39 P40

DSUB (9 Pin) P5 P6 P4

N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2

CABLE TYPE ALPHA BETA GAMMASMA P46 P41 P37

SMA P45 P42 P38




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


RF Cables to beReconnected on Simplex

Filter (On Side of Cabinet)

The table below shows the RF cables to be reconnected on simplexfilter the on side of the cabinet.

CRTU Cables to beReconnected on Simplex

Filter (On Side of Cabinet)

The table below shows the CRTU cables to be reconnected on simplexfilter the on side of the cabinet.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-7. Replacement Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinetusing the 216C can wrench.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha, beta or gamma)that is being removed. Refer to page 8-15.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the CRTU is installed in the Minicell, disconnect the cables listed onpage 8-15 from the RU filter coupler assembly.

If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, there are no cablesconnected to the J3 and J4 coupler connectors.

CABLETYPE

ALPHA BETA GAMMA RECONNECT TOSIMPLEX FILTER

SMA P41 P42 P43 J2

SMB P38 P39 P40 J4

DSUB(9 Pin)

P5 P6 P4 J3

N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 J1

CABLETYPE

ALPHA BETA GAMMA RECONNECT TOSIMPLEX FILTER

SMA P46 P41 P37 J6 (-50 RX)

SMA P45 P42 P38 J5 (-40 RX)





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of theMinicell. One is located above the RU; the second is located below the

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

RU; and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-8. Simplex Filter Panel Installation

Install the new simplex side panel onto the Minicell frame. The three(3) mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta

filter side panels. For the gamma filter side panel, the three (3)mounting screws are left justified.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed simplex filter. Use the tablepage 8-16 as a reference. When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cableconnections, use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use the table on page 8-16 as areference for the cables to be reconnected. The 50 ohm terminationshave to be removed from coupler connectors J3 and J4 on the simplexfilter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected.

If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, leave the J3 and J4coupler connectors terminated.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove the

Alarm Control Board “ACB” and change rotary switch 1 to the correctfrequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fanassembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Press the reset “RST” button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must bedone before you start testing the new filter panels.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Run the FER (RX path test) for each antenna face filter that has been

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

replaced (alpha, beta, gamma).


Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on page8-19.



RepairsCall Processing Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Call Processing Tests

Purpose If the Minicell is in service, the following call processing tests must be

performed. If the Minicell is not in service, this section can be skipped.

Disabling Diversity The table below shows the circuit breakers to turn off to disablediversity.

Call Processing Test ECPCommands

The table below shows the Call Processing Test ECP Commands

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-9. Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Contact the cell tech, engineer, or maintenance personnel at the PCSCto perform the commands listed in the table above on the ECP before acall is made on each antenna face.

One CDMA Mobile-to-land call must be made for each antenna face(alpha, beta, gamma) equipped.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Restore all BBAs equipped.

Diversity Circuit Breaker Result

diversity 0 turn OFF CB9 in thePrimary Radio Cabinet

removes diversity 0from service

diversity 1 turn OFF CB1 in thePrimary Radio Cabinet

removes diversity 1from service

Call Process On AlphaFace (BBA 2)

Call Process On BetaFace (BBA 4)

Call Process On GammaFace (BBA 6)

rst:cell #, bba2;ucl



rmv:cell #, bba

4;ucl

rmv:cell #, bba

2;ucl

rmv:cell #, bba

2;uclrmv:cell #, bba6;ucl

rmv:cell #, bba6;ucl

rmv:cell #, bba4;ucl




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsCall Processing Tests

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn ON CB1 and CB9.



RepairsMinicell Cleanup


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell Cleanup

Purpose Remove all test equipment from the Minicell.

Verify all cell cabling is properly reconnected and the connectors areproperly torqued, (Torque Wrenches (p/o ITE-6267) SMA type: R-4399, N type: R-5851).

Verify that the special tools that ship with the cabinets remain withtheir respective cabinets.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-10. Secure Minicell

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Replace the side and rear panels.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell. Check that all side andrear panel locking bolts are tight.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure, if equipped




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsMinicell Cleanup

Power Calibration Description

Introduction

Purpose This section describes the procedures for performing PCS CDMAtransmitter measurements and calibrations with the Minicell controlledfrom the ECP.

When to Run TheseProcedures

These procedures are not routinely required during optimization. Thereis NO need to perform these on every cell. They are included in thehandbook for troubleshooting problems such as:

• no detectable Pilot channel

• unaccountably low level Pilot channel

• LAC alarms

When troubleshooting these problems, RF transmit powermeasurements are an adjunct to antenna checks.

Minicell Equipment The procedures include steps for the standard 8 Watt CDMATransmitter Unit (CTU) and the 16 Watt, High Power CTU (HPCTU);also, the procedures support both Primary and 1st Growth Cabinets.



RepairsPreliminary Notes


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Preliminary Notes

Overview These notes should be read and understood before proceeding with the

calibration.

Coordination Calls End any coordination call while actually measuring/adjusting the RFpower output of a face. A call up on the cell under test might affect theoutput power of the face under test.

When Calibration isRequired

The installation crew performs a transmit path calibration as part of their normal testing. The RF transmit power calibration must beperformed after the replacement of any component in the Transmit RFpath (cabling, BCR, CTU, HPCTU, or Filter). Additionally, the RFtransmit path will require calibration if the center frequency of thecarrier (channel number) is changed. Additionally, Rho and receiveFrame Error Rate tests may be required.

Units Taken Out-of-Service To perform average RF power measurement or calibration on a PCSCDMA Minicell, the CCCs and BBAs must be taken out-of-service.

CTU and HPCTU The standard CTU is always calibrated for an 8 Watt (39.0 dBm)output. The High Power CTU can be adjusted to either mimic the 8Watt CTU or set to its full 16 Watt output (42.1 dBm). See thediscussion under the heading CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues.

ECP and Cell GenericRequired

These test procedures can be performed on any PCS CDMA Minicellthat is controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center (PCSC)and is loaded with the minimum Cell Generic software releaseAPXB08.00. The HPCTU and growth cabinets require ECP 9.0 andCell generic load h40Y08.00 (APXD08.01), or later.

Station for Running theProcedures

The procedure is best run from the OMP where simultaneous craftshell(TIpdunix) and APX/RCV sessions can be run. (Alternately, personnelat the switch center may use two terminals: one running a UNIX

session, craftshell or RC/V, and the other on MCRT pages.)

BCR Attenuation Factor For the standard (8 Watt) CTU, never adjust the BCR AttenuationFactor in ceqface to less than 8 dB except while running this procedure.BCR attenuation values less than 8 will result in overdriving the CTU.Double check that the ceqface fields modified during this procedure are




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsPreliminary Notes

returned to their normal operation values after the RF transmit powerhas been measured or calibrated.

Similarly, the High Power CTU should never have its BCR Attenuationvalue set to less than 6 dB, except when running the procedures in this

section.Check the cell site configuration parameters for the range of allowedBCR Attenuation Factor values.

Stable Clear A stable clear should be performed after translations modification toensure that the changes take effect.

References The documents listed in the table below are useful references for theprocedures described in this section.

• Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter Operation Manual00437-

90036 • AUTOPLEX® 1000 Cell Site Input Message Manual401-610-055

• AUTOPLEX®1000 Cell Site / DCS Input / Output Message Manual401-610-107

• CDMA Translation Note #1 A Translation Application Note forCDMA Forward Link Transmit Path (Version 4.0, 3/5/98)



RepairsTest Equipment


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Test Equipment

Required Test Equipment The following equipment is required to perform these test procedures.

Power Meter Warm up It is recommended that the HP-437B or HP-441A Power Meters usedto set power in wireless system be allowed to warm up 30 minutes priorto calibration to allow it to stabilize for proper readings.

QTY Description1 VT-100 Terminal Emulator and ECP dialup access (UNIX login)

or a second person at the PCSC to enter terminal commands1 Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter

Any calibrated Average Power meter and attenuator combinationcapable of reading approximately 43 dBm (about 20 watts) may beused.

1 HP 8481H, 3.5 Watt Power Sensor1 30 dB, 50 Ohm attenuator

1(Optional)

90 Degree N type adapter (male to female).This is needed on installations with the Compact Size Antenna Ca-ble Cover. This assembly does not permit enough room for the at-tenuator and power sensor head.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsTest Equipment

CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues

Amplifier Type and Power Level

Purpose The standard CTU can only be calibrated for 8 Watts (Linear AmplifierCircuit type, or lactype, p and Maximum Power, or maxpwr, 8).



RepairsAmplifier Type and Power Level


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Amplifier Type and Power Level

Before you begin Prior to calibrating a High Power CTU, the desired RF output level

must be known. The High Power CTU can be adjusted for either:

Determine if CTU or HPCTUis Present

CAUTION Permanent damage to the CTUs will result.

If the CTU shelf fan is removed to check for HPCTU equipage, it must be reinstalled and operating within 15

minutes.

To determine if the Minicell is equipped with the HPCTU:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the CTU fan to read the faceplate apparatus code (BMT1).

Additional Heat Exchanger Minicell Primary cabinets equipped with HPCTUs have an additional,tell-tale Heat Exchanger mounted on the rear panel in the Primarycabinet (although this extra Heat Exchanger is also used with the HighTemperature Kit).

Growth Cabinet If a growth cabinet is equipped, the HPCTU apparatus code (BMT1) onthe faceplate can easily be read (the CTU fan is mounted in the rear).

Never attempt to adjust a standard CTU for more than 8 Watts (39.0dBm).

CTU lactype maxpwr

8 Watts p 8

16 watts z 16




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsTranslations

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Translations

Overview The differences in translations must be understood prior to performing

the procedures in this section.

CTU/HPCTU RF PowerLevels

The table below sums up the CTU/HPCTU configurations.

HPCTU can be calibrated for 8 Watts or 16 Watts on a face by facebasis.

Important! To change between 8 watt and 16 watts on theHPCTU, the translations must be changed and the RF path re-calibrated to the new power level.

Power Translations ceqcom2

AmpType

DesiredConfiguration

Max Pwr (field162)

lactype (field75)

CTU 8 Watts 8 p

HPCTU 8 Watts 8 p

HPCTU 16 Watts 16 z



RepairsTranslations


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power Calibration Test Procedure

Outline

Purpose The following is an outline of the procedure in this section. Seesubsequent paragraphs for detailed steps.

1. Calibrate the Power Meter.

2. Remove the CCC and BBA from service for all shelves to bemeasured or calibrated.

3. Remove the foam jumper and connect the power meter andattenuator to the cabinet’s antenna interface panel for the firstshelf to be tested.

4. Make Translations changes for the attenuator measurement, then

restore the CCC and BBA for the first shelf and make theattenuator measurement.

5. Enter actual attenuator loss as an offset in the power meter.

6. Remove the BBA again and add attenuator back into themeasurement circuit.

7. Start an apxrc/v session and note the Forward Link powertranslations values: Pilot, Paging, and Sync Channel DigitalGains; BCR attenuation; Linear Amplifier Type (lactype), andMax Power.

8. Temporarily Change the Pilot, Paging Sync, and BCR Attenuatortranslations parameters for Each Face of the cell which will becalibrated or measured.

9. Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs arerestored to service.

10. Measure the CDMA transmitter power and/or perform thecalibration procedure.

11. Remove from Service the BBA for the face just measured orcalibrated.

12. Remove the Power Meter and re-connect the Foam Jumper.13. Remove the BBA for the next face to be measured/calibrated, then

remove the face’s foam jumper and connect the power meter.

14. Restore the BBA for the shelf under test.

15. Repeat steps 10 through 12 for all equipped shelves to bemeasured.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsTranslations

16. Remove the tested BBA tested from service, disconnect the meter,and re-connect the foam jumper.

17. Change the translations back to the normal operating parametersfor each face where translations were modified.

18. Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs arerestored to service.

19. Place one test call on all transmit paths measured or calibrated.



RepairsHP 437B Power Meter Calibration


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................HP 437B Power Meter Calibration

Purpose This section details the Power Meter Calibration.

Power Meter Diagram

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-11. Power Meter Calibration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Connect the sensor cable between the HP 8481H Power Sensor (ITE

6889) and the sensor jack on the HP 437B Power Meter (ITE 6891).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Turn ON the Power Meter. Verify that there are no error messages onthe display.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Press the [PRESET] button. Then press [ENTER] to execute the preset.The unit will display “PRESETTING”.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 After presetting disappears, press the [ZERO] button. The power meterwill display “ZEROING***”.

(HP437B)

ITE6891 FUNCTION DATA ENTRY

POWER REF SENSOR

(HP8481H)ITE6889

REF CF 99%

GHz CF% Rho

.1 99.0 .00297. 0 . 006"

2.0" "

" " "

Reference CalibrationFactor

Calibration Factor




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsHP 437B Power Meter Calibration

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 When the “ZEROING***” is finished, select CAL (press [SHIFT] then[ZERO]). The display will show the current calibration factor stored inthe meter.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Connect the Power head to the POWER REF jack on the meter. SeeFigure 1.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Locate the Reference Calibration Factor on the power head. This islocated above the table on the head. It is labeled REF CF (or REF CALFAC) and the value is typically 99%, but varies between units. Using theup and down arrows ([¦] or [Ø]), modify the blinking digit to match the

Reference Cal. Factor. If necessary, use the left and right arrows ([¨] or[Æ]) to choose the digit.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Press [ENTER] on the meter. The meter will display “CAL***”.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 When the “CAL***” display disappears, disconnect the head from thePOWER REF jack on the meter.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Select CAL FAC (press [SHIFT], then [FREQ]). The meter displays thecurrent value of the Calibration Factor.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Obtain the Calibration Factor for 2.0 GHz from the table on the sensorhead (see Figure 1). Alter the value using the arrow keys as done

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

previously. Press [ENTER].

The calibration steps in the above paragraphs should be repeated everytime the meter is turned on. This will guarantee accuratemeasurements.






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsConnect the Power Meter to the Minicell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell

Purpose This section describes connecting the power meter to the Minicell.

Hewlett Packard PowerMeter Connections

RF Connections The table below lists the 2 or 3-Sector Primary Radio Cabinet, RFinterface plate connections.

HP 8481 H30 dB atten.RF Interface PlatePrimary RadioCabinet

Function Data Entry Power Ref SensorLine

Filter Type Connection Description

Simplex TX - S1P 1st Carrier Alpha Transmit Filter

TX - S2P 1st Carrier Beta Transmit Filter

TX - S3P 1st Carrier Gamma Transmit Filter

TX - S1G Growth, 2nd Carrier Alpha Transmit Filter

TX - S2G Growth, 2nd Carrier Beta Transmit Filter

TX - S3G Growth, 2nd Carrier Gamma Transmit Filter





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OMNI Primary RadioCabinet, RF Interface Plate

Connections

The table below lists the OMNI Primary Radio Cabinet, RF Interfaceplate connections.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-13. Connect the Power Meter

CAUTION Personal Injury or damage to cell equipment

Donot disconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in theTRANSMIT state (ACT LED ON).

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 At the ECP, or using a VT100 terminal emulator with dialup access to

the ECP, enter the following command at the UNIX prompt to begin aCraftshell session. Enter:

TIpdunix <cr>

Result: A REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE

Duplex RX/DX S1D0/S1P Primary Alpha Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 0 / RU 1

RX/DX S2D0/S2P Primary Beta Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 1 / RU 3

RX/DX S3D0/S3P Primary Gamma Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 2 / RU 5

RX/DX S1D1/S1G Growth Alpha Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 0/RU 2RX/DX S2D1/S2G Growth Beta Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 1/RU 4

RX/DX S3D1/S3G Growth Gamma Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 2/RU 6

Filter Type Connection Description

Duplex D0 (C1P) First Carrier Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 0 / RU 1

D1 (C2P) Second Carrier Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 1 / RU 2

Simplex C3P Third Carrier Transmit Filter - CTU 2

C4G Fourth Carrier Transmit Filter - Growth CTU 0

C5G Fifth Carrier Transmit Filter - Growth CTU 1

C6G Sixth Carrier Transmit Filter - Growth CTU 2




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the following command to remove the first BBA from service.

rmv:cell a, bba b;ucl <cr>

Result: RMV:CELL a, BBA b, COMPLETEDa = Minicell number 1 - 222

b = BBA number 2 or 4(b = 2 for all cells except Beta/Gamma two-sector cells)

2 = Alpha or Omni -Carrier 1, 4 = Beta, 6 = Gamma

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn OFF the BCR AUTO/OFF Switch.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the Foam jumper from the RF Interface Panel for the shelf (CRC) to be measured/calibrated.

Remove only one foam jumper at a time to avoid mistakes upon re-connection.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Connect the attenuator and the sensor head/meter to the proper port of the RF Interface Panel. The figure illustrates the connections for the HP437B power meter equipped with the HP8481H Sensor and itsassociated 30 dB attenuator. The 2 or 3-Sector and Omni tables list thetransmit RF connection markings of the RF Interface Plate on thePrimary Radio Cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 After connecting the attenuator and power meter to the transmit port at

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

the RF Interface Panel, return the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.



RepairsBegin the Recent Change/Verify Session


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session

Purpose Recent Change/Verify will be used to control the CDMA Channel

Elements to provide a calculated maximum power to the CTU/HPCTUinput. The BCR faceplate adjustment will be used to trim the BCRoutput.

Personnel performing recent changes must be familiar with the recentchange process and data entry commands.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-14. Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 At the UNIX terminal, enter the following command to begin a recentchange session:

apxrcv

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The RC/V process will respond with a request for a form name:

Enter Form Name (or ?):

Enter ? to display all the available form names.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter:

ceqcom2 <CR>

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 After form name is entered, type:

u for update, if a change to the HPCTU configuration will be madeorr to review if no changes will be made

If r was used to enter the form in review mode, changes cannot be madeunless you exit Review Mode. Enterthe left arrow key, < <CR> to exit




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsBegin the Recent Change/Verify Session

form screens to enter the update

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

modes.

Navigation Commands The following commands are useful during recent change sessions:

Form fields preceded by * are required fields, data must be entered inthe field.

The ceqface form contains antenna face information CDMA ForwardLink Power Control parameters. The ceqcom2 form contains theAmplifier parameters.

1. Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of theceqcom2 form.

2. Type 6 for screen 6 and verify that the lactype (field 75) is asexpected for the CTU/HPCTU on each face.

No changes will be required on this form during this procedureunless the cell has high Powered CTUs being altered from the 8watt to the 16 watt configuration or vice versa.

3. Type 13 for screen 13 and verify that the maxpwr (field 162) is asexpected, for each transmit path.

4. Exit the form, type: ! <CR>

! Abort form operation, changesignored

< Go back to previous 'Tab stop'

> Go forward to next 'Tab stop'

^ Backup to previous data field

~ Go to end of form

* Go to end of form and execute

; Default entry

' NULL entry

? List form names or controlcharacters



RepairsSet Up Attenuator Measurement Signal


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal

Sample ceqface Screen The diagram below shows the ceqface screen with the forward link

parameters.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-15. Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal on the ceqface Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 If attenuator loss is known and has been entered into the power meter asan offset, skip to “Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals”.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 At the apxrc/v form query prompt, enter:

ceqface

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the ceqfaceform.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (PhysicalAntenna Face) where the meter/attenuator is connected.

1 = Alpha or Omni 1st Carrier




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


2 = Beta or Omni 2nd Carrier

3 = Gamma or Omni 3rd

4 = Alpha Growth or Omni 4th

5 = Beta Growth or Omni 5th

6 = Gamma Growth or Omni 6th

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters - Forward Link. The screennumber will vary depending on the ECP release; “Forward Link”parameters will be on or around screen 8.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain value is 108. If it is not, check the cluster notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has beenmade to the pilot’s gain. The figure on page 8-39 shows typical ceqfaceCDMA power control values.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Also record on a note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain(dgu), the Sync Channel Gain (dgu), and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB);they must be restored later.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging Channel

Gain (dgu), Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Sync ChannelGain (dgu). Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Only for the HPCTU in 16 Watt configuration, type C, then enter thefield number of the Pilot Channel Digital Gain. Enter 90 into the field.(For the CTU and HPCTU in the 8 Watt setup, leave Pilot at dgu = 108.)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 After these changes, press Enter, once again.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Type U to update the ceqface form. “Form Updated” will appear if theform is properly updated.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This setup will only be performed for this face to measure the testattenuator. Do not repeat these changes to any other face.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

13 Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear by enteringthe following command:

init:cell a:sc <cr>

A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that theapxrcv changes will take effect on the

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

paging channel.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsCalibrate the Attenuator Offset

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Calibrate the Attenuator Offset

Purpose This procedure is for determining the true insertion loss of a 30 dB

attenuator using the specified HP 437B and HP 8481H power sensor.DO NOT USE THIS procedure if the attenuator is anything other than30 dB.

Requirements This procedure requires the following:

• The power meter should have been calibrated.

• A 30 dB attenuator is connected between the antenna port and thepower sensor.

• No offset has been entered into the meter.

• The translations must have been setup for this procedure per “SetUp Attenuator Measurement Signal”.

Record the Attenuator Loss Once the true loss of the attenuator has been measured, tag theattenuator with the value for future use. There is no need to repeat theprocedure unless the attenuator is dropped or appears damaged.

If you have to turn down the BCR faceplate potentiometer whileperforming this procedure, the RF path must be re-calibratedafterwards.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-16. Calibrate the Attenuator Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Restore the CCC and BBA. At this point, the only signal should be:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Read the meter. The value should be approximately 1 to 4 dBm. If thevalue is above 4.5 dBm, the power level is too high; turn the fineadjustment pot on the BCR under test down (counterclockwise) until themeter reads 2 dBm.

8 Watt Pilot only at dgu = 108,BCR att = 8 dB

16 Watt Pilot only at dgu = 90;BCR att= 6 dB





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Record the meter reading.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 At the Minicell, turn OFF the AUTO/OFF switch on BCR on the shelf under test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the sensor head/attenuator from the antenna port. Unscrew theattenuator from the head and place the sensor head directly onto thesame antenna port, i.e., without the attenuator.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Return the BCR switch to the AUTO position and then restore the BBA:

rst:cell a, bba y;ucl

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Take the meter reading, it should be approximately 30 dB higher thanthe previous reading.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Subtract the reading just taken from the initial; for example, if the initialreading were 3.1 dBm and the reading without the attenuator was 32.6dBm, then:

32.6dB - 3.1 dB = 29.5 dB

The difference is the actual loss of the attenuator. Record this value ona tag and attach it to the attenuator.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Press [OFFSET] on the power meter. Use the arrow keys once again toobtain the value calculated in the last step. Press [ENTER]. The powermeter is now ready for use.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Once again, at the Minicell, turn OFF the BCR on the shelf under test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Remove the sensor head from the antenna port and re-connect the 30 dBattenuator with the head to the antenna port. The RF powermeasurements can now proceed.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


The Sensor Head will be permanently damaged if the 30 dB attenuatoris not in series with the head while

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

measuring full transmit power.



RepairsSet Up Shelf Calibration Signals


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals

Purpose This procedure outlines the steps to set up shelf calibration signals.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-17. Shelf Calibration Signals

Follow the steps below to set up the shelf calibration signals.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 At the apxrc/v form query prompt, enter:

ceqface

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the ceqfaceform.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the first physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (PhysicalAntenna Face).

• Alpha or Omni 1st Carrier

• Beta or Omni 2nd Carrier

• Gamma or Omni 3rd

• Alpha Growth or Omni 4th

• Beta Growth or Omni 5th

• Gamma Growth or Omni 6th

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters - Forward Link (type 9, forscreen 9).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain is 108. If it is not, check theoptimization notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has beenmade to the pilot’s gain. Figure 3 shows typical ceqface CDMA powercontrol values.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain (dgu), the SyncChannel Gain (dgu), and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB), they must berestored later.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Sync ChannelGain (dgu). Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the BCR attenuationFactor.Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field for CTU. Enter a value of 2-18 forHPCTU, depending on the option that was set when configuring the

HPCTU............................................................................................................................................................................

9 The table below shows the steps to change the Paging Channel Gain

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Type U to update the ceqface form. “Form Updated” will appear on thescreen.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Repeat the modifications to the ceqface form for all shelves in the cellwhich are to be measured and/or calibrated (“Set Up Shelf CalibrationSignals”, steps 1 through 10).

If Then

CTU & 8 WattHPCTU

To change the channel gain for 8 watt:

1. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the PagingChannel Gain (dgu), Enter 0 (zero) into the field.

2. After Sync, BCR attenuation, and paging gains are changed,

press Enter, once again.16 Watt HPCTU To change the channel gain for 16 watt:

1. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the PilotChannel Digital Gain (dgu), Enter 127 into the field.

2. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the PagingChannel Gain (dgu), Enter 59 into the field.

3. After Sync, BCR attenuation, Pilot, and Paging gains arechanged, press Enter, once again.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear; enter thefollowing command:

init:cell a:sc <cr>

A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that theapxrcv changes will take effect on the

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

paging channel.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsCalibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup)Transmit Power

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-18. Calibrate the 8 Watt Transmit Power

Use the procedure on 8-50 for RF Transmit paths equipped with theHPCTU set up for 16 Watts.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 At the Minicell, the RF power should be present at the hatchplate (RFInterface Panel). Measure average power with the power meter. Areading of 38.8 ± 1.5 dBm is the expected value.This power value (38.8 dBm) reflects a Pilot Channel Digital Gain of 108, the default setting. A Pilot Digital Gain of 111 would boost the

output two-tenths of a dB (0.2 dB) to full power (39.0 dBm). The outputpower is so close to the full power with a Pilot Digital Gain of 108 thatchanging the setting for this procedure is not warranted.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 If calibration is required, continue on to step 3, otherwise proceed to“Remove Meter”.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 On the shelf under test, find the BCR’s adjustment potentiometer on the

BCR’s faceplate.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 With a Trimpot adjustment tool, carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot,6 full turns Counter Clockwise.

This step is necessary to prevent the BCR from overdriving the CTU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Using the adjustment tool, slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain38.80 dBm (range 38.75 to 38.85 dBm) on the power meter.

Be careful not to turn too quickly; if you overshoot 38.80 more than 0.5dBm, turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowlyincrease (CW) to the set point. These steps are necessary to preventoverdriving the CTU.



RepairsCalibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup)Transmit Power


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digiton the meter may vary).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Record the power level measured on the RF Transmit Power CalibrationData Sheet (see Attachment).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

8 Proceed to the procedure on 8-51 to ceremove the meter.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsCalibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) TransmitPower

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-19. Calibrate 16 Watt Transmit Power for HPCTU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 At the Minicell, the RF power should be present at the hatchplate (RFInterface Panel). Measure average power with the power meter. Areading of 42.1 ± 1.5 dBm is the expected value.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 If calibration is required, continue on to step 3, otherwise proceed to“Remove Meter”.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 On the shelf under test, find the BCR’s adjustment potentiometer (pot)on the BCR’s faceplate.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 With a Trimpot adjustment tool, carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot,6 full turns Counter Clockwise. This step is necessary to prevent theBCR from overdriving the CTU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Using the adjustment tool, slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain42.1 dBm (range 42.05 to 42.15 dBm) on the power meter.

Be careful not to turn too quickly; if you overshoot 42.1 more than 0.5dBm, turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowlyincrease (CW) to the set point. These steps are necessary to preventoverdriving the CTU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digiton the meter may vary).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Record the power level measured on the RF Transmit Power Calibration

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

Data Sheet (see “RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet”).



RepairsRemove Meter


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Remove Meter

Purpose This procedure lists the steps to safely detach the power meter from the

Minicell.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 After average power measurements have been completed, turn off theCDMA transmitter by taking the BBA Out-of-Service. Enter:

rmv:cell a, bba b;ucl <cr>

Where:

Result: RMV:CELL a, BBA b, COMPLETED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 At the cell, turn the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to OFF.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the power meter and attenuator.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Re-connect the Antenna Foam Jumper Cable to the RF Interface Panel.

To prevent personal injury and/or damage to cell equipment, neverdisconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in the TRANSMIT state(ACT LED ON).

a Minicell number 1 - 222

b bba number2-Alpha or Omni -Carrier 14-Beta or Omni - 26-Gamma or Omni - 38-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni - 410-Beta 1st Growth or Omni - 512-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni - 6

20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni - 722-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni - 824-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni - 9




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsRemove Meter

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

5 Return BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.



RepairsCalibrate Additional Shelves


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Calibrate Additional Shelves

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-21. Calibrate Additional Shelves

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 If additional shelves are to be tested, or calibrated, remove the BBA of the next shelf from service; enter:

rmv:cell a , bba b;ucl <cr>

Result: RMV:CELL a , BBA b, COMPLETED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Repeat all the steps in 8-48 8 watt setup or 8-50 for 16 watt setup,whichever is applicable, for the next shelf (face or carrier) to be

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

calibrated or measured.

a Minicell number 1 - 222

b bba number

4-Beta or Omni - 26-Gamma or Omni - 38-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni - 410-Beta 1st Growth or Omni - 512-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni - 620-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni - 722-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni - 824-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni - 9




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsRestore the Original CDMA Power ControlTranslations

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations

Purpose This section details restoring the original CDMA power control

translations.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-22. Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Return to the APX/RCV session and update the ceqface form again, thistime updating the form with the original values for the:

Sync Channel Gain (dgu)

Paging Channel Gain (dgu)

BCR Attenuation FactorAlso Pilot Channel Gain (dgu), if changed for theHPCTU (16 Watt setup).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Update the ceqface form saving the parameters listed above. Keep theapxrcv session active until all shelves have been restored to the originalceqface settings.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear by enteringthe following command:

init:cell a:sc <cr>

A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that theapxrcv changes will take effect on the paging channel.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Confirm the operation of the cell by placing one call on each transmitpath of the Minicell.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Before the technician leaves the Minicell site, verify that there are noalarms for the cell. In particular, verify that CB 22 in the primary radio







RepairsRF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Heat Exchanger Repairs

Overview

Objectives Heat exchanger maintenance is covered in this section along withdocumentation from the original equipment manufacturer.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsHeat Exchanger Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Heat Exchanger Maintenance

Description The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the air-

to-air type that provide thermal environmental control for theseelectronic equipment cabinets. These heat exchangers limit andmonitor cabinet internal temperatures from 0 ° to 65° C.

The heat exchangers consist of an ambient fan, internal fan, micro-controller, a heater element, and a sheet metal housing.

Alarm Conditions These heat exchangers will report an alarm condition under thefollowing conditions:

• Loss of 24 VDC power to heat exchanger

• Cabinet internal air temperature below 0 ° C.

• Cabinet internal air temperature above 65 ° C.

Microcontroller Functions The microcontroller, which operates from a 26 VDC source, providesthe logic to perform the following:

• Vary the speed of the internal and ambient fans to maintain theinternal cabinet temperature between 0 ° to 65° C.

• Control of the heater element in maintaining the internal cabinettemperature above 0 ° C. during cold ambient temperatures.

• Provide alarms for fan failures, heater failures, cabinet high andlow temperatures conditions both on the heat exchangers and tothe Alarm Facilities Interface.

Normal Heat ExchangerOperation

At ambient temperature of 50 ° F. or less the ambient fan may not needto run.

It is normal for the ambient fan to cycle on and off above 50 ° F.ambient.

The internal fan will run continuously a low speed and will ramp up inspeed as cooling demand increases.

It is normal for the cabinet surfaces to feel very warm when touched inhigh ambient temperatures.



RepairsHeat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions

Purpose This procedure lists the steps to perform the heat exchanger rop alarm

corrective actions

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-23. Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm 1: (Ambient Fan)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents forobstructions.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform heat exchanger test run.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check fan fuse s2 on controller card inside heat exchanger (primaryonly).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check 26 V DC to fan at connector block on control card (see wiringdiagram on heat exchanger).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace with new ambient fan............................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

6 Change control card if new fan does not correct problem.

Result

The ambient fan is replaced.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-24. Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm 0: (Internal Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check fan fuse s1 on controller card inside heat exchanger.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsHeat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check 26 V DC to fan at connector block on control card (see wiringdiagram on heat exchanger)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Replace with new internal fan.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change control card if new fan does not correct problem.



RepairsHeat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm

Heater Power Loss There are no alarms sent to the Alarm Facilities Interface for heater

element failure or loss of 220 VAC. However, a Temperature alarmwill be indicated if the cabinets internal air temperature falls below 0 °C. This will indicate a possible heater element failure or loss of 220VAC, power. In addition, a heater element failure or loss of 220 VAC,power will be indicated by a LED alarm located on the heat exchangerpanel.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-25. Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm

This procedure lists the steps to correct Minicell cabinet troubles wheninternal temperature is below 0× or above 65× c.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for bug, dust orobstructions if high temp is suspected.Remove obstruction and clean vent screen.

...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check for heater alarm on heat exchanger panel (for low temp alarm).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check 220 AC breaker for heater power (for low temp alarm).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check 220 AC power connector is plugged into heat exchanger (for lowtemp alarm).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Replace heater element (for low temp alarm).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

7 Change controller card if new heater element does not correct problem.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsWeekly and Monthly Heat ExchangerMaintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance

Purpose This procedure lists the weekly and monthly maintenance procedures

for the heat exchanger.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-26. Weekly Heat Exchanger Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents forObstructions, heavy insect or dust accumulations.

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

The intake screens may be cleaned with a brush and detergent cleaner.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-27. Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Perform heat exchanger test run

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................



RepairsYearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance

Control Panel Diagram The diagram below shows the control buttons and indicator lights of

the heat exchanger control panel.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-28. Flush the Heat Exchanger Core

Heat Exchanger Damage

Cell components will short out if the liquid used in the cleaning come in contact with live electrical components.

The heat exchanger should be powered down when performing this cleaning procedure.

Heat Exchanger Damage

The heat exchanger becomes blocked causing temperature control problems.

This core cleaning process should be more frequent in dusty or areas with high air pollution levels.

The heat exchanger core should be flushed clean with a non acid based

air conditioning coil cleaner.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 The cleaner should be sprayed with a low pressure sprayer into the topexhaust vent following the manufacturers instructions.

888INTERNAL FAN

AMBIENT FAN

GREEN STATUS LIGHT

UP ARROW DOWN ARROW

HIGH TEMP

LOW TEMP HEATER




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

2 Thoroughly flush out with clean water.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-29. How to Perform Test Run of Primary Heat Exchanger:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Push both arrow buttons on display panel at the same time and hold untila 2, appears on display then let go.

Result: A 000 will display, then push-up arrow button. This willset the time duration (in minutes, set to 5) of a full speed blower testrun.

When the test run starts, the alarm lights will all cycle on and off and the temp alarm indicator will remain illuminated during the testrun.

In addition, the green OK status light will not illuminate during thetest run. However, it will illuminate after the 5 minute test run if theHeat Exchanger is functioning properly.

If the internal and ambient fans are functioning properly, no fanalarm lights will remain illuminated during the test run.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 It is also recommended to check for air flow on ambient side top vent

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

to verify the bottom ambient fan is running during the test run.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-30. Test Run of Growth Frame Heat Exchanger

This procedure outlines how to perform a test run of Growth Frameheat exchanger:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Power-down growth heat exchanger by turning off circuit breakernumber 12 and 13.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Wait 1 minute for fans to stop.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Power-up Growth heat exchanger by turning on circuit breaker number12 and 13.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Heat exchanger will perform a self test of fans and control card and runboth internal and ambient fans for 60 seconds.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check for air flow on ambient side top vent to verify the bottom ambientfan is running during this 60 second full speed test run.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Monitor the alarm panel status lights for 2 minutes.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 If no Alarm Panel status lights illuminate, the heat exchanger is

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

functioning properly.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsReplace the Control Card for Growth FrameHeat Exchanger

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger

Purpose This procedure covers the replacement and testing of the heat

exchanger control card.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-31. Control Card Replacement

WARNINGHigh voltage

Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the components.

Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove the top fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 14 panhead screws securing the cover.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Unfasten the three captive screws and remove the fan shroud from theheat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Locate the control circuit card on the top right side of the heatexchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the card in this order:

1. Disconnect both the fan connectors J5 internal and J6 ambientfans from the control card.

2. Disconnect the 26 VDC power connector J2 from the control card.

3. Disconnect the J7 alarm connector.

4. Disconnect the J4 temperature sensor connector.

5. Unfasten the four captive screws securing the control card to theheat exchanger.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Disconnect the 220 VAC power spade leads one at a time transferringthem to the corresponding lug of the new control card heater relays.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Install the new control card in the heat exchanger with captive screws.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Connect the cables:

1. Connect 26 VDC power connector J3 on the control card.

2. Connect the J7 alarm connector.

3. Connect the J4 temperature sensor connector.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Re-install the fan shroud assembly and secure the three captive screws.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Put the top fan cover on the heat exchanger and install the two frontcover screws connecting the cover to the fan shroud first.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Install the remaining 12 pan head screws.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Connect the 220 VAC power connector on the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Connect the 26 VDC power connector on the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

13 Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

14 Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.

Result

If the installation is correct, the following will occur:

1. The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


2. The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce andadjust to half speed.

3. Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated.



RepairsReplace the Heater Cartridge for Growth FrameHeat Exchanger


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-32. Heater Cartridge Replacement

WARNINGHigh voltage



. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove the air grill on the heat exchanger by removing all 6 pan headscrews securing the air grill.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Unplug the heater cartridge from the cable harness.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the four screws attaching the heater cartridge to the air grill.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the heater cartridge from the air grill.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Install the new heater cartridge in the air grill securing it with the fourscrews. Tighten the screws securely.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Re-install the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsReplace the Heater Cartridge for Growth FrameHeat Exchanger

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Re-connect the heater cartridge cable to the mating harness connector.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Re-install the air grill and secure with the pan head screws............................................................................................................................................................................

10 Connect the 220 VAC power connector to the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

13 Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel

Result

If the installation is correct, the following will occur:


2. The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and

adjust to half speed.3. Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated.



RepairsReplace the Ambient Fan for Growth FrameHeat Exchanger


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-33. Ambient Fan Replacement

WARNINGHigh voltage



. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove the bottom fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 19pan head screws securing the cover plate.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Unfasten the four pan head screws connecting the fan bracket to the heatexchanger. Remove the fan/bracket assembly from the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Unplug the weather tight fan connector from the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the cable clamp on the back of the fan/bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the four screws attaching the fan to the fan bracket.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Remove the fan from the fan bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Attach the new fan to the fan bracket assembly securing it with the fourpan head screws. Tighten the screws securely.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Re-install the cable clamp on the back of the fan bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Connect the fan cable connector back to the mating weather tightconnector inside the fan box of the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Carefully re-install the new fan and bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Spin the fan slowly by hand checking for interference and adjusting thefan bracket if necessary.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Install the bottom fan cover and secure it with all 19 pan head screws.Fully and evenly tighten all the pan head screws.

...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

16 Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.

Result

If the installation, is correct the following will occur:


2. The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce andadjust to half speed.

3. Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Island Cell

Overview

Objectives Some cell sites have experienced “island mode” situations, evidentwhen the cells cannot accept hand-offs from other cells, nor can theisland cell hand-off to its neighbors.

Correcting Island ModeCells

Refer to the fax flashes and information bulletins to learn the latestinformation on this problem and procedures to correct it..




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsIsland Mode CDMA Cell Script

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Island Mode CDMA Cell Script

Overview A new Service Measurement Report Generator (SMRG) script has

been developed to help identify island cells.

Description The script compares secondary cell traffic channel usage to total trafficchannel element usage to identify cells which may be in an island cellcondition. Once a potential island cell has been identified, a test driveof the cell is still necessary to confirm the problem.

This script will work with both PCS-CDMA and CDMA-850 systems,and has been tested on both ECP 9.0 and 10.0.

Questions Please refer questions to the CTSO Methods and Procedures

Organization.



RepairsIsland Mode CDMA Cell Script


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NVM Procedures

Overview

Purpose These procedures are designed to minimize the amount of time thatCDMA service is unavailable. The total time it takes to NVM theentire cell is unchanged by these procedures.

NVM Procedures These procedures differ from previously recommended procedures inthree primary ways:

1. NVMing the BBAs before the CCCs. By having the BBAsNVM'd and in service prior to NVMing the CCCs, CDMA serviceis restored on a partial basis as soon as the first CCC is fullyNVM'd (assuming the interconnection of shelves). As each

additional CCC is NVM'd, additional CDMA radios becomeavailable for service. With this change the CDMA downtime isreduced by (N-1) * (CCUOFC download time per CCC) where Nis the number of CCCs. For a 3 sector/1 carrier Series II cell with 6CCCs this amounts to at least 25 minutes.

2. Call Processing is allowed during the download of CDMAhardware. Previous procedures only allowed CP during downloadon AMPS/CDMA systems.

3. A Stable Clear of the cell at the end of the NVM procedure is notneeded.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RepairsCDMA Cell Downloading Procedures

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures

Purpose These procedures are designed to minimize the amount of time that

CDMA service is unavailable. The total time it takes to Non-VolitaleMemory (NVM) the entire cell is unchanged by these procedures.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-34. Change Generic:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Use the Cell2 Form to change the generic.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify generic:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

OP:CELL,GENERIC

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-35. Inhibit Audits, RTDIAG, FT:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Inhibit NVM version audit:INH:CELL #,AUD NVMVER

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Inhibit routine diagnostics:INH:CELL #,RTDIAG

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Inhibit functional tests:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

INH:CELL #,FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL}

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-36. Download CSCs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove CSC 0:RMV:CELL #,CSC 0;UCL





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Download CSC 0 CPU:DNLD:CELL #,CSC 0,CPU

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Download CSC 0 CPI:DNLD:CELL #,CSC 0,CPI

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Inhibit call processingINH:CELL #,CP

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Boot the cell:

INIT:CELL #:BOOT;SW...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Verify CSC 0 version:OP:CELL #,CSC 0;UCL:VERSION

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Download CSC 1 CPU:DNLD:CELL #,CSC 1,CPU

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Download CSC 1 CPI:DNLD:CELL #,CSC 1,CPI

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Restore CSC 1 to standby:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

RST:CELL #,CSC 1:STBY

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-37. Remove CDMA Hardware

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove all the BBAs:RMV:CELL #,BBA #;UCL (skip this step if BBAs do not need to beNVM'd)




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove all the CCCs:RMV:CELL #,CCC #;UCL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the CRTU:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

RMV:CELL #,CRTU;UCL

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-38. Download SCTs

Skip this procedure entirely if SCTs do not need to be NVM'd.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the standby SCTs:RMV:CELL #,CAT #;UCL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Download the SCTs removed:DNLD:CELL #,CAT # (Downloaded SCTs should restore to standby)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the active SCTs:RMV:CELL #,CAT #;UCL (A SCT board switch will occur)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Download the SCTs removed:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

DNLD:CELL #,CAT # (Downloaded SCTs should restore to standby)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-39. Allow Call Processing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Allow Call Processing:ALW:CELL #,CP

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-40. Download CDMA Hardware

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Download all BBAs:

DNLD:CELL #,BBA ALLCDMA(skip this step if BBAs do not need to beNVM'd)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Download all CCCs - Part 1:DNLD:CELL #,CCC ALLCDMA;CCCOFC

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Download all CCCs - Part 2:DNLD:CELL #,CCC ALLCDMA;CCUOFC

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Download CRTU:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

DNLD:CELL #,CRTU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 8-41. Allow Audits, RTDIAG, FT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The NVM version audits:ALW:CELL #,AUD NVMVER

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Routine diagnostics:ALW:CELL #,RTDIAG

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Functional tests:ALW:CELL #,FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL}

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify Cell status:

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

OP:CELL #




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Upgrading a PCS CDMA

Minicell

Overview

Purpose This unit is designed to enable you to review the general principles of PCS CDMA Minicell upgrades, and to apply these principles to thespecific examples of ECU and HPCTU upgrades.

Contents Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell 9-3• Outline of Upgrade Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4• Preliminary Preparation Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5• Example of Configuration Change - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-6• Baselining a Minicell - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7

Programming the CRTU 9-8• Items Needed to Program the CRTU - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9

Upgrade TCU to ECU 9-10• Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- Installation Procedure - 9-11• Enabling Channel Pooling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-13• ECU Upgrade -- Removing a CCC from Service - - - - - - -9-14• ECU Upgrade -- Updating the Minicell Translations - - - - - 9-15• NVMing the CCC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-16

Example of Upgrade: CTU To HPCTU 9-19• Preliminary Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-20• Installing the HPCTU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-22• Testing the Minicell - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-25

Range Extension Offer 9-26• Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview - - - - - - - - - - 9-27




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell

• Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28• Required Material and Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30• Preliminary Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-31• TTLNA Physical Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-32• Transmit Power Calibration Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - 9-33• Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-34• Minicell Cleanup and Reboot - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-35• TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests - - - - - - - - - - 9-37• Close Up the Minicell - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-41• MAU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42• PDU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43• Cable Routing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45• PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet - - - - - - 9-46• Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet - - - - 9-47• Bias T Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49• Identifying Faults in the MAU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-50• Component Replacement and Repair Preparations - - - - - 9-51• Cable/MAU Connector Re-sealing - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-52• Preparing an MAU for Mounting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-54• Replacing a Failed MAU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-56• Replacing a Failed PDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-60





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................OverviewIntroduction to PCS CDMA Minicell Upgrades

Purpose Upgrades are required to implement new software releases (e.g., cellgeneric release 10), or new services/features made possible by newhardware design (e.g., ECU or HPCTU).

How to Upgrade? Upgrades are made according to specified procedures which aredesigned to keep impact on service to a minimum. Procedures thatcannot be carried out without taking a Minicell out-of-service willusually be done at night.

PCS CDMA SystemComponents are Involved

in an Upgrade

Upgrades may involve only the Minicell (e.g., filter upgrades), butmost often will require changes at both the PCSC (translations) and atthe Minicell site.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellOutline of Upgrade Procedures

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Outline of Upgrade Procedures

Overview Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell can be an involved undertaking.

Even though its highly procedural, it requires a thorough understandingof the internal workings of the Minicell and of the purpose of eachprocedure to keep the upgrading time to a minimum.

Upgrade Procedure Upgrade procedures should always involve the following sequence of tasks:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Preliminary preparation

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Baselining the cell (i.e., recording the state of the cell and its operatingparameters) before the upgrade

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Performing the upgrade

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Testing that the upgrade is effective and that the cell is operatingproperly

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Baselining the Minicell after the upgrade, to record the new operatingparameters

The Upgrading Team Some of the tasks performed during upgrades may have system-wideimplications. Consequently, upgrades should be undertaken andperformed as a team effort. A typical team will be made up of PCSCand Minicell technicians, but it may need to include other specialties,such as RF Engineering. For instance, upgrading from TCU to ECUmay require Packet Pipe re-engineering, the results of which would

require translation changes at the PCSC, in addition to the physicalhardware change at the Minicell site.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellPreliminary Preparation Procedures


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Preliminary Preparation Procedures

Software Preliminary procedures will involve verifying that the proper software

version for the upgrade has been installed at the PCSC and theMinicell. For instance, an ECU will not work on ECP release 9.0. Inaddition, whenever possible, time has to be allowed to check that thecell is operating under the new release prior to the upgrade (a processknown as “soaking the cell”).

Hardware Preliminary procedures also involve ensuring that all hardwareconfigurations have been worked out for the upgrade, and that allupgrade components (circuit packs) and required tools and equipmentare available.

Soaking a Minicell The term describes the process of running frequent diagnostics on aMinicell that has been downloaded with a new release to ensure that allits components have been properly updated to that release. Soakingperiod is usually set for one week.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellExample of Configuration Change

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example of Configuration Change

Physical Change Configuration changes that are reflected in translation may involve

physical or logical changes to the Minicell configuration.Example of physical change may be output power, such as whenupgrading from a CTU to an HPCTU.

Logical Changes Logical changes involve changes such as the reassignment of communication channels. An example of a logical change is thereassignment of packet pipes.

Upgrade procedures will specify the order in which these changes haveto be performed.

RC/V Fields Diagram The diagram below depicts the relationship between the RC/V screens,the packet pipe, and the antenna faces. Each antenna face (alpha, beta,and gamma) must be associated with a series of DS0 channels on thepptm RC/V screen to define a packet pipe.

DSODSO

123456

78910111213141516171819

2021222324

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

DL1

DL0

AUTOPLEXCellular PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBER INFORMATION ( pptm )

Screen 1 of 1System

CDMA Switch Identification............………….. *1) 1Trunk Group Number....................…………….. *2) 590CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)…*3) 2Trunk Status............... ............. …………………. 4) e

Packet Pipe Data Rate (Kbps)..........…………… 5) 56DS1 Board Number................... ...………………. 6) 0

7)DS0 Channels:[1] 1 [5] 5 FIELDS 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 12 are site specific[2] 2 [6] 6[3] 3 [7] 7[4] 4 [8] 8

DCS-E Switching Module.................. 12) 2

AUTOPLEXCellular PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBER INFORMATION

(pptm ) Screen 1 of 1System

CDMA Switch Identification............………….. *1) 1Trunk Group Number....................…………….. *2) 590CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)…*3) 4Trunk Status............... ............. …………………. 4) ePacket Pipe Data Rate (Kbps)..........…………… 5) 56DS1 Board Number................... ...………………. 6) 0

7)DS0 Channels:[1]9 [5] 14 FIELDS 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 12 are site specific[2] 10[6] 15[3] 11[7] 16[4] 12[8] 17


AUTOPLEXCellular PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBERINFORMATION ( pptm ) Screen 1 of 1System

CDMA Switch Identification............………….. *1) 1Trunk Group Number................ ....…………….. *2) 590CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)…*3) 6Trunk Status.............. .............. …………………. 4) ePacket Pipe Data Rate (Kbps)..........…………… 5) 56DS1 Board Number.................... ..………………. 6) 0

7)DS0 Channels:[1]18[5] FIELDS 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 12 are site specific[2]19[6][3]20[7][4]21[8]


ALPHA

Alpha FaceAssociated DSO Channels

BETA

BETA

Beta Face Associated DSO Channels

GAMMA

Gamma FaceAssociated DSO Channels

* In ECP 13 the numberof DS0 Channels isincreased to 16



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellBaselining a Minicell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Baselining a Minicell

Overview The process of baselining is designed to certify that the Minicell is

operating as intended, especially when the update involves changes tothe cell generic.

Components Involved Baselining involves:

• Routine diagnostics

• Manual diagnostics on DLs, CSCs, Packet Pipe Trunks, SCTs,CCCs, BBAs, and CRTUm

• Functional Tests on overhead channels and traffic paths

Once these tests are completed, it may be of value to verify the integrity

of the cell, by looking at the SDPs that reflect the configuration of thecell, as shown in the table below.

Routine Diagnostics andManual Diagnostics

Routine diagnostics, which are scheduled to be automaticallyperformed after midnight, may detect defective hardware. If diagnosticfailures are reported, replace the defective hardware and performmanually requested diagnostics on the unit.

SDP Page Number Title

SDP 2121 System Equipage Summary

SDP 2131 Minicell Equipment Status

SDP 2132 Minicell Software Status

SDP 2134 Minicell DS-1 Status

SDP 2138 Minicell Site CDMA Equipage Status

SDP 2139 Minicell Site CCC CCU Status




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellBaselining a Minicell

Programming the CRTU

Overview

Purpose The ability to change CRTUm phone numbers is available with theQualcomm (QC) phones. This information pertains to all cellular andPCS Autoplex customers with CDMA Growth Frames or Minicellswith CRTU (CDMA Radio Test Unit) equipment.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellItems Needed to Program the CRTU


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Items Needed to Program the CRTU

Description The Programming Adaptor allows service providers to perform

NAMing (Number Assignement Module) of the Qualcomm (QC)mobile which resides within the CRTUm, without Lucent installationpersonnel. An example of NAMing might be to make area codeupdates. The Programming Adaptor provides the interface between theQC PST software and the CRTUm.

Required Equipment The following equipment is required to run the software.

• PC or laptop, minimum configuration 386, 33MHz, 8MB RAM,DOS5.0, RS-232 serial port (customer provided)

• PST software (v5.0 or later, PST software must be purchased bythe customer directly from Qualcomm)

• Commercial cable (DB9-RS-232 shielded type, customerprovided)

• Programming Adaptor (order via Lucent)

How to Order The information on availability and ordering is in the following list:

• Availability is by early November, RTO target is November 20,1997

• Series II CDMA GF: Comcode 407805423

• PCS or Cellular CDMA Minicells: ZCCMC-Adaptor(108167610)

• List price is $200

Qualcomm OrderingInformation

Qualcomm ordering information is in the following list:

• Call 1-800-349-4474 and identify your account

• Specify appropriate version

• PST-I supports service programming




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellItems Needed to Program the CRTU

Upgrade TCU to ECU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The upgrade from TCU to ECU is a complex operation that mayrequire significant service-affecting reconfigurations.

Because the ECU can support ten CEs instead of the two CEs availablewith a TCU, there may be a need to reconfigure the packet pipes thatbackhaul traffic back to the PCSC.

Discussion of the “PCSC” side of the upgrade, especially thediscussion about packet pipe re-engineering, is an RF Engineeringtopic, and therefore outside the scope of this document.

In the following, we will assume that all the necessary preliminary andPCSC related work has been performed, and limit the example toMinicell-related processes.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellExample of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- InstallationProcedure


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- Installation Procedure

Purpose The preliminary procedures (packet pipe re-engineering, software

updates, 5ESS views and Access Manager forms updated, MinicellNVM, baselining) must be performed in advance of the actual upgrade.

The upgrade from TCU to ECU can be performed without loss of service if the channel pooling feature is enabled.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-1. Upgrade TCU to ECU

The sequence of tasks is as follows:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enable channel pooling. See page 9-13 for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Inhibit Minicell diagnostics and tests, to avoid unnecessary automatictrigger of alarms at the PCSC. See page 9-14 for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove from service the CCC controlling the TCUs to be replaced.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Physically remove the TCUs from the shelf and take them out of theMinicell. See page 9-14 for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Update, or ask someone at the switch to update, the appropriate RC/Vforms for the TCUs to be replaced, one sector at a time. See page 9-15for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Re-NVM the CCCs, and verify that the download is valid. See page 9-

16 for more information............................................................................................................................................................................

7 Insert the replacement ECUs.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Restore and diagnose each ECU.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellExample of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- InstallationProcedure

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Perform Functional Tests (overhead channels and traffic path).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Allow diagnostics and tests............................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

11 Re-baseline the Minicell.

Result

Upon completion of these broad steps, the cell will be operational withECUs. The cross references note the steps with more information.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellEnabling Channel Pooling


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Enabling Channel Pooling

Overview Enabling of channel pooling is done by entering non-zero values in RC/

V Form ceqcom2, field SubMem.

Channel Pooling Numbers These values are given in the following table.

ceqcom2 Screen The diagram below shows the ceqcom2 screen with emphasis shownon the SubMem field where channel pooling is enables.

Cabinet BBA Numbers Value to beentered

Primary Cabinet 2,4,6 1,1,1

Primary Growth I 8,10,12 2,2,2

AUTOPLEXCellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON ( ceqcom2 ) Screen 13 of 17 System Cell 90

BBA BBA BBA CDMA CDMA Base LAC Phy SubStat Stat Type Carr Chanl Class ID Ant Mem

153) BBA 154) BBA 155) 156) 157) 158) 159) 160) 161) 170)[1] 1 u 2 e FULLSET 1 450 JTC 29 1 1[2] 3 u 4 e FULLSET 1 450 JTC 30 2 1[3] 5 u 6 e FULLSET 1 450 JTC 31 3 1

Max LMT/CATV

Pwr Max Pwr163) 164)

[1] 008.0 ___[2] 008.0 ___[3] 008.0 ___

Screen 13 Primary CabinetBBA: 2,4,6SubMem: 1,1,1

Screen 14 Growth CabinetBBA: 8,10,12SubMem: 2, 2, 2

Channel Pooling NOT enabled if Sub Mem fields are set to “0”




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellECU Upgrade -- Removing a CCC from Service

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ECU Upgrade -- Removing a CCC from Service

Purpose The PCSC periodically initiates routine diagnostics and alarm

scanning. Inhibiting these tests will prevent the triggering of alarmswhen removing equipment from service.

Upgrading Sequence Upgrading is done one sector at a time, after having removed thecorresponding CCC from service.

Before you begin Even though the CCC is out-of-service, it may try to communicate withthe CE, using its stored NVM. It is therefore necessary to remove theTCU before changing the translation.

For the same reason, the ECU should not be inserted in the CRC shelf

before the translations have been updated.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-2. Remove the CCC from Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Inhibit diagnostics and tests:

inh:cell #, rtdiag <cr>

inh:cell #, ft, tp <cr>

inh:cell #,ft, oc <cr>

inh:cell #,ft pl <cr>inh:cell #,ft ant <cr>

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the corresponding CCC from service:

rmv:cell #,ccc x;ucl <cr>

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Physically remove the required TCUs.

Result

The cell is ready for upgrading of the forms.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellECU Upgrade -- Updating the MinicellTranslations


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ECU Upgrade -- Updating the Minicell Translations

Overview This page describes the process of updating the Minicell translations

for a TCU to ECU upgrade.

Updating the Translations Note: someone with access to the switch needs to perform the RC/Vupdates.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Translations are updated from the apxrcv, by changing the ceqcom2database form, CCC Type field (field 150 in ECP 10.0) from 2 to 10.This change has to be done one sector at a time, by entering and savingthe change for each CCC involved in the upgrade.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Once the ceqcom2 form has been updated, it is necessary to verify thatthe proper CEs will be recognized, This is done by verifying and, if necessary, updating the ceqccu form, placing an e in each entrycorresponding to an equipped CCU and entering a “ u” where the TCU’swere taken out of the cell.

Upgrade Process Diagram The Minicell upgrade requires changes to the Minicell translations asshown in the diagram:

CL3805 - L9V7.0

From the apxrcv, update the ceqcom2 form bychanging the Type field from 2 to 10 , one face at a time.

AUTOPLEXCellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON ( ceqcom2 ) Screen 12 of 17 System Cell 90

146) CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) List:Status Type Status Type

CCC 147) 148) CCC 149) 150)[1] 1 u 2 2 e 10 WARNING: CHANGING CCC TYPE[2] 3 u 2 4 e 10 WITHOUT FOLLOWING THE PROPER[3] 5 u 2 6 e 10 PROCEDURES WILL CORRUPT THE

[4] 7 u 2 8 u 2 CELL OPERATION. REFER TO THE[5] 9 u 2 10 u 2 DATA BASE UPDATE (401-610-036)[6] 11 u 2 12 u 2 FOR MORE DETAILS.[7] 13 u 2 14 u 2[8] 15 u 2 16 u 2[9] 17 u 2 18 u 2[10] 19 u 2 20 u 2[11] 21 u 2 22 u 2[12] 23 u 2 24 u 2 Fields 149 and 150 are site specific.

Populate[13] 25 u 2 26 u 2 CCCs 8, 10 and 12 for a growth frame.[14] 27 u 2 28 u 2[15] 29 u 2 30 u 2

Verify and update (if required) the ceqccu form, to reflect thecorrect number of ECUs/ TCUs, updating one upgraded CCCat a time.

AUTOPLEXCellular SERIES 2 CELL CDMA CCU EQUIPAGE ( ceqccu ) Screen 1 of 2System Cell Site Number *1) 90

2) CDMA Channel Unit Equipment Status List: CCC CCU 1 CCU 2 CCU 3 CCU 4 CCU 5 CCU 6 CCU 7

ID# 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)[1] 1 u u u u u u u

[2] 2 e e e u u u u[3] 3 u u u u u u u

[4] 4 e e u u u u u[5] 5 u u u u u u u [6] 6 e u u u u u u

[7] 7 u u u u u u u[8] 8 u u u u u u u[9] 9 u u u u u u u[10] 10 u u u u u u u[11] 11 u u u u u u u[12] 12 u u u u u u u Equipage for CCC ID# 2,

4, 6,[13] 13 u u u u u u u 8, 10 and 12 are site

specific.[14] 14 u u u u u u u[15] 15 u u u u u u u




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellNVMing the CCC

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................NVMing the CCC

Purpose This page describes the procedure to download the correct software

version to the NVM (Non-Volatile Memory).

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-3. To NVM the CCC

To NVM CCCs, invoke a download command. This may require aprior initialization for new CCCs.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 NVM the CCC for the ECUs, with all CEs removed.dnld:cell #,ccc x <cr>

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the craftshell, verify correct NVM.

op:cell #,ccc x;ucl:version <cr>

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify the following output message response is seen on the terminal fora CCC NVMed for ECUs:

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

CCC NVM 052397-10

Result

The date reported back (052397) may change on later releases of thecell generic, but the “-10” extension must be there for an ECU. For aTCU, the extension will be “-02”.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-4. Restoring the Cell to Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Remove and restore the CCC NVMed to diagnose it with the followingcommands:

rmv:cell #,ccc x;ucl <cr>

rst:cell #,ccc x <cr>

where x is the CCC number updated (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12).





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Insert the new ECUs then restore and test the cell with:

rst:cell #,ccc x,ccu y <cr>

where x is the CCC number updated (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12) and y is theECU (1 - 4).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Execute the CRTU traffic path functional test and ensure each CE testpasses for each physical antenna face (traffic path) in the subcell withthe following command:

exc:cell #,ft tp <cr>

Result: For several equipped traffic CEs, traffic path functionaltests could take several minutes to complete and give a responseback as an output message on the terminal screen. Monitor theMCRT 2139 page during the traffic path test. The overheadchannels and any traffic channel elements that are busy will not betested during this functional test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Allow routine diagnostics with the following command:

alw:cell #,rtdiag <cr>

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Allow CRTU functional tests with the following commands:

alw:cell #,ft tp <cr>

alw:cell #,ft oc <cr>

alw:cell #,ft pl <cr>

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

alw:cell #,ft ant <cr>

Result

The cell equipped with ECUs is operational.

Verifying the NVM Verifying download is done by invoking an op:cell command.

Install ECUs Install ECUs to the appropriate slots. Perform functional tests. Restorecell to normal operation.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


As of APXD 12.00, a new script was written for individual CCCs. Itcompressed both loads and now takes less than half the time, makingthe wait time only ten minutes per card.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example of Upgrade: CTU ToHPCTU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose In contrast with the TCU to ECU upgrades, the upgrade from a CDMATransmit Unit (CTU) to a High Power CDMA Transmit Unit (HPCTU)is characteristic of upgrades that can be performed entirely from theMinicell site.

However, while ECU upgrades could benefit from channel pooling,this is not the case for the CTUs. In fact, all CTUs within the same

cabinet (i.e., same carrier) must be upgraded at the same time.Therefore, a CTU upgrade will require that the Minicell be put out-of-service during the upgrade.

Another difference in the type of upgrade is that TCU and ECU areplug compatible, making their replacement an easy mechanical task. Incontrast, the HPCTU is thicker than the standard CTU, requiringsignificant physical intervention within the affected Minicell cabinet.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellPreliminary Procedures

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Preliminary Procedures

Purpose This procedure prepares the Minicell to upgrade from a CTU to an

HPCTU.

Taking the Minicell Out-of-Service

Because the CTU is on the signal path, the Minicell must be takenout-of-service before proceeding. This is done by removing the datalinks. To avoid unnecessary alarms at the PCSC, call processing andalarm reporting should also be inhibited.

Before you begin Because the CTUs need to be tuned to the Minicell operating channels,it is necessary that the cell operating parameters (e.g., channelnumbers, PN offsets) be known before hand. Without that information,

it will be impossible to reconfigure the Minicell with the new HPCTU.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-5. Removing a Cell from Service

The procedure lists the actions at a high level.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Record the cell operating parameters (e.g., channel numbers, PN offsets,etc.)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Inhibit call processing and alarm reporting.

Because the CTU is on the signal path, the Minicell must be takenout-of-service before proceeding. This is done by removing the DataLinks. To avoid unnecessary alarms at the PCSC, call processing andalarm reporting should also be inhibited.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Take the Minicell out-of-service by removing the datalinks.

Result

The Minicell is off-line.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing Translations Translation changes will relate to the change in the transmit power thatis required by the HPCTU.

Leaving a CTU power setting for an HPCTU will result in an increasein power drain on the Minicell.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellInstalling the HPCTU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Installing the HPCTU

Overview Once translations have been changed, the installation of an HPCTU is

essentially an electrical/mechanical operation.

Purpose This procedure is used to upgrade the Minicell from a CTU to anHPCTU.

Before you begin Cooling for HPCTUs is provided by fans in the back of the radiocabinet. In Minicell version 2, a separate heat exchanger needs to bemounted on the radio cabinet back panel. That heat exchanger is notrequired in the Version 4 Minicell.

The Primary cabinet is pre-wired for HPCTU upgrades. However, it

will be necessary to verify that there is power. This verification will notbe necessary for the Growth cabinets, as the HPCTU will use the samepower source as the one feeding the existing CTUs.

Each piece of hardware comes with its own installation instructions.Follow them for the Heat Exchanger and the HPCTUs.

Powering-down The sequence of tasks to perform is:

DANGER

............................................................................................................................................................................

There is a serious risk of burns and other damages.

The BCRs must be turned off before attempting to install the HPCTU.

1 Power down the BCRs before begining the physical installation of theHPCTUs.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 For installation in the Primary Cabinet, verify that there is power for theRear Door Heat Exchanger (cable P2 in the back should yield between25 VDC and 28 VDC). If there is no power, the installation cannotproceed.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn off all the remaining circuit breakers except for CB4 and CB 14,

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

which are the breakers feeding the RFTGs.

Result

The cabinet is powered down and ready for the upgrade.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-6. Installing the HPCTU

Physical Strain

The heat exchangers are heavy units.

Secure assistance before attempting physical installation.A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs. However, theHPCTUs are wider than the CTUs. Each piece of hardware comes withits own installation instructions. Follow them for detailed instructionsto install HPCTUs in a radio cabinet. It will be necessary to do thefollowing:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the cooling fan (if applicable) and the CTU card cage.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install the unit directly in thecabinet, using prescribed tools and torque to avoid warping the HPCTU

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

circuit pack.

Result

The HPCTU is installed in the cabinet.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-7. Powering the Minicell Back

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Power the Minicell back up by turning all the circuit breakers to ON,

except for CB8 (CSU) to prevent communication with the PCSC. The

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

fans should be running.

Result

The primary Minicell is ready for tests.

Rear Door Fan The Rear Door Exchanger fan may not start immediately as it iscontrolled by a thermostat.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellTesting the Minicell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Testing the Minicell

Purpose Functional tests are run to ensure that the HPCTUs are functioning.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-8. Rho tests and Resetting the Minicell

Conduct CDMA Functional Tests

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Set RF Power to 40.79+/-0.05dB.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Run Rho tests. See Chapter 7 for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Turn the CB8 ON to activate the CSU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Reset the ACB and verify that there are no alarms.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check with the Switch that the Minicell can be restored to service, and,

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

if so, invoke the restore command. The Minicell should boot.

Result

The Minicell is ready to transmit.

Power setting The RF power is set for CTU with Pilot Channel.

The 40.79 db corresponds to a 12 W output.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellTesting the Minicell

Range Extension Offer

Section Overview

Purpose This section covers the description and maintenance of the RangeExtension Option. This feature includes several new components toenable a low noise amplifier at the antenna head to improve the radioreception and the HPCTU to improve transmission.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellRange Extension Offer (REO) Overview


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview

Overview The REO System is an optional feature that improves the Minicell

noise figure, improves performance in noise-limited environments, andincreases the radius and coverage area of the cell.

Power Distribution Unit(PDU)

The Power Distribution Unit receives 24 VDC from the Power Cabinet(or non- Lucent power) and distributes 12-15 VDC to the MastheadAmplifier Units (2 per sector) via the individual antenna coaxial cables.It also provides individual PDU and MAU alarm signals to the PrimaryCabinet.

Masthead Amplifier Unit(MAU)

The MAUs (2 per sector) are powered by 12-15 VDC from the PDU.They amplify the receive antenna signals to the Primary Cabinet.

Required Primary CabinetConfiguration

The required Primary Cabinet configuration for the REO, must includethe following items, which are shipped (if not factory installed) withinstallation instructions included in the kits:

• High Power CTU(s)

• Rear Mounted Heat Exchanger

Required Primary CabinetExternal Parts

The required external REO installation parts are supplied in fourseparate kits:

• Installation Kit (1 per site)• Power Distribution Unit Kit (1 per site)

• Bias T Kit (2 per Sector, up to 3 sectors)

• Masthead Amplifier Unit (2 per Sector, up to 3 sectors)

Refer to the parts list, included in each kit, for individual parts.

Required Primary CabinetInternal Parts

The required internal REO installation parts are shipped withinstallation instructions included in the kits. These parts are:

• MAU MAS-RUs (Masthead Amplifier System - Receive Units, 2per sector)

The existing Filter Assemblies must be replaced with new ones (havingthe new Receive Units) but not until certain FOA tests have beenperformed. Refer to the current FOA Test Plan for this product.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellDescription

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Description

Overview Each receive (RX) diversity path has its own REO System (i.e. each

face has two REO Systems) which consists of seven principlecomponents.

Diagram The diagram below shows the REO System components.

Components of the RangeExtension Offer System

The table below lists the seven components of the tower top low noiseamplifier.

Item Description Remarks

1 Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU)- Lucent

Mounted on the antenna tower near the RX Antennaelement

2 MAU Mounting Bracket - Lucent Attaches the MAU to the antenna tower structure

3 PDU - Lucent Located at the rear of the Minicell radio cabinet

4 PDU Alarm Cable - Lucent Connects the alarm control shelf and the RCC



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellDescription


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Antenna Jumper Cable -Customer

Coaxial Radio Frequency (RF) jumper between the RXAntenna element and the MAU connector

6 Tower Jumper Cable - Customer Coaxial RF jumper between the MAU connector and the

Tower Cable that runs down to the Minicell7 MAU Grounding Wire -

CustomerA # 6 solid copper ground strap connects the MAUgrounding stud to the antenna grounding point

Item Description Remarks




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellRequired Material and Information

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Required Material and Information

Overview Various documents and equipment are needed to perform the

installation and testing of the TTLNA (which includes the MAU).

Required Equipment Equipment required for High Power CTU Upgrade along with theRHO, FER, and Transmit Power Level Adjustment Procedures arerequired for the TTLNA installation test.

An ITE 5632 / 6379 / 6928 multimeter is recommended for TTLNAinstallation testing.

Required Information Obtain cell site specific information. This information should includeradio carrier channel assignments, PN Offsets, and two user alarm

assignments required for the TTLNA installation. These External UserAlarms will require text message definitions in the /lapx10/alarms/cell/ alarms file on the ECP (refer to User Definable Alarms Feature 401-612-057 ).





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Preliminary Procedures

Overview These activities prepare the Minicell for the TTLNA upgrade.

Remove Cell From Service Call the switching center (PCSC) to have the cell removed fromservice. Generally this means disabling call processing, disabling alarmreporting, and disabling the data links.

Ask the cell tech or engineer to make the cell site translation changesrequired for the HPCTU upgrade.

Preliminary Procedures To prevent the CDMA equipment in the Radio Cabinet(s) fromtransmitting upon power-up, ensure all BCR faceplate AUTO/OFFswitches are set to OFF.

Injury from wind gusts.

When opening a cabinet, set the locking bar in place. Place thelocking bar, located at the bottom of the front door, into its slotin the bottom, front of the cabinet.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellTTLNA Physical Installation

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................TTLNA Physical Installation

Purpose This procedure is to install the TTLNA and reset the ACB.

TTLNA Installation Install the TTLNA option according to the installation instructionsincluded with the installation kit. Complete all of the installationinstructions.

High Power CTU Upgrade Note: skip this section if the High Power CTU option is alreadyinstalled.

Perform the High Power CTU Upgrade.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-9. Reset the ACB

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 On the CTU shelf of the cabinet that was upgraded, locate the AlarmControl Board (ACB, the pack’s code is either BLB1 or BLB2).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Using a pen, press the reset (RST) switch on the ACB. This will reset

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

the LAC alarms reported by the ACB to the RCC.

Result

After a couple of seconds, all the ACB LEDs should illuminate thenextinguish, except for the Active (ACT) LED.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellTransmit Power Calibration Procedure


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Transmit Power Calibration Procedure

Purpose The following procedure calibrates the TTLNA/HPCTU equipped

Minicell for operation at 16 watts.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-10.


The HPCTU power level must be set to 16 watts to ensurelink balance.

If the customer desires a power level other than 16 watts, contact the Columbus CTSO Methods and procedures group at 1-800- 356-8574 or, for international locations, (614) 860-3760.

Damage the lightning protectors

Use of excessive force can damage the lightening protectors..

Take care not to place any additional stress on the DC Bias Ts.when attaching / removing the 30dB Attenuator.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The power calibration will be performed at the output of the DC Bias T.

Set the HPCTU power level to 16 watts using the procedure for 16 watts,on page 8-50 for each sector/carrier

E N D O F S T E P S...........................................................................................................................................................................

upgraded to a HPCTU.

Result

The power is calibrated.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellRho and FER Testing the TTLNA

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA

Purpose Each sector/carrier must be tested to insure cell operation.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-11. Rho and FER Testing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Run the RHO Test for each sector / carrier that was upgraded to anHPCTU. Verify the RHO measurement is 0.95 or greater for eachtransmit path upgraded to HPCTU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the FER test on each sector / carrier and diversity that was

changed for the TTLNA.FER must be 0% and the path loss must be less than 56.0 dB for aPrimary Cabinet or less than 62.0 dB for a Growth Cabinet for each CEunder test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the path loss exceeds the allowed value, recheck the test cableconnections and repeat the test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Only test a single channel element for each antenna sector and each

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

diversity.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellMinicell Cleanup and Reboot


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Minicell Cleanup and Reboot

Purpose Once the installation is complete the Minicell must be cleaned up and

restored to service.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-12. Minicell Cleanup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Verify all test equipment is removed from the Minicell, and anyequipment removed for testing is replaced.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify all circuit packs are properly seated.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-13. Reboot the Cell

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Call the switching center and see if the cell tech or engineer is ready toboot the cell site to the switch. Do not proceed until ready.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Prior to performing integration with antenna connected, confirm that theRF spectrum is cleared.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ask the cell tech to restore the datalinks and alarm reporting. Once thefacilities connections are restored at the PCSC, the Minicell should bootautomatically.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 When the cell tech or engineer reports the site has started to boot, watchthe primary cabinet for indications that it is booting. After about 20




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellMinicell Cleanup and Reboot

minutes the cell should be booted. Contact the switch and verify the

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

Minicell has completed the boot.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellTTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests

Purpose Alarm testing assures that all alarms are connected and working

properly.

PDU Diagram The TTLNA PDU control panel is shown below:

Before you begin Before beginning the TTLNA alarm testing procedures, verify that allappropriate circuit breakers are on and the BCRs’ (AUTO/OFF)switches are in the OFF position.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-14. Alarm Testing

Damage to the PDU

There is a potential for damage and/or blowing fuses to the Power distribution unit (PDU)

Turn off the power to the appropriate MAU prior to connecting or disconnecting any RF cables.

Alarm testing will be performed at the PDU Panel and via the switch.The procedure will be to perform an action (e.g., turn off a switch), and

0.5

STATUSALARMPOWER

ON ON

OFF OFF

TTA 0.5

STATUSALARMPOWER

ON ON

OFF OFF

TTA

0.5

STATUSALARMPOWER

ON ON

OFF OFF

TTA 0.5

STATUSALARMPOWER

ON ON

OFF OFF

TTA

0.5

STATUSALARMPOWER

ON ONOFF

OFF OFF

TTA 0.5

STATUSALARMPOWER

ON ON

OFF OFF

TTA2.0

DC/DCMAIN

ON




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


verify the result (i.e., check alarm LED or user alarm going active at theswitch).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on the Standard UserAlarm Cross Connect Panel are in the appropriate position: closed onalarm.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Ensure the Main power switch for the PDU is ON, (the green MAINLED should be on). The power switches on the PDU for all the MAUs(TTA1 - 6) are in the OFF position and all the alarm switches are in theOFF position.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Disconnect the antenna jumper from the ANT connector of the bias teeon the alpha face diversity 1 connector. Turn the power and alarm switchfor MAU1 to the ON position.

Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should be lit, indicating anunder-current condition.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect a 30dB 25W attenuator to the antenna end of the bias tee. Turn the power

switch for MAU 1 to the ON position.Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should remain lit, indicating anover-current condition.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect theantenna jumper to the antenna connector of the bias tee on the alpha facediversity 1. Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the ON position.

Result: The green LED for MAU1 should be lit, indicating normal

operating condition............................................................................................................................................................................

6 Repeat this sequence for each MAU verifying the PDU alarm LEDs.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 After verifying all the MAU alarms, ensure all the foam jumpers aresecurely attached to the antenna port of the Bias Ts and all the power andalarm switches for the MAUs are in the ON position. All the green LEDs

for the MAUs should be illuminated, indicating normal operatingcondition.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Call the switch and ask the technician to enter the following commandat the craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login] terminal. This will show thealarms to the terminal as they change state:

alw:cell a,scsm <cr>

Where a = Minicell #.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 To override the Intrusion alarms (door open, User Alarm 10), gently pullthe front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop. Do the same forall open doors. Request the switch to verify which alarms are active.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Disable both power supplies by turning off the main power switch on thePDU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Active.

If the ... Then...

Cell under test shall indicates anyAlarms.

Identify and correct the source ofthe alarm.

Radio Cabinet door is left open on a

cold day (outside temperature belowfreezing), and the User Alarm 11,High/Low Temp, is reported.

Ignore this alarm.

Scan reported does not match the table. Verify the Offset/Bit. If theOffset/Bit matches, the alarmtest passes. Alarm scan reportedmay change with differentgeneric loads.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enable both power supplies by turning ON the main power switch.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

13 Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Normal............................................................................................................................................................................

14 Turn any one of the MAU power switches to the OFF position. The redLED should illuminate for that MAU indicating an alarm.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

15 Verify from the ECP that only the PDU alarm is Active.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

16 Return the MAU power switch to the ON position. The green LEDshould illuminate indicating Normal operation.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

17 Verify from the ECP that the PDU alarm is Normal.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

18 After the alarm tests are complete, ask the technician at the switch toenter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login]terminal. This will inhibit the command allowed earlier.

inh:cell a,scsm <cr>Where a = Minicell #.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

19 If the Minicell is in service, perform the Call Processing Tests on each

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

antenna face upgraded with the TTLNA option.

Result

Installation testing of the TTLNA option is complete.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellClose Up the Minicell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Close Up the Minicell

Purpose Complete this procedure to close the cabinet and secure it against the

outside weather conditions.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-15. Secure Minicell

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Verify no manuals or paperwork are blocking the cooling duct above thecircuit breakers in the radio cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell. Check that all side and

rear panel locking bolts are tight.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified. Turn on the Mainpower switch in the PDU and all equipped MAU power and alarmswitches.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify all cell cabling is properly reconnected, particularly the antennacables, and that the connectors are properly torqued (Torque Wrenches

(p/o ITE-6267) SMA type: R-4399, N type: R-5851)............................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

5 Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure it, if equipped.

Result

The Minicell is ready for operation.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellMAU Description

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................MAU Description

Masthead Amplifier Unit

(MAU)

The MAU is mounted on the antenna tower near the receive antenna

and is a rectangular enclosure which houses all of the following:• Low noise amplifier (LNA)

• Band specific bandpass filter

• Lightning protectors

MAU Diagram The diagram below shows the coax connectors and the groundconnections on the side of the unit.

Power The MAU operates on D.C. power (+12 VDC) supplied by the PDU viathe coaxial cable.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellPDU Description


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PDU Description

Overview The PDU (Power Distribution Unit) provides power to the MAU.

Prepare Antenna CableCover

The diagram below shows the housing, openings, and location of thePDU.

Route DC Cable FromPower Cabinet To PDU

The diagram below shows the DC cable routing from primary cabinetto PDU

LOCKWASHERDRILLED SPANNER

SCREW

INSULATINGBUSHING4 PLACES

LOCKNUTS

COVER

GASKET

CHASE NIPPLES(INSIDE OFPOWER CABINET)

SEALING RING(OUTSIDE OFPOWER CABINET)

P O W E R C A B I N E T

PULL BOX

GASKET

COVER

LOCK WASHERDRILLED SPANNERSCREW

PLUG

P C S C D M A

M I N I C E L L C A B I N E T

G-2

G1/G2

A N T E N N A C A B L EC O V E R




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellPDU Description

3 R Z H U & D E L Q H W

3 X O O % R [

& R Q G X L W W R

3 U L P D U \ & D E L Q H W

R I

3 U L P D U \ & D E L Q H W

$ Q W H Q Q D & D E O H

& R Y H U % R [

7 H U P L Q D O % O R F N

+ R X V L Q J

/ L T X L G 7 L J K W ) H H G

7 K U R X J K R I



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellCable Routing


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Cable Routing

Cable Routing Through

PDU Wall

The diagram below shows the routing cable through clamp and

removal/installation of tape gasket.

Circuit Breaker The diagram below shows the DC circuit breaker distribution panel

TAPE GASKET

SECURE SCREWS AFTER TAPING

CABLE CLAMP

CABLES

(TOP VIEW)

TAPE GASKET(PUSH INTO CLAMP

AND SEAL)

CABLE BUNDLE

CABLE CLAMP

NOTE: SEAL ANY GAPS WITHRTV.

CABINET FLOOR SHELF(SIDE VIEW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1 - 5 6 - 10 11 - 15

PrimaryRadio Cab.

GrowthCab. # 1

GrowthCab. # 2

Power Cab.Fan Unit

PDU




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellPDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet

Route Alarm Cable To The

Primary Cabinet Punch-Down Block

The diagram below shows the primary cabinet alarm cable entry at

antenna interface plate.

Lightning Protection Block The diagram below shows the location of the lightning protection block in the primary cabinet.

5 4 3 2 1DC FEED

L1 L2GN D

240 AC

Powe r Cabinet Alarm s AccessT1/E1 Twisted Pair F acilities A cces s

EXT ERNAL USER ALARM ACCESS

PWRCA B

A L A R M S

T 1 / E 1 E XTUSER

A L A R M S

6

See Note6 G r o u n d

C o n n e c t i o n s

Antenna C onnections

T1 CABLE ORINCOMING ALARM CABLE

FROM POWER CABINET

POWER CABINET ALARMS

GROWTH #1WHEN REQ’D

PRIMARY

GROWTH #2WHEN REQ’D

TO AIM



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellAlarm Cable Connections Inside the PrimaryCabinet


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet

User Alarm Connections The table below shows the cable connections for the alarms in the

primary cabinet.

Connect Alarms to Punch-Down Block

The diagram below shows the lightning protection punch-down block (external user alarm application.

Alarm Functions * Close/Open on Alarmor Switchable

110 ANA Block LightningProtection Pair (OPS Side)

External User Alarm0

Switchable 16


Switchable 17


Switchable 18


Switchable 19


Switchable 20


Switchable 21


Switchable 22

External User Alarm

7“Generator Fail”

Close on Alarm 7




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellAlarm Cable Connections Inside the PrimaryCabinet

GND

01

06

11

16

21

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 1 4 15

1 6 1 7 1 8 19 2 0

21 22 23 2 4 25

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

111213 1415

161718 19 20

212223 2425

OSP

OSP

CPE

CPE

LIGHTNING

PROTECTIONBLOCK

ALARMPROTECTION

NOTE: ALL PUNCH DOWNCONTACTS WILL ACCEPT 22 OR24 AWG SOLID INSULATED WIRES.

“OSP” SIDEEXTERNALUSER ALARMCONNECTIONS



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellBias T Description


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Bias T Description

Disconnect Applicable

Antenna Jumper Cables

The diagram below shows the weatherproofing connectors their

removal.

Important! Do not bend the Antenna Jumper Cables more thanthe specified bend radius.

1 / 2 “ R F A N T E N N AJ U M P E R C A B L E S

C O N N E C T O RW E AT H E R P R O O F I N G K I T

G P S A N T E N N A C A B L E

C O M PA C T A N T E N N A

C A B L E C O V E R

C O N N E C T O RW E AT H E R P R O O F I N G K I T

A N T E N N A C A B L E S




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellIdentifying Faults in the MAU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Identifying Faults in the MAU

Failure Monitoring Circuitry within the MAU monitors for active RF device failure. If a

failure occurs, the bias current increases beyond a predefined limit andwill be detected by the PDU as an MAU failure, causing an alarm state.Also, if the MAU does not draw any current, this will be detected bythe PDU and reported as an MAU failure.

MAU Maintenance The MAU is a sealed unit with no internal user serviceablecomponents. When an MAU fails, LEDs will be lighted on the frontpanels of the PDU. If an MAU alarm is reported, then the unit must bereplaced. MAU alarms are also reported to the cell controller via theuser defined alarm.

Lightning Damage The MAU has lightning arrestors but these are not field serviceable. If the MAU has been subjected to multiple lightning strikes, then itsprotection may be compromised and the unit must be replaced.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellComponent Replacement and RepairPreparations


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Component Replacement and Repair Preparations

MAU/PDU Handling and

Storage

The MAU or PDU is shipped from the factory in protective packaging.

Lucent Technologies recommends that none of the protectivepackaging be removed until the unit is at the job site. The MAU orPDU package should be stored in a clean dry area until deployed.

Routine Cable/ConnectorWeatherproof Check

All weatherproof seals at connector/cable interfaces should beinspected during each tower top visit. If the seal is not weatherproof then it must be resealed according to local practice.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellCable/MAU Connector Re-sealing

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Cable/MAU Connector Re-sealing

Purpose Please note that the procedure described below is used for both the

Antenna Jumper/MAU connector as well as the Tower Jumper/MAUconnector junctions.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-16.

Weather Damage

It is critical that both junctions remain waterproof ot avoid damage to the connectors.

Check the seals and re-seal as needed.

To re-seal the cable/MAU connector weather seals:

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove any previous weather sealing materials.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Disconnect the jumper cable.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Slip Andrew 3M™ Cold Shrink™ Weatherproofing Kit (# 241475-9)over cable end.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Place the Cold Shrink spacer approximately 4-6 inches from the DINconnector.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Reconnect the jumper cable to the MAU connector.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Push the Cold Shrink wrap flush against the MAU connector faceplate............................................................................................................................................................................

7 Activate the Cold Shrink by pulling out the nylon coil.



Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellCable/MAU Connector Re-sealing


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

8 Apply silicone sealer at the Cold Shrink and MAU faceplate junction.

Result

The MAU and associated cables are weather tight.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellPreparing an MAU for Mounting

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Preparing an MAU for Mounting

Purpose Prepare a replacement MAU for mounting, according to the procedure

outlined below.

Diagram The MAU mounting is designed to accept different styles of brackets.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-17. Preparing an MAU for Mounting

Preparing an MAU for Mounting Procedure

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Assemble the hex machine screws, flat washers, and jam nuts finger

tight on the 4 MAU mounting legs.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Place the MAU Mounting Bracket Plate on the hex head machinescrews.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Align the screws with the holes in the plate and tighten the jam lock nuts.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the MAU Mounting Bracket and set it aside as a spare. You willnot use this new bracket unless the existing bracket at the tower top isdamaged.

Amplifier Leg

MAU MountingBracket Plate

Flange Nut

Flat Washers

Hex JamLock Nut

Hex Head Machine Screw






401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellReplacing a Failed MAU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replacing a Failed MAU

Purpose Replace a failed MAU by following the procedure outlined in the table

below and as described in the figure below.

MAU ReplacementHardware

Before ascending the antenna tower it is essential that the hardwaredescribed in the table below has been assembled for transport.

MAU Jumper CableDiagram

The loop in the Tower Jumper Cable provides critically importantstrain relief for the MAU connector. When forming the Tower Jumper

Cable loop, do not exceed the recommended minimum bend radius forthe type of cable you are using. The recommended minimum bend radii

Quantity Description Supplied By:

1 MAU Mounting Bracket with Hardware Lucent

1 MAU (tested and prepared as above) Lucent

3 Andrew 3M™ Cold Shrink™ Weatherproofing

Kits (#241475-9) for Coaxial cable(recommended)

Customer

Lot Silicone sealer Customer

1 RX Antenna Jumper Cable spare Customer

1 Tower Jumper Cable spare Customer

Lot UV-resistant tie wraps Customer





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

for two commonly used RF cables are: 1 1/4” for 1/2” Superflex FoamJumper, FSJ; 5” for 1/2 Foam Jumper, LDF.

MAU Mounting Position Since cable loss between the receive antenna and the MAU directlyimpacts the system noise figure, the MAU must be mounted within 10’of its receive antenna.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-18. Replacing a Failed MAU

Damage to the MAU, Personal Injury

This procedure assumes that you have turned OFF power to the appropriate PDU.

Switch off Circuit Breaker depending on the RX diversityinvolved.

The following procedure outlines replacing a failed MAU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Switch OFF circuit breaker #5 or #6 depending on the RX diversityinvolved. Both the RFG and the PDU are supplied by this circuitbreaker.

RXAntenna

AntennaJumper

MAU

TowerJumperLoop

TowerCable

J1 J2




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the old weatherproofing from the two MAU connectors.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Disconnect both the RX Antenna Jumper and Tower Jumper Cablesfrom the failed MAU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Disconnect the ground wire from the failed MAU grounding stud.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the failed MAU from its mounting bracket.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Mount the replacement MAU to the existing mounting bracket............................................................................................................................................................................

7 Reconnect the ground wire to the grounding stud of the replacementMAU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Reconnect and weatherproof (see Table 5-2) the RX Antenna Jumpercable to the RF IN connector on the replacement MAU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Reconnect and weatherproof the Tower Jumper cable to the RF OUTconnector on the replacement MAU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 Resecure all cables to the tower top using UV-resistant tie wraps.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Switch ON the same Circuit Breaker as above.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

12 Check for a green MAU LED on the PDU faceplate.

Result

A green MAU LED indicates a successful replacement.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lucent Responsibility Proper MAU operation is not guaranteed by Lucent Technologiesunless the MAU is mounted vertically with the connector end down.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upgrading a PCS CDMA MinicellReplacing a Failed PDU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Replacing a Failed PDU

Purpose Replace a failed PDU by following the procedure outlined below.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Procedure 9-19. Replacing a Failed PDU

Damage to the PDU and Personal Injury

This procedure assumes that you have turned OFF power to the appropriate PDU.

Switching off circuit breaker.

Replacing a Failed PDU Procedure

...........................................................................................................................................................................

1 Turn OFF power to the appropriate diversity PDU by switching off thecircuit breaker.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the cable connections and terminations from the failed PDUnoting each cable connection designation (J1, J2, J3, etc.).

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the failed PDU from the Primary Cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Install the replacement PDU in place of the failed PDU. If necessary,guide the housing tabs on the rear of the unit into the slots in the cabinetrear bracket.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Reconnect all cables and terminations to their termination points asnoted in Step 1 above.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 Turn ON power to the diversity PDU selected above.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Check the faceplate of the PDU for a green PDU LED indicating that the

E N D O F S T E P S............................................................................................................................................................................

new PDU is operational.

Result

A green PDU LED indicates the PDU is operational.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1 0 - 1Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Fault Isolation and

Troubleshooting Techniques

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Overview This is the first issue of a document that is intended to provide somegeneral guidelines for maintenance procedures useful for fault isolationand troubleshooting of PCS CDMA Minicells.

Purpose The primary emphasis in this first document issue is placed on faultisolation and troubleshooting procedures for PCS Minicells. However,

much of the material also is relevant for AUTOPLEX System 1000Series II CDMA Cell Sites and for Cellular CDMA Minicells.Additional material that is more explicitly focused on fault isolationand troubleshooting procedures for AUTOPLEX System 1000 Series IICDMA Cell Sites and Cellular CDMA Minicells is planned to beincluded in future issues of this document.

Contents System Performance Measurements 10-3• Operational Fault Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5• Other System Performance Measurements - - - - - - - - - -10-6• Service Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-7• Plant Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-8• Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements - - - - - -10-9• CDMA Frame Error Rate & Power-Level Measurements - - 10-10• Troubleshooting with OFD-Access - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11

Other Cell Site Housekeeping Software 10-13• Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14



1 0 - 2 Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting Techniques

• Functional Testing Software Sub-Systems - - - - - - - - 10-15• Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-17• Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-18• Software Asserts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-21• Hardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests - - - - - 10-22• Hardware Alarm Scanning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-24

Use of CRTU Functional Tests for Troubleshooting 10-26• Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT - - - - - - - - - - 10-27• Demand-Mode Use of OCFT for Troubleshooting - - - - 10-29• Demand-Mode Use of TPFT for Troubleshooting - - - - 10-33• Troubleshooting with PLFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-35

Examples of Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT 10-38• Example 1: Failed CTU in PCS CDMA Minicell - - - - - 10-39• Example 2: Failed ECU Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-45

• Example 3: Failed CCC Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-47• Example 4: Failed ACU Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-50• Example 5: Failed BCR Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-52• Example 6: Failed BIU Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-53

Use of Cell Site Housekeeping Software for Troubleshoot10-54• Troubleshooting with Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - 10-55• RC/V Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-56• CRTU Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-57• RSP Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-59• Problems Due to No Traffic CE Available - - - - - - - - 10-60• List of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causes - - 10-61• Troubleshooting with Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - 10-66• Troubleshooting with Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - 10-71

Issue It should be noted that this document is limited to descriptions of maintenance procedures that are available with CDMA Release 6.0.

Scope A wealth of information regarding maintenance, fault isolation andtroubleshooting procedures is already available in existingdocumentation. For clarity and convenience, some of that material isreplicated here. In addition, extensive references are made to other

relevant material available in existing documentation. This document isintended to supplement the existing maintenance-relateddocumentation by providing a single, compact framework for theexposition of various tips, techniques, and procedures that are effectivein conducting fault isolation and troubleshooting analyses of CDMACell Sites.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System Performance Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose A broad range of maintenance capabilities has been provided since theinitial Release 1.0 deployment of CDMA. Full Non-Volatile Memory(NVM) downloading, alarm collection, Status Display Pages (SDPs),and Service Measurements (SMs) capabilities were included in CDMARelease 1.0. In CDMA Release 3.0, the CDMA Radio Test Unit(CRTU) was introduced to provide the capability to perform end-to-endtesting of CDMA traffic paths. The CRTU is fully integrated into theCDMA system, just as test radios were integrated into previous

AUTOPLEX System 1000 equipment using analog and TDMAtechnologies.

CDMA Release 3 The CDMA Release 3.0 software enabled the CRTU to conductFunctional Tests (FTs) of both Overhead Channels (OCs) and end-to-end Traffic Paths (TPs). The Overhead Channel Functional Test(OCFT) verifies the pilot, sync, access, and paging special-purposechannels for each sector of the cell. The Traffic Path Functional Test(TPFT) verifies the capability to conduct an end-to-end CDMA call.The TPFT begins with the CRTU placing a call to a special Mobile

Station Test (MOST) directory number, and then completing the call byusing one of the traffic Channel Elements (CEs) available to the sectorunder test. The call is then handed off from CE to CE in order to testevery traffic channel path (including growth carriers) available to thephysical antenna face. The CRTU then repeats the MOST callorigination and handoff process for every sector in the cell in order tocomplete the TPFT.

CDMA Release 6 In CDMA Release 6.0, an additional type of Functional Test capabilitywas added to the CRTU, namely, a Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT).The PLFT verifies the suitability of the pilot signal strength of eachcarrier on each sector of a CDMA cell.

CDMA Release 7 Future CDMA software releases (namely, CDMA Release 7.0 andbeyond) are planned to enhance farther the utility of the CRTU, toallow additional testing and more refined troubleshooting capabilities.These future CRTU test enhancements include: (1) Single ChannelSelective Functional Test; and, (2) CDMA Transmit Antenna Test.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


References All of the CDMA Release 6.0 CRTU Functional Tests will be describedin more detail elsewhere in this document (Functional Tests: page10-14, Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27, andTroubleshooting with Functional Tests: page 10-55). Additionalinformation about CRTU Functional Tests may be found in the

AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 8, January 1999 .



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesOperational Fault Detection


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Operational Fault Detection

Description Another addition to CDMA Release 6.0 is a feature called Operational

Fault Detection (OFD) for Access Channels (OFD-A). Designed tocomplement the CRTU and CDMA functional testing, the OFD-Afeature consists of a set of specific statistical tests, run on measuredcell-site operational performance data, that can be used to identifydeviations from normal operating conditions. The OFD-A feature candetect the absence of call traffic on a particular sector and carrier, basedon that sector’s and carrier’s usage histories. In this way, OFD-A canidentify overhead channel failures on multiple-carrier sectors havingpaging-access channel pairs. The output resulting from the OFD-Aanalyses is summarized in the form of output messages which are

directed to the ECP ROP.

OFD Release Additional OFD capabilities are planned to be added in future CDMAsoftware releases (namely, CDMA Release 7.0 and beyond). Thesefuture OFD enhancements include:

1. OFD for Multi-Sector Calls and Accesses (OFD-MS);

2. OFD for Sector/Cell Capacity (OFD-CAP);

3. OFD for Holding Time (OFD-HT); and OFD for Paging (OFD-P).

Reference The OFD-A feature in CDMA Release 6.0 will be described in moredetail later in this document. Additional information regarding OFD-Amay be found on pages 32-93 through 32-97 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Operations,

Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January1999.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesOther System Performance Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Other System Performance Measurements

Description In addition to OFD measurements, the ECP also collects other various

measured data from cell sites and stores them in files at the ECP. Themeasurements, which include traffic data, subscriber (mobile) data,cell-site equipment data, etc., contain information about systemperformance that can be used to identify cell-site-related faults thatcannot be detected readily by the RCC. [Catastrophic and severefailures will be detected by the RCC, but more subtle service-affectingproblems, such as call-processing coverage problems or partialoperational performance degradations experienced by hardware units,may escape detection by the RCC.]

RCC Measurements The following four types of specific measurements collected by theRCC and reported to the ECP will be described briefly below:

1. Service Measurements (SMs);

2. Plant Measurements (PMs);

3. Voice Channel Selection Activity (VCSA) Measurements; and,

4. CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power-Level Measurements(PLMs).

Reference More detailed descriptions of these measurements may be found onpages 26-39 and 26-40 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Operations,

Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January1999.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesService Measurements


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Service Measurements

Description Service measurements provide statistical information (cumulative

counts) on call traffic, various failure events, and the usage of systemresources. The data is used to troubleshoot the system, to evaluate howwell the system is operating, and to engineer its growth.

Scheduling ServiceMeasurements

Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled or manual basis.On the scheduled basis, the RCC continually gathers servicemeasurements and reports the data hourly to the OMP. At the OMP, thecollected data is saved in a series of 24 data files, one file for everyhour of the day. The files are overwritten with new data beginning atthe start of a new day.

Important! Note that prior to ECP Release 8.0, the servicemeasurements were scheduled hourly by the ECP, storedtemporarily at the ECP, and then copied to the OMP. As of Release8.0, the OMP took over all service-measurement responsibilitiesfrom the ECP, thereby freeing up ECP resources. The OMP is nowthe primary user interface for all service measurements.

Related Documents: Service Measurements (401-610-135)

Special Studies Measurements (117-8A CIB).




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesPlant Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Plant Measurements

Description Plant measurements provide information on the performance of cell

site equipment including failure occurrences, failure durations (out-of-service time), audit failures, diagnostic failures, and initializations. Thedata can be used to evaluate cell site hardware deficiencies and theirimpact on subscriber service.

The number of failures is the number of times a hardware unit is takenout-of-service automatically. That count does not include manualremovals.

Scheduling PlantMeasurements

Although service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basisor manual basis, scheduling of plant measurements is controlled

exclusively by the RCC. The RCC automatically reports the plantmeasurement data to the ECP every day at 2:30 AM.

Related Documents: ECP Plant Measurements System 254-341-116



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesVoice Channel Selection Activity Measurements


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements

Description Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements provide

detailed information about traffic movement within a cellular systemby recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processingevents at specified cell sites. VCSA can also be run in a special mode tocollect data only for a single specified mobile. Each record indicateswhat type of event occurred, the time it occurred, the telephone numberof the involved mobile station, and other data. Off-line processing of this data by the AutoPACE system provides information about voicechannel selection and handoffs during call processing.

Collecting VCSA VCSA measurements can be collected only if a VCSA study is

requested (manual basis). For the time period specified by the user, theRCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECPduring and after the measurements are made.

Related Documents: Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide (401-660-108).



1 0 - 1 0 Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesCDMA Frame Error Rate & Power-LevelMeasurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CDMA Frame Error Rate & Power-Level Measurements

Description The CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power Level Measurements

(PLM) feature (CDMA FER/PLM) is currently under development andcommitted for CDMA Release 8.0 availability. It will be similar to thePLM capability that is already provided for analog systems. (Theanalog PLM provides detailed information about the distribution of power levels detected by setup, locate, and voice radios at a specifiedcell site. The data are used by the AutoPACE system to investigatesystem troubles, add or alter radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, andplan growth.)

Collecting Measurements The CDMA FER/PLM feature will be built upon the Autoplex 1000

system capability to collect useful statistical data on systems. Thecollected data will include the following:

1. Reverse Link Frame Error Rate on every Traffic Channel

2. Forward Link Frame Error Rate on every Traffic Channel

3. Total output power on Forward Link

4. Noise Rises

5. Pilot strength of the primary cell before and after handoff

6. Signal-to-Noise ratio (Eb/No) set point before and after handoff

7. Pilot strength of the primary cell just prior to when the call is lost

8. Signal-to-Noise ratio (Eb/No) set point just prior to when the callis lost

9. Soft handoff period

Based on the data, service providers will then be able to fine tune thepower control parameters and handoff parameters for the CDMAoperation.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with OFD-Access

1 0 - 1 1Lucent Technologies – ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting with OFD-Access

Description The Operational Fault Detection - Access (OFD - A) feature can detect

two types of access-channel faults, hard faults and soft faults.

Hard faults OFD -A declares a hard fault when there are no accesses on one carrierand there are enough total access counts for the sector to make it highlyprobable that the no-access carrier is faulty.

Soft faults OFD -A declares a soft fault when there are some accesses on a carrierbut there are so many more accesses on the other carriers that it ishighly probable that the some-access carrier is faulty.

OFD Sample OFD -A reports the worst access-channel fault for a sector and showsthe access-channel counts for all carriers having access channels on thesector. An example OFD -A Output Message sent to the ROP file isshown below.

Sample Output

REPT:CELL 132 CDMA ACCESS CHANNEL STATUSSECTOR 1 CHANNEL FAULT - INITIALACCESSES ON CARRIER 1 CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 0 COUNT=0 FAULTACCESSES ON CARRIER 2 CCC 4, CCU 3, CE 0 COUNT = 104FAULT START TIME: 10:57:01

11/12/97 14:57:26 #270516OFD Output Fields The OFD output report includes the following information:

• Cell number (1-222)

• Sector (0-6) where the fault occurred

• Sector fault state (initial, continuing, or cleared)

• Access channel counts for the faulty and good carriers on thesector; identifies the P/S/A CE for each carrier by CCC number,CCU number, and CE number

• Time stamp when the initial fault occurred on the carrier.• Time stamp when the report printed at the ECP ROP.

OFD Sample After the initial OFD -A report has been issued, OFD -A will send areport to the ECP every five minutes until the fault clears, as shown inthe example message below:




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Sample Output

REPT:CELL 132 CDMA ACCESS CHANNEL STATUSSECTOR 1 CHANNEL FAULT - CONTINUINGACCESSES ON CARRIER 1 CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 0 COUNT=0 FAULTACCESSES ON CARRIER 2 CCC 4, CCU 3, CE 0 COUNT = 143FAULT START TIME: 10:57:0111/12/97 15:02:53 #270665

OFD Sample Typically, a carrier access-channel fault will continue for periods thatcan range in duration from just a few minutes up to several hours or,possibly, days. OFD -A will send a continuing fault report to the ECPevery five minutes until the fault clears. The example message belowshows a hard fault that cleared within 10 minutes.

Sample Output

REPT:CELL 132 CDMA ACCESS CHANNEL STATUSSECTOR 1 CHANNEL FAULT - CLEAREDACCESSES ON CARRIER 1 CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 0 COUNT=187FAULTACCESSES ON CARRIER 2 CCC 4, CCU 3, CE 0 COUNT = 125FAULT START TIME: 10:57:0111/12/97 15:08:26 #270831

OFD -A Recovery Currently, there is no automatic recovery for OFD-detected faults. You,as the technician, must take manual actions to correct the problem.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Other Cell Site HousekeepingSoftware

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The cell site has excellent housekeeping software: faults such astransmitter failure, power and entry alarms, and speech path conditionsare constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the ECP. Inmost cases, fault detection, diagnosis, and recovery are automatic. Thecell site detects faults by various means including functional tests ,diagnostic tests, software audits, software asserts, hardware integritychecks, board self-tests, and hardware alarm scanning.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesFunctional Tests


Description Functional tests run on cell site equipment that is in-service. (This is in

contrast to diagnostic tests, discussed in the following Diagnostic Tests:page 10-17, which run on equipment that is out-of-service.) Functionaltests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit, test it, andthen free it for normal call processing traffic.

CDMA functional tests run at the Series II Cell Site, Cellular CDMAMinicell, and Personal Communications Services (PCS) CDMAMinicell. They verify that the network is able to originate mobile callsover the CDMA channels and that the CDMA radio equipment isoperational. Every idle (in-service and non-busy) CDMA trafficchannel element (CE) at the cell site can be tested without human

intervention.

Scheduling FunctionalTests

Functional tests can be performed on a scheduled or manual (on-demand) basis. For the latter case, in order to test new installations ortroubleshoot suspected problems, functional tests are initiated andcontrolled from the ECP. The cell site performs the requestedfunctional test and returns the results to the ECP. Running functionaltests on a regularly scheduled basis ( routine functional tests) is a wayof checking the integrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths. Thefrequency of routine functional tests is specified in the cell site

translations. (Unlike routine diagnostic testing, the exact time of daycannot be specified.) The test results (pass, fail) are reported to theECP.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesFunctional Testing Software Sub-Systems


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Functional Testing Software Sub-Systems

Overview The following specific software sub-systems are involved in the

execution of functional testing.

Technician Interface (TI) TI provides a system operator with the ability to control theAUTOPLEX System 1000 and respond to system problems requiringmanual intervention. TI also provides a means for the system to sendinformation such as alarms, error messages, status information, andmeasurement data to the system operator.

Routine MaintenanceScheduler (RMS)

RMS performs functional tests by sending a functional test request tothe maintenance request administrator (MRA) software subsystem,which in turn sends a request to the functional test (FT) softwaresubsystem. RMS handles the result messages that are sent back fromFT. RMS can start a functional test initiated by a technician (manualrequest, on demand) or by a timer (automatic request, scheduled). RMSaccesses the start time of scheduled functional tests from thetranslations (TR) software subsystem. For a manual request, RMS willsend a report to the ECP read-only printer (ROP) upon completion of the functional test. For an automatic request, RMS will not send areport to the ECP ROP upon completion of the functional test even if the test fails.

Maintenance RequestAdministrator (MRA)

MRA administers cell site maintenance requests and manages cell siteequipment status. The administration of maintenance requests includesaccepting, rejecting, sequencing, queuing, and reporting to thetechnician interface.

Functional Test (FT) FT contains the code to run functional tests. At the completion of afunctional test, FT always sends the results to RMS, and will send theresults to the hardware error handler (HEH) software subsystem if anyerrors occurred.

Hardware Error Handler(HEH)

HEH receives autonomous errors from hardware units, functional testerrors from FT, and call processing errors from the call processing (CP)software subsystem. It determines if a recovery action (remove orrestore) is needed and issues a request to MRA. Depending upon theseverity of the error, either HEH takes immediate recovery action orwaits until the error has occurred a predefined number of times before




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesFunctional Testing Software Sub-Systems

taking action. In all cases, either when an error occurs or when HEHtakes a recovery action, HEH sends a report to the ECP ROP.

Call Processing (CP) CP is responsible for CDMA call setup, handoff, and teardown.

Translations (TR) TR stores all site-dependent data required for initialization.

Additional Information Additional information regarding CDMA functional tests is included inFunctional Tests, Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27,and Troubleshooting with Functional Tests: page 10-55 of thisdocument.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesDiagnostic Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Diagnostic Tests

Description Diagnostic tests can be performed on an automatic (error-driven),

scheduled, or manual basis. For the latter case, diagnostic tests areinitiated and controlled from the ECP via TI commands; the cell siteperforms the requested diagnostic test and returns the test results to theECP.

Scheduling Diagnostics Diagnostic tests run on equipment that is out-of-service or in thegrowth state. Running diagnostic tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine diagnostic tests) is a way of determining if the cell sitehardware units are operational. Routine diagnostic tests run once a day;the time of day at which these tests run is specified in the cell site

translations. The test results are reported to the ECP.[Note that cell site translations, or system-configuration parameters,can be set or changed using the recent change/verify (RC/V)subsystem; initially, they are maintained in the ECP’s application databases and then downloaded from the ECP to the cell site controller(radio control complex—RCC). For more information, refer to the

Data Base Update Manual 401-610-036 )

Related Documents: Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions 401-660-101




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesSoftware Audits

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Software Audits

Description AUTOPLEX System 1000 audits are major software programs that

detect, confine, and correct software data errors before the errorsadversely impact the system. Audits correct broken linkages, restorelost data resources, and help identify the location of problems in sourcecode. They provide the following functions:

• Maintain system performance by checking for inconsistencies andlost resources.

• Provide system initialization during emergencies.

• Protect and recover temporary memory (for example, call stores)from error.

• Report errors to indicate trouble to maintenance and fieldpersonnel.

• Facilitate office growth by automatically updating certain systemsoftware.

Error Reporting Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service. Audit testerrors are reported to the ECP. When audits detect errors, they recoverany lost resources and, if necessary, invoke appropriate systeminitializations.

Scheduling SoftwareAudits Software audits normally run automatically, but they also can beperformed on a manual basis via input commands entered through theTI. All of the AUTOPLEX System 1000 audits are run under thecontrol of the Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS).The audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP by the OSDSAudit Control (OSDSAC) program. Upon receipt of an audit requestfrom the OSDAC, the cell site performs the requested audit and returnsthe results to the ECP. Audits are also run in the ECP, independently of the audits in the cell sites. ECP audits check the integrity of the data inthe OSDS only; audits in the cell site check the integrity of the data inthe cell sites only. In addition, interprocessor audits are run periodicallyfrom the ECP to ensure consistency of the data that are commonbetween the ECP and the cell sites and between the ECP and the DCS.(There is one dummy audit named INTRPROC that exists in the cell.Its sole purpose is to request the ECP to run interprocessor audits on therequesting cell site.





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit Types The AUTOPLEX System 1000 has approximately 50 different cell-siteaudits. Each audit has a distinct name that conveys meaningfulinformation about the data structures being audited. The audits aredesigned to run a wide variety of checks on the entire cell site. Inaddition to checking the consistency of software data structures, thecell site audits also check the status of different firmware and hardwareunits in the cell.

Examples of Audits Examples of some of the CDMA-specific cell-site audits include:

• ARCCC - Initiates internal audits for CDMA cluster controllers(CCC).

• CCPCCC - Verifies the data integrity between the CCC and thecell.

• CCPECP - Ensures that for every CDMA call which occupies aprimary CDMA Radio Control Register (CRCR), a matching callappearance exists at the ECPC.

• CCPINT - Performs an internal audit of the CDMA CallProcessing (CP) translations. [ CCPINT audits the Traffic ChannelAdministration (TCA) and the CRCR data structure.]

• CCPOAM - Ensures consistency of data between the TCA and thetranslations structures from which they derived.

• CCPSEC - Checks consistency of call-related data between the

RCC CDMA Call Processing at the primary and secondary cells.• TUCDMA - Checks the CDMA maintenance units’ parameters,

by performing an audit of translations parameters at the CCCs,CEs, and BBAs.

Complete List of Cell SiteAudits

For a complete list of currently available AUTOPLEX System 1000cell-site software audits, the AUTOPLEX Cellular TelecommunicationsSystems, System 1000, Cell Site Audits Manual 401-610-078 , should beconsulted.

Scheduling Cell Site Audits Running software audits on a regularly scheduled basis ( routineaudits) is a way of detecting, confining, and correcting software dataerrors before the errors adversely affect system performance. Thefrequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the RCC; thereis no scheduling translation associated with audits.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Related Documents: Series II Cell Site Audits Manual (401-610-078).



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesSoftware Asserts


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Software Asserts

Asserts Description Asserts occur when software encounters an unusual or unexpected

condition.Example

For example, a software program calls a routine and expects threechoices but is presented with four. Such errors are reported to assert-handling software on the RCC, which is responsible for formattingassert output messages and sending the messages to the ECP.

Assert handling SoftwareSubsystems

The assert-handling software may be one of two software subsystemson the RCC:

When an assert occurs, an assert macro provides the assert-handlingsoftware with the information it needs to process the assert failure.

What output message prints at the ECP depends upon the macro thatcalled the assert-handling software.

Escalation Note that assert messages are often difficult to analyze and may requireescalation to the next level of technical support.

Assert Handler Receives and handles asserts from boards on the TDM bus.Most asserts come from the radios or the communicationsprocessor interface (CPI) board. The assert handler doesnot initiate any recovery.

SIassert Receives and handles asserts from the application softwarerunning on the RCC. SIassert can initiate different levels of recovery depending upon the severity of the assert.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesHardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Hardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests

HEH Description The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the

Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem. HEH receiveserror reports from hardware boards, functional tests, and call-processing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore,remove) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.Depending upon the severity of the error, either HEH takes immediaterecovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefinednumber of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH sends onlyan error report to the ECP.

Board Level Reporting Specifically, the HEH plays a role in the following two different types

of board-level error reporting:(1) Solicited Error Reporting

Every 30 minutes, HEH queries each active DS1, DFI, clock and tone(CAT), and synchronized clock and tone (SCT) board for errors. (SCTboards are installed only at cell sites that support CDMA operation.)Each board responds with status messages containing a count of certaintiming or facility errors. There is an error threshold count for each typeof error; if the threshold is exceeded, HEH reports the error to the ECPand takes recovery action.

(2) Autonomous Error Reporting

Autonomous error reporting is the spontaneous reporting of errors toHEH by certain cell site hardware plug-in circuit boards, that is, HEHdoes not solicit the error reporting. The hardware boards report an erroras soon as it occurs. Some boards will also report when an error ceases(clears).

CDMA Hardware HEHReporting

The following CDMA hardware boards are capable of autonomouserror reporting:

• DS1 - digital signal 1

• DFI - digital facilities interface• CCC - CDMA cluster controller; also reports errors for associated

CDMA channel units (CCUs) [A CCC and its associated CCUsform a CDMA cluster.]



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesHardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• BIU - bus interface unit; also reports errors for its associatedbaseband combiner and radio (BCR) and analog conversion unit(ACU) [The associated BIU, BCR, and ACU form a CDMA radioset—the BBA, for BCR-BIU-ACU.]

• SCT - synchronized clock & tone; also reports errors for thereference frequency & timing generator (RFTG)

• CRTU - CDMA radio test unit (specifically, the CRTUi).

Error Types Reported All of the cell site plug-in circuit boards listed above will reportautonomously four types of errors to HEH, to allow appropriatediagnostics recovery to be scheduled. The error types are:

1. hardware errors,

2. program-control errors,

3. radio-channel errors, and

4. mobile station errors.

Hardware Errors Hardware errors include malfunctioning microprocessor errors,memory read/write errors, trap errors, or synthesizer lock errors. Theseerrors come from on-board self tests.

Program Control Errors Program control errors include stack pointer errors, divide by zeroerrors, or overflow and underflow errors.

Radio Channel Errors Radio-channel errors include frame errors and access-attempt successand failure errors. These errors are “bursty” in nature and will bereported to the ECP after a predefined threshold has been passed. Insome cases, the threshold is an engineering parameter, that is, it ishardcoded into the software. In other cases, the threshold is tunable viatranslations.

Mobile Station Errors Mobile station errors include improper or illogical message content inthe received message from a mobile transceiver or the absence of aresponse message. An error message will be returned to the RCC.

Related Documents: Output Messages 401-610-057 [See RPT CELL HEH]




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesHardware Alarm Scanning

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Hardware Alarm Scanning

Description Alarms are the first indication of cell-site trouble, indicating either: (1)

a software failure; (2) a hardware failure; or (3) a user-definedcondition. Alarms are classified according to the level of severity/ priority of required actions: Critical; Major; Power Failure; Minor;Spurt Minor; Manual.

Scanned alarms are faults that are gathered by dedicated monitoringcircuits at the cell site and then reported to the ECP. Unlike other faults,scanned alarms are gathered from cell site equipment having noassociated software diagnostic tests. There is no automatic recovery forscanned alarms.

AFI Boards The Alarm and Factory Installation and Test System (FITS) Interface(AFI) boards, which are part of the RCC in the primary frame, monitorboth user-defined and equipment-scanned alarms. User-defined alarmsare gathered from alarm sensors external to the cell site equipment,while equipment-scanned alarms are gathered from alarm sensorswithin the various hardware frames of the cell site. All of the alarms arereported to the ECP by the AFI circuit pack. In addition, some alarmsactivate an LED display on the appropriate circuit pack.

AFI Scanned Alarms In a PCS CDMA Minicell, the alarms scanned into the AFI can beclassified as follows:

1. Amplifier alarms (displayed as “LAC” alarms)

2. Frame alarms (fan and power converter alarms)

3. User alarms

4. Miscellaneous alarms (RFTGm side 0 or side 1).

Alarm Reporting The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from theMinicell’s frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to theAFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC).

The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipmentsector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports bothamplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information tothe AFI. The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests inapproximately a 2-second period of time.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesHardware Alarm Scanning


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit (CTU)and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports powerconverter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.

User Defined Alarms User-defined alarms include miscellaneous alarm conditions, such asfire, forced entry, high temperature, and alarms from ancillary co-located equipment. The alarm level (critical, major, or minor) andalarm text associated with each alarm are defined by the ECPtechnician using the Cell-Site User-Defined Alarms (UDA) optionalfeature.

The RCC reports an alarm condition only once to the ECP, at the timethe RCC initially detects the alarm. The RCC will also send an “allclear” message to the ECP when the alarm condition either clears itself or is cleared by cell site maintenance personnel.

Additional Information Additional detailed information on hardware alarm scanning may befound in the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems,System 1000, Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide401-610-160 Issue 8, January 1999 .

Related Documents: User-Defined Cell Site Alarms (UDA) Optional Feature 401-612-057

Input Messages 401-610-055 [See OP CELL EXTERN]

Output Messages 401-610-057 [See REPT CELL ALARM SCAN]





Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT

Utilizing OCFT and TPFT The first step in utilizing CRTU Overhead Channel Functional Tests

(OCFTs) and Traffic Path Functional Test (TPFTs) for troubleshootingerrors is to review the ROP file for functional test error messages. TheCRTUMON processing tool should be used to perform this function, tosupplement direct inspection of the ROP file. (See pages 32-87through 32-92 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular TelecommunicationsSystems, System 1000, Operations, Administration, and MaintenanceGuide 401-610-160 Issue 6, January 1998 , for a complete description of the CRTUMON ROP-file analysis tool and its use.) Note that theamount of data that will be available in the ROP for analysis dependsnot only on the number of errors that occur for each FT but also on the

interval value for conducting scheduled FTs that has been set in RC/Vtranslations. An example of a CRTUMON Output Summary Report isshown below:

CRTU Failure Report CRTU Failure Report Generated : Fri Jan 10 16:34:07 CST 1997

Report Span : 08:00 01/10/97 - 11:00 01/10/97

CRTU Overhead Channel Failure Report

CRTU Traffic Path Failure Report

As can be seen in the example output, the summary report wasgenerated on Friday, January 10, 1997, at 16:34:07. The failing cellsare ordered from lowest to highest cell number. The hardware units fora specific cell are ordered from the most number of failures to the leastnumber of failures.

Extract Information Aboutthe Carrier and BBA Fields

Note that the CRTUMON Output Summary Report actually containsmore information of great value for troubleshooting than what was

CellNum PhyAntFace Carrier BBA CCC CCU CE #Fail

184 1 1 7 7 2 0 1

184 1 1 7 7 3 0 1

CellNum PhyAntFace Carrier BBA CCC CCU CE #Fail

184 1 1 7 7 4 0 4

184 1 1 7 7 4 1 3




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT

contained in the original ROP-file output messages. In particular, thecarrier and BBA fields are not contained in the original HEH messagesinvolving OCFT and TPFT failures. CRTUMON extracts those fieldsfrom the ECP database whenever it is able to do so. To guarantee thatCRTUMON will be able to extract information about the carrier andBBA fields from the ECP database, it is necessary to ensure that thefollowing two conditions are met:

1. the dual serial channel computer interconnect (DCI) link to theECP must be active when CRTUMON generates the report; and,

2. the user (login) running the report must have permission to accessthe ECP database.

If both conditions are not satisfied, CRTUMON will populate theCarrier and BBA fields with question marks (?).

Examine the ROP File andthe CRTUMON Output Files

For Patterns

Both the ROP file itself and the CRTUMON output files should beexamined carefully to find patterns of failing Channel Elements (CEs),CDMA Channel Units (CCUs), CDMA Cluster Controllers (CCCs), orentire Test Paths (TPs). Instead of analyzing in detail which parts of which FTs resulted in particular types of failures, it is often useful tofocus instead on identifying consistent failures and patterns of failures.

Re-execute FunctionalTests

Whenever feasible, Functional Tests that resulted in failures should bere-executed manually to verify the errors. (Currently, intermittent FTerrors are normal, even when the operational performance of all system

components is within acceptable limits.)

Review SDPs The Status Display Pages (SDPs) should be reviewed to determine if any cell site hardware is Out of Service (OOS), or in alarm. On cellsthat show no alarms on the SDPs, but consistently fail FTs, call-throughtesting should be performed to identify points of failure.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesDemand-Mode Use of OCFT forTroubleshooting


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Demand-Mode Use of OCFT for Troubleshooting

Overview

OCFT Flow Manually initiated (demand-mode) OCFTs can be a very useful tool forisolating faults indicated by failures of overhead channels duringautomatically scheduled (or manually requested) OCFTs and/or TPFTs.A flow diagram for utilizing demand-mode OCFTs for fault isolation isshown below.

OCFT Process The following steps in fault isolation procedures are to be followedwith the aid of the flow diagram.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The sequence starts when an automatically scheduled (or manuallyrequested) OCFT or TPFT indicates a fault involving overhead channels.The system sends a message to the ROP. The message shows the sectoron which the fault was detected and the CE that was carrying the




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


overhead channel. [1]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The system will automatically attempt to restore the overhead channels

(OCs) by migrating the failed overhead channels. The system places theCCU (either a TCU or ECU) that carried the overhead channels out of service (OOS). After migration of the overhead channels, the systemautomatically runs the OCFT to determine whether the new overheadchannels are operating properly. [2]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the post-migration OCFT is successful, the sector in question will nowbe operating properly. As a technician, you should confirm that themigration was successful by looking at SDP 2139 and verifying thatthere are active CEs assigned to the P/S/A and paging channels on thePAF in question. You should further verify proper functioning of theoverhead channels by executing the OCFT in the demand mode. Finally,you should monitor the next hour’s CDMA Service Measurements onthat sector. [3,4]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the migration of the overhead channels has been successful, youshould identify any failed maintenance unit (e.g., a failed CCU board)that may have been responsible for the original FT failure involvingoverhead channels. Identification of the faulty unit usually can beaccomplished by carefully examining the outputs of a variety of troubleshooting tools: ROP files; CRTUMON Output SummaryReports; SDP 2139; etc. [5]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 Once identified, you can attempt to conditionally restore the faulty unitto see if it can be placed back into service. If the conditional restoresucceeds, scheduling of field maintenance on the unit can be deferred; if the conditional restore does not succeed, field maintenance on the unitneeds to be scheduled more quickly. [6,7,8]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 If the migration of the overhead channels has not been successful, trymanual recovery, provided other CCUs that could carry the overheadchannels are available. [You can determine whether another CCU isavailable for overhead channel migration by inspecting SDP 2139.] If other CCUs are not available, schedule immediate field maintenance to





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

provide the needed CCUs. If other CCUs are available, attempt a manualmigration of the overhead channels to one of them. If this manualrecovery action does not succeed, proceed to the next step. [9,10,11]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 If the reason why the attempt to migrate the overhead channels failedwas not due to a lack of available CCUs, look at SDP 2139 to see if anyamplifier failures may have occurred. Look for LAC failures if the cellsite is a Series II cell or for CTU failures if the cell site is a PCS orcellular Minicell. If any amplifier failure is found, take recovery actionto correct the non-CDMA problem. [12,13]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Inspect SDP 2138 to determine the row (sector and shelf) thatcorresponds to the failed channels. This page will indicate whether thesector BBA is working (active) or OOS. If the BBA is OOS, issue thecommand OP:CELL:BBA to find the status of the BBA and toconditionally restore it to the active state. If this action fails to restorethe BBA, attempt to place the redundant BBA, if present, into service.

Important! Note that redundant BBAs are never present inMinicells.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 If neither BBA can be placed into service, schedule field maintenance of

the BBA. If the BBA is successfully restored to service, run the OCFTin demand mode to see whether the overhead channels have beenrestored. [14,15]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 If the overhead channels are still OOS, examine SDP 2138 to check theCCC of the overhead channels. If the CCC is OOS, try to place the CCCin service with a conditional restore command. When the conditionalrestore command is applied to the CCC, the overhead channels willautomatically migrate to different CEs on another CCC. Run the OCFT

in the demand mode again to see if the overhead channels have beenrestored. If the overhead channels now have been restored, schedule thefailed CCC for field maintenance. [16,17]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 If the OCFT still finds a fault on the sector, restore the CEs that arecarrying the overhead channels. [Use SDP 2139 to identify the CEs of




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


the overhead channels (P/S/A and Paging). Conditionally restore theCCU on which these CEs are located.] If the overhead channels cannotbe restored, schedule field mantenance to restore the overhead channels.[18]



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesDemand-Mode Use of TPFT forTroubleshooting


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Demand-Mode Use of TPFT for Troubleshooting

Overview

TPFT Flow Diagram Manually initiated (demand-mode) TPFTs can be a very useful tool forisolating faults indicated by failures of traffic paths duringautomatically scheduled (or manually requested) TPFTs. A flowdiagram for utilizing demand-mode TPFTs for fault isolation is shownbelow.

TPFT Flow The following steps in fault isolation procedures are to be followedwith the aid of the flow diagram.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 The sequence starts when an automatically scheduled (or manuallyrequested) TPFT indicates a fault involving traffic paths. [1]

T P F T

FAULTS TA RT

R O P

M E S S A G E

I D E N T I F Y

FAULT?

R U N T P F T

A G A I N

D U P L I C AT E

FAULT?

CONTINUES Y S T E M

OPERATION

S C H E D U L E

F I E L D

MAINTENANCE

S C H E D U L E

F I E L D

M A I N T E N A N C E

I D E N T I F Y

M O S T L I K E LY

U N I T

R E V I E W

A L L R O P

MESSAGES

R U N T P F T

O N A L L

S E C T O R S

Y E S

Y E S

N O

N O

1

2

3

5

6

7

11

1 0

9

8

4




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesDemand-Mode Use of TPFT forTroubleshooting

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 The system then sends a message to the ROP. The message shows theCCC, CCU (either a TCU or ECU), and CE on which the fault wasfound. There is no automatic recovery triggered by the TPFT. Any fault

detected by the CRTU might also result in faults detected on calls placedby customers’ mobiles, which also would be reported to HEH. If thereports of the fault meet certain HEH criteria, HEH might take recoveryaction. [2]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 As the technician, you should examine the ROP to determine if the faulthas generated messages that have not yet triggered recovery by HEH. If there are such messages, examine them for any pattern present toidentify which maintenance unit might be faulty. If the location of the

fault can be determined, schedule field maintenance of the faulty unit.[3,4]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 If a faulty unit cannot be identified, run TPFT again in the demand modeto see if the fault can be reproduced. If the fault is not reproduced, thefault is most likely a transient fault; take no action at the present time.[5,6,7]

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 If the fault can be reproduced, run the TPFT again in the demand modefrom all sectors in an attempt to gain additional information about thelocation of the fault. In addition, review the ROP file again to determinethe best estimate of the maintenance unit that should be replaced. [SeeExamples of Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-38 forexamples of TPFT pass/fail patterns caused by different types of boardfailures.] Schedule field maintenance to replace the unit. [8,9,10,11]



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with PLFT


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting with PLFT

PLFT Display The Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) failures (resulting from out-of-

tolerance Pilot levels) generate both ROP output and alarms on theStatus Display Pages (SDPs). [For a PLFT to pass, the absolute value of the expected pilot level measurement value minus the actualmeasurement value must be less than or equal to the pilot leveltolerance value (a translations parameter). Otherwise, the pilot leveltest fails.]

PLFT ROP Messages The ROP messages indicate both the actual measured pilot level valueand the expected pilot level value (calculated by the software, based onamplifier type, pilot dgu, and the BCR attenuation values in

translations). As with OCFTs and TPFTs, a manually initiated PLFTwill always generate ROP output, whereas automatically initiated(scheduled) PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs. The frequency of scheduled PLFTs is set in translations.

PLFT ROP Sample The following excerpt from a ROP file shows the ROP messageresulting from a failed PLFT performed on a 2-carrier sector. The PLFTROP output report contains the actual (ACTL) and expected (EXP)pilot level measurement values in dBm for each pilot channel on eachsector tested ( PL 0 = omni, PL 1 = sector 1, PL 2 = sector 2, ...). [For amultiple-sector cell, PLFT first tests all pilot channels (carriers) onsector 1 (alpha), then tests all pilot channels on sector 2 (beta), and soon until PLFT has tested all pilot channels on all sectors of the cell.] Forany pilot channel having an out-of-tolerance ACTL measurementvalue, the report includes an error reason of OUT OF RANGE.

Output Sample

EXC:CELL 132 FT PL, COMPLETEDPL 1 COMPLETED SOME TESTS FAILEDPL 1 CARRIER 1 COMPLETED OUT OF RANGEPILOT LEVEL: ACTL = 37.98 dBm EXP = 36.99 dBmPL 1 CARRIER 2 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDPILOT LEVEL: ACTL = 36.98 dBm EXP = 36.99 dBm

The SDP alarms caused by failure of a PLFT include:

1. a major alarm (red) of the cell status on the 2121 SDP;

2. CDMA equipment in trouble (red) on the 2131 SDP; and

3. the affected CCC and PAF as degraded (yellow) on the 2138 SDP.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Clearing of the SDP alarms caused by a PLFT failure requires either:

1. subsequent execution of another PLFT with All Tests Passed(ATP) results, or

2. a stable clear of the cell.

Translations AffectingPLFT

The following translations affect the PLFT:

PLFT Calibration Criteria To ensure that PLFT test will perform correctly, it is necessary tocalibrate (or re-calibrate) PLFT-related parameters in translationswhenever any of the following conditions occurs:

1. installation of a new cell;

2. initial loading of a cell generic;

3. changing of any components in the RF test path (CRTUm, RSP,cabling, filters);

4. changing of any parameters in translations that impact PLFT(amplifier type, pilot dgu, or BCR attenuation).

Important! Note that the PLFT calibration does not replace powercalibration. If the status of a cell’s power calibration is in question,it should be verified before proceeding with PLFT calibration.

PLFT Calibration ProcessSummary

A summary of the PLFT calibration process follows. (See the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 8, January 1999 , pages 32-33 through 32-36 for a more extensivedescription of the calibration process.)

1. Inhibit the PLFT. ( Issue the command INH:CELL #, FT PL).2. Initialize the CDMA Pilot Level Calibration value to 0 (ceqface

form).

3. Execute the PLFT five times.

4. Average the actual results reported on the ROP.

PLFT Field Screen Alternate Screen

CDMA Pilot Level Calibration ceqface form

CDMA Pilot Level Interval ecp form ceqcom2 form, screen 2

CDMA Pilot Level Tolerance Value ecp form ceqcom2 form, screen 2





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5. Calculate the difference between the average and the expectedresults.

6. Enter the difference into the Pilot Level Calibration field.

7. Execute the PLFT again.

8. Verify that the actual result is within 1dB of the expected results.If not, repeat the calibration process.

9. Perform the calibration for each equipped sector of the cell.

10. Allow PLFT. ( Issue the command ALW:CELL #, FT PL).




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Examples of Troubleshooting withOCFT and TPFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose This section provides examples of troubleshooting using the OverheadChannel Functional Test (OCFT) and the Traffic Path Functional Test(TPFT)).



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 1: Failed CTU in PCS CDMA Minicell


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example 1: Failed CTU in PCS CDMA Minicell

OverviewMore Information The following example of the use of CRTU OCFTs and TPFTs for

troubleshooting a PCS CDMA Minicell is taken from a Fax Flashdocument: AUTOPLEX CTSO Fax Flash 97-236, “Detecting FailedCTUs in PCS CDMA Minicells using the CRTU”, dated 12/4/97. ThisFax Flash contains more detailed information than what is includedhere as well as additional examples. It should be consulted byinterested readers.

Identify a Failed CTU The example illustrates how to identify a CDMA Transmitter Unit(CTU) which has failed without generating an alarm. (The particulartype of failure involved in this example - a blown regulator on the

Transmitter Up-converter Board, Tx-up - does not generate an alarm.)One way of detecting this type of failure (loss of RF output) is bymonitoring service measurements, and noting a drop in the typical callprocessing rates for a particular cell. Once at a suspect cell, the TX-coupled port in the Minicell could be used to determine if there isadequate output power from any given sector if a problem is suspected.

Detecting a Failed CTU Cells equipped with a CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) can use it todetect a failed CTU, remotely from the MSC. The CRTU cannotcurrently isolate a specific component as a failure, but it can detect aproblem in the overall traffic path (MSC to the Output port of theMinicell). Following are excerpts from the Read Only Printer (ROP)showing the series of messages received from a cell with a failed CTUin the Alpha sector. Once understood, one can determine, even from alocation remote from the cell site (such as the location of the ECP),that the CTU is a likely suspect for failure despite the lack of an alarm.

ROP Output for a Cell witha Failed CTU in the Alpha

Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Overhead Channel Functional Tests Started

01 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, STARTED09/19/97 14:01:24 #456727




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


M 01 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, COMPLETEDOC 0 SKIPPED UNIT OUT OF SERVICE

09/19/97 14:01:24 #456728

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Alpha Sector reports no Overhead from CCC2 (Alpha), CCU 1

03 REPT:CELL 131 HEH, CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1PID: OS = FTSUPV, N/A, 0FT OC 1 FAILURE: NO_OVERHEAD

09/19/97 14:03:44 #456857

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 Alpha sector can not complete because no Overhead is detected.[Continues with Beta sector testing.]

M 03 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, COMPLETEDOC 1 PARTIALLY COMPLETED LOST PILOTOC 1 CARRIER 1 NOT STARTEDOC 1 CARRIER 2 NOT STARTED

09/19/97 14:03:45 #456859

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Beta Sector Overhead Detected, and all tests Completed

M 04 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, COMPLETEDOC 2 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED

OC 2 CARRIER 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDOC 2 CARRIER 2 SKIPPED09/19/97 14:04:08 #456864

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 CCC 2 (Alpha) migrates Overhead Channels from CCU 1 to CCU 2 socell can run Diagnostics on CCU 1

* 04 OP:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 2 ACTIVECE 0, PSA, PAF 1CE 1, PAGE, PAF 1

09/19/97 14:04:12 #456865





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

6 CRTU tries again to detect Overhead on CCC 2 (Alpha), CCU 2, but noOverhead Channels are detected.


09/19/97 14:06:29 #456913

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7 Gamma Sector Overhead Detected, and all tests Completed

M 06 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, COMPLETEDOC 3 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDOC 3 CARRIER 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDOC 3 CARRIER 2 SKIPPED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8 Alpha sector CCU 1 is returned to service, since no problems are foundwith the board.

07 RST:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 1, ATP09/19/97 14:07:08 #456937

M 11 OP:CELL 131 COMPLETED09/19/97 14:11:25 #457039

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9 Since CRTU did not detect Overhead Channels on Two consecutiveCCUs it assumes (erroneously) it is the failing unit and reports thatFunctional Test for Overhead channels failed for the Alpha sector.

12 REPT:CELL 131 HEH, CRTUPID: OS = FTSUPV, N/A, 0FT OC 1 FAILURE: NO_OVERHEAD

...........................................................................................................................................................................

10 CRTU is removed from service and a RED Alarm appears on the 2131Page of the MCRT, and the overall cell status changes from Green toRed on the 2121 page.

* 12 OP:CELL 131 CRTU, OOS, FRCELL, TBLANL




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


...........................................................................................................................................................................

11 Cell was restored and the Functional Test for the Traffic Path wasstarted.

M 20 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, STARTED09/19/97 14:20:47 #457266

M 20 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETEDTP 0 SKIPPED UNIT OUT OF SERVICE

09/19/97 14:20:47 #457267

...........................................................................................................................................................................

12 Alpha Sector detected no pilot, and again moves the Overhead Channelsto the next CCU (CCU 2)

M 23 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETEDTP 1 PARTIALLY COMPLETED LOST PILOT

09/19/97 14:23:08 #457334

...........................................................................................................................................................................

13 CCU 2 is active with Overhead Channels

* 23 OP:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 2 ACTIVECE 0, PSA, PAF 1CE 1, PAGE, PAF 1

09/19/97 14:23:34 #457339

...........................................................................................................................................................................

14 Beta Sector completed FT TP

M 23 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETEDTP 2 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 4, CCU 2, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 4, CCU 2, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 4, CCU 3, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 4, CCU 3, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 4, CCU 4, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 4, CCU 4, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED

09/19/97 14:23:56 #457345





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................

15 Again, no Overhead is detected on the Alpha sector CCU 2.


09/19/97 14:26:16 #457415

...........................................................................................................................................................................

16 Alpha sector CCU 1 is returned to service, since all tests pass.

26 RST:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 1, ATP09/19/97 14:26:32 #457418

...........................................................................................................................................................................

17 Gamma Sector FT TP is completed successfully

M 27 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETEDTP 3 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 6, CCU 2, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 6, CCU 2, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 6, CCU 3, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 6, CCU 3, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 6, CCU 4, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSEDCCC 6, CCU 4, CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

18 CRTU is removed from service and is flagged as a failure causing a Redalarm on the MCRT 2131 status page, as well as a overall cell status of Red on the 2121 page.

30 OP:CELL 131 CRTU, OOS, FRCELL, TBLANL

...........................................................................................................................................................................

19 Since the CRTU is flagged as a failure, it is removed from service andthe cell indicates trouble, i.e., Red on the 2121, and Red CRTU on the2131 pages respectively. The next step is to run diagnostics on theCRTU which will complete with all tests passing, since the real failureis in the CTU.

Analysis If this scenario is completed, it would indicate that since the CCUs allpassed diagnostics, and the CRTU passed diagnostics, the problemwould have to be somewhere after the CCUs, (i.e., something in the RFpath, either the BCR, CTU, or some RF portion of the RF test network).At this point, other data, such as service measurements, or looking at




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


the power at the coupled port, could be used to further troubleshoot theproblem, and a technician could be dispatched to the cell for additionaltesting.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 2: Failed ECU Board


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example 2: Failed ECU Board

Overview In this example, we consider a case in which a single Enhanced

Channel Unit (ECU) board fails, but all other hardware remains fullyoperational. In this case, only a few functional tests would fail(namely, those that directly involve the failed ECU board). The FTfailures would be reported to the ECP and would appear as FT failureoutput messages on the ROP file. Note that ROP messages refer toeither a TCU or an ECU as being a CCU (CDMA Channel Unit). [TheTCU and ECU are in fact 2-channel and 10-channel versions,respectively, of a CCU.]

Error Process

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Initially, if the bad ECU was supporting any overhead channels, anOCFT involving the bad ECU would fail, resulting in a ROP messagelike the following example:

REPT:CELL 150 HEH, CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1PID: OS = FTSUPV, N/A, 0FT OC 1 CARRIER 1 FAILURE: NO_OVERHEAD

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Once an overhead channel error occurs, however, HEH automaticallymigrates the overhead channels, Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A) and Page,for the carrier under test to idle traffic Channel Elements (CEs) onanother CCU. Subsequently, there will be no additional OCFT failuresinvolving the bad ECU (CCU # 4 in the current example). Nevertheless,the bad ECU will continue to cause TPFT failures, as illustrated in thefollowing ROP message.

REPT:CELL 150 HEH, CRTU - PART 1 OF 1PID:OS = FTSUPV, N/AFT TRAFFIC PATH 1 RESULTS: COMPLETEDCCC CCU CE REASON RESULT

2 2 2 PASS2 2 4 PASS2 2 5 PASS2 3 1 PASS2 3 2 PASS2 3 4 PASS




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 2: Failed ECU Board

2 4 1 TRFFICFL FAILED2 4 3 TRFFICFL FAILED2 4 4 TRFFICFL FAILED

Analysis Note that all of the idle CEs in the bad ECU (CCC # 4) result in TPFTfailures, while in this example, none of the CEs in other ECUs result infailures.

The pattern is clear: When an ECU board is bad, all of the CEs thatcomprise the bad ECU will fail in TPFTs. Whenever this pattern of TPFT failures occurs in ROP messages, a bad ECU board may quicklybe identified and replaced.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 3: Failed CCC Board


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example 3: Failed CCC Board

OverviewProblem

Description

In this example, we consider a case in which a single CDMA Cluster

Controller (CCC) board fails, but all other hardware remains fullyoperational.

Error Process

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 It is quite likely that, initially, an OCFT involving the bad CCC wouldfail, resulting in a ROP message like the following example:

REPT:CELL 150 HEH, CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1PID: OS = FTSUPV, N/A, 0FT OC 1 CARRIER 1 FAILURE: NO_OVERHEAD

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2 Once an overhead channel error occurs, however, HEH automaticallymigrates the overhead channels, Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A) and Page,for the carrier under test to idle traffic Channel Elements (CEs) onanother CCU. If the overhead channels are migrated to another CCUcontrolled by the bad CCC, the next OCFT again will quite likely failand the overhead channels will again be migrated. Ultimately they willbe migrated to another CCU behind a CCC that is not bad. Subsequently,

there will be no additional OCFT failures involving the bad CCC (CCC# 2 in the current example). Nevertheless, whether or not the bad CCCinitially causes OCFT failures to occur, the bad CCC will cause TPFTfailures, as illustrated in the following ROP message:


2 2 2 TRFFICFL FAILED2 2 4 TRFFICFL FAILED

2 2 5 TRFFICFL FAILED2 3 1 TRFFICFL FAILED2 3 2 TRFFICFL FAILED2 3 4 TRFFICFL FAILED2 4 1 TRFFICFL FAILED




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


2 4 3 TRFFICFL FAILED2 4 4 TRFFICFL FAILED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3 The pattern of failures in the above ROP message differs clearly andmarkedly from that shown in the previous example. In this case, all of the CEs belonging to all of the CCUs that are controlled by the bad CCCcause TPFT failures. A ROP message that looks like the above exampleprovides strong evidence that the most likely cause of failure is a badCCC board, CCC # 2 in this example.

Important! Note, however, that the above ROP message does notindicate with 100% certainty that the faulty hardware is the CCC#2 board. It is (remotely) possible that CCC # 2 is actually O.K.,

and that the reasons for all of the TPFT failures listed in the ROPmessage are due to a coincidental simultaneous failure of the threedifferent CCU boards: CCU # 2, CCU # 3, and CCU # 4.Simultaneous failures of so many boards is a very unlikelyoccurrence. It is much more reasonable to assume in this case thatthe failures are due to the CCC # 2 board being bad. Thelikelihood of this assumption being correct increases if severalsuccessive ROP messages or a CRTUMON Summary OutputReport for some extended time period show the same failurepatterns involving TPFT failures of CCC # 2.

...........................................................................................................................................................................

4 Suppose, however, that we now consider a variant of the presentexample: namely, a case in which the bad CCC board controls only asingle CCU. In this case the ROP-file output message would somethinglike this:


2 1 2 TRFFICFL FAILED2 1 4 TRFFICFL FAILED2 1 5 TRFFICFL FAILED

...........................................................................................................................................................................

5 It is now impossible to ascertain which component board is faulty. Fromthe information available in the ROP message, one can deduce only that





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

it is equally likely that either the CCC # 2 board is bad or the CCU # 1board is bad. (In addition, there is a small likelihood that both boardscould be bad.) Additional ROP messages and CRTUMON SummaryOutput Reports for extended time periods will only serve to increase ourcertainty that one (or both) of these two different boards may be bad;they will not help to resolve the ambiguity regarding which board is infact bad.

Analysis Based on the reasoning presented in the previous paragraph, thefollowing general statement can be made:

“Greater ambiguity exists in the fault-isolation process for systemsinvolving smaller configurations with fewer hardware componentboards.”




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 4: Failed ACU Board

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example 4: Failed ACU Board

Problem Description In this example, we consider a case in which a single Analog

Conversion Unit (ACU) board fails, but all other hardware remainsfully operational. For this example, it is helpful to refer to the figurebelow, showing a schematic diagram of a portion of the primary frameof a PCS CDMA Minicell with three fully interconnected shelves thatform a subcell supporting a 3-sector configuration. Any CE locatedanywhere within the 3 shelves comprising the subcell is available toany of the 3 sectors supported by the subcell. This CDMA subcellconfiguration is required for softer handoff, which occurs duringhandoff of a call between two different sectors of a subcell .

Important! A mobile involved in softer handoff communicatessimultaneously with a traffic CE through 2 paths and 2 sectors.The traffic CE combines the signals received from the 2 sectorsand uses the result to demodulate the signal.

PCS CDMA Minicell with 3Interconnected Shelves

Subcell of a PCS CDMA Minicell with 3 interconnected shelves.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 4: Failed ACU Board


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ACU Board Failure WillCause FT Failures

From the figure we can observe that each shelf contains a single CCCboard, which is connected (through its CCU boards) to a single ACUboard, also on the same shelf. It follows that failure of an ACU boardwill cause FT failures to occur for the CCC board (and its associatedCCU boards) that are directly linked to the bad ACU on the same shelf.Because of this one-to-one relationship between the ACU and the CCCon the same shelf, the FT failure patterns observable are essentially thesame as what was discussed in the previous example.

Overhead ChannelMigration

As in the previous example, initial failure of an OCFT would ultimatelycause the overhead channels to be migrated away from the failed ACU.Suppose, for example, that the bad ACU is ACU # 2 on Shelf # 1 (theshelf with the BCR supporting the alpha sector). Then after the initialOCFT failure caused by ACU # 2, the overhead channels for the alphasector would ultimately be migrated either to ACU # 4 on Shelf # 2(the shelf supporting the beta sector) or to ACU # 6 on Shelf # 3 (theshelf supporting the gamma sector). In either case, as soon as the alpha-sector overhead channel migration has been completed, subsequentOCFTs for sector alpha would pass.

TPFT Failures The bad ACU will continue to cause TPFT failures to occur, however.Because of the direct one-to-one linkage between ACU # 2 and CCC #2, essentially the same TPFT failure patterns as those described in theprevious example would be observed. As a result, there would exist anambiguity in the fault isolation process: it would not be possible to

determine with certainty whether the observed FT failures are due tothe ACU board or to the CCC board directly linked to it on the sameshelf.

Important! Note, however, that if the suspect CCC board is in factbad, then depending upon the nature of the CCC failure, thededicated CDMA packet pipe that terminates on the CCC mayexperience trouble. The status of the Packet Pipe Trunk GroupNumber (PP TG No.) that matches the suspect CCC should bechecked on Status Display Page (SDP) 2139. If the packet pipestatus is either blocked or out of service, it is more likely that theTPFT failures are being caused by the CCC board; if the status of the packet pipe shows no sign of trouble, it is more likely that theTPFT failures are being caused by the ACU board.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 5: Failed BCR Board

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example 5: Failed BCR Board

Problem Description In this example, we consider a case in which a single Baseband

Combiner Radio (BCR) board fails, but all other hardware remainsfully operational. For definiteness, we refer to the figure PCS CDMAMinicell with 3 Interconnected Shelves: page 10-50 introduced in theprevious example and assume that the bad BCR board is BCR # 2 onShelf # 1.

Analysis It is clear from the figure PCS CDMA Minicell with 3 InterconnectedShelves: page 10-50 that all calls in the alpha sector must utilize BCR #2. Consequently, when BCR # 2 fails, the alpha sector goes dead andcan no longer support calls. Both OCFTs and TPFTs will show a pattern

of failure of all calls associated with the alpha sector when BCR # 2fails.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 6: Failed BIU Board


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Example 6: Failed BIU Board

Problem Description In this example, we consider a case in which a single Bus Interface Unit

(BIU) board fails, but all other hardware remains fully operational. Fordefiniteness, we refer to the figure PCS CDMA Minicell with 3Interconnected Shelves: page 10-50 utilized in the previous twoexamples and assume that the bad BIU board is BIU # 2 on Shelf # 1.

BIU Description The BIU is the interface between the Time Division Multiplexed(TDM) bus and the BCR and ACU components of the BBA (BCR-BIU-ACU) trio comprising the CDMA radio set. As such, it provides acontrol bus interface to the CCC, CCUs, ACU, and BCR. In addition, itprovides power conversion and alarm control functions.

Analysis It can be seen from figure PCS CDMA Minicell with 3 InterconnectedShelves: page 10-50 that BCR # 2 is directly connected to and issupported by BIU # 2. As a result, if BIU # 2 fails, BCR # 2 can nolonger operate properly and effectively fails. Hence, as in the previousexample, the alpha sector goes dead and can no longer support calls.Both OCFTs and TPFTs will show a pattern of failure of all callsassociated with the alpha sector.

Important! Note, however, that there is an ambiguity in faultisolation. From the observed pattern of failures of all callsassociated with the alpha sector, it is not possible to determinewith certainty whether the problem is caused by a bad BIU boardor by a bad associated BCR board.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesExample 6: Failed BIU Board

Use of Cell Site HousekeepingSoftware for Troubleshooting

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Overview

Purpose The cell site has excellent housekeeping software: faults such astransmitter failure, power and entry alarms, and speech path conditionsare constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the ECP. Inmost cases, fault detection, diagnosis, and recovery are automatic. Thecell site detects faults by various means including functional tests ,diagnostic tests, software audits, software asserts, hardware integritychecks, board self-tests, and hardware alarm scanning.

CDMA Functional Testing This section provides troubleshooting tips for manually clearing errorsdisclosed by CDMA functional testing at the CDMA Series II Cell Site,Cellular CDMA Minicell, or PCS CDMA Minicell. Also described inthis section are some of the typical CDMA functional test errorsexperienced during in-house testing or reported by field serviceengineers. Likely causes of the errors and error remedies are alsodescribed in this section. Additional information regarding CDMAfunctional tests is included also in Functional Tests, andTroubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27 of this document.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with Functional Tests


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting with Functional Tests

Functional Test Failures CDMA functional tests make use of many hardware units at the cell

and involve communication between many software subsystems at thecell and at the switch. Any failure in hardware or software during aCDMA functional test is reported as an error to the FT softwaresubsystem, which reports the error to the RMS and HEH softwaresubsystems. Typical reasons why CDMA functional tests fail include:

• Missing RC/V parameters

• Programming errors in the CRTUm

• Hardware failures in CRTUi, CRTUm, or RSP

• Hardware failures in test call path such as defective BBA, CCC, or

CCU.

MOST Call Setup Failure Failure to set up properly the initial MOST call is one of the mostcommon failures observed at a cell site having a newly installed CRTU.If FT aborts the functional test due to a failed origination, RMS willreport a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and HEHwill report a NOCALLORIG error for an automatic request. If FTaborts the functional test due to a lost call information message, RMSwill report a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, andHEH will report a NOCALLINF error for an automatic request.

Important! Note that it is normal for some CDMA functional testerrors to occur intermittently without valid cause. Currently, aboutone such error may be expected to occur every couple of days,depending upon functional test interval values, cell equipage, andso on.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesRC/V Problems

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RC/V Problems

Missing CDMA MOST

Directory Number

The CRTU dials the CDMA MOST directory number to start a CDMA

functional test. If FT aborts the functional test due to a missing CDMAMOST directory number, RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILEDerror for a manual request, and HEH will report a NOCALLORIG errorfor an automatic request.

Error remedy

Use the CDMA Functional Test MOST DN field on screen 16 of theRC/V sub form to find/enter the CDMA MOST directory number. Goto screen 1 of the RC/V sub form and enter the CDMA MOSTdirectory number and other mobile-related data. Set the MobileDirectory Number Type field to o (oh) and the Mobile Serial Numberfield to h0000000f.

Missing CRTU DirectoryNumber

This number is the ten-digit CRTU mobile phone number. If FT abortsthe functional test due to a missing CRTU directory number, RMS willreport a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and HEHwill report a NOCALLINF error for an automatic request.

Error remedy

Go to screen 1 of the RC/V sub form and enter the CRTU directorynumber and other mobile-related data. Set the Mobile DirectoryNumber Type field to y.

Incorrect Mobile CountryCode

If the mobile country code parameter for the CRTU is not correct, FTwill abort thefunctional test. RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILEDerror for a manual request, and HEH will report a NOCALLORIG errorfor an automatic request.

Error remedy

Use the Mobile Country Code field on screen 5 of the RC/V cgsa formto enter the correct mobile country code (310 in USA).



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesCRTU Problems


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................CRTU Problems

Incorrect Mobile Setup If the CRTU mobile-related parameters are not set up properly, FT will

abort the functional test. RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILEDerror for a manual request, and HEH will report a NOCALLORIG errorfor an automatic request.

Error remedy

Visit the cell site and use the Programming Setup Tool (PST) to check/ change the following CRTU mobile-related parameters at the CRTUm:

• Ten-digit CRTU mobile phone number—Specified by serviceprovider

• Home system identification (SID) number—Specified by service

provider• Mobile country code (MCC)—Set to 310 in USA

• Mobile network code (MNC)—Specified by service provider

• Mobile station identification number (MSIN)—Set to the CRTUmobile phone number.

• CDMA channel number assignments—Set to the carrier 1 valuespecified in the RC/V cgsa or cell2 form.

Programming CRTU Carrier Note that as of CDMA Release 6.0, the CRTUm must be programmedwith the carrier 1 value specified in the RC/V cgsa or cell2 form in allfour CDMA channel number locations. This restriction ensures that theCRTUm will not attempt to acquire the system on any other carrier butcarrier 1 during CDMA functional testing, even if carrier 1 is faulty forthe sector under test.

CRTUm Attenuator Values The CRTUm also has in-line attenuators in its transmit and receivepaths to adjust the RF test signals to their proper levels. You shouldcheck these CRTUm in-line attenuators (located in the Series II CellSite at the RCB RF switch assembly) to ensure that they have thefollowing values:

• Series II Cell Site: CRTUm Tx port attenuator = 26 dB; CRTUmRx port attenuator = 40 dB

• Cellular CDMA Minicell: CRTUm Tx port attenuator = 26 dB ;CRTUm Rx port attenuator = 40 dB




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesCRTU Problems

• PCS CDMA Minicell: CRTUm Tx port attenuator = 0 dB;CRTUm Rx port attenuator = 20 dB (with multi-carrier kit) or 15dB (without multi-carrier kit)

Communication WithMobile Failure

If the CRTUi fails to communicate properly with the CRTUm, FT willaborts the functional test. RMS will report a COMM. WITH TESTMOBILE FAILED error for a manual request, and HEH will report aRTU2MOBL error for an automatic request.

Error remedy

Visit the cell site and check that the CRTUm has operating power (+24Vdc); check the cables between the CRTUi and the CRTUm; replacethe CRTUm, if necessary.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesRSP Problems


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RSP Problems

RSP Configuration Request If the Radio Switch Panel (RSP) fails to respond to an RSP

configuration request from the CRTUi, FT will abort the functional test.RMS will report an RSP FAILED TO GET REQUESTED SECTORerror for a manual request, and HEH will report an RSP2SECTORerror for an automatic request.

Error remedy

Visit the cell site and check that the RSP has operating power (+24Vdc); check the cables between the CRTUi and the RSP; replace theRSP, if necessary.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesProblems Due to No Traffic CE Available

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Problems Due to No Traffic CE Available

Problems Allocating a

Traffic CE

Problems can occur if RCC call processing cannot allocate a traffic CE

to either:• set up the initial MOST call, or

• receive the handed-off call.

There are several reasons why RCC call processing might not be ableto allocate a traffic CE, including:

• BBA for the sector under test is out-of-service

• LAC for the sector under test is in an alarm state

• Packet pipes for the sector under test are out-of-service or blocked(blocked from the cell, blocked from the DCS)

• CCCs for the sector under test are out-of-service.

Interconnected 3-ShellSubshelf

In the case of a fully interconnected 3-shelf subcell, as is shown PCSCDMA Minicell with 3 Interconnected Shelves: page 10-50, the thirdand fourth items in the above list require additional clarification. In thiscase, in order for absolutely NO traffic CE to be available to start theCRTU TPFT, ALL packet pipes and/or ALL CCCs in the entire logicalsubcell must be out of service. If there is ANY healthy CCC with ahealthy packet pipe, then the TPFT would be able to get started. If nosuch healthy CCC with a healthy packet pipe exists anywhere withinthe 3-shelf logical subcell, then not only is the CRTU TPFT blocked,but no subscribers can place calls either.

Important! This problem, because of its severity, should havebeen seen earlier by alert technicians. However, it would be ahighly unlikely event that ALL CCCs in the subcell are OOS,unless there are only 1 or 2 of them.

Error remedy: Consult the cell site status display pages to check hardware status at thecell; if necessary, visit the cell site and manually identify, isolate, and

clear the error.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesList of CDMA Functional Test Faults & LikelyCauses


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................List of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causes

Description The list of CDMA Functional test faults & likely causes, which is

adapted from Table 32-3 on pages 32-106 through 32-109 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 6, January 1998 , tabulates the Error Codes of the possible reasonswhy CDMA functional tests can fail. Each Error Code is followed by abrief description of what the failing Error Code means, and this, in turn,is followed by one or more high-level causes that are most probablyresponsible for causing the CDMA functional test error. These probablecauses are based on the failing reason reported by HEH.

Error Code Format Each of the entries in the list has the following general format:ERROR CODE [Description of Error] => Probable Cause or Causes

List of CDMA FunctionalTest Faults & Likely Causes • ACCESSCHAN [CRTUm is unable to acquire access channel] =>

RF transmission (Tx) path; CRTUm

• BADMOBILSTAT [CRTUm is in invalid state] => CRTUm;CRTUi

• CELLSYSTEMERR [Unexpected condition] =>See assertmanual

• CP_ACTIV_FAIL [Unable to complete handoff due to channelactivation failure] =>RF Tx path

• CP_CALL_KILLED [Unable to complete handoff due to call iskilled] => RF Tx path

• CP_CCC_NAVAIL [Unable to start handoff due to CCC notavailable] => CCC unavailable (e.g., CCC blocked or OOS)

• CP_CCC_NRSP [Unable to complete handoff due to no responsefrom CCC] => RCC did not get acknowledgment for handoff fromCCC; RF Tx path

• CP_CCC_SDCALL [Unable to complete handoff due to CCCshutting down the call] => RF Tx path

• CP_CCP_FAIL [Unable to complete handoff due to CCP failureon CCC] => RF Tx path




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


• CP_CE_NAVAIL [Unable to start handoff due to traffic CE notavailable] => Traffic CE blocked (e.g., packet pipe, DCS); RF Txpath; DCS

• CP_FRCD_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CP_FRM_OFBLCKD [Unable to start handoff due to frame offsetblocked] => Traffic CE on requested frame offset is blocked

• CP_HHO [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CP_HNDOFF_ACTV [Unable to start handoff due to handoff already active on the CE that is currently carrying the call] => RFTx path

• CP_INTERNAL [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CP_LOST_CALL [Unexpected call drop] RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CP_MOB_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CP_NO_CCC_HOACK [Unable to complete handoff due to noCCC_HOACK from primary CE] RF Tx path

• CP_NO_HOCMPLT [Unable to complete handoff due to CCC didnot receive EC_RTC_HOCMPLT message] => RF Tx path;CRTUm

• CP_NO_VC_CNFRM [Unable to complete handoff due to novoice channel confirmation] => packet pipe

• CP_PCTRL_BLCKD [Unable to start handoff due to powercontrol blocked] => Power capacity for calls exceeded; RF Tx

path• CP_PGCH_ECPRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm

• CP_PGCH_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CP_RCC_ERROR [Unable to start handoff] => Unexpectedcondition

• CP_RLS_UNKNOWN [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;CRTUm

• CP_RRHOREQNRSP [Unable to complete handoff] => Noresponse to handoff request message

• CP_SEC_BLCKD [Unable to start handoff] => Sector blocked(e.g., BBA OOS, LAC alarm)

• CP_SHLOSS_CRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;CRTUm





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• CP_SHLOSS_MRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;CRTUm

• CP_SHO_SH_PROB [Unable to complete handoff] DCS (speechhandler)

• CP_TRCH_ECPRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;CRTUm

• CP_TRCH_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm

• CRTU2MOBL [CRTUi failed to communicate with CRTUm] =>CRTUm; CRTUi

• DIALDNFAIL [CRTUm could not dial] => CRTUm; CRTUi

• DIALDNTMO [CRTUm did not respond to DIAL request] =>CRTUm; CRTUi

• DIALHOFAIL [RCC did not receive acknowledgment for handoff from CRTUi] => CRTUi; CRTUm

• FHOFAILED [Handoff failed. Cell attempted handoff but wasunable to complete handoff] => RF Tx path

• HOREQFAILS [CRTUm did not send the handoff request, or celldid not receive the request, or cell is unable to process the request]=> RF Tx path; CRTUm

• INTERNAL [Unexpected condition] => See assert manual

• NOCALLINF [Cell received CALLORIG message from CRTUmbut unable to complete call setup] => Needed resource is

unavailable (e.g., packet pipe, DCS); RF Tx path; DCS• NOCALLORIG [CRTUm did not send CALLORIG message or

cell did not receive the message] => RF Tx path; RSP; CRTUm

• NOCEAVAIL [Traffic CE blocked] => Traffic CE blocked (e.g.,packet pipe, DCS); RF Tx path, DCS

• NO_OVERHEAD [CRTUm unable to acquire pilot channel] =>RF Tx path; CRTUm

• PAGE_ACCESSFL [CRTUm unable to acquire paging channel]=> RF Tx path; CRTUm

• PILOTCHAFL [Handoff failed and there are no calls on carrier]=> RF Tx path; bad pilot or traffic CE

• PWROVLD [Forward/reverse link power over-load conditiondetected] => Power capacity for calls exceeded; RF Tx path

• RCC2CRTUI [RCC could not send message to CRTUi] =>CRTUi; RCC




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


• RCCFTTMRFL [RCC did not receive message from CRTUi] =>CRTUi; RCC

• RSP2SECTOR [Command to configure RSP failed] => RSP;CRTUi

• SYNCCHANFL [CRTUm unable to acquire sync channel] => RFTx path; CRTUm

• TRFFICFL [CRTUm is not in conversation state] => RF Tx path;CRTUm

ComplementaryTroubleshooting Tools

The above list of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causesprovides a useful starting point for troubleshooting faults revealed byCDMA Functional Tests. However, by itself it is not sufficient tocompletely identify, locate, and correct system faults. The list should beused for initial guidance in troubleshooting, then it should be followed

by use of one or more of the following complementary troubleshootingtools to gather more detailed information about the nature and probablecause(s) of the fault:

• Status Display Pages (See pages 32-62 through 32-66 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 8, January 1999 )

• ECP ROP Files (See pages 32-66 through 32-67 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 8, January 1999 )

• RMS Output Messages (See pages 32-68 through 32-76 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 8, January 1999 )

• HEH Output Messages (See pages 32-77 through 32-86 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160Issue 8, January 1999)

• CRTUMON ROP Processing Tool (See pages 32-87 through 32-92 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems,System 1000, Operations, Administration, and MaintenanceGuide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January 1999 )





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Operational Fault Detection - Access Channels (See pages 32-62through 32-66 of the OA&M Guide, AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Operations,

Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8,January 1999 )




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with Diagnostic Tests

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting with Diagnostic Tests

Overview Diagnostic tests are run automatically by software control when a fault

is detected. Before a diagnostic test is run, the unit to be tested will beplaced out of service (OOS).

Running Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic tests may also be called manually on an off-line unit. Youcan run diagnostics on specific cell site units. The diagnosemaintenance action can be applied to a unit in the out-of-service orgrowth state, to a redundant unit in the standby state, or to a redundantunit in the active state. In the latter case, MRA initiates a switch beforeexecuting the diagnose request.

In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC

or TCU/ECU in the active state. The first step in a diagnosemaintenance action for an active CCC or TCU/ECU is the automaticexecution of a conditional remove.

Except for BBAs, CCCs, and CCUs, units are left in the out-of-servicestate after completion of diagnostics. These units are returned to thestate they were in prior to running diagnostics.

Important! For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the activestate but the mate is out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with noaction taken.

DGN Command Use andFormat

The DGN command described below may be used to diagnosesuspected faulty units. When you have isolated the fault, either adjustor replace the isolated hardware, as appropriate. After you correct thefault, manually run the CDMA functional tests ( OCFT, TPFT, and/orPLFT) again to ensure that no additional errrors were introduced andthat the original error was, in fact, corrected.

Command Format:

DGN:CELL a,b [;[RPT c ][,RAW][,UCL][:[PH d][,TLP][,CHANL e]] [CLASS f ]

Important! Reference should be made to the latest issue of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,Cell Site/DCS Input/Output Messages 401-610-107 , for currentinput commands.

Command Legend Meaning of Parameters:





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

a Indicates the cell site number (1-222).NOTE: This parameter may be a single number, a range (maximum32), or a list separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.However, the a parameter must be a single cell site number if the bparameter is one of the following: BBA x, CAT x, CCC x[, CCCx],CCU y, DL x

b Indicates the cell site unit:BBA x - CDMA BIU-BCR-ACU (BBA) set (1-30).CAT x - Clock and tone (0-5 for a CDMA cell or 0-3 for a non-CDMAcell).CCC x - CDMA cluster controller (1-30).CCC x,CCU y - CDMA cluster controller (1-30), CDMA channel unit(1-7)CSC x - Cell site controller (0 or 1).CSC x,AL - Cell site controller (0-1) alarm interface.CSC x,CPI y - Cell site controller (0-1), Communications processorinterface (0 or 1).CSC x,CPU y - Cell site controller (0-1), Central processor interface (0or 1).CSC x,MEM y - Cell site controller (0-1), Memory (0 or 1).CSC x,NCI y - Cell site controller (0-1), Network control interface (0or 1).DL x - Data links (0 or 1).

c Indicates the number of times you want the diagnostic to run (1-

32,767). The default value is 1.NOTE: If the unit is a data link (DL), the range is 1-256.

RAW Indicates printing the diagnostic results of every phase. Thedefault is the first five failures of each failing phase.

UCL Indicates unconditional execution of diagnostic and prints allfailures. Normal mode stops on first failure.

PHd Indicates execution of particular phase numbers. Numbers are indecimal and may be a single number or a range of numbers:1 - BBA1-2 - CAT [NOTE: Phase 2 of the CAT diagnostic is a CDMA onlydiagnostic.]1 - CCC1 - CCC, TCU1-16 - CSC1 - CSC,AL1 - CSC, CPI1 - CSC, MEM




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


1 - CSC, NCI2 - DL1 - DS1

TLP Indicates executing trouble locating procedure (TLP) at the

conclusion of the diagnostic. TLP generates a list of suspected faultyequipment.

NOTE: It is recommended that you do not specify the TLP and UCLparameters in the same command line because the accuracy of the TLPlisting could be affected.

CHANLe Indicates the channel number (1-1023) used to diagnose thelocation radio, setup radio, or the test generator test unit. If the channelis not available at the cell site, the diagnostic request is denied.NOTE: If the CHANL parameter is not specified, the diagnosticsupervisor chooses any available channel.

CLASSf Indicates message class override (151-213).NOTE: This option can only be used if the Virtual System OutputMessage Routing feature is supported.

The following is an example of a successful output report made inresponse to the issuance of a DGN:CELL diagnostic request:DGN CELL 1 BBA 7 COMPLETED ATP

Each diagnostic test is supported by a Trouble Locating Procedure(TLP) that identifies the suspect unit(s) at fault when the diagnosticencounters a failure. The location of suspect units at fault is given inhard-copy format. In most cases, when a diagnostic failure occurs, youwill be able to clear the trouble by replacing one of the suspect unitslisted on the TLP.

Important! It is important to include the TLP option when issuingthe DGN:CELL diagnostic request so that the TLP list of suspected faulty units will be printed at the conclusion of thediagnostic.

TLP Output Message The specific format of the TLP output (Message Type 316) is described

under DGN CELL TLP in the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Output Messages 401-610-057 . It is reproduced here for Series II Cell Sites.

DGN:CELL a b, TLPLIST UID FRAME SHELF SLOTd b e g h





401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This output message indicates the unit ID, the frame, the class of circuits, and the vertical and horizontal location of each board in thetrouble-location procedure (TLP) list whenever the TLP option isselected in a DGN request. This message is printed following a some-test-failed (STF) message.

VARIABLE FIELDDEFINITIONS:

a = Cell site number (1-222).

b = Cell site unit. Series II only list includes:BBA x - BCR-BIU-ACU units. x = (1 - 30).CAT x - Clock and tone, x = (0 - 3).CAT(SCT) x - Synchronous clock and tone, x = (0 - 5).CCC x - CDMA cluster controller, x = (1 - 30).CCC x, CCU y - CDMA channel unit (CCU), x = (1 - 30), y = (1 - 7).CRTU - Radio test unit (CDMA).CSC x - Cell site controller, x = (0 or 1).CSC x, CPI - Cell site controller, communications processor interface,x = (0 or 1).CSC x, AL - Cell site controller, alarm interface, x = (0 or 1).CSC x, MEM - Cell site controller, memory, x = (0 or 1).CSC x, NCI y - Cell site controller, x = (0 or 1).network control interface, y = (0 or 1).DL x - Data links, x = (0 or 1).DS1 x - Digital service 1, x = (0 - 13).DS1(DFI) x - Digital facility interface, x = (0 - 13).GPS - Global Positioning System.LAC x - Linear amplifier circuit, x = (0 - 31).(NOTE: Cannot be diagnosed.)LC x - Location radio, x = (0 - 39).RA x - Radio, x = (0 - 191).RCG - Reference calibration generator.(NOTE: Cannot be diagnosed.)RG x - Reference generator, x = (0 - 1).(NOTE: Cannot be diagnosed.)RSP - RTU Switch Panel.RTU - Radio test unit (AMPS).

SU x - Setup radio, x = (0 - 7 or 0 - 35 with Directional Setup).TRTU - Radio test unit (TDMA).VDRU - Voice Digital Radio Unit.

d = A number from 1 to 8, which indicates the order in which thesuspect circuits should be replaced.

e = Radio (0 - 7).




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


g = Shelf number.

h = Slot number.



Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with Software Audits


401-703-301Issue 8April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting with Software Audits

Running Audits Audits in AUTOPLEX System 1000 normally run automatically and

autonomously. Audits also can be requested manually to help locateand analyze specific software or hardware problems. If a problem issuspected with a particular data structure, the audits associated withthat data structure can be run to obtain data dumps that will aid inisolating the error. If a hardware problem is suspected, an auditmessage may be useful for identifying the error.

Audit Complexity Using audits to detect hardware and software problems is not an easytask. Skill in using audits as a troubleshooting tool comes with practiceand with knowledge of the overall system software. Generally, you

need to know how to request audits and how to interpret the problemsrevealed in the output message printouts. For specific information onhow to do these things, consult the Cell Site Audits Manual, reference[6].




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting TechniquesTroubleshooting with Software Audits



GLO - 1Lucent Technologies - ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GLO Glossary



GLO - 2 Lucent Technologies—ProprietarySee notice on first page

401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

Glossary

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A ACDN Administrative call processing/database node—a CDN (call processing/database node) that has been designated the administrativeCDN by the AUTOPLEX ® system software. An ACDN can assign call

processing tasks to itself as well as to all other available CDNs.

ACU Analog conversion unit—provides the baseband combining fromall the CEs in a CCC; performs A/D, D/A conversion. Currentlyassociates with one face; in the future will have access to any face.

AM Access manager—a 3B20D or 3B21D computer and its

associated I/O (input/output) devices. This processor controls systemoperations.

AMPS Advanced mobile phone service—the original name of theworld's first cellular radio system, which was introduced in 1978. Nowthe term refers to analog technology radios.

B BBA trio Bus interface, baseband, and analog components for oneCDMA radio shelf. Redundant BBA trio is optional.

BCR Baseband combiner and radio—used in the CDMA-equipped cell site to modulate the spread-spectrum voice, sync, and pilot channels.

BER Bit error rate—the number of digital pulses detected as errors ina specific time period. Error rates measure the quality of a digitalcircuit.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Glossary

C CCC CDMA cluster controller—terminates the packet pipe from the DCS and controls the channel elements in the cell site.

CDMA Code division multiple access—assigns each active call aunique pseudonoise code that is used by the system to distinguish that

call from all other calls occupying the same CDMA carrier band.

CDMA Carrie rBand A contiguous 1.23-MHz spectrum in the 1.8 to2.0 GHz range, allocated specifically to CDMA service. Wireline and nonwireline each may have as many as ten CDMA carrier bands.

CE Channel element—voice processing unit of the Minicell that provides CDMA radio service.

Cell A geographical area, usually depicted as hexagon-shaped, that isserved by a cellular system. Cellular technology is based on the

premise that a group of radio frequencies used within one cell can beused again in distant cells.

Cell Site Node Link node that provides the interface between the cellsite and the IMS ring. Each PCS access manager has at least two CSNs.

Each CSN can have a maximum of eight cell site data links.

Channel A channel is a portion of the cellular frequency band designated for a single cellular telephone conversation. A channel is anactual cellular RF channel as identified by the Federal




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

Glossary

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communications Commission (FCC), 30 kHz for analog and 1.25 MHz for CDMA.

CNI Common network interface—the hardware/software that provides SS7 connectivity between 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS offices and the access manager.

CPI Communications processor interface—used by the active RCC tosend and receive data link messages from/to the PCSC.

CPU Core processor unit—a component of the AM, the CPU provideshigh-speed control functions, such as logic, control, and arithmetic

processes as required by the 3B21D computer.

CRC Cyclic redundancy check—a process in which a desired sequence of bits is encoded in a prescribed manner to enable detectionand correction of bit errors.

CRTU CDMA radio test unit—modified mobile used to performtransmitter and receiver tests on the Minicell.

CRTUi CRTU interface—circuit board on the RCC shelf that givesthe active RCC control of the CRTU.

D DCS Digital cellular switch—the AUTOPLEX system trunk switchthat terminates all voice trunks in the cellular system. The DCS is a5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.

DFI Digital facilities interface—a DS1 board, located in the cell sites,that contains either one or two E1/T1 facilities.

DFI2 Digital facilities interface 2—digital trunk interface, located inthe 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS II that supports one or two T1 facilities.

DFU Digital facilities unit—a DS1 board, located in the cell site, that contains either one or two E1/T1 facilities; also known as DFI board.

Direct sequence spread-spectrum A type of CDMA classification,used in the CDMA product. A DS generator encodes voice signals and




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Glossary

assigns a unique PN code to each user. The DS system reducesinterference and ensures privacy.

DLTU Digital line trunk unit—used in the AUTOPLEX application tohouse the digital trunk units.

DMM Dual mode mobile—an IS-95 compliant mobile that supportsCDMA radio technology and analog mode or an IS-54 mobile stationthat can operate in digital mode (TDMA) or analog mode (FDMA).

DPC Dynamic power control—a feature that allows cellular transceivers to adjust their transmit power level in response to changesin the RF environment.

DS0 Digital signal level 0—the basic channel in the digital hierarchy, DS0 consists of digital signal of 64 kbps (kilobits per second).

DS1 Digital signal level 1—a level of the digital hierarchy that transmits a time multiplexed signal that contains 24 DS0 channels. A

DS1 channel has a bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps. Also referred to as a T1 facility or span.

F FDMA Frequency division multiple access—also known as AMPS or analog service.

FER Frame error rate—the number of frames detected with errors ina specific time period. Error rates are used to measure the quality of adigital circuit.

FRPH Frame relay protocol handler—performs packet selectionbased on the frame error rate (FER) of each packet.

G GPS Global positioning system—a system of 24 satellites that provides, among other things, extremely accurate timing information toCDMA-equipped cell sites.

H Handoff An automatic transfer of a cellular telephone call from onecell to another, maintaining call quality as the mobile user movesthroughout the coverage area.

HLR Home Location Register—the database in charge of managingmobile phone subscribers. The HLR stores a permanent copy of a




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

Glossary

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

mobile subscriber's subscriber information, and some locationinformation to enable call routing to the access manager where thesubscriber is located.

I IMS Interprocess message switch—a subsystem of the access

manager complex consisting of nodes that provide the hardware and software that interface the system data links.

IRN2 Integrated ring node 2—processes ring messages to and fromthe RPCNs (ring peripheral control units). RPCNs exist both in theaccess manager and the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.

IS-95 Interim Standard-95—the TIA standard that defines thetechnical requirements for CDMA Minicell site and mobile operation.

L LEDs Light-emitting diodes—used as status indicators on variouscircuit packs.

M MIN Mobile identification number—a 34-bit number that is thedigital representation of the 10-digit directory number assigned to themobile station.

N NCT Network control and timing links—fiber optic links between theSMs and the CM in the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS. NCT links process 512

time slots; NCT2 links process 1024 time slots.

Neighbor cell A neighbor cell is a cell that is adjacent to the cellcurrently serving a mobile subscriber.

Neighbor group A group of cell sites near the cell site serving a call.When a handoff is required from the serving cell site, the system tries tohandoff the call to one of the cells in the group.

Neighbor list A list of cell sites in a neighbor group.

NVM Nonvolatile memory—a device that retains its memory evenafter power is removed. NVM updates are normally performed after cell site generic program changes.

O OMP Operations and maintenance platform—Sun MicrosystemsSPARCstation that provides OA&M access directly to the accessmanager and remotely to the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Glossary

P Packet pipe A group of DS0s, in the same DS1, that transmit and receive voice and data between the speech handler and CCC in the cellsite.

PAF Physical antenna face—a transmit antenna and its associated receive antennas. The cells can have from one to six physical antenna

faces.

PCM Pulse code modulation—the 8-bit code that is created duringthe encoding step of analog/digital conversion.

PCS Personal communications services are services planned for newdigital RF equipment operating in the 2-GHz spectrum.

PCSC PCS switching center—the access manager, combined with at

least one DCS and an IMS.

PHA PSU2-to-ATM interface—optional board that providesconnectivity from PSU2 to ATM network when handoff betweendifferent 5ESS-2000 Switch DCSs is performed.

PHV Protocol handler voice—contains either 8 kbps or 13 kbps inPSU2. Also called PHV1 for 8 kbps and PHV2 for 13 kbps in PSU2.

Pilot Channel CDMA channel used by the mobile unit to determinecorrect transmit power level.

PN Pseudorandom noise—random code used to spread CDMA voiceor data prior to modulation.

PSTN Public switched telephone network— consists of switchingequipment external to the PCSC. May consist of local, long-distance,and SS7 networks.

PSU Packet switch unit 2—transforms DS0s into packet pipes. A packet pipe handles approximately four time the calls that a DS0 does.




401-703-301Issue 8

April 1999

Glossary

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R RCC Radio control complex—main processor of the primary radiocabinet.

RS-442 Data link used by the CRTUi to control the CRTU duringdiagnostic testing.

S SCT Synchronized clock, and tone board—provides precise timing tothe CDMA-equipped cell sites by GPS signals; also provides tonesduring diagnostic and FCC test sequences.

SM-2000 Switch module—houses digital trunks (or lines) in the AUTOPLEX application.

Soft handoff Bridged CDMA handoff between neighbor cells or faceswithin the speech handler of the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.

SS7 Signaling system 7—a protocol standard used to communicatebetween telecommunications sites. Large communications networkscan be built with sites using SS7-compatible equipment. SS7 networkscarry signaling information separately from the voice/datacommunications path.

Sync Channel CDMA channel used to provide CDMA mobile unit with system information and timing data.

T TCU CDMA channel units—supports two CDMA CEs (channelelements).

TDM Time division multiplex bus—a parallel bus that providescontrol and data transfer within the CDMA cluster. The TDM busesconnect all radios and circuit pack components in the CDMA cluster.

TDMA Time division multiple access—a digital technology availablewith Series II cell site. TDMA uses DRUs to provide the transmission of three voice channels over the 30-kHz RF bandwidth of one FDMAchannel.

Traffic Channel CDMA voice handling channel similar in function toa voice channel.

V Vocoder Voice coder/decoder—may be either 8 kbps or 13 kbps.